JP6260762B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, a gaming machine is provided with various boards including a game control board and an effect control board in order to arrange a display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols and perform processing necessary for pachinko game control and the like.
Of the various boards constituting the gaming machine, the effect control board controls the video display on the display device that is most noticed when the player plays a game. The effect control board (sub-board) determines the effect contents (drawing contents) for the game state at that time based on an instruction from the game control board (main board) and performs the effect (see Patent Document 1).
Note that the game control board and the effect control board respectively constitute a control device (control means) , which are a game control device (game control means) and an effect control device (effect control means) .

JP 2005-13477 A

  By the way, in order to cope with the display effect amount that tends to increase year by year, development of an efficient gaming machine is required.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can efficiently develop diversified effects.

The invention described in claim 1
And game control means for controlling the progress of a game, the gaming machine and a presentation control means capable of performing the effect by controlling the Viewing means,
The production control means includes
Character data storage means for storing image data of still images or moving images;
A motion table storage means for storing a motion table including the image data to be displayed on the display means and information for designating the display position for each frame;
Scenario table storage means for storing a scenario table including information for controlling the progress of the display effect on the display means,
It performs the display effect based on the scenario table selected in response to a command from said game control unit,
The motion table is provided for each section of production.
The scenario table is configured to selectively use the motion table as a part of the display effect.
Particular the motion table to be used in combination with each other, includes first motion table and the second motion table, when performing predetermined display effect, the first motion corresponding to the progression of the display effect A table and the second motion table are used sequentially,
Wherein the display position of the image data of the first frame is set to the same display position of the first motion table and the second motion table.
Here, the “display unit” is, for example, a display device, but is not limited to the display device.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently developing diversifying effects.

It is a front side perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a back view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the control system of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of a game control device. It is a block diagram of an effect control device. It is a block diagram of VDP in the production control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an input process. It is a flowchart which shows a switch reading process. It is a flowchart which shows an output process. It is a flowchart which shows payout command transmission processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main prize ball remaining number update process. It is a flowchart which shows the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the random number update process 2. It is a flowchart which shows a winning opening switch / error monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows fraud & winning prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart which shows a command setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an error check process. It is a flowchart which shows special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows special figure pending | holding information determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure normal process transfer setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2 byte distribution process. It is a flowchart which shows distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure change process transition setting process (special figure 1). It is a flowchart which shows a special figure change process transition setting process (special figure 2). It is a flowchart which shows a special figure change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure display middle process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure display process. It is a flowchart which shows the fanfare / interval process transition setting process. It is a flowchart which shows production mode information check processing. It is a flowchart which shows a time shortening fluctuation frequency update process. It is a flowchart which shows a time-short end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart which shows a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart which shows a solenoid information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows process transition setting process 1 during the big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows the process transition setting process 2 during a big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening residual ball process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process transition setting process 3 during a special winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows a big winning opening residual ball process. It is a flowchart which shows a fanfare / interval process transition setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure normal process transfer setting process 3. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a usual game process. It is a flowchart which shows a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a general power prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a usual figure normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the usual figure normal process transfer setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a process change setting process during a common figure change. It is a flowchart which shows a process during usual figure change. It is a flowchart which shows a process transfer setting process during a normal map display. It is a flowchart which shows a process during normal map display. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process transition setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a process during a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows a general electric operation transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a general electric power residual ball process. It is a flowchart which shows an end process shift setting process per common figure. It is a flowchart which shows an end process per common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the usual figure normal process transfer setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows a radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a main prize ball signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a start port signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a specific information signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows CPU specific information acquisition processing. It is a figure which shows the bit transposition pattern of a hard random number. It is a figure which shows the opening-and-closing pattern of an upper prize winning opening. It is a figure which shows the opening / closing pattern of a lower university prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the power-on reset process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows command reception interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows a received command range check process. It is a flowchart which shows a received command check process. It is a flowchart which shows a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation type command process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern corresponding | compatible symbol determination process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit system command process. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol type command process. It is a flowchart which shows single-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows single-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows a customer waiting scenario data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a scenario data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a special figure 1 hold information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation production setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation production setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a reachless fluctuation | variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern classification | category process. It is a flowchart which shows the random number lottery process A. It is a flowchart which shows the notification effect setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in character replacement determination process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in character replacement determination process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in character replacement determination process 3. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the cut-in character replacement determination process 3. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the scenario data setting process for PB notice. It is a flowchart which shows the transmission start process between sub. It is a flowchart which shows a reception task process between sub. It is a flowchart which shows the transmission data edit process between sub. It is a flowchart which shows inter sub ack response task processing. It is a flowchart which shows the production setting process between sub. It is a flowchart which shows a scenario setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a scenario analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a scenario analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a motion registration process. It is a flowchart which shows the motion data initialization process 1 and 2. It is a flowchart which shows a motion deletion process and a motion continuation process. It is a flowchart which shows a constant weight process and a variable weight process. It is a flowchart which shows a PB waiting process and a PB determination branch process. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a symbol reverse calculation replacement process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation scenario switching process. It is a flowchart which shows an iterative process and an end process. It is a flowchart which shows a motion control process. It is a flowchart which shows a motion command execution process. It is a flowchart which shows a motion command execution process. It is a flowchart which shows a bitmap addition process. It is a flowchart which shows a moving image addition process. It is a flowchart which shows 1 point designation | designated object movement processing. It is a flowchart which shows an effect type designation | designated process and an effect parameter designation | designated process. It is a flowchart which shows an object deletion process and an object change process. It is a flowchart which shows an object moving image decoding process. It is a flowchart which shows a behavior index setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect display edit process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect display edit process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect display edit process. It is a flowchart which shows a character drawing process. It is a flowchart which shows a display left symbol conversion process, a PB color conversion process, and a reach character conversion process. It is a flowchart which shows a military commander 1 serif conversion process. It is a flowchart which shows a VDP interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows V blank start interruption processing. It is a figure which shows the packet structural example of communication between sub. It is a figure which shows an example of an ACTION check table and a coincidence check table. It is a figure which shows an example of an ACT consistency check address table and an ACT consistency check table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a major pattern table. It is a figure which shows an example of a still image ROM member list table. It is a figure which shows an example of a moving image ROM member list table. It is a figure which shows an example of the list table for motions. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a notice distribution table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a notice distribution table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a symbol fluctuation | variation list table. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a specific example of a normal fluctuation scenario table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a motion table at the time of the left symbol normal fluctuation start. It is a figure which shows the example of a display at the time of the left symbol fluctuation | variation start. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the present symbol at the time of a normal fluctuation, a previous symbol, and the next symbol. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the motion table at the time of special figure 1 4th symbol fluctuation. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a 4th design. It is a figure which shows the specific example (connection example) of the motion table at the time of a left symbol normal fluctuation. It is a figure which shows an example of a push button notice time scenario, and a motion table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a scenario table at the time of a customer waiting demonstration. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a scenario table at the time of an ending. It is a figure explaining common motion table (still picture movie). It is a figure which shows the specific example of a motion table at the time of a scroll notice. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a motion table at the time of a scroll notice. It is a figure which shows the example of a display at the time of scroll notice. It is a figure which shows an example of the display component used by the production | presentation of a display apparatus, and a display screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario table used by the production | presentation of a display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario table regarding the effect of an effect button, and a push button effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the motion table of push button notice. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement of a symbol stop display. It is a figure which shows an example of the motion table of a symbol stop display. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement of a symbol stop display. It is a figure explaining the setting operation | movement of the basic character of a symbol stop display. It is a figure explaining the setting operation | movement of the basic character of a symbol stop display. It is a figure explaining operation | movement of a jackpot ending period. It is a figure which shows an example of the display component used by the production | presentation of the display apparatus in Example 2, and a display screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the display component used by the production | presentation of the display apparatus in Example 3, and a display screen.

Hereinafter, as a first embodiment of the present invention, a configuration example when applied to a pachinko machine will be described with reference to the drawings.
A. Front Configuration of Pachinko Machine First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine of this example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 1 of this example.
The pachinko machine 1 has a machine frame 2 fixed to an island where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and is pivotally supported by the machine frame 2 at a hinge portion 3 so that the machine frame 2 can be pivoted. And a front frame 4 that can be freely opened and closed. A game board 20 (shown in FIG. 2) is attached to the front frame 4.

A glass frame 5 is attached to the front frame 4 so as to be openable and closable so as to cover the upper front side. Note that a game area 22 (to be described later) of the game board 20 is visible from the front through a glass plate (a transparent plastic board may be omitted) held by the glass frame 5. The glass frame 5 is pivotally supported by the front frame 4 at the hinge portion 3 so as to be opened and closed.
Here, the front frame 4 is referred to as a game frame, and the glass frame 5 is sometimes referred to as a front frame. In the present embodiment, the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 are described.
An operation panel 6 is provided below the glass frame 5.
Normally, the pachinko machine 1 may be provided with a CR unit (card type ball lending control unit) as a game medium lending device, but the illustration is omitted here. However, in FIG. 4, the CR unit is illustrated as a card unit 551, and the card unit connection board 54 that relays transmission of signals and the like to and from the card unit 551 is also illustrated in FIG. 4.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 20 has game nails planted on the front surface of a plate-like base material (so-called veneer). 22 is formed. The game area 22 is an area where a game ball that has been thrown in is dropped from above and a determination of whether it is out or safe (determination of whether or not a prize has been won) is made. Is configured such that a predetermined number of game balls are discharged to an upper plate 7 provided at the lower part of the glass frame 5 (that is, discharged as a prize ball).
Further, a key insertion portion 8 of a locking device (not shown) for the front frame 4 and the glass frame 5 is formed at the opening / closing side (right side in FIG. 1) of the front frame 4.

Moreover, the upper plate 7 provided in the lower part of the glass frame 5 temporarily holds a game ball before being discharged as a prize ball or a rental ball. The upper plate 7 is provided with a push button type effect button 9 operated by the player.
Further, the operation panel 6 is provided with a lower plate 10 that can move a game ball on the upper plate 7 by a player's operation, and a launch operation handle 11 that performs a launch operation of the game ball.
In addition, what is indicated by reference numerals 12a and 12b in FIG. 1 are speakers that output sound effects and the like. Of these, reference numeral 12 a denotes upper speakers provided on both the upper left and right sides of the glass frame 5. Reference numeral 12b denotes a lower speaker provided at the left end of the operation panel 6 (left side of the lower plate 10).

In FIG. 1, reference numeral 13 denotes a decorative lamp having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the front surface of the glass frame 5 as a light source, and reference numeral 14 denotes the upper left and right sides of the glass frame 5. It is a moving light provided on the front. Although not shown, the moving light 14 includes an LED as a light emission source and a motor as a drive source. Here, the decorative lamp 13 and the moving light 14 constitute a decorative LED 301 shown in FIG.
Further, if the decoration mechanism is divided based on the concept of a board and a frame of the pachinko machine 1, the decoration lamp 13 and the moving light 14 correspond to the frame side effect mechanism, and constitute the frame decoration device 43 shown in FIG. The moving light 14 also constitutes a frame effect device 45 shown in FIG.

B. 2 is a guide rail of the game board 20, and as described above, a game area 22 is formed by surrounding a substantially circular area on the front face of the game board with the guide rail 21. ing.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game area 22 includes an out ball inlet 23, a center case 24, a first start winning port 25, a second starting winning port 26 as an ordinary electric accessory (general power), and a variable winning device. 27, a general winning opening 28-31, a general start gate 32, a variable winning device 33 (hereinafter referred to as a second variable winning device 33 to distinguish from the variable winning device 27), a large number of game nails (not shown), and the like. Is provided. A collective display device 35 is provided outside the game area 22 of the game board 20. The game nails flow down while hitting the game balls that have entered the upper part of the game area 22, and a plurality of game nails are planted in the game area excluding the attachment portion such as the center case.

The center case 24 is a member that surrounds the front periphery of the display unit 41a (shown in FIG. 2) of the display device 41 (shown in FIG. 4) attached to the back side of the game board 20. Although not shown in the figure, the center case 24 includes lamps that use LEDs for production or decoration as light sources, and electric accessories that enhance production effects in cooperation with production display on the display device 41 (for example, An accessory having a movable part that is operated by a driving source such as a motor or a solenoid).
Note that lamps for effect or decoration are also provided in portions other than the center case 24 of the game board 20 (may be outside the game area 22). It should be noted that lamps for performance or decoration provided on the game board 20 (including the center case 24) correspond to the board-side effect mechanism, and the board decoration device 42 (shown in FIG. 6) and the center case 24 The provided electric accessory corresponds to a board-side production mechanism, and constitutes a board production device 44 (shown in FIG. 6). It should be noted that the electric accessory constituting the board effect device 44 may be provided at a place other than the center case 24 of the game board 20.

The display device 41 (production means, display means) includes, for example, a liquid crystal display device, and is usually referred to as a variable display device. In addition, as a name of the display device 41, for example, a special symbol display device, a special symbol display device, a symbol variation device, a variable symbol display device, an identification information variation device, and an identification information variation display device are used as names of members having similar functions. There are various types, but those with the same function are in the same category.
The display device 41 has a display unit 41a (screen) capable of displaying identification information (referred to as a special figure) such as numbers and characters, and can display a plurality of special figures. For example, special charts are displayed in three vertical columns on the left, center, and right, and special figures consisting of numbers, letters, etc. in each column are displayed in a stopped state (stop display), or in a fluctuating state (for example, vertically) Display in a scrolling state) (that is, a variable display).
In addition to the special figure, the display unit can display an image for presentation such as a background image or a character image or an information notification image.
In addition, it is good also as a structure which can display on the display apparatus 41 the image corresponded to what is called a common figure. However, when an ordinary map is displayed on the display device 41, it is a decorative map. When the display device 41 is configured to display a general symbol, the display device 41 corresponds to a normal symbol variable display device.
Here, the special figure is identification information that is variably displayed in the variable display game related to the big hit, and the common figure is identification information that is variably displayed in the variable display game related to the common figure (not the big hit). is there.
The general map is not actually displayed on the display device 41 but is displayed on the collective display device 35. The common map displayed on the collective display device 35 is referred to as a regular map as described later.

The start winning ports 25 and 26 are winning ports that function as start winning ports for special drawings as will be described later. In this example, they are arranged side by side as shown in FIG. The upper first start winning opening 25 is always open. The lower second start winning opening 26 has opening / closing members 26a on both the left and right sides, and when these opening / closing members 26a are opened in a reverse C shape, a winning can be made. As shown in FIG. It is impossible to win if it is closed. The start winning ports 25 and 26 are disposed below the center portion of the center case 24.
The second start winning opening 26 is also called an ordinary electric accessory (general power), and corresponds to an ordinary variable winning device.
The variable prize winning device 27 is a device (so-called attacker) having a big prize opening 27a (corresponding to a first big prize opening as will be described later) opened and closed by an opening / closing member 27b. This special winning opening 27a is opened on condition that a big hit, which will be described later, is made, and game balls can be won.
Further, the second variable prize winning device 33 has a pair of opening and closing members 33a on both the left and right sides, and when these opening and closing members 33a are opened in a reverse C shape, it is possible to win. As shown in FIG. 2, these opening and closing members 33a It is impossible to win if the is closed. The second variable winning device 33 is opened on condition that a special winning state is reached even in a big win described later, and a game ball can be won. In this case, when a big hit occurs, either the variable winning device 27 or the second variable winning device 33 is released, which is determined by the result mode (special result) of the special figure display game. The
In the second variable prize winning device 33, the opening that allows the opening / closing member 33a to open in an inverted C shape is called a second big prize opening.
Here, in the present embodiment, since the two attackers of the variable winning device 27 and the second variable winning device 33 are arranged, the variable winning device 27 is the first attacker and the second variable winning device 33 is the second attacker. In addition, the winning opening of each attacker may be referred to as the first grand prize opening (or lower large prize opening) and the second large winning opening (or upper university prize opening). As will be described later, the first big prize opening is opened and closed by a first big prize opening solenoid 133, and the second big prize opening is opened and closed by a second big prize opening solenoid 134.

The general display is displayed on the collective display device 35 (details will be described later) in addition to the special drawing.
When the game ball passes through the normal map start gate 32, a general display variable display game (hereinafter referred to as a general map variable display game) is performed on the collective display device 35, and the stopped general map is predetermined. If it is an aspect (specific display aspect), the privilege called per map is provided.
If the display device 41 is configured to display a general map, the variable display of the general map (decorative map) is performed on the screen of the display device 41. However, you may arrange | position an original common map display separately from the display apparatus 41. FIG.
When a normal hit is reached, a game is held in which the pair of opening and closing members 26a of the second start winning opening 26 are opened in a reverse C shape, and are temporarily held for a predetermined opening time, and the game ball is started. It becomes easier to win, and accordingly, the number of executions of the special figure variable display game increases and the possibility of winning a big game increases.
In addition, during the above-mentioned normal display variable display game, when a game ball is further won in the general display start gate 32, the general display start memory is held on the display of the collective display device 35 to be described later. Are stored, and after the usual variable display game is completed, the usual variable display game is repeated based on the stored memory. In addition, if the probability of the usual figure is set to a high probability, it becomes easier to hit the ordinary figure.
In addition, the hold display of the common figure start memory displayed by the indicator of the collective display device 35 is the normal figure start memory. In addition to the collective display device 35, a unique general map start memory display for displaying the decorative general map start memory may be arranged in the game area 22. Here, the time reduction will be described as follows. Is something.
Abbreviation of time is an abbreviation of “time reduction”. After the big hit, the special figure and the usual figure change time is shortened more than usual, the time efficiency is increased, and the probability per ordinary figure is increased. The number of executions of the variable display game with a predetermined special figure by supporting the winning at the starting port by opening the (second starting winning port 26) (including extending the opening time of the electric train longer than usual) It is a function to change the special figure efficiently without reducing the number of balls (number of balls).

Next, the collective display device 35 displays a so-called ordinary figure display, special figure display, a special figure or general figure start-up memory hold display (sometimes referred to as a special figure hold display, a general figure hold display), a game, Display of status, for example, a plurality of indicators using LED as a light source (for example, a display composed of one small lamp, or a 7-segment display capable of displaying numbers as a special figure) Instrument). For example, among the LED segments in the collective display device 35, those that display the special figure 1 are arranged as a special figure 1 display, and those that display the special figure 2 are arranged as a special figure 2 display.
Note that the start memory hold display (in some cases, simply referred to as the start memory display) is a display for informing the number of start memories that are held in a state in which the variable display game is not executed, and generally Is displayed by lighting a lamp or the like for each start memory. That is, if there are three start memories, the three lamps are turned on or three figures are displayed.
Note that what is displayed by the display of the collective display device 35 is the special figure or the ordinary figure (formal special figure or ordinary figure), whereas the display unit of the above-described variable display device 41 or the like. A special figure or a general figure to be performed (however, when the variable display device 41 is configured to display a common figure) is a dummy display for the player. For this reason, when referring to the special figure and the ordinary figure as viewed from the player, this dummy display is pointed out. In the following, when emphasizing this dummy display, for example, “decorative map” and “decorative map” are described.
Thus, the collective display device 35 is not intended for the player but is used for inspection of the game board 20 and the like. For example, the display of the special figure start memory for the player (special figure hold display) is performed by, for example, the display unit of the variable display device 41 or a plurality of lamps (light emitting units) provided on the game board 20.

C. Next, FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an overall configuration of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment.
The main components of the back mechanism in the pachinko machine 1 include a storage tank 51, a guide path 52a, a payout unit 53, a card unit connection board 54, an external information terminal board 55, a payout control device 200, a game control device 100, and an effect control device. 300, power supply device 500, and the like.
In FIG. 3, the effect control device 300 is not directly visible, and the effect control device 300 is disposed in the back of the cover member. Therefore, for convenience of explanation, arrows are shown as in FIG. 3. That is, the cover member that can be seen in FIG. 3 has a function that prevents the game ball from entering the back of the gaming machine, unlike the box that houses the board of the effect control device 300, and has a structure that can be opened and closed like a door. . And the left side of the cover member shown in FIG. 3 serves as a fulcrum, opens to the left side, and the production control device 300 housed in the box is arranged behind the fulcrum.

The storage tank 51 stores in advance the balls before being dispensed, and an insufficient number of balls in the storage tank 51 is detected by a replenishment sensor (not shown). Balls are replenished from the equipment. The balls in the storage tank 51 are guided by the guide path 52a and discharged to the upper plate 7 by a payout unit (not shown) incorporating a payout motor 222 (shown in FIG. 4). The payout unit can discharge, for example, a number of game balls corresponding to the amount of rotation of the payout motor 222, and the payout unit detects the payout ball detection switch 215 (see FIG. 4).
The external information terminal board 55 has a function as a relay terminal board (external terminal board) when various information (including a unique ID) of the pachinko machine 1 is sent to the hall management device 140.
The unique ID is, as will be described later, individual identification information that can identify the gaming microcomputer 101 (main board unique ID: main board unique identification information) and individual identification information that can identify the payout microcomputer 201 (payout unique ID: This is a concept representing payout board unique identification information), and the reason why these are output to the outside of the gaming machine is to check the unique ID outside to determine the legitimacy of the gaming machine. The management device 140 corresponds to an external device of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1), and has a function of externally determining the legitimacy of the pachinko machine 1 based on the unique ID.
Note that the external device having the function of determining the legitimacy of the gaming machine is not limited to the management apparatus 140, and for example, the card unit 551 (see FIG. 4) has a function of judging the legitimacy of the gaming machine. Also good. In this case, the unique ID of the pachinko machine 1 is sent from the external information terminal board 55 to the card unit 551.
In addition, the determination of the legitimacy of the gaming machine may be any of a form performed only by the management apparatus 140, a form performed by both the management apparatus 140 and the card unit 551, or a form performed only by the card unit 551.

Here, the above-mentioned unique ID corresponds to individual identification information that can individually (uniquely) identify an arithmetic processing device (game microcomputer 101 described later) in the game control device 100, but in the payout control device 200. In the arithmetic processing device (the payout microcomputer 201 described later), individual identification information that can individually (uniquely) identify the arithmetic processing device is also stored.
Therefore, in the first embodiment, the individual identification information that can identify the gaming microcomputer 101 is appropriately distinguished from the unique identification information, and the individual identification information that can identify the payout microcomputer 201 is appropriately distinguished from the payout unique ID as necessary. .
In addition, individual identification information that can identify the payout microcomputer 201 is referred to as payout individual identification information as a concept that distinguishes the individual identification information that can identify the gaming microcomputer 101 from the individual identification information. The same applies to other examples described later.
It should be noted that without distinction, when simply referred to as a unique ID, it refers to a main board unique ID.
Further, in the inventive concept, the unique ID is referred to as “individual identification information”. However, in general cases such as a normal site level, the individual identification information is often referred to as a unique ID. In Example 1, the individual identification information is described as a unique ID, and the description and drawings may be described and illustrated as unique information or unique identification information in balance with the unique ID.

The payout control device 200 performs control necessary for paying out game balls (both prize ball payout and rental ball payout), and is configured by storing a circuit board that realizes this control function in a predetermined case. Yes. As shown in FIG. 4, the payout control device 200 performs a prize ball payout control for discharging a predetermined number of game balls to the upper plate 7 as prize balls based on a payout control command transmitted from the game control device 100. In addition, the payout control device 200 controls the payout for paying out the ball so that a predetermined number of game balls are discharged to the upper plate 7 as a loan based on the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal from the card unit 551 (see FIG. 4).
The game control device 100 controls the solenoids and the like disposed on the game board 20 and sends control information (commands) to other control devices to comprehensively manage and control the progress of the game ( A substrate on which a circuit including a microcomputer that performs these controls is formed is housed in a predetermined case.

The production control device 300 controls the above-described variable display device, decoration lamp, production device, and speakers 12a and 12b based on the command transmitted from the game control device 100, and this control function is provided in a predetermined case. The circuit board to be realized is housed and configured.
The card unit connection board 54 (see FIG. 3 and also shown in FIG. 4) is a board for wiring connection between the pachinko machine 1 side and the CR unit (card unit 551, the same applies hereinafter) side that lends a ball. is there. If the wiring connection is not made on the card unit connection board 54, the pachinko machine 1 is controlled so that it is impossible to launch a game ball.

  In general, when changing the model of a pachinko machine, replace the entire pachinko machine except the CR unit, or leave the pachinko machine frame side (including the payout control device) and the game board side (game board and game control). In some cases, only major control devices such as devices are exchanged. However, in the case of a rental ball of 4 yen, a 4-yen ball is used. For example, in the case of a 1-ball rental stand, the game board side and the frame side are exclusively for 1 yen rental. It is assumed that.

D. Configuration of Control System Next, the control system of the pachinko machine 1 of this example will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 7. In the drawings and the following description, “SW” means a switch. Further, in the drawings, when the name of the member is long, it becomes difficult to show the illustration, and therefore, the drawing may be appropriately shortened (not shown).
The pachinko machine 1 includes a game control device 100, a payout control device 200, an effect control device 300, a launch control device 400, and a power supply device 500 as main components of the control system.

(Game control device related)
First, the configuration of the game control device 100 of the pachinko machine 1 and the devices connected to the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG.
Of the signals indicated by the arrows in FIG. 4, “main ID” is a main board unique ID, “external information” is a gaming machine status signal, and “prize ball signal” is a prize ball from the payout controller. Ball number signal to be paid out, “discharge command” is a discharge command command from the game control device, “various signals” are payout abnormality status signals, chute ball switch signal, overflow switch signal, glass frame from the payout control device An open switch signal, a front frame open switch signal, and the like are shown.
Further, “external information” and “prize ball signal” are collectively referred to as “external / prize ball”.
The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 101 and an inspection device connection terminal 102. Details of the gaming microcomputer 101 will be described later.
The game control device 100 corresponds to a control device.
The gaming microcomputer 101 functions as a gaming arithmetic processing device (arithmetic processing device) and corresponds to the first arithmetic processing device of the present invention.
In the present embodiment, the game control device 100 is a main control means, a power failure monitoring means, a random number updating means, a starting winning storage means, a second starting storage means, a prior determination means, a priority control means, a variation pattern determination means, a variation display game execution. The control means, determination means, stop time setting means, specific gaming state generation control means, and main board unique identification information output means are configured.
The inspection device connection terminal 102 includes, for example, a photocoupler, and is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various game information obtained from the game microcomputer 101 to the inspection device is connected.

The game control device 100 includes a first start port switch 120 (start port 1SW in FIGS. 4 and 5), a second start port switch 121 (start port 2SW in FIGS. 4 and 5), a gate switch 122, and a winning port switch. 123, detection from lower count switch 124, upper count switch 125, magnetic sensor 126, radio wave sensor 127, glass frame open detection switch 211 (glass frame open detection SW) and front frame open detection switch 212 (front frame open detection SW) A signal is input.
Here, the first start port switch 120 is a sensor for detecting a winning ball that detects the game balls won in the first start winning port 25 one by one, and the second start port switch 121 is the second start winning port. This is a sensor for detecting a winning ball, which detects one gaming ball that has won a prize 26.
The lower count switch 124 is a similar sensor that detects a game ball won in the big winning opening of the variable winning device 27. The upper count switch 125 is a similar sensor that detects a game ball won in the second big prize opening of the second variable prize winning device 33.
In the present embodiment, two lower count switches 124 are provided, and any of the game balls that have flowed into the big winning opening of the variable winning device 27 is detected by any one of the lower count switches 124. By providing a plurality of lower count switches 124 in this way, it is possible to quickly detect a game ball that has flowed into the special winning opening.
The prize winning port switch 123 is a similar sensor provided for the general prize winning openings 28 to 31, and when there are n general prize winning openings, one is provided for each and n is provided as a whole. Instead of providing one sensor for each general winning opening, one sensor may be provided for a plurality of general winning openings. The gate switch 122 is a sensor for detecting one game ball passing through the usual starting gate 32 one by one.
The sensors 120, 121, 122, 123, 124, and 125 that detect these game balls are proximity switches in this example, and output a negative logic detection signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V. The circuit configuration is as follows.

Further, the magnetic sensor 126 and the radio wave sensor 127 are sensors that are provided on the back surface of the game board 20 and the like and detect fraud by magnetism or radio waves. For example, the magnetic sensor 126 is arranged in each of the general winning ports 28, 30, 31 on the game board 20 and the first big winning port (large winning port 27a) of the variable winning device 27 (that is, arranged in four places). In order to detect fraud, such as stacking game balls using magnets in the vicinity of the first big winning opening of the general winning opening 28, 30, 31 and the variable winning apparatus 27, and making it easy to win each winning opening. It is a sensor. Note that the magnetic sensor 126 may be configured not to be arranged at four places as described above but to be arranged at more places.
Further, the glass frame open detection switch 211 is a sensor that detects that the glass frame 5 on the front surface of the pachinko machine is open. The front frame open detection switch 212 is a sensor that detects that the front frame 4 to which the glass frame 5 is attached is open.
The game control device 100 is provided with a proximity I / F that processes signals from the sensors 120, 121, 122, 123, 124, 125, 126, and 127. For details, refer to FIG. Will be described later.

Here, the game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids 132 and 133 to be described later driven by the game control device 100 have a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 500. Supplied and enabled.
The power supply device 500 includes a normal power source including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 501, a backup power supply unit 502 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the gaming microcomputer 101 in the event of a power failure, a power failure monitoring signal that has a power failure monitoring circuit and notifies the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure A control signal generation unit 503 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal, and a RAM clear switch 504 that initializes an internal RAM or the like of the gaming microcomputer 101 are provided.

  In the first embodiment, the power supply device 500 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 502 and the control signal generation unit 503 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, You may comprise so that it may provide on a main board | substrate. Since the game board 20 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 502 and the control signal generation unit 503 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 500 or the main board in this way. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement when changing the model.

  The backup power supply unit 502 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 101 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control apparatus 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. For example, the control signal generation unit 503 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 501, and detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to, for example, 17V or less, and changes the power failure monitoring signal (in this example, it is turned on). ) And a reset signal after a predetermined time. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

An initialization switch signal is output from the RAM clear switch 504. The initialization switch signal is a signal generated when the RAM clear switch 504 is turned on. Information stored in a RAM area such as a work RAM and a similar RAM area in the payout control apparatus 200 is initialized.
In this example, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 101 and the payout microcomputer 201. The reset signal causes the entire control system to be reset.

Next, the game control device 100 includes a payout control device 200, an effect control device 300, a test firing test device 131 (connected during a test at a test engine), a general electric solenoid 132, a first big prize opening solenoid (the first in FIG. 4). 1 large winning opening SOL) 133, a second large winning opening solenoid (second large winning opening SOL in FIG. 4) 134 and a collective display device 35 are connected.
The game control device 100 manages the unique ID of the game control device 100 via the external information terminal board 55, specifically, individual identification information (main board unique ID) that can identify the game microcomputer 101 and external information as external devices. It is output to the device 140.
The external information terminal board 55 is connected to the game control device 100 with a cable, and relays when transmitting external information and the unique ID (main board unique ID) of the game control device 100 to the management device 140 as an external device. .
The management device 140 collects information (for example, external information) from a large number of pachinko machines installed in the amusement store, and performs processing such as calculation processing and tabulation display of information necessary for business.

Here, as the external information, for example, a signal that informs the signal input to the game control device 100 to the outside, a jackpot signal that informs the jackpot that occurs in the course of the game, a starting port that is a condition for rotating the symbol A start signal indicating the winning of a symbol, a symbol starting to rotate, or a symbol determining number signal notifying the symbol rotation when the symbol stops rotating, and the gaming state being in a state advantageous to the player (so-called probability variation state) , A privilege state signal indicating a short time state) and the like, and signals that are notified to the outside, and these are collectively referred to as a gaming machine state signal.
Since the privilege state signal is generated after the end of the big hit state, it is a signal output during the “big hit state + a state advantageous to the player” period.
Further, data (for example, a payout command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the payout control device 200 by parallel communication. On the other hand, a payout abnormality status signal, a shot ball out switch signal, and an overflow switch signal are output from the payout control device 200 to the game control device 100. The contents of each signal will be described later.

Next, the test firing test apparatus 131 connected to the game control apparatus 100 will be described.
The test firing test apparatus 131 is used by an authorized organization to perform a test firing test of a gaming machine. The general electric solenoid 132 is a solenoid that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the second start winning port 26, the first large winning port solenoid 133 is a solenoid that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the variable winning device 27, and the second large winning port solenoid 134 is a special winning device. As described above, the solenoid and collective display device 35 that opens and closes the opening / closing member 33a of the 33 is a so-called ordinary figure display or special figure display, and also a special figure or ordinary figure start memory hold display or game state display. Is what you do.
Further, data (for example, an effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication.
Here, in the game control device 100, when a winning signal to the starting ports 25 and 26 is detected by the first starting port switch 120 and the second starting port switch 121, respectively, and a detection signal is input, the special figure starting winning number is 4. In addition to storing and holding in the range, a prefetch command relating to hold information is generated by extracting a random number based on the start winning hold and transmitted to the effect control device 300 at a predetermined timing. Further, when the start winning storage is suspended, a special figure suspension number command relating to the number of suspensions is generated and transmitted to the effect control device 300 in the same manner.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The game control device
A start winning storage means for storing a start winning number based on a winning of a game ball in the starting winning opening as a hold number within a predetermined range;
Pre-read command generating means for generating a pre-read command relating to stored information by extracting a random number based on the memory when the start winning memory is stored by the start winning storage means;
A hold number command generating means for generating a hold number command related to the hold number when the start winning memory is stored by the start winning storage means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising.

In the first embodiment, since there are two start ports (start ports 25 and 26), two types of special chart start memory (special figure start memory) are displayed (special figure 1 hold display and special figure 2 hold display). It is configured to execute two types of variation display games (a first variation display game and a second variation display game) as the special figure variation display game. The pre-read command and the hold number command are generated separately based on the winning of the game balls to the start ports 25 and 26, respectively. For example, pre-read hold information of special figure 1, pre-read hold information of special figure 2, hold number command of special figures 1 and 2, and the like are generated individually corresponding to each start port 25, 26.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
There are a number of start prize openings where game balls can be won,
The start winning storage means is
The number of start winnings based on the winning of each game ball to each of the plurality of starting winning openings is distinguished and stored as hold number 1 and hold number 2,
The prefetch command generating means includes
When the start prize storage means stores each start prize corresponding to each of the plurality of start prize openings, a prefetch command relating to stored information is generated separately for each start prize opening by extracting a random number based on the memory. ,
The hold number command generation means includes:
A game machine characterized in that when each start prize is stored by the start prize storage means, a hold number command relating to the hold number 1 and the hold number 2 is generated separately for each start prize port.

Further, in the first embodiment, a variation pattern command and a symbol command that are paired are sequentially transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. However, when a later symbol command is missed, the following control is performed. Done.
That is, it is determined whether or not the time from the end of the previous symbol variation to the reception of the current variation pattern command is within a specified time (for example, 1 second) when the effect control device 300 receives the variation pattern command sent first. However, if it is determined that the time from the end of the previous symbol variation to the reception of the current variation pattern command is within the specified time, even if reception of a symbol command sent later is missed, processing to start symbol variation is performed. If it is determined that the time from the end of the previous symbol variation to the reception of the current variation pattern command exceeds the specified time, a process that does not start the symbol variation is performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform a special drawing effect that does not stress the player as much as possible. Then, when a stop command comes, the variable stop or stop is continued, and the next command set is normally transmitted to the effect control device 300 At the point of time (set is established), the correct performance is executed based on the regular command information.

(Production control device related)
Next, a configuration of the effect control device 300 and devices connected to the effect control device 300 will be described.
The effect control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer, a video control microcomputer that performs video control exclusively under the control of the main control microcomputer, a VDP as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41, Although it has a sound source LSI that controls the output of various melody and sound effects, the detailed configuration will be described later with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 analyzes the control command (8-bit data signal) from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100, determines the contents of the effect and controls the content of the output video of the display device 41, or the sound source LSI. The reproduction sound is instructed and the speakers 12a and 12b are driven to produce sound effects, and the processing such as the drive control of the decoration LED 301 described above is executed. Further, when receiving the error notification instruction from the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 outputs a signal to the error notification LED 302 to turn it on.
Here, in addition to a single command (for example, a stop command), the command transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100 to the presentation control device 300 does not start the presentation alone, and exhibits the effect in pairs. This is, for example, “variation pattern command + design designation command” at the start of special figure variation, and details of the type of command will be described later.

In addition to the above, main commands are described as probability information commands. This is prepared in correspondence with the special figure game mode flag (see steps S974 and S984 described later), and is a flag reflecting the probability state at that time.
Note that even if the presentation control device 300 receives the probability information command transmitted from the game control device 100, for example, the screen of the display device 41 does not change immediately with the command alone, but an internal for producing the screen. Just change the parameters. Thereafter, when a command for changing the screen (fluctuating system, customer waiting demo command, etc.) is received, it is reflected as the probability state at that time.
Also, since it is determined that the probability of hitting the jackpot is low, even if the jackpot command is received without receiving the probability information command, the internal parameter may be forcibly rewritten with a low probability.
Examples of information that can be understood by the probability information command include the following.
・ "Low probability and short time (so-called 100 short and short time)"
・ "High probability and short time (so-called probability change)"
・ "Low probability and no short time"
Here, the “probability information” in the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) includes not only “whether or not it is probable change” but also information “whether or not time is short”. There are four types of gaming machine states: “low probability / short time”, “low probability / short time”, “high probability / short time”, and “high probability / short time”. In the present embodiment, the above three types (excluding “high probability / no time reduction”) are used, and are transmitted from the game control device 100 at the timing when each state changes.
Note that the command communication may be a serial communication method or a parallel communication method. In this embodiment, a serial communication method is adopted as command communication.

(Discharge control device related)
Next, the configuration of the payout control apparatus 200 and devices connected to the payout control apparatus 200 will be described.
The payout control device 200 includes a payout microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a payout microcomputer) 201 for controlling payout of game balls (award ball payout or rental payout), an error number display 202, an error release switch 203, an inspection device. A connection terminal 204 is provided. Details of the payout microcomputer 201 will be described later.
The payout microcomputer 201 functions as a payout arithmetic processing device (arithmetic processing device), and corresponds to the second arithmetic processing device of the present invention.
The inspection device connection terminal 204 includes, for example, a photocoupler, and is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various types of information related to payout obtained from the payout microcomputer 201 to the inspection device is connected. When there is an error in the payout control process, the error number indicator 202 lights a specific number according to the content of the error. The error cancel switch 203 outputs a signal for canceling the error when operated, for example, when the processing is stopped due to an error in the payout control process.

Devices connected to the input side of the payout control device 200 include an overflow switch 213, a radio wave sensor 214, a payout ball detection switch 215, and a chute ball break switch 216.
The overflow switch 213 is a switch for detecting that the number of game balls in the lower plate 10 is excessive, the radio wave sensor 214 is a sensor for detecting abnormal radio waves such as fraud, and the payout ball detection switch 215 is raised by the payout unit 53 (FIG. 3). A switch for detecting game balls (award balls or rental balls) to be paid out toward the tray 7 one by one, a shot ball cut switch 216 is a switch for detecting that there is no game ball on the chute for supplying game balls to the storage tank 51 It is.
The radio wave sensor 214 is a sensor that detects fraud such as acquiring a predetermined number or more of game balls without reacting the sensor with radio waves when the game ball to be paid out passes through the payout ball detection switch 215. . The radio wave sensor 214 may detect other illegal radio waves.

Also, devices connected to the output side of the payout control device 200 include a payout motor 222, a card unit connection board 54, a firing control device 400, and an external information terminal board 55.
The payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 222 of the payout unit 53 in accordance with a signal (payout control command) from the game control device 100, and performs control for paying out a prize ball. Also, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 222 based on a BRQ signal (lending request signal) or the like from the card unit (CR unit) 551 connected to the card unit connection board 54, and pays out a rental ball. Control to make it happen.
An operation panel board 552 is connected to the card unit connection board 54, and the operation panel board 552 is provided with a ball lending LED, a balance indicator, a ball lending switch, a return switch (all of which are provided in the pachinko machine 1). Etc.) are connected. The operation panel board 552 receives signals such as a ball lending LED and a balance indicator from the card unit (CR unit) 551, and sends operation signals from the ball lending switch and return switch to the card unit (CR unit) 551 for lending. Control necessary for paying out the ball is performed.
Although not shown, backup power is also supplied from the power supply device 500 to the RAM area of the payout control device 200 in the event of a power failure.

The payout control device 200 sends a prize ball signal (ball number information paid out as a prize ball) created based on the payout command received from the game control device 100 to the management device 140 as an external device via the external information terminal board 55. At the same time, the unique ID of the payout control device 200, specifically, individual identification information (payout unique ID) that can identify the payout microcomputer 201 is output to the management device 140 via the external information terminal board 55.
When the card unit 551 determines the validity of the payout unique ID, the payout unique ID is output to the card unit 551 via the external information terminal board 55.
The external information terminal board 55 is connected to the payout control device 200 with a cable, and performs relay when transmitting the prize ball signal and the unique ID (payout unique ID) of the payout control device 200 to the management device 140 as an external device. .
Here, the payout control device 200 constitutes subordinate control means and payout board unique identification information output means.

  The launch control device 400 is supplied with necessary power from the payout control device 200 and receives a launch permission signal and a power failure detection signal. The launch control device 400 controls the launch motor 401 that launches the game ball according to the operation of the launch operation handle 11, and signals from the touch switch 402 and the launch stop switch 403 are input to the launch control device 400. The touch switch 402 detects whether or not the player is touching the launch operation handle 11, and the launch stop switch 403 temporarily stops the launch of the game ball and is operated by the player. It is.

Next, a detailed configuration of the game control apparatus 100 will be described with reference to FIG.
The game control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus that comprehensively controls games, corresponds to a main board (that is, a circuit formed on the main board), and specifically includes a circuit shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the game control apparatus 100 includes a CPU unit 150 having a gaming microcomputer 101 (that is, a gaming microcomputer) 101, an input unit 151 having an input port, an output unit 152 having an output port, The data bus 153 connects the CPU unit 150, the input unit 151, and the output unit 152.

The CPU 150 includes a game microcomputer 101 called an amusement chip (IC) and an inverter that logically inverts a signal (start winning detection signal) from a proximity I / F 163 described later and inputs it to the game microcomputer 101. An inverting circuit 112 and an oscillator such as a crystal resonator are included, and an oscillation circuit 113 that generates a clock serving as a reference for a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit, and the like.
The gaming microcomputer 101 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 101A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 101B, and a RAM (random access memory) 101C that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 101B stores non-changeable information (program, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 101C stores the work area of the CPU 101A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 101B or the RAM 101C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

The CPU 101A executes a game control program in the ROM 101B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and the general electric solenoid 132, the first big prize opening solenoid 133, the second The pachinko machine 1 as a whole is controlled by generating driving signals for the big prize opening solenoid 134 and the collective display device 35.
Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 101 performs a hard hit determination random number for the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a hit determination random number for the normal figure variation display game, etc. A random number generation circuit for generating a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 101A based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock for providing update timing of the random number generation circuit A clock generator.

Here, the power supply device 500 generates electronic components such as the game control device 100 and the general-purpose solenoid 132 driven by the game control device 100, the first big prize opening solenoid 133, and the second big prize opening solenoid 134. A DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, or DC5V is supplied to enable operation.
The power supply device 500 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 501, backup power supply unit 502 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of game microcomputer 101 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit and an initialization switch to inform game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of power failure A control signal generation unit 503 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal is provided.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 500 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 502 and the control signal generation unit 503 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. However, since the game board 20 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 502 and the control signal generation unit 503 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 500 or the main board in this way. By providing it, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement when changing the model.

  The backup power supply unit 502 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 101 (particularly, the built-in RAM 101C) of the game control apparatus 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. For example, the control signal generation unit 503 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 501, and when the voltage drops to, for example, 17V or less, the control signal generation unit 503 changes (for example, turns on) the power failure monitoring signal as detecting the occurrence of power failure. At the same time, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  The initialization switch signal is a signal generated when the RAM clear switch 504 (initialization switch) is turned on, and is stored in the RAM 101C in the gaming microcomputer 101 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. Is forcibly initialized. In this example, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 101. The reset signal causes the entire control system to be reset.

Next, the input unit 151 of the game control apparatus 100 is provided with a first input port 160, a second input port 161, and a third input port 162 as input ports. The input 151 includes a first start port switch 120, a second start port switch 121, a gate switch 122, a winning port switch 123, a lower count switch 124, an upper count switch 125, a magnetic sensor 126, a radio wave sensor 127, a glass frame. Detection signals from the opening detection switch 211 and the front frame opening detection switch 212 are input.
The input unit 151 is provided with an interface chip (proximity I / F) 163 that converts detection signals input from the switches 120 to 124 and 127 into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. The proximity I / F 163 has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the proximity switch (the above switches 120 to 124, 127) is improperly shorted, the switch is disconnected from the connector, the lead An abnormal state in which the line is cut and floated can be detected, and when such an abnormal state is detected, an abnormality detection signal is output. The proximity I / F 163 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 500 in order to enable the signal level conversion function as described above. ing.

Here, a part of the output of the proximity I / F 163 (excluding the abnormality detection signal) (the output from each of the switches 120 to 124) is supplied to the second input port 161, and the microcomputer for gaming is supplied via the data bus 153. 101, and is supplied from the game control device 100 as the main board to the test firing test apparatus 131 via the relay board 170.
Further, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 127 among the outputs of the proximity I / F 163 is supplied to the third input port 162 and is read into the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153.
Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 163, detection signals of the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121 are input to the gaming microcomputer 101 via the inverting circuit 112 in addition to the second input port 161. It is configured. The inversion circuit 112 is provided because the signal input terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101 is assumed to receive a signal from a micro switch or the like, and is detected with negative logic, that is, low level (0 V) as an effective level. Because it is designed to do. If the signal input terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101 can detect positive logic as an effective level, the inverting circuit 112 is not necessary.
Further, the signal from the lower count switch 124 of the output of the proximity I / F 163 is supplied to the third input port 162 as the abnormality detection signal 1 and is read into the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153. Yes.

A detection signal from the upper count switch 125 is input to the proximity I / F 165.
Here, the reason why the proximity I / F 163 and the proximity I / F 165 are provided is that the number of input terminals of the proximity I / F 163 is limited. The proximity I / F 165 is smaller than the proximity I / F 163 according to the number of input terminals that are insufficient, thereby reducing the cost. Note that the proximity I / F 163 having a necessary number of input terminals may be used, and the proximity I / F 165 may not be provided.
The proximity I / F 165 is an interface chip that converts a detection signal input from the upper count switch 125 into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. Like the proximity I / F 163, the input range is 7V-11V. Thus, it is possible to detect an abnormal state in which the lead wire of the proximity switch (upper count switch 125) is improperly shorted, the switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected and becomes floating. When an abnormal state is detected, an abnormality detection signal is output. In addition, in order to enable the signal level conversion function as described above, the proximity I / F 165 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 500 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. ing.
Of the outputs from the proximity I / F 165, the signal from the upper count switch 125 is supplied to the 3 input port 162 as the abnormality detection signal 2 and is read into the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153.
Further, the output of the upper count switch 125 is supplied to the second input port 161 via the proximity I / F 165, read into the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153, and relayed from the game control device 100 as the main board. The test firing test apparatus 131 is supplied via the substrate 170.

As described above, the signal from the magnetic sensor 126 is input to the third input port 162 and the signal from the radio wave sensor 127 is input via the proximity I / F 163, and the signal from the upper count switch 125 is abnormal. A detection signal 2 is input via the proximity I / F 165, and a signal from the lower count switch 124 is input as the abnormality detection signal 1 via the proximity I / F 163.
In addition, the magnetic sensor 126 will be described. In FIG. 5, the magnetic sensor switch 126 is shown as one, but this is only one input to the game control device 100, and in fact, A plurality of magnetic sensors (four in this example) are mounted and wired or connected on a relay board (present between the sensor and the main board, not shown).
Here, the data held in the third input port 162 is that the gaming microcomputer 101 asserts the enable signal CE3 (changes to an effective level) by decoding the address assigned to the third input port 162. Therefore, it can be read (the same applies to other ports). The enable signal of the first input port 160 is CE1, and the enable signal of the second input port 161 is CE2.

  On the other hand, a signal from the glass frame opening detection switch 211 and the front frame opening detection switch 212 and a signal from the dispensing control device 200 are input to the first input port 160. These signals are supplied from the first input port 160 to the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153. The signals from the payout control device 200 include a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shot ball break switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow switch signal indicating overflow. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of the game balls are stored in the lower plate 10 (full).

  Further, the input section 151 is provided with a Schmitt trigger circuit 164 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal from the power supply device 500 to the gaming microcomputer 101 and the like. Reference numeral 164 has a function of removing noise from these input signals. Of the signals from the power supply device 500, the power failure monitoring signal and the initialization switch signal are once inputted to the first input port 160 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 101 via the data bus 153. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 101 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt trigger circuit 164 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 101 and each port of the output unit 152 (ports 171, 175, 176, which will be described later). 177, 180). Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 170 without passing through the output unit 152, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 170 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows.
Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 170. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the input ports 160 to 162 of the input unit 151. The data set to each port of the output unit 152 by the gaming microcomputer 101 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. However, immediately before the reset signal RST is input, each data of the input unit 151 is reset. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 101 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 101 is reset.

Next, the output unit 152 of the game control device 100 includes a first port 171, a third port 175, a fourth port 176, a fifth port 177, and a sixth port 180 as output ports connected to the data bus 153. . Note that data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the payout control device 200 through the first port 171 by parallel communication. In addition, data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 200 through serial communication via a buffer (Schmitt trigger buffer) 173.
The first port 171 generates a 4-bit data signal to be output to the payout control device 200 (for example, a prize ball payout command or data) and a control signal (data strobe signal) indicating the validity / invalidity of this data signal. To do.
The buffer 173 prevents a signal from being input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side, that is, in order to secure one-way communication, the data signal from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. A unidirectional buffer that only allows output. A similar buffer may be provided for a signal output from the first port 171 to the payout control device 200.

The third port 175 includes a first big prize opening solenoid 133 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 27b of the variable prize winning device 27, a second big prize opening solenoid 134 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 33a of the second variable prize winning device 33, and a second start prize. This is an output port for outputting each opening / closing data of a solenoid (hereinafter referred to as “general power solenoid”) 132 for opening / closing the opening / closing member 26a of the mouth 26.
The fourth port 176 is an output port for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 35.
The fifth port 177 is an output port for outputting on / off data of a digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 35 is connected.
The sixth port 180 is an output port for outputting information related to the pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 55 as an external information signal (external information shown in FIG. 4). Note that the information output from the external information terminal board 55 is supplied to, for example, an information collection terminal or management device 140 installed in a game store. In addition, a photo relay 55a is mounted on the external information terminal board 55, and through this photo relay 55a, external information, a unique ID (main board unique ID) of the game control device 100, and a unique ID of the payout control device 200 ( The payout unique ID) is transmitted to the management device 140 as an external device. Note that since the photocoupler has polarity, it is necessary to pay attention to the connection. However, if the photorelay 55a is used as described above, there is an advantage that the polarity is unnecessary and it is convenient.
When the card unit 551 determines the validity of the payout unique ID, the payout unique ID is output to the card unit 551 via the external information terminal board 55.

  The output unit 152 is connected to the data bus 153 and outputs data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability status of the jackpot, etc. via the relay board 170. The buffer 174 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 174 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device 100 (main board) of the pachinko machine 1 as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in the game store. Note that the detection signal of the switch that does not need to be processed such as the start port SW output from the proximity I / F 163 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay substrate 170 without passing through the buffer 174.

  On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor 126 and the radio wave sensor 127 that cannot be supplied to the test fire testing device as they are are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 101 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine cannot control the game. An error signal indicating the state is supplied from the data bus 153 via the buffer 174 and the relay board 170 to the test firing test apparatus. The relay board 170 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 174 and supplies the signal to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 101 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 170, and the signal of the port that is selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  The output unit 152 includes a plurality of drive circuits (first driver 178a to fourth driver 178d). The first driver 178a receives the opening / closing data signals of the first big prize opening solenoid 133, the second big prize opening solenoid 134, and the general electric solenoid 132 outputted from the third port 175, and generates respective solenoid driving signals. And output. The second driver 178 b outputs an on / off drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 35 output from the fourth port 176. The third driver 178 c outputs an on / off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 35 output from the fifth port 177. The fourth driver 178 d outputs an external information signal supplied from the sixth port 180 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 55.

The first driver 178a is supplied with DC 32V as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 500 in order to drive the first big prize opening solenoid 133, the second big prize opening solenoid 134, and the general power solenoid 132 that operate at 32V. Supplied.
Further, DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 178b for driving the segment line. Further, since the third driver 178c for driving the digit line is for pulling out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V. Note that the collective display device 35 has a second driver 178b that outputs 12V, a current is supplied to the anode terminal of the predetermined LED via the segment line, and a cathode terminal of the predetermined LED that is output by the third driver 178c that outputs the ground potential. As a result, current is drawn through the segment line, so that the power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected by the dynamic drive method, and the predetermined LED is turned on. The fourth driver 178d is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V.

  Further, the output unit 152 is provided with a photocoupler 179 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 180. The photocoupler 179 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 101 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 180 through serial communication. Note that such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101 as in the case of a general general-purpose microprocessor, and therefore, ports such as the input ports 160 to 162 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 and the devices connected to the effect control device 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
In the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 is a slave control means, scenario data setting means, screen creation means, effect control means, effect button control means, effect content control means, character data storage means, motion table storage means, scenario table storage. Means, background type selecting means, and background effect means.
The effect control device 300 is a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 composed of an amusement chip (IC) in the same manner as the game microcomputer 101, and image processing for video display on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the 1st CPU 311. VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the above and a sound source LSI 313 for controlling output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speakers 12a and 12b.
Here, in addition to the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 311, a video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) that performs video control exclusively under the control of the 1stCPU 311 is provided, and two CPUs are provided. In addition, a configuration in which image processing for video display on the display device 41 is performed in accordance with the data, but in this embodiment, only the 1st CPU 311 with high performance is provided, which is advantageous in terms of arrangement space and cost.
A configuration in which two main control microcomputers (1st CPU) and a video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) that performs video control exclusively under the control of the 1st CPU may be employed.

The main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 is connected to a PROM (programmable read only memory) 321 and an RTC (real time clock) 325 storing a program to be executed by the CPU, and to a VDP 312.
The RTC 325 is a clock element that clocks time, and can be adjusted to the actual time by setting. The clock signal is sent to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 uses a signal from the RTC 325, for example, Production control related to time, such as event announcements and special productions at amusement stores, is possible.
On the other hand, an image ROM 322 storing character images and video data is connected to the VDP 312, and an audio ROM 323 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 313. The image ROM 322 stores a plurality of moving images (movies) as video data.
Here, the character data is stored in the image ROM 322, but the motion data representing the character movement information and the scenario data defining the connection of the motion data are stored in the PROM 321.
The image ROM 322 corresponds to character data storage means, and the PROM (control ROM) 321 corresponds to motion table storage means and scenario table storage means.
The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the control command (data signal output from the buffer 173) from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control apparatus 100, determines the contents of the presentation, and determines the contents of the output video of the display device 41. Processing such as instruction, instruction of reproduction sound to the sound source LSI 313, drive control of the decoration devices 42 and 43 and the rendering devices 44 and 45 described above is executed.
Here, in the present embodiment, the display device 41, the board decoration device 42, the frame decoration device 43, the board production device 44, the frame production device 45, the speakers 12a and 12b, etc. constitute production means.

For example, when a variation display game is executed, a command (for example, a variation pattern command to be described later) including stop combination (result mode) data and reach system (or variation time) data from the game control device 100. Is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the main control microcomputer 311 that has received this selects the change mode that satisfies the stop mode and the change time, and displays the display device 41 via the VDP 312. It is configured to control a special figure variation display game in which a predetermined special figure is variably displayed and finally a specific symbol combination (result mode) is derived and displayed.
It should be noted that aspects such as special display variation display actually implemented by the control of the effect control device 300 may be uniquely determined by a command from the game control device 100, but the conditions given by the above command In the range, the main control microcomputer 311 of the production control device 300 finally selects a mode by random number extraction or the like (a configuration in which a certain amount of discretion is given to select the mode also in the production control device 300). Yes.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the random function is updated at least once every control cycle of the main process using the rand function, and the random number seed value is updated every time a predetermined condition is satisfied. The random number is generated based on the generation sequence specified by the threshold value.

Here, the RAM 311a that provides a work area for the main control microcomputer 311 is provided inside the chip. The RAM 311a that provides the work area may be provided outside the chip.
Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 313 in a serial manner, and data between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 is obtained in a parallel manner. Are transmitted and received. In general, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission by transmitting and receiving data in parallel.
The VDP 312 includes an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) 312a used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 322, and a scaler for enlarging and reducing images. 312b, a signal conversion circuit 312c that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) system, and the like are provided.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC is input from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311 in order to synchronize the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the lamps provided on the glass frame 5 and the game board 20. In addition, the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive an interrupt signal INT0-n and a command or data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT for notification is input. Also, between the main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 313, a call signal CTS and a response signal RTS are exchanged in order to transmit and receive commands and data by the handshake method.

In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface circuit (command I / F) 331 that receives a command (data signal output from the buffer 173) transmitted from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100. ing. Via this command I / F 331, control commands from the gaming microcomputer 101, such as decoration special figure hold number command, special figure type / design information command, variation pattern random number command, customer waiting demonstration command, variation pattern command, and The main control microcomputer 311 receives a fanfare command or the like.
Note that the command transmitted from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100 is stored in the RAM 311a which is built in the main control microcomputer 311 and provides a work area as necessary.
In this case, the command is stored in an area such as a command storage area of the RAM 311a. Specifically, for example, when a variation pattern command and a symbol command to be paired are sequentially transmitted among the commands sent from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, these commands are command storage areas in the storage area of the RAM 311a. Are sequentially stored and read from the command storage area when the set is established, and the main control microcomputer 311 executes the effect process. The command storage area may be divided into a first command storage area and a second command storage area.
In the first embodiment, the stop symbol command is sent in the order of the variation pattern command.
When a configuration in which the variation pattern command is transmitted in the order of the symbol stop command is employed, for example, when the variation pattern command sent first is received, the effect control device 300 relates to the effect of the RAM 311a of the main control microcomputer 311. You may make it perform the operation | movement which sets a memory | storage area | region to a default value (For example, the symbol stop state in a loss symbol). In this case, the “storage area related to the effect” is an area for setting a default value, and is separate from the command storage area.

In addition, in order to receive or analyze a command transmitted from the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100, the RAM 311a that is built in the main control microcomputer 311 and provides a work area has a received command buffer (hereinafter referred to as a command buffer). The analysis data storage area may be provided as appropriate.
The reception buffer stores reception commands in order, and a ring buffer type is used.
Here, the ring buffer is an area for temporarily storing data that is controlled so that a certain memory area looks like a ring-shaped memory area. By using such a ring buffer, Transmission processing and reception processing can be performed separately, and it is also effective for preventing data loss and avoiding traffic jams in command reception processing.
On the other hand, the analysis data storage area stores a predetermined number of commands stored in the reception buffer by copying, and uses a FIFO (First-in-First-out) format that performs first-in first-out processing. Has been.
Here, the FIFO is one of methods related to data storage and retrieval, and is a method of retrieving data first stored first (that is, first-in first-out).
The use of the FIFO has advantages that high-speed communication processing is possible and communication and data reading can be performed asynchronously.
The reception command buffer corresponds to reception buffer means, and the analysis data storage area corresponds to analysis data storage means.
Since the game microcomputer 101 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 has a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling the LEDs of the panel decoration device 42, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling the LEDs of the frame decoration device 43, and the panel. A board effect motor / SOL control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a motor and a solenoid of the effect device 44, and a frame effect motor control circuit 335 for driving and controlling a motor (for example, a motor for operating the moving light 14) of the frame effect device 45 described above. Is provided. These control circuits 332 to 335 are connected to a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a light emission source other than the LED may be used as the light emission source of the panel decoration device 42 or the frame decoration device 43.

  The effect control device 300 also includes an effect button SW46 built in the effect button 9 provided on the glass frame 5, the effect motor SW47 that detects the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44, and the frame effect device 45. An amplifier circuit 337a comprising an SW input circuit 336 for detecting the on / off state of the CPU and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311; an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 12a provided on the glass frame 5; An amplifier circuit 337b for driving the lower speaker 12b provided on the operation panel 6 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 501 of the power supply device 500 supplies a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and the electronic components controlled thereby, in order to drive a motor and a solenoid. In addition to DC12V for driving the display device 41 composed of a liquid crystal panel, DC5V serving as the power supply voltage for the command I / F 331, DC18V for driving the LED and the speakers 12a and 12b, and direct current voltages thereof. It is configured so as to generate a voltage of NDC 24V that is used to turn on the power monitor lamp. Further, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311, DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V is generated based on DC 5 V. The DC-DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 501.

  The reset signal RST generated by the control signal generation unit 503 of the power supply device 500 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312, the tone generator LSI 313, the control circuits 332 to 335, and the amplifier circuits 337 a and 337 b, and these are reset. To. In this embodiment, the general-purpose port of the main control microcomputer 311 is used to generate and supply a reset signal to the VDP 312. Thereby, the cooperation of the operations of the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the effect control device 300 is provided with a wireless module 360, and the wireless module 360 includes a CPU 360a, a ROM 360b, and a RAM 360c. The wireless module 360 is supplied with predetermined power from the power supply device 500.
The wireless module 360 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 and wirelessly communicates between its own gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) and another gaming machine 370 in accordance with a command from the main control microcomputer 311 (intersub communication described later). Exchange the information on the state of each other's gaming machine by the communication, control the transmission and exchange of images and characters, etc., and synchronize images and characters that are mutually related to the display device of each gaming machine Display while synchronizing. The CPU 360a performs processing such as wireless communication control, image and character transmission, the ROM 360b stores a program executed by the CPU 360a, and the RAM 360c is used as a work area.
The wireless module 360 corresponds to a communication unit.

The setting switch 371 is arranged at a different gaming machine number (for example, one gaming island) for each gaming machine so that a transmission source or a transmission destination gaming machine can be specified when exchanging data between a plurality of gaming machines. If there are 10 gaming machines, No. 1 to 10 (n is assumed if there are n) in order from the left))) can be operated by the staff of the gaming store. For example, the setting switch can display the same image or character on all gaming machines arranged on the island by the above-mentioned communication between subs, or display images or characters that are related to each other while being synchronized or synchronized. It is possible by the operation of 371. Further, by using the aforementioned gaming machine number, it is possible to perform the effect only between two specific gaming machines.
The gaming machine number may be defined based on, for example, the unique ID set in the wireless module. In this case, the value of the unique ID of the wireless module is almost random, so that the arrangement of gaming machines is specified. If you want to produce an effect such as a group notice flowing in order from the leftmost gaming machine on the island, it is a master gaming machine or management device to manage the location information of each gaming machine It will be necessary to provide this, which takes time.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the stage can be specified and performed by manual setting by the setting switch 371 that can simply specify the game machines on the island in order, so that anyone can easily operate the stage. Can be controlled easily.
Further, the setting switch 371 may be used not for setting location information but for setting the control contents of the wireless module 360 in a plurality of stages and switching the selection according to the business form of the amusement store.

  In the case of this example, the circuit board constituting the effect control device 300 corresponds to the sub control board. As described above, the effect control device 300 (sub control board) that controls the display device 41 controls the speaker, the lamps, the movable part for decoration, and the like, which will be described later, constituting the game control device 100. The main board indirectly controls the movable part and the like by sending a control command to the sub-control board. For this reason, the hardware configuration such as the wiring pattern of the main board is basically the same regardless of the model, and technically, the main board is modeled by installing a game program for each model in the microcomputer 101 for gaming machines. It can be shared even if the brand is different.

Next, the configuration of a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
The VDP 312 includes a CPU I / F 601, a data transfer circuit 602, a CG bus I / F 603, a compressed data decompression circuit 604, a drawing circuit 605, a first VRAM 606, a second VRAM 607, and a display circuit 608. Necessary circuits are connected to each other via the H.611.
The VDP 312 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control apparatus 300 via the CPU I / F 601 and is connected to the image ROM 322 via the CG bus I / F 603. The VDP 312 basically creates image data for each frame to be displayed on the display device 41 in accordance with an instruction from the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 and outputs the image data to the display device 41 via the display circuit 608. To do. The first VRAM 606 is mainly used as a RAM for a frame buffer, specifically, for example, a RAM for a frame buffer or a Z buffer (in the case of three dimensions, the amount in the Z-axis direction). On the other hand, the second VRAM 607 is mainly used as a drawing material RAM for storing material data.

Data in the image ROM 322 is stored in the second VRAM 607 via the CG bus I / F 603. The compressed data is decompressed by the compressed data decompression circuit 604, stored in the second VRAM 607, and also stored in the first VRAM 606 as necessary.
The drawing circuit 605 mainly processes the drawing material stored in the second VRAM 607 (for example, processing of various effects, enlargement, reduction, etc.), and the display position and order (for example, from the back of the screen to the front). Display order, etc.), image data of one frame is created and stored in the first VRAM 606.

The display circuit 608 includes a scaler 608a and an LVDSI / F 608b.
Then, the display circuit 608 converts the image data of one frame stored in the first VRAM 606 to the LVDS specification signal level at the setting timing of the interless mode or the non-interlace mode, and outputs the RGB data to the display device 41. Note that the display area of the image data can be enlarged (for example, VGA → XGA) and displayed by the scaler 608a. For example, in the case of VGA, the image size is 640 × 480, and in the case of XGA, the image size is 1024 × 768.
The data transfer circuit 602 has data transfer functions such as between the main control microcomputer 311 and the first VRAM 606, between the main control microcomputer 311 and the drawing circuit 605, and between the CG bus I / F 603 and the first VRAM 606.

E. Outline of Game Next, an outline of a game performed in the pachinko machine 1 of this example and a flow of the game will be described.
First, at the beginning of the game (or before the start of the game), the customer is in a waiting state (during demonstration), and a command for instructing the display of the waiting screen for the customer is a buffer (for example, the same) 5 corresponds to the buffer 173 in FIG. 5), and is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and a customer waiting screen (moving image or still image) is displayed on the display unit 41 a of the display device.

  When the game ball that has been driven into the game area 22 through the guide rail 21 wins the special winning start winning opening 25 or 26 (that is, when there is a special winning start winning), the fluctuation display of the special figure Is sent from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and a display (so-called variable display) in which a special figure (including numbers, characters, symbols, patterns, etc.) fluctuates (for example, scrolls) on the display unit 41a. ) Is performed, and a special figure variation display game (hereinafter referred to as a special figure variation display game) is performed.

And if the stop result mode of this variable display game (the combination of special figures derived by the variable display) is a special result mode (for example, “3, 3, 3”, etc.), a privilege called a big hit is given. It is given to the player. In terms of control, for example, a value such as a big hit random number is extracted and stored on the condition that there has been a start prize, and this extracted and stored random number value is compared with a predetermined determination value at the time of determination. Based on the comparison determination result, whether or not to make a big hit is determined in advance, and the variable display game is started in response to this determination.
Further, in the normal mode, if the stop result mode of the variable display game is a specific mode of the special result mode (for example, “7, 7, 7”), it will be a big hit and after the big hit game The game state shifts from the normal mode to the probability change mode (after a special prize period to be described later). In this probability variation mode, control is performed to increase the probability that the special figure will be a big hit (hereinafter referred to as the special figure big hit probability). In some cases, so-called time reduction (which shortens the variable display time for special drawings or the like to increase the frequency of the variable display game and make it easier to win) is also performed.

  When the jackpot is reached and the jackpot state is reached, a fanfare period (a period in which an output of a sound effect that produces a jackpot is executed) is passed through the first jackpot of the variable winning device 27 for a specified time. Within a range not exceeding (for example, 30 seconds), for example, an opening operation (a jackpot round) that is temporarily opened for a period of up to 10 winnings is performed. This release operation is repeated for a specified number of rounds. In this big hit state, a command for instructing display of a big hit screen for producing a big hit state or informing the player of the number of big hit rounds is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300, and the display unit In 41a, such a big hit display is executed.

The period in which the jackpot is in effect (the fanfare period, the period of the jackpot round in which the jackpot is open, the interval period between the jackpot round and the next jackpot round, and the ending period) are the special prize period. It corresponds to.
In addition, as the number of rounds of the big hit, for example, a big hit of 15 rounds is usually the main big hit, but a configuration that generates a 16R big hit as a premier or other configurations may be used. Further, there may be a two-round big hit or the like as a so-called suddenness (a sudden probability change in which the big hit probability changes via a big hit with few balls).
Further, when the stop result mode of the variable display game by the display device 41 becomes a special mode (for example, special eyes such as “3, special symbol, 3”, etc.), a privilege called a special jackpot is generated, and the second variable winning device In the range where the 33 open / close members 33a do not exceed a specified time (for example, 30 seconds), an opening operation (a big hit round) is performed in which the opening / closing member 33a is temporarily opened, for example, for a period of up to 5 winnings. This release operation is repeated for a specified number of rounds.

On the other hand, when a game ball is further won in the start winning opening 25 or 26 during the above-mentioned special display variation display game or big hit, the display memory 41a or the like displays a special display start memory hold display, for example, 4 After the change display game or the big hit state is finished, the special display change display game is repeated or returned to the customer waiting state based on the start memory.
In other words, if the variable display game ends with a big hit, the game shifts to a big hit state. If the big hit ends and there is a start memory, the variable display game is executed again. If the big hit ends and there is no start memory, the flow returns to the customer wait state.

In this embodiment, for example, two types of special chart start memory (special map start memory) are displayed (special figure 1 hold display and special figure 2 hold display). A variation display game (a first variation display game and a second variation display game) is executed. That is, when a special figure start prize (first start prize) due to the game ball entering the first start prize opening 25 occurs, the display device 41 plays the first variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 1. When a game ball wins the first start winning opening 25 during any special figure variation display game or the like, one first start memory (start memory corresponding to the special figure 1 hold display) is stored. On the other hand, the first variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 1 is performed on the display device 41 after the special figure fluctuation display game is finished.
Further, when there is a special figure start prize (second start prize) due to the game ball entering the second start prize opening 26, the display device 41 plays the second variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 2. When a game ball wins the second start winning opening 26 during any special figure variation display game or the like, one second start memory (start memory corresponding to the special figure 2 hold display) is stored. On the other hand, the second variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 2 is performed on the display device 41 after the above special figure fluctuation display game ends.
When both the first start memory and the second start memory are present, either the first variation display game or the second variation display game is executed first in accordance with a preset rule. For example, a mode in which the second variable display game corresponding to the second start winning opening 26 is preferentially performed (that is, a mode in which the second start memory is preferentially consumed) or two types of variable display games are arranged in the order of winning. There may be a mode to be performed.

On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the usual figure start gate 32 during the game, a usual figure change display game (hereinafter, referred to as a usual figure change display game) is played by the display part 41a or the like. . And if this normal map change display game result (stopped general chart) is a predetermined mode (specific display mode), a privilege called per map is granted.
At this time, a game is held in which the pair of opening / closing members 26a of the second start winning opening 26 is temporarily held in an open state where the pair of opening / closing members 26a is opened in a reverse C-shape. This makes it easier for the game ball to start and win, and accordingly, the number of executions of the special figure variable display game increases and the possibility of winning a big hit increases.
Further, during the above-mentioned variable display game, when a game ball is further won in the general chart start gate 32, the collective display device 35 performs a hold display of the general chart start memory and stores, for example, up to four, After the usual variable display game is over, the usual variable display game is repeated based on the memory.

Next, the external output of the unique ID will be outlined. When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or the system is reset, the unique ID stored in the gaming microcomputer 101 (for example, stored in the HW parameter ROM) (hereinafter referred to as appropriate) Main unique ID) is read out, and is converted into a serial communication format (or parallel communication format) by the operation of the game program, and relayed by the external information terminal board 55 to be externally managed by the management device 140 (or card unit 551). May be included). As a result, the unique ID stored in the gaming microcomputer 101 can be sent to the gaming store side.
The unique ID is transferred to the outside (in this case, the inspection apparatus connection terminal 102 in FIG. 4) in response to a request from the outside. Then, for example, by connecting the inspection device to the inspection device connection terminal 102, the unique ID stored in the gaming microcomputer 101 is read out by the inspection organization.
On the other hand, the payout unique ID (payout individual identification information) that can identify the payout microcomputer 201 of the payout control device 200 is made into a serial communication format (or a parallel communication format) by the payout control device 200 by the operation of the payout program. Then, it is relayed by the external information terminal board 55 and transmitted to the external management device 140 (or the card unit 551 may be included). As a result, the payout unique ID stored in the payout microcomputer 201 can be sent to the game store side.
In the present embodiment, the unique IDs of the main board and the payout board are separately relayed by the external information terminal board 55 and transmitted to the external management device 140, but this is not restrictive. For example, a main unique ID is sent from the game control device 100 (main board) to the payout control device 200 (payout board), and the payout control device 200 collectively relays the main unique ID and the payout unique ID through the external information terminal board 55. It may be configured to transmit to the external management device 140. Further, for example, a payout unique ID is sent from the payout control apparatus 200 (payout board) to the game control apparatus 100 (main board), and the game control apparatus 100 collects the payout unique ID and the main unique ID and relays them through the external information terminal board 55. It may be configured to transmit to the external management device 140.
If it does in this way, the freedom degree of taking out each unique ID of a main board and a payout board outside will increase according to the circuit composition of a game machine.

Next, the commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 will be briefly described. When a variable display game is executed, the combination of stop symbols (result mode) from the game control device 100 and reach A command (for example, a variation pattern command to be described later) including system (or variation time) data is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 selects a variation mode that satisfies the stop mode and the variation time. Then, a special figure variable display game is controlled in which a predetermined special figure is displayed in a variable manner on the display device 41, and finally a specific symbol combination (result mode) is derived and displayed.
In this case, among the commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, there is a command that does not start the effect alone and exerts an effect as a set. For example, the “variation pattern command + There is a “designation command”. In addition, there is a command (for example, a customer waiting command) that exerts an effect alone, and many commands are sequentially transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 for the effect.

When a sub-interlocking advance notice command is transmitted simultaneously from one gaming machine (preliminary execution gaming machine) in the same group of inter-sub communication to other gaming machines as an inter-sub advance notice command, the inter-sub linked advance notice system command, for example, In the case of the content instructing the execution of the mode A, in other gaming machines, the execution probability of the inter-sub notice is determined based on the execution probability of the notice mode A set for each unit. Based on the above, a lottery using random numbers is performed and determined. When the execution is determined, the notice mode A (for example, a tiger character) is inserted during the presentation of another gaming machine, and displayed in an overlapping manner. Synchronization is performed.
In addition, in the gaming machine that has performed the effect based on the inter-sub-linked notice system command instructed by the gaming machine (pre-announcement execution gaming machine) in the same group in the inter-sub communication, the next execution number of the notice mode A is set. Update by +1 to prepare for the next inter-sub-linked notice command.

In this case, in other gaming machines that have received the inter-sub-linked notice system command, whether or not to execute the inter-sub notice is determined by lottery using random numbers based on the execution probability for the past notice mode A set for each unit. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the appearance of any inter-sub notice in response to an instruction from another stand, and it is possible to cause the inter-sub notice effect to appear at an appropriate frequency.
That is, the number of executions of the inter-sub notice can be appropriately limited according to the number of executions of the inter-sub notice performed in the past.
Accordingly, the reliability of the notice effect or the like can be prevented from being lost, and the interest of the game can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the concept of scenario data (scenario layer) is used in drawing control of a screen displayed on the display device 41. Scenarios are set in advance as a table by dividing the design variation effects into a plurality of layers (scenario layers) such as background scenario, left symbol scenario, right symbol scenario, etc. (details will be described later) This is a technique for generating a picture on one screen by individually controlling them as a scenario and synthesizing all the scenarios.
Specifically, in the symbol variation effect on the display device 41, for example, the motion of the beginning of the variation, the motion from the slowdown to the temporary stop (number of frames to be sent, sliding, etc.), the type of the notice effect, etc. Since there are a variety of combinations depending on the effect distribution, if scenario data is created for each screen for every combination, a huge amount of data is required.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the rendering control in the variation effect in the effect control device 300, the background, the left symbol, the right symbol,... Are individually categorized for each display element, and each of them is independently divided into a plurality of motions. Information is set as a table of operation scenarios for effecting display by switching simultaneously or continuously and stored in advance in, for example, (PROM (control ROM) 321. Next, in accordance with the effect command from the game control device 100 The production control device 300 selects scenario tables, combines them, and synthesizes them to create one screen of drawing content (for each frame), thereby defining a minimum operation pattern ( It is only necessary to make parts of operation), saving data capacity and improving development efficiency.

Further, in this embodiment, the button effect start setting data in the scenario table is set to the effective time of the push button type effect button 9 (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as PB as appropriate) operated by the player. Has been.
That is, in the scenario table including the effect of the effect button 9, an effective period timer indicating that the button is valid (update processing that is updated (ie, (−1) updated) every time one frame elapses) is included in the timer. The scenario presentation time to be performed thereafter is variable based on the update status of the validity period timer at the timing when the presentation button 9 is pressed.
Therefore, every time the frame of the effect screen on the display device 41 advances, the value of the effective period timer is decremented. When the effective period timer becomes “0”, the operation of the effect button 9 becomes invalid and the effect button 9 is pressed. No directing is performed. On the other hand, when the effect button 9 is pressed before the effective period timer becomes “0”, the effect when the button is pressed is started.
In this way, the display time of the appearing character becomes variable depending on the timing when the effect button 9 is pressed, so that the interest of the game is enhanced.
That is, when the effect button 9 is pressed early, a long notice effect (remaining time + fixed time) is seen according to the remaining time (that is, the time corresponding to the remaining frame: α frame), and the effect button 9 is pushed at the end of the notice effect. When the button is pressed, a notice effect for a minimum fixed time (for example, 55 frames) is performed.
Therefore, the longer the effect button 9 is pressed at an earlier timing, the longer the notice effect will be seen, and the advantage of pressing the effect button 9 will arise earlier, and the interest of the game will increase.

In the present embodiment, a determination code for determining whether or not to continue the current performance state is provided in the scenario table, and the motion information in the RAM 311a and the motion information on the scenario table in the effect control device 300 are provided. If they are different, the motion information on the scenario table is set as the production content, and if it is the same, the motion information on the scenario table is not set as the production content.
For example, it is determined based on the determination code whether the background of the effect screen is continuously displayed or whether the effect is performed with a new background. If it is determined that the background is a new background, the current data in the RAM 311a is stored on the scenario table. Overwrite with data corresponding to the new background. As a result, the background is switched and an effect is performed with the new background. On the other hand, if it is determined that the background is to be continued, the instruction data acquired from the scenario table is discarded and the presentation proceeds with the current background.
By doing in this way, the background state in the previous production can be continued in the next production, for example, it is possible to have a display element having a sense of unity between the productions of different special figure fluctuations. , The fun of gaming is improved.
For example, it is possible to perform various effects such as leaving the notice character on the screen of the display device 41 across a plurality of different special drawing fluctuation effects.
Further, there is no need to use different scenario tables depending on whether the production contents are continued or not, and the development efficiency is improved. In other words, it is possible to produce effects in accordance with the game situation with one scenario table.

Next, when performing an effect on the display device 41, a scenario table is used as described above. In this scenario table, data for controlling the flow of a specific effect (what motion table is used at what timing). Data that specifies whether to execute) is set.
The motion table has motion data of each effect (mainly effect display) that is blocked (that is, data that specifies image data to be displayed and its display position), and the motion is blocked. Meaning directing action.
Here, in this embodiment, as the motion data, if the movement (character drawing position) is the same, basically only one pattern is provided even if the displayed character is different. Therefore, an animation for generating motion data is created after a basic character is determined.

That is, in this embodiment, control is performed such that a character is defined in the motion table, a basic (representative) character is determined, and one animation is created.
For example, when creating a variation animation, it is necessary to make a symbol character appear. However, there are innumerable combinations (states) of symbols displayed on the screen of the display device 41, and an animation reflecting all of them is created. It's impossible. Therefore, the basic (representative) character is determined and one animation is created (one in the group where the characters move in the same way but the characters are different), and the character replacement process is performed by the control program. Then, control for saving the data capacity is performed so as to be able to cope with any display mode.
Specifically, the basic character is set to the one with the lowest jackpot reliability in the group to be replaced. For example, if there are white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow types in the character related to the operation of the effect button 9 displayed in the effect of the push button notice (PB notice), the character is defined in the motion data of the push button notice. For the button character to be used, “white” having the lowest jackpot reliability is used. However, it is assumed that they appear in common at the time of loss and the big hit.

  In this way, the character with the lowest jackpot reliability is registered in the motion table as a basic character, and the character changes with the progress of the production (however, within the range of the same type of character, such as a push button character, for example) If you want to change), you can use the control program to replace the basic character with another behavior (function to replace the image data (character data) of the object (display element)), and handle any display mode. As a result, it becomes data that can be used in common at the time of losing and big hit, reducing the data capacity and improving the development efficiency.

Next, in the present embodiment, control is performed such that a background screen is selected before the end of the jackpot presentation and a symbol stop screen is displayed using the selected background screen before the end of the jackpot ending period.
Specifically, after the big hit effect, the display returns to the normal screen for changing the special figure of the display device 41 (decorative special figure (decorative symbol), the same applies hereinafter), where there is a background screen that harmonizes with the symbol fluctuation ( For example, a background movie) is displayed. In this case, there is a high possibility that the type of background screen and the shape of the special figure differ depending on the gaming state at that time (for example, probability variation, time reduction, normal probability, etc.).
The effect control device 300 determines the game state based on the probability information command from the game control device 100, but the game control device 100 may change the state of the probability or the like when the jackpot operation is completed. Therefore, the probability information command can be transmitted just before starting the special figure fluctuation after the big hit.
By the way, if the type of the background screen is changed by receiving the probability information command, the background screen for the jackpot ending screen is suddenly switched to the background screen for special figure fluctuations, which can be a stunning effect. High nature.

In this embodiment, therefore, a time (predetermined symbol display period) for displaying a so-called stop symbol display screen is provided during a specified time (for example, about 1 to 2 seconds) before the end of the jackpot ending operation. The background screen is a background screen at the time of special figure change in the normal game after the big hit, so that a smooth transition from the big hit ending period to the special figure change game in the normal game state can be performed.
Since the effect control device 300 is in a state to be displayed after receiving the probability information command before receiving the probability information command, it is necessary to predict the gaming state after the end of the jackpot.
Therefore, for example, in addition to the symbol command, fanfare command, and ending command received during the big hit, it is determined based on the contents such as the internal information of the effect control device 300 (for example, information that will be changed to the latent probability next time). The game state that will shift later is predicted.
Then, based on the various information as described above, the background type in the normal game after the jackpot is predicted, one background screen is selected from the plurality of background types, and the selected background screen is selected as the probability information command. Is controlled to be displayed on the display device 41 from before the reception.
In this way, the background type in the normal game after the big hit is predicted from the information (ending command etc.) already received from the game control device 100 and the internal information of the effect control device 300, and the big hit ending operation ends. By making a space before the symbol stop screen using the background type is displayed before, it is possible to prevent a sudden change of the effect screen and to improve the effect.
Moreover, since it respond | corresponds beforehand including the prediction by the internal information of the production | presentation control apparatus 300, possibility that a normal display will be able to be performed becomes high, without taking a countermeasure when a probability information command is not received, and becomes efficient. Development and control can be performed.

Next, in this embodiment, a plurality of objects (for example, characters) of the same category are defined in the motion table to control the production.
That is, although motion data (image data to be displayed and data for specifying the display position thereof) is registered for each display element (for example, background, left symbol, right symbol,...) In the motion table. These data are registered together in an object group defined as the same category.
For example, for the object group defined as the left symbol category, not only the current symbol but also the previous symbol, the next symbol, etc. are defined in one motion table as symbol characters. For each of these objects (characters such as the current symbol, the previous symbol, and the next symbol), a character number, coordinates, size, behavior, and the like are defined on the motion table.
Thus, for example, in the case of the left symbol category, not only the symbol (current symbol) that is visible in front of the display device 41 but also the next symbol and the previous symbol that are arranged above and below the symbol are defined in the same motion table. Will be.

When performing control using such a motion table, since characters of the same category are registered as a group of objects in one motion table, the same operation results in a similar operation. You can control the characters of a category collectively. Therefore, it is easy to handle when creating a scenario table for managing motion, the amount of data can be reduced, and development efficiency is improved.
For example, when controlling the symbol, when displaying the current symbol, the next symbol, the previous symbol, etc. on the screen of the display device 41, a replacement operation of the next symbol and the previous symbol based on the current symbol (if the current symbol is used as a reference) , Other symbols can be calculated by relatively replacing), but if the characters in the same category (in this case, symbol characters) are defined in one motion table, the calculation parameters It can be reused and can be controlled efficiently.

Next, in this embodiment, control is performed to draw a character that appears to be a still image display using a one-image moving image character.
That is, in the present embodiment, a normal moving image display character is stored in the image ROM 322 using a moving image character, and a character that looks like a still image display by repeatedly displaying one still image (appears as a still image). The visible character) is stored using a one-image moving image character in a format that repeatedly displays a still image composed of only one image. When these characters are displayed on the display device 41, a common motion chart is stored. Drawing is controlled using the bull.
In other words, even if the character looks like a still image on the screen of the display device 41 that the player sees, the internal control of the effect control device 300 is configured with only one image in the form of repeatedly displaying the still image. The one-image moving image character is stored in the image ROM 322, and the one-image moving image character is created by data in a format for repeatedly displaying the same still image composed of only one image.
In addition, the motion table that defines the motion of the image has a common motion table by defining a normal moving image character and a one-image moving image character that appears as a still image in the same table. Yes.
When a normal moving image character that appears as a moving image display and a one-image moving character that appears as a still image display are displayed on the display device 41, drawing control is performed using a common motion table. For a one-image moving image character that appears to be displayed, drawing is performed using data in a format in which the same still image composed of only one image is repeatedly displayed.
In this case, since the one-image moving image character that looks like a still image is created by a movie (herein called a still image movie) composed of the same image (that is, the same still image), it is reproduced as a moving image. In this case, the appearance image does not change, and the display is the same as that of the still image character.

Accordingly, since the one-image moving image character that looks like a still image is stored in the image data format in the image ROM 322 of the production control device 300 and handled as a moving image, the motion table can be used in common. It is not necessary to increase the number of tables (data capacity reduction), it is possible to prevent the control ROM 321 from being compressed (that is, capacity reduction, etc.), and to facilitate control by reducing the number of data items. In addition, ease of management can be expected, and development efficiency is improved.
In addition, in the case of motion data dedicated to still images, if a still image movie is used without playing back a movie (for example, only the first image of a one-image movie character is displayed), it becomes a mere still image, Since it is not necessary to prepare character data for a single still image, the data amount can be saved.

Next, in this embodiment, the control of the effect is performed by providing a processing code related to sound output in the scenario table related to the effect of the PB notice.
That is, when a display prompting the user to press the PB (effect button 9) is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 during the game, when the player presses the effect button 9, a button press sound is output and, for example, A warrior appears and a notice is produced that tells the dialogue. This effect is controlled by a scenario table that manages video such as characters.
In this case, in the scenario table related to the effect of the PB notice, the scenario data when the effective time ends without the effect button 9 being pressed, and the effect is advanced by pressing the effect button 9 There is scenario data.
In the scenario data portion where the production progresses when the production button 9 is pressed, a processing code for setting the output of the button press sound for sounding when the production button 9 is pressed is provided.

  Therefore, in the effect process executed by the processing code for setting the output of the button press sound, it is not necessary to confirm whether the button press sound is sounded or not (however, it is determined whether the button press sound is acceptable). Is necessary: This is because the PB wait code data is set in the scenario table, so it is possible to determine that the production button 9 has been pressed.) As a result, it is easier to manage the synchronization of video and sound effects, and the development efficiency is improved.

In addition, the present embodiment also has the following features, for example, in the control of the effect control device, and details thereof will be described later.
-The feature is that motion data (motion table data) is provided for each section of production and is made into a block, and in the scenario table, a motion table as a part is selectively combined and used according to the content of the production to be performed.
-The variation of the 4th symbol (variation state notification symbol) is characterized in that it is performed from the beginning of the variation cycle determined regardless of the previous stop symbol.
・ The motion table of the 4th pattern is different from the case of other special figures (decorative designs for production), and is characterized in that it is not switched during the change (that is, it is not changed from the one set at the start of the change).
A feature of performing display control of a plurality of types of 4th symbols (4th symbol of Special Fig. 1 and 4th symbol of Special Fig. 2) with one motion table.
-When performing a fade effect, the feature is that a fade character is arranged on the back side from the 4th pattern.
-In the case of control of decorative symbols that change with the same size, the first frame of various motion tables that are blocked starts from a certain coordinate position (in this case, the display position when the symbol is stopped).
-In the case of control of decorative designs that change with the same size, the first frame of the various motion tables that are blocked is configured to start from a certain coordinate position, and the coordinate data of the final frame is The feature is that it is set to a position different from the fixed coordinate position.
-Even if it is a case where the display of the same character is continued, the character information is once deleted and re-registered at the change point of the production.
-The feature is that the RAM area to be written is separate in the case of simple wait (constant weight, variable wait) and button wait wait in the scenario of the production.

F. Operation of Control System Next, the control contents of the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIGS.
First, it is as follows when the concept of the main structure used for description of the following flowcharts is clarified.
As described above, the special display and the normal map are displayed on the collective display device 35. The special figure in the following description of the control processing means this special figure (this special figure), and will be described in detail on the basis of the above. Note that the special drawing controlled by the production control device 300 based on the command from the game control device 100 is a special drawing for production displayed on the display device 41.
(A) Special figure display device In the following flow chart, the special figure refers to the “main special figure” displayed on the collective display device 35. Further, when referring to the dummy display for the effect displayed for the player displayed on the display device 41, it is called "decorative drawing".
In this way, the device for displaying the special figure is the collective display device 35, but the names of the areas for displaying the special figure in the collective display device 35 include, for example, a special symbol display device and a special figure display device. In order to distinguish it from a general-purpose display device, it may be called a special symbol display device.
(B) General-purpose display device In the following flow chart, the general-purpose display refers to the “general-purpose map” displayed on the collective display device 35. Further, when the display device 41 is configured to display a common figure, when the player indicates a dummy display for the effect displayed for the player displayed on the display device 41, for example, it is called “decorative figure”.
In this way, the device for displaying the universal map is the collective display device 35, but the names of the areas for displaying the regular map in the collective display device 35 include, for example, a normal symbol display device and a universal map display device. In order to distinguish from a special figure display device, it may be called a normal symbol display device.
However, in this embodiment, the display device 41 does not display such a general-purpose display. In addition, you may provide the indicator which displays a common figure (here a decoration common figure) display. In describing a gaming machine, a device that displays a “decorative map” may be described if necessary.
(C) Fudenden A device corresponding to Fudenden is the second start winning opening 26 as an ordinary electric accessory (Fudenden).
However, there are cases where ordinary electric power is referred to as an ordinary variable winning device, and in the description of the flowchart, for example, an ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 26) may be used.
In addition, for example, at the time of high probability or when the time is short, the start winning is supported by the opening / closing member 26a of the second start winning opening 26 as an ordinary electric accessory (general power). There is simply a “Fujiden Support”.
(D) Special figure storage In the following flowchart, in the case of special figure hold (sometimes simply referred to as “hold”), special figure storage, or special figure start-up storage, It points towards “Figure Memory”. In addition, when referring to the dummy display for the effect displayed for the player displayed on the display device 41, it is referred to as "decoration special figure hold" or "decoration special figure storage".
The winning winning ports that function as the starting winning ports for the special figure are the starting winning ports 25 and 26.
(E) Universal map memory In the following flowchart, the general map hold, the universal map memory, or the general chart start memory indicates the “general map memory” displayed on the collective display device 35. Further, when referring to the direction of the dummy display for the effect displayed for the player displayed on the display device 41, it is referred to as “decoration map drawing hold” or “decoration map drawing storage”.
However, in the present embodiment, such a normal start memory display is not displayed on the display device 41. In addition, you may provide the indicator which performs the starting memory | storage (in this case, the decoration common memory) display. In the description of the gaming machine, if necessary, it may be described including a device that displays “decorative map memory”.
(F) Variable winning device The variable winning device 27 is a device (so-called attacker) having a large winning opening 27a that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 27b. The variable winning device 27 is sometimes referred to as a special variable winning device in order to be distinguished from the normal variable winning device.
In this embodiment, in addition to the variable winning device 27, a second variable winning device 33 is provided, and so-called two attackers are arranged.

[Main processing of game control device]
First, the main process of the game control device 100 (game microcomputer 101) will be described with reference to FIGS.
This main process starts based on the fact that the gaming microcomputer 101 is forcibly reset. That is, when a power switch (not shown) of the power supply device 500 is turned on, a reset signal is sent from the control signal generation unit 503 of the power supply device 500 at a predetermined timing (during a predetermined reset period when the power is turned on). When the reset terminal of the gaming microcomputer 101 is turned on and then the reset signal is released, the gaming microcomputer 101 is activated. When the power is restored from a power failure, the gaming microcomputer 101 is activated after the reset signal is turned on and released. Further, when the worker wants to initialize the user work RAM or the like of the game control device 100, the power switch is turned on while turning on the RAM clear switch 504 (initialization switch) of the power supply device 500. There is a need.

When the gaming microcomputer 101 is activated, first, a process for prohibiting an interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then an interrupt vector setting process (step S2) for setting a jump destination vector address to be executed when an interrupt occurs. When this occurs, stack pointer setting processing (step S3) for setting the stack pointer which is the head address of the area where the value of the register or the like is saved is sequentially performed.
Next, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 160) is read (step S4), and an interrupt mode setting process (step S5) for setting an interrupt process mode is performed.
Next, in step S6, processing for setting a power supply delay timer is performed. In this process, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from game control apparatus 100 serving as main control means by setting a predetermined initial value. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the device to start normally is set. This is because the game control device 100 delays activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) is started up. The device can avoid missing commands.

Here, the delay timer includes waiting for activation of the payout board (payout control device 200). That is, it includes stopping the progress of processing for a predetermined delay time (for example, 4 msec) in order to wait for the program of the payout board (the payout control device 200) to start normally.
Note that the initialization switch signal from the RAM clear switch 504 is inputted to the first input port 160, and the initialization switch is read by reading the state of the first input port 160 before the start of the standby time. The operation of (RAM clear switch 504, hereinafter the same) can be reliably detected. In other words, if the initialization switch state is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch is continuously operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to do. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

After performing the process of setting the power supply delay timer (step S6), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S7 to S11) is performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 500 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to check is set (step S7), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Is performed (step S8). Even when the power delay timer is set in step S6 and the timer is counting, the power failure monitoring in step S8 is performed.
If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S8; YES), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S7 (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S9; NO), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S8). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S9; YES), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) is powered off. Wait for it. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, since the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time, a power failure that occurs during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed. It is possible to cope with the problem, and it is possible to appropriately cope with the trouble at the time of power-on. Note that until the end of the standby time, access to the RAM (for example, the RAM 101C) is not permitted, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power-off are retained, so backup is performed when a power failure occurs here. It is not necessary to perform this process. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S8; NO), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S10), and then the timer value is 0. It is determined whether or not there is (step S11). When the value of the timer is not 0 (step S11; NO), that is, when the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S7). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S11; YES), that is, if the standby time has ended, access to a read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S12). ), Off-data is output to all output ports (signal corresponding to binary signal “0”: that is, set to a state in which there is no output) (step S13).
Here, in this embodiment, the RWM indicates the RAM 101C. However, the RWM is not limited to the RAM, and a read / write storage element such as an EEPROM may be used as the RWM.
Since each output port is turned off (reset) by the reset signal, it is not always necessary to output the off signal to each output port in software, but step S13 is provided here just in case. .

Subsequently, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 101, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the management device 140 in this embodiment) is set (step S14).
Here, the serial port is set to be used because the serial port is used when the unique ID is output to the outside (for example, the management device 140). is there. Further, since it is necessary to perform serial communication with the effect control device 300, the serial port is set to be used.
Next, it is determined whether the initialization switch (RAM clear switch 504) in the power supply device 500 is turned on from the state of the first input port 160 read in advance (step S15). This is to determine whether or not the initialization switch is turned on according to the state of the initialization switch signal. If the initialization switch is turned on, the process proceeds to step S25, and if not, the process proceeds to step S16. .
In addition, when the initialization switch is turned on and the game microcomputer 101 is activated, the process proceeds to step S25 when the power failure inspection area 1 and the power failure inspection area 2 of the RWM are all in steps S16 and S17 described later. This is a case where it is determined that the checksum is not normal, or a case where it is determined that the checksum is not normal in step S19 which will be described later. For this reason, when the processing proceeds to step S25, processing such as initialization of data (excluding the access-prohibited area) in the RWM of the gaming microcomputer 101 is performed.

If the initialization switch is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S16 to check whether or not the value of the power outage inspection area 1 of the RWM is normal power outage inspection area check data 1. If the check result is not normal in step S116. If it judges, it will jump to Step S25. On the other hand, if the check result in step S16 is normal, it is checked in subsequent step S17 whether or not the value of the power outage inspection area 2 of the RWM is normal power outage inspection area check data 2. If the check result is not normal in step S17, the process jumps to step S25. If the check result is normal, the process proceeds to step S18.
Thus, if the values of the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RWM are all normal, it is determined that the power failure has been restored, and the process proceeds to step S18. On the other hand, if the values of the power outage inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RWM are abnormal (if not stored normally), the routine jumps to step S25 assuming that the power is normally turned on.
The power failure inspection area check data 1 and 2 are set in steps S39 and S40 described later. In these steps S39 and 40, since it is determined whether or not the power failure is restored by using the plurality of check data 1 and 2 as described above, whether or not the power failure is restored is determined with high reliability.

In step S18, a checksum of the RWM data is calculated. In step S19, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum at the time of power-off to determine whether the value is normal (match). If the checksum is not normal (that is, when the RWM data is corrupted), the process proceeds to step S25. If the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S20 in FIG. Performs processing when recovered.
In step S20, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized. The area to be initialized here includes the following areas.
・ External information area door ・ Frame open signal, security signal ・ Power failure recovery inspection area 1, 2
-Game machine error status signal in the test signal area-Checksum area at power-off-Error scan counter (game frame status monitoring scan counter)
・ Front frame opening monitoring area ・ Game frame opening monitoring area ・ Shooting ball break monitoring area ・ Overflow monitoring area ・ Payout abnormality monitoring area ・ Switch 1 and 2 abnormality monitoring area ・ Small University prize entry illegal prize monitoring area ・ Upper university prize opening illegal Prize-winning monitoring area, public power fraud winning monitoring area, magnetic fraud monitoring area, radio wave fraud monitoring area, large prize opening fraud monitoring information 1, 2
・ Fujiden fraud monitoring information

After passing through step S20, the area | region which memorize | stores the game state in RWM is investigated after that, and it is determined whether a game state is a high probability state (step S21). If the probability is not high (step S21; NO), steps S22 and S23 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, when the probability is high (step S21; YES), the on-information is saved in the high-probability notification flag area (step S22), and for example, a high-probability notification LED (not shown) provided in the collective display device 35 is turned on (not shown). (Lit) The data is saved in the segment area (step S23). As a result, the treatment corresponding to the current high probability state is performed. For example, the high probability notification LED provided in the collective display device 35 is turned on to display the high probability state.
Next, a power failure restoration command corresponding to a process number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (step S24), and the process proceeds to step S29.

On the other hand, when jumping from step S15, S16, S17, S19 to step S25, first, all work areas before the access-prohibited area in the RWM used by the CPU are cleared (step S25), and then in the RWM. All stack areas after the access-prohibited area are cleared (step S26), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step S27).
The region to be initialized here is a region having a value other than the value (0) written in step S25 as an initial value, and in this embodiment, a customer waiting demo region and a region related to the setting of the effect mode. Is applicable. Specific information on these areas is as follows.
<Area to be initialized>
• Customer waiting demo area Customer waiting demo flag • Production mode command area Production mode command • Security signal control timer • Next mode transition information area Next mode transition information • Special game mode information command

Next, a process of transmitting a power-on command (power-on command) to the effect control device 300 is performed (step S28).
It should be noted that the following command is included in the power failure recovery command transmitted in step S24 and the power-on command transmitted in step S28. As shown below, the commands sent at power-on and when the power failure is restored are the same.
-Model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine-Decoration special figure 1 hold number command and decoration special figure 2 hold number command indicating the number of hold of special figures 1 and 2-Probability information command indicating the status of probability If the special figure variation display game is being executed when the power is turned off according to the state when the power is turned on, the following commands are included.
・ Restoration screen command ・ Customer waiting demo command when waiting for customer at power-off ・ Power-on command when initialized at power-on ・ Direction mode information command indicating the state of rendering mode depending on the model ・ Time-saving state When the power-on command is transmitted, the other control device receives this power-on command, and, for example, in the case of the effect control device 300, the operation of the motor of the frame effect device Initialization such as setting the position to the initial position is performed, and an effect of notifying that the RWM clear has been made is started. After step S28, the process proceeds to step S29.

When the process proceeds from step S24 or step S28 to step S29, in step S29, a timer interrupt signal and random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 101 (clock generator) are generated. Circuit) Starts the circuit.
The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 101. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the crystal oscillator 113 and a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 101A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S29, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S30). Specifically, the CPU 101A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit.
Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. That is, in the process of step S30, a hard random number bit transposition pattern is set, and a big hit random number bit transposition is also performed.
Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 94 described later, the bit transposition pattern is a bit arrangement (lower stage) in which the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (the arrangement before the bit transposition in the upper stage) is replaced in a predetermined order. This is a pattern that determines how to replace the data when stored as an arrangement after bit transposition. By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

Next, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on is extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (random numbers for determining the big hit symbol (big hit symbol random number 1, big hit symbol random number) 2) As an initial value (start value) of a random number (winning random number) for determining the hit of the usual figure, it is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM (step S31).
Here, the types of random numbers include the following.
-Hit initial value random number-Jackpot symbol initial value random number 1
-Big hit symbol initial value random number
(These use different soft random number register values.)

The random number generation circuit generates a part of each random number of special figures and ordinary figures in hardware. However, the initial values of these random numbers are set in software by the processing in step S33 described later. The random number generation circuit in the CPU 101A used in the present embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as an initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. ), It is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.
Note that the random numbers related to the special figure include jackpot random numbers (random numbers for determining whether to win or not), jackpot symbol random numbers 1, 2 (random numbers for determining jackpot stop symbol), fluctuation pattern random numbers (reach of reach) Random number for determining a variation pattern including presence / absence), stop symbol random number (random number for determining outlier stop symbol), and the like. In addition, examples of random numbers related to ordinary maps include random numbers per ordinary figure (random numbers for determining whether or not per ordinary figure). Among these, the random numbers (hard random numbers) targeted in steps S30 and S33 are, for example, jackpot random numbers, random numbers per common figure, and jackpot symbol random numbers 1 and 2. Note that the random numbers related to the special figure may be common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 when there are two types of special figures, or may be provided separately.

Next, an interrupt is permitted in step S32, and an initial value random number update process is performed in the next step S33. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the initial value of the hard random number so that it is difficult to deliberately aim for a big hit or the like by timing the game ball. This is for breaking the regularity of random numbers by updating the values of various initial value random numbers.
Note that the initial value random number update process in step S33 includes a method of performing an initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of value random number update processing, when performing initial value random number update processing in the main processing, it is necessary to disable interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. In the timer interrupt process, the initial value random number update process is not performed. If it is only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process, thereby simplifying the main process. There is an advantage that

Further, although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the CPU operation clock. Is a “low-speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing). In the big hit symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, a so-called “initial value changing method” is adopted in which each initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value every time the random number makes a round. Each random number may be a counter update by +1 or −1, or may be a random update in which all values within the range appear without overlapping until one round is reached. That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number is a random number that is updated by hardware and software.
In step S34, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 500 is read via the port and the data bus, the number of times of power failure monitoring signal check (for example, 2 times) is set, and in step S35, the power failure monitoring signal is set. If it is on, the process proceeds to step S36 for final determination of power failure. If it is not on, the process returns to step S33. During normal operation, steps S33 to S35 are repeated.
That is, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S35; NO), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S33). That is, when no power failure has occurred, initial value random number update processing and power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S33) (step S32), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, and the timer interrupt Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

Then, when proceeding to step S36, it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of times of the check. If the result is negative, it is determined that a power failure has occurred and the process returns to step S35.
When the power failure monitoring signal is turned on, this power failure monitoring signal may be used as an NMI interrupt signal to interrupt the processing being executed and forcibly execute the power failure processing after step S37. However, with the configuration of this example, the power failure monitoring signal is turned on temporarily and momentarily due to noise even though no power failure has actually occurred since the power failure monitoring signal is checked for multiple times in step S36. In this case, there is an advantage that it is not erroneously determined that a power failure has occurred.

In step S37, interrupts are prohibited, and then all outputs are turned off in the next step S38 (off data is output to all output ports). Next, power failure information setting processing is executed in steps S39 and S40. To do. In the power failure information setting process, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 in step S39, and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 in step S40.
After step S40, a checksum is calculated in the next step S41 when the RWM is turned off, and the checksum calculated in step S42 is saved in a predetermined checksum area.
Next, in step S43, access to the RWM is prohibited and then waiting (becomes a reset waiting state waiting for a reset signal from the control signal generation unit 503 described above).
In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure recovery inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutdown is calculated, so that whether or not the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown is correctly backed up can be checked. This can be determined when the power is turned on again.
In addition, the power failure process of the above steps S37 to S43 is performed before the power supply voltage drops below the operating voltage of the gaming microcomputer 101 due to the power failure.

[Checksum calculation processing]
Next, the checksum calculation process (step S41) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, the start address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address in step S51, and the number of repetitions is set in step S52. The number of repetitions is set corresponding to the number of bytes of the RWM being used. Next, after setting “0” as the calculated value in step S53, the content of the calculated value + the calculated address is calculated as a new calculated value in step S54. In this way, the contents of each address are added as a calculated value. Next, in step S55, the calculation address is updated by “+1”, and in step S56, the number of repetitions is updated by “−1” to check whether the calculation is completed. In step S57, it is determined whether the calculation is completed. If the decision result in the step S57 is NO, the process returns to the step S54 to repeat the routine. When the number of repeated times is equal to the number of bytes of RWM, it is determined that the calculation has been completed, and the process exits from step S57 to YES and ends the routine.
In this way, the checksum is calculated when the RWM is powered off.

[Initial value random number update processing]
Next, the initial value random number update process (step S33) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, a process of incrementing (updating (+1)) the hit initial value random number (step S61), a process of incrementing (updating (+1)) the jackpot symbol initial value random number 1 (step S62), a jackpot symbol A process (step S63) of incrementing (update (+1)) the initial value random number 2 is sequentially performed.
Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number 1” is a random number that is an initial value of a random number for determining the big hit stop symbol of the special figure 1 and is updated in the range of 0 to 99. The “big hit symbol initial value random number 2” is an initial value random number of a random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure 2 and is updated in the range of 0 to 99. is there. The “hit initial value random number” is a random number that becomes an initial value of a random number that determines the hit of the usual game, and is updated in the range of 0 to 250. is there. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be increased by continuing to increment the random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing of the game control device 100 (game microcomputer 101) will be described with reference to FIG.
This timer interrupt process is started by the processes of steps S29 and S32 in the main process described above, and is repeatedly executed at a predetermined timer interrupt period.

In this timer interrupt process, first, in step S71, register saving and interrupt prohibition are executed as necessary. In register saving, for example, register saving processing is performed in which a value held in a predetermined register is transferred to the RWM. In the Z80 microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment, the processing can be replaced by saving the value held in the front register to the back register.
Next, input processing is executed in step S72. In this input processing, reading of detection signals of the aforementioned sensors (start port switches 120 and 121, gate switch 122, winning port switch 123, lower count switch 124, upper count switch 125, etc.) is executed. Specifically, the output value of each sensor is determined at each timer interruption period, and when the output value of the same level continues for a specified number of times (for example, twice), the level of this output value is detected by each sensor. Read as deterministic value of signal. When it is read that any one of the sensors is on, a flag (input flag) indicating that is set.

Next, in step S73, an output process for setting and outputting the output data set in each step described later to the corresponding output port is executed. This is a process for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (first big prize opening solenoid 133, second big prize opening solenoid 134, general electric solenoid 132) based on output data set in various processes. is there.
Next, in step S74, a payout command transmission process is performed. This is because the command is transmitted between the game control device 100 as the main board and the effect control device 300 as the sub board by serial communication, and only the discharge command transmission processing is performed. Here, the command set in the transmission buffer of the gaming microcomputer 101 is output to the effect control device 300.
Next, random number update processes 1 and 2 are executed in steps S75 and S76, respectively. Here, the soft random number related to the special drawing and the soft random number related to the general drawing are updated. As soft random numbers related to special figures, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers 1, 2 (random numbers for determining jackpot stop symbols), variation pattern random numbers (random numbers for determining variation patterns including presence / absence of reach action), stop symbol random numbers ( Random numbers for determining outage stop symbols). Here, the update of the random number is executed by increasing the random number by, for example, “1”. Therefore, each time this timer interrupt processing routine is repeated, the random number changes, and the extracted value of the soft random number maintains at randomness.

  In this example, there are three types of variation pattern random numbers: variation pattern random numbers 1-3. Among these, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is a random number for selecting the reach system of the second half fluctuation (the fluctuation after the start of reach), and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is a detailed presentation distribution (for example, plus one frame) from the reach system. The special pattern stops or the special figure stops at minus one frame), and the variation pattern random number 3 is a random number for selecting the first half variation (variation before the start of reach). is there. In addition, the variation pattern random number may directly determine all the variation modes, but in this example, the effect control device 300 determines a specific mode. For example, only the variation time and the reach system (rough type of reach) are determined by the variation pattern random number 1, and the production control device 300 determines a specific variation mode based on the determined variation time and reach system.

  Next, in step S77, winning prize switch monitoring processing and error monitoring processing are executed. The winning opening switch monitoring process monitors input flags (start opening switches 120 and 121, winning opening switch 123, lower count switch 124 and upper count switch 125 in the special figure) set as described above, for example, a lower count switch. When the input flag 124 is set, processing such as preparation for requesting the payout control device 200 to pay out 15 prize balls is executed. In addition, the error monitoring process includes the undetected error of each sensor described above, the excessive error of the prize ball discharge, the open state of the glass frame 5, the big prize opening 27a (first big prize opening), the second variable prize apparatus. This is a process for monitoring an illegal winning or the like other than during opening of the 33 opening (second big winning opening) and the public power supply 26 being open.

Next, in step S78, special figure game processing is performed. In the special figure game process, overall control of the special figure variable display game is performed. That is, when the change start condition (start condition of the change display game) is satisfied, the determination of the big hit random number, the process of setting the combination of the special symbol stop pattern (result form), and the process of setting the change form of the special figure (Details will be described later).
Here, when the change start condition is satisfied, when the start-up prize is received in the waiting state and the change display game is started, the change display game ends and the start display is stored and the change display game is executed again. When the game is played, there are three types when the jackpot ends, the start-up memory is stored, and the variable display game is executed again.
In this special figure game process, a process of setting various output data related to the special figure variable display game is also performed. That is, the content (command data) of a command to be transmitted to, for example, the effect control device 300 is set in accordance with the game state of the special display variable display game.

Next, in step S79, processing for the usual variable display game is performed. That is, processing for setting the content of a command to be transmitted to the production control device 300 or the like according to the state of the usual variable display game is performed.
Next, in step S80, segment LED editing processing is executed. This is the display of the special figure on the collective display device 35, such as the special figure decided in the special figure game process in step S78, the special figure decided in the common figure game process in step S79, and other information. This is a process for displaying on a display (LED, 7-segment display).
Next, in step S81, a magnet fraud monitoring process is executed. This is to check whether there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 126. For example, if an input flag of the magnetic sensor 126 is set, it is assumed that a magnetic error has occurred and a predetermined process ( Error notification command transmission, etc.).

Next, in step S82, radio wave fraud monitoring processing is executed. This is to check the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 127 to determine whether there is any abnormality. (E.g., transmission of an error notification command) is executed.
Next, in step S83, external information editing processing is executed. This is to edit data to be output from the game control apparatus 100 to the outside. This data is output data to the payout control device 200 and the external information terminal board 55 (including a unique ID in addition to a jackpot signal, a prize ball signal, etc.).
Thereafter, in order to resume the main routine, the timer interrupt request is cleared in step S84, the register saved in step S85 is restored, the interrupt is permitted in step S86, and the process is interrupted at the interruption (return). )

[Input processing]
Next, the input process (step S72) in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the input process, first, the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 160 is read (step S91). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the bit state is cleared (step S92).
Here, the switches monitored by the input port 1 are as follows.
・ Glass frame open detection switch (bit 0)
・ Front frame open detection switch (bit 1)
・ Discharge abnormality status signal (bit 4)
・ Shoot ball break switch signal (bit 5)
・ Overflow switch signal) Bit 6)
Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S93). In step S94, unused bit data is prepared.
In this embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value in a register, but is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.
In step S95, bit data to be inverted is prepared. For example, since the radio wave sensor 127 needs to invert the detection signal, bit data of such a sensor / switch or the like is prepared.

Next, an address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared in step S96, an address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 161 is prepared in step S97, and a switch reading process is further performed in step S98.
Here, the switches monitored by the input port 2 are as follows.
Start port 2 switch (bit 0): second start port switch 121
Start port 1 switch (bit 1): First start port switch 120
-Left winning entrance switch (bit 2): winning entrance switch 1_123
・ Right winning entrance switch (bit 3): Winning exit switch 2_123
Gate switch (bit 4): Gate switch 122
Lower prize winning switch 1 (bit 5): Lower count switch 1_124
・ Lower University prize opening switch 2 (bit 6): Lower count switch 2_124
・ Upper University prize opening switch (bit 7): Upper count switch 125
Although not shown in FIG. 4, for example, a plurality of (two) winning opening switches may be arranged as corresponding to the winning opening switch 123. As an example, the left winning opening switch (bit 2): Winning port switch 1_123, right winning port switch (bit 3): Two switches are monitored at the input port 2 as notation such as winning port switch 2_123. The same applies to the lower large prize opening switch 124. A plurality of magnetic sensors 126 described later may be arranged and monitored by the input port 3.
Next, unused bit data is prepared in step S99, and bit data to be inverted is prepared in step S100. Thereafter, the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared in step S101, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 162 is prepared in step S102, and the switch reading process is further performed in step S103. Exit.
Here, the switches monitored by the input port 3 are as follows.
Radio wave sensor (bit 0): Radio wave sensor 127
・ Switch abnormality detection signal 1 (bit 1)
Magnetic sensor (bit 2): Magnetic sensor 126
・ Switch abnormality detection signal 2 (bit 3)

[Switch read processing]
Next, the switch reading process (step S103) in the above input process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the switch reading process, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S111). This corresponds to the first reading. Next, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S112), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S113), and then the target switch control area in the RWM Save (store) in port input state 1 (step S114). Thereafter, the process waits for the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading to elapse (step S115).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) elapses, a second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step S116). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S117), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S118), and then the port input state of the target switch control area 2 is saved (stored) (step S119). After that, the bit that has changed in the first and second readings, that is, the signal is detected, and a definite bit pattern is created (step S120). Specifically, a definite bit pattern is created in which the same bit in the first and second states of the read input port state is “1” and the different bit is “0”. Next, the logical product of the definite bit pattern and the port input state 2 is calculated and set as the definite bit this time (step S121).

  Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created by setting the same bit in the first and second readings to 0 and different bits to 1 (step S122), and the logical product of the undetermined bit pattern and the final state at the previous interrupt. Is taken as the previous hold bit (step S123). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the current confirmed bit and the previous retained bit are combined, saved in the RWM as the current finalized state (step S124), exclusive-ORed with the previous and current finalized state, and saved in the RWM as the rising edge ( Step S125), the switch reading process is terminated.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt processing, and the signal changes by comparing the result with the previous reading. There is a method for determining whether or not the switch has been made. However, if the switch state read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, the correct determination may not be made. Also, since the input pulse of the switch must be held for more than twice the timer interrupt cycle by simple calculation, the design of the electric circuit that extends the pulse and the speed of the game ball passing through the switch are slowed down. It is necessary to design the structure of the spherical channel.
On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the processable amount in the interrupt by extending the timer interrupt period by performing the switch read process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference. It is possible to achieve both the increase and the ease of structural design and avoid the above problems.

[Output processing]
Next, output processing (step S73) in the above-described timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the output process, first, all output data of the port 176 (see FIG. 5) for outputting segment data of the collective display device (LED) 35 is turned off (step S131). Subsequently, the data to be output to the third port 175 having the function of outputting the data of the first grand prize winning solenoid 133, the second big prize winning solenoid 134, and the general electric solenoid 132 is synthesized and output (step S132).
Next, the digit counter value for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 35 is updated (updated (+1) in the range of 0 to 3) (step S133), and the LED corresponding to the digit counter value is updated. The output data of the digit line is loaded (obtained) (step S134). Next, the acquired data is output to the digit output port (fifth port 177) (step S135). The fifth port 177 is an output port for outputting ON / OFF data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 35 is connected.
Next, the segment line output data is loaded (acquired) from the segment data area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S136), and the acquired segment output data is input to the segment output port (fourth port 176). Output (step S137). The fourth port 176 is an output port for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 35.

Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal board 55 is loaded and synthesized, and output to the external information output port (sixth port 180) (step S138). The sixth port 180 is an output port for outputting information related to the pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 55 as an external information signal (external information shown in FIG. 4).
Next, the output data 1 to 3 of the test signal output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 provided on the relay board 170 (step S139). Thereafter, the test signal output data 4 to 6 to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 provided on the relay board 170 (step S140).
Next, the test signal output data 7 to 8 to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 provided on the relay board 170 (step S141). Also, the test signal output data 9 to 10 to be output to the test firing test apparatus are loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 provided on the relay board 170 (step S142). Further, the output data 11 of the test signal to be output to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 provided on the relay board 170 (step S143). End the output process.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, the payout command transmission process (step S74) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the payout command transmission process, first, the number of winnings to be checked among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls (for example, 3 winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls). It is determined whether there is a count number other than “0” in the counter area (step S151).
The structure of the winning number counter area is, for example, as follows.
・ 3 prize ball counters ・ 10 prize ball counters ・ 14 prize ball counters Each prize counter area can store up to 255 prizes, and the above counter can be used to check the prize counter area. Check in order (from 3 prize ball counters).
Returning to the flow, if there is no count number (step S151: NO), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step S152), and check of the count number of all the winning number counter areas is completed. Is determined (step S153). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (step S153; YES), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S153; NO), the process returns to step S151 and the above processing is repeated.

  If it is determined in step S151 that there is a count number (step S151; YES), the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step S154), and the winning number counter area A payout command (negative logic data) corresponding to the address is acquired (step S155). Then, a strobe off timer for measuring the off time of the strobe signal indicating whether the data reading is valid or invalid (for example, the time for maintaining the low level, for example, 0.015 ms) is set (step S156), and obtained in step S155. The payout command (negative logic data) and the off-state (low level) strobe signal are output to the port 171 (see FIG. 5) (step S157).

  Thereafter, the strobe off timer is updated by −1 (step S158), and it is determined whether the value of the strobe off timer is 0, that is, whether the off time set in step S156 has elapsed (step S159). If the value of the strobe off timer is not 0 (step S159; NO), that is, if the off time has not elapsed, the process returns to step S157. If the value of the strobe off timer is 0 (step S159; YES), that is, if the off time has elapsed, a negative logic output remaining timer that counts the remaining output time of negative logic data (for example, 0.030 ms) is set. Set (step S160).

  Next, a payout command (negative logic data) is output, and an on-state (high level) strobe signal is output to the port 171 (step S161). Then, the negative logic output remaining timer is updated by -1 (step S162), and it is determined whether the value of the negative logic output remaining timer is 0, that is, whether the output time of the negative logic data set in step S160 has expired ( Step S163). If the value of the negative logic output remaining timer is not 0 (step S163; NO), that is, if the output time of the negative logic data has not ended, the process returns to step S161. When the value of the negative logic output remaining timer is 0 (step S163; YES), that is, when the output time of the negative logic data has ended, the negative logic payout command data is inverted and the positive logic payout command is inverted. Data is generated (step S164).

  Next, a strobe on remaining timer for measuring the remaining strobe signal on time (high level time, for example, 0.015 ms) is set (step S165), and the payout command (positive logic data) generated in step S164 described above is set. The strobe signal in the on state (high level) is output to the port 171 (step S166). Thereafter, the remaining strobe-on timer is updated by -1 (step S167), and it is determined whether the value of the remaining strobe-on timer is 0, that is, whether the on-time set in step S165 has expired (step S168). If the value of the remaining strobe on timer is not 0 (step S168; NO), that is, if the on-time has not ended, the process returns to step S166. Further, when the value of the remaining strobe on timer is 0 (step S168; YES), that is, when the on-time ends, the positive logic output remaining timer that counts the remaining output time (eg, 0.030 ms) of the positive logic data. Is set (step S169).

  Thereafter, a payout command (positive logic data) is output, and an off state (low level) strobe signal is output to the port 171 (step S170). Then, the positive logic output remaining timer is updated by -1 (step S171), and it is determined whether the value of the positive logic output remaining timer is 0, that is, whether the output time of the positive logic data set in step S169 has ended (step S171). Step S172). When the value of the positive logic output remaining timer is not 0 (step S172; NO), that is, when the output time has not ended, the process returns to step S170. Further, when the value of the positive logic output remaining timer is 0 (step S172; YES), that is, when it is finished, information regarding the number of winning balls to be paid out transmitted from the game control device 100 to the external device is set. A main winning ball remaining number update process (step S173) is performed, and the command transmission process is terminated.

  Through the above processing, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is transmitted to the payout control device 200, and the payout control device 200 pays out the game ball based on this payout command. As described above, by outputting negative logic payout command data and then outputting positive logic payout command data, the command receiving side reads and compares negative logic payout command data and positive logic payout command data. Thus, it can be determined whether or not a correct command has been received. For example, the negative logic payout command data received earlier is logically inverted and compared with the positive logic payout command data received later. Can be received from the game control device 100 to receive an accurate command.

[Main prize ball remaining number update processing]
Next, details of the main winning ball remaining number update process (step S173) in the above-described payout command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG.
In this main award ball remaining number update process, a main award ball signal to be output to an external device is set every time the number of award balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). To do. In addition to the main prize ball signal, an external apparatus outputs a prize ball signal every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control apparatus 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By checking these two signals, it is possible to monitor unauthorized payout.
That is, the main award ball remaining number update process transmits an award ball signal to the external device based on the payout schedule from the game control device 100, thereby actually paying out (the number of award balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200). It is a process performed to ensure consistency.
As for the prize ball signal, one game pulse is output from the game control device 100 as the main board every 10 scheduled payouts, and one pulse is output from the payout control apparatus 200 as the payout board. It has become.

  As shown in FIG. 17, in the main winning ball remaining number update process, first, the value of the remaining winning ball area and the number of payouts (payout command (positive logic value)) are added (step S181). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before this processing, a fraction that does not reach a predetermined number that is a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored. In this process, the value of the remaining prize ball area is stored. The value of a positive logic payout command is added as the number of payouts of newly generated prize balls. Then, the added value is saved in the winning ball remaining area (step S182).

  Thereafter, 10 which is a reference number for outputting the main prize ball signal is subtracted from the value of the remaining prize ball area (step S183), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S184). When the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step S184; NO), the main winning ball remaining number update process is terminated. When the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S184; YES), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by 1 (step S185), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (step S185). S186), the process returns to step S183.

[Random number update process 1]
Next, the random number update process 1 (step S75) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial values (start values) of the jackpot symbol random number 1, the hit random number, and the jackpot symbol random number 2 that are the targets of the initial value random number update process of FIG.
In the random number update process 1, it is first determined whether or not the normal random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S191).

  If the normal hit random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S191; NO), it is determined whether the big hit symbol random number 1 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S194). Further, when the normal random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S191; YES), the initial random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S192), and the next random number of the loaded normal random number is loaded next time. The initial value is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S193). Thereafter, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 1 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S194).

  If the jackpot symbol random number 1 is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S194; NO), it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S197). If the jackpot symbol random number 1 is waiting for the initial value setting (step S194; YES), the jackpot symbol initial value random number 1 is loaded as the next initial value (step S195), and the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number 1 is loaded. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S196). Thereafter, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S197).

  If the big hit symbol random number 2 is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S197; NO), the random number update processing 1 is terminated. When the big hit symbol random number 2 is waiting for the initial value setting (step S197; YES), the big hit symbol initial value random number 2 is loaded as the next initial value (step S198), and the next initial value of the loaded big hit symbol random number 2 is set. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S199), and the random number update process 1 ends.

[Random number update process 2]
Next, the random number update process 2 (step S76) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2.
In this embodiment, there are a 1-byte random number (variable pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and a 2-byte random number (variable pattern random number 1) as the variable pattern random numbers. The random number update process 2 in FIG. Target and update every time an interrupt occurs. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (reach variation mode determination random number) by the random number update processing 2 executed in one interrupt processing for the main processing is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is comprised so that.

In the random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be subjected to the current update process is updated (step S201). Here, it is updated in the range of 0 to 3.
The types of random numbers to be updated are as follows.
-When 0: Fluctuating pattern random number 1 (high order)
・ When 1: Variable pattern random number 1 (low order)
・ 2: Fluctuating pattern random number 2
・ 3: Fluctuating pattern random number 3
Next, the address of the production random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S202). Then, the random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S203). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.
Here, the effect random number update table has data for the types of random numbers to be updated (4 blocks), and details are as follows.
・ Upper limit judgment value ・ R register mask value ・ Random number area type information to be updated (details below)
1 byte random number 2 byte random number (upper)
2-byte random number (low order)
・ Address of update area

Subsequently, for example, a random value such as a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as an R register) used for refreshing a DRAM provided in a Z80 microcomputer used as a gaming microcomputer in this embodiment. The value of the register to which is set is read (step S204). By using the value of the R register, randomness can be given to the random number. After step S204, a mask value for masking the value of the R register is acquired, and the value of the R register is masked (step S205). Note that the mask value is different in the number of bits depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 bit of the R register and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated in the lower 4 bits of the R register. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number.
As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the R register are updated. When the upper byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower byte of the R register is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

Next, it is checked whether or not the random number area to be updated is higher than the 2-byte random number (step S206). If it is higher than the 2-byte random number (step S206; YES), the process proceeds to step S207, and the value remaining by masking the value of the R register with the mask value (hereinafter referred to as the masked value) is “1”. Is added value (higher order), and “0” is added value (lower order), and the process proceeds to step S208.
The reason why “1” is added to the masked value is that the masked value may be “0”, and if “0” is added later, it does not change from the value before the addition, so that it is avoided.
On the other hand, if the random number area to be updated is the lower order of the 2-byte random number or the 1-byte random number (step S206; NO), the process branches to step S209 to set “0” as the addition value (upper order) and set the mask value to “1”. The added value is regarded as an added value (lower order) and the process proceeds to step S208.

In the next step S208, it is checked whether or not the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is a 2-byte random number. If it is not a 2-byte random number, the process jumps to step S210 (step S208; NO). On the other hand, when the random number area is a 2-byte random number, the process proceeds to step S211 (step S208; YES). In step S210, “0” is set as a random value (upper order), and the value obtained by adding “1” to the mask value is updated as the value (lower order) of the random number area, and the process proceeds to step S212.
If the random number area is a 2-byte random number, the process proceeds to step S212 with the random number area value (2 bytes) updated in step S211 as a random value.

Next, in step S212, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in steps S207 and S209 to the random value is calculated to obtain a new random value, and whether or not this random value exceeds the upper limit determination value acquired in step S203. Determination is made (step S213).
If the newly calculated random number value exceeds the upper limit determination value, the upper limit determination value is subtracted from the calculated random value to obtain the current random number value (step S214), and then the process proceeds to step S215. On the other hand, if the newly calculated random number value does not exceed the upper limit determination value, the calculated random number value is set as the current random number value, and the process jumps to step S214 and proceeds to step S215.
In step S215, the lower order of the random number value is saved in the corresponding random number area. Here, the data is saved in either the 1-byte random number area or the lower-order area of the 2-byte random number. Subsequently, it is checked whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S216). If the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S216; YES), the higher rank of the random number value is higher in the random number area (2-byte random number (upper)) side. (Step S217). Here, the data is saved in the upper area of the 2-byte random number. After step S217, the random number update process 2 ends.
On the other hand, if the updated random number is not a 2-byte random number (step S216; NO), the process jumps to step S217, does not perform the process, and ends the random number update process 2.

In this way, the CPU 101A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIG. 1 and FIG. As the variation pattern, as will be described later, a variation pattern of “no reach”, “normal reach”, “special (SP) 1-A reach”, “special (SP) 1-B reach”, “special ( Fluctuation patterns (reach) in various reach states such as “SP) 2-A reach”, “Special (SP) 2-B reach”, “Special (SP) 3-A reach”, “Special (SP) 3-B reach”, etc. Variation mode).
Therefore, the CPU 101A determines the reach variation mode for determining the reach variation mode in the reach state among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game balls into the start area of the start winning opening 25 and the normal variation winning device 26. It serves as a random number update means for updating random numbers for use (variation pattern random numbers).

[Prize mouth switch / error monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch / error monitoring process (step S77) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The winning opening switch / error monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not there is a signal input (signal change) from a switch provided in each of the various winning openings and for monitoring an error.

In the winning opening switch / error monitoring process, first, the winning opening monitoring table 1 (for example, a detection signal from one lower counting switch 124) corresponding to one lower count switch 124 in the lower large winning opening (variable winning apparatus 27). Is stored) (step S221). In the present embodiment, two lower count switches 124 are provided, and a game ball that has flowed into the big winning opening of the variable winning device 27 is detected by any of the lower count switches 124. The winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to the lower count switch 124 is prepared.
Next, in spite of the fact that the big prize opening is not open, whether or not there is an illegal prize in the big prize opening is monitored, and an illegal & prize monitoring process (step S222) for detecting a normal prize is executed.

Thereafter, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other lower count switch 124 in the lower large winning opening (the variable winning apparatus 27) is prepared (step S203), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning or not, and a normal winning is made. The detected fraud & winning prize monitoring process (step S204) is executed. Next, a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the upper count switch 125 in the upper winning opening (second variable winning apparatus 33) is prepared (step S205), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning, and a normal winning is detected. The fraud & winning prize monitoring process (step S306) is executed.
As described above, there are three count switches, two lower count switches 124 arranged at the lower major prize opening, and one upper count switch 125 arranged at the upper major prize opening.
Next, a fraud monitoring table for the winning switch in the ordinary electric train is prepared (step S227). There is a second start port switch 121 for detecting a winning to the second start winning port 26 as an ordinary electric accessory (general power).
Next, while monitoring whether there is an illegal winning, an illegal & winning monitoring process (step S228) for detecting a normal winning is executed.

  Thereafter, a winning monitoring table (for example, a list indicating switches that do not require fraud monitoring) is prepared (step S229). As the winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring, for example, there are a first starting opening switch 120 and a winning opening switch 123 provided for the general winning openings 28 to 31. For a prize opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring, since a prize detection process is performed although fraud monitoring is not performed, a prize monitoring table is prepared for the process in step S229, and the number of prizes to be updated in the next step. The counter update process (step S230) is executed. The detailed procedure of the winning number counter updating process will be described later.

After the winning number counter updating process (step S230), an error scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored for errors is to be monitored this time. Update (update “+1” in the range of 0 to 3) and prepare (step S231). Subsequently, the gaming machine error monitoring table 1 is prepared (step S232).
There are the following types of errors for monitoring the gaming machine, which correspond to an error monitoring error of the chute ball switch, overflow switch, and payout control device 200 from the payout control device 200.
(B) When 0: Switch error (connector disconnection, switch failure, etc.)
(B) When 1: Shooting ball break error (c) When 2: Overflow error (d) 3: When payout error

Next, the type of error check defined in the gaming machine error monitoring table 1 is performed (step S233), and then it is determined whether or not the error scan counter has become “3” (step S234). If the error scan counter is not “3”, the gaming machine error monitoring table 2 is prepared (step S235).
The types of error monitoring defined in the gaming machine error monitoring table 2 are as follows.
(E) When 0: Glass frame open (front frame open)
(F) When 1: Front frame open (game frame open)
(G) When 2: Switch error (connector disconnected)
(H) When 3: None: Next, the type of error check defined in the gaming machine error monitoring table 2 is performed (step S236), the winning opening switch / error monitoring process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S234 that the error scan counter = “3”, there is no error to be monitored in the gaming machine error monitoring table 2; Return to

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
Next, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process (step S222, step S226, step S228) in the above-described winning opening switch / error monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the winning monitoring process, each of the two lower count switches 124 of the lower large winning opening (variable winning apparatus 27), the upper counting switch 125 of the upper large winning opening (second variable winning apparatus 33) and the second start in the ordinary electric power system. This is processing performed for the mouth switch 121. As for the big prize opening (variable prize winning devices 27 and 33) and the ordinary electric power (ordinary variable prize winning device 26), it is easy to perform an illegal act of forcibly opening the opening / closing member and inserting the game balls to pay out the prize balls. Monitor fraud in addition to detection.
Here, the information defined in the fraud monitoring table to be prepared in explaining the fraud & prize winning monitoring process in the winning mouth switch / error monitoring process is as follows.
・ Data for judging whether there is input (monitor switch bit)
・ Lower address of fraud monitoring information ・ Lower address of illegal prize amount area ・ Illegal prize error notification command ・ Unauthorized prize number upper limit (number of fraud occurrence determination)
-Winning mouth switch table address-Notification timer update information (permission / update)
In the fraud & prize winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step S241), and it is determined whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S242). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than the special gaming state in which the variable winning device 27 is opened when the error monitoring target prize-winning switch is the lower count switch 124, and the error monitoring target prize-winning switch is the upper count switch. If it is 125, it is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the second variable winning device 33 is opened. Further, when the winning opening switch to be monitored for error is the second start opening switch 121, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variation winning apparatus 26 is being executed based on the usual hit.

  If it is the fraud monitoring period (step S242; YES), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize-winning switch (step S243). If there is no input to the target prize opening switch (step S243; NO), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S252). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S243; YES), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (step S244), and the number of illegal winnings after addition is the number of fraud occurrence determinations to be monitored (for example, 5) is determined (step S245).

The number of judgments is five, for example, when a large winning opening in the open state is converted to a closed state, the game ball is caught by the door member of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the valid period of the count switch. This is because when a prize is won or when a noise is applied to the signal, it is not judged as illegal, and it is not illegal, but it is not easily judged as an error.
If it is determined that the number of determinations has not been exceeded (step S245; NO), the process jumps to step S250 to prepare a winning monitoring table for the target winning opening switch. If the number of determinations is exceeded (step S245; YES), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the number of fraud determinations (step S246), and the initial value is saved in the target fraud winning notification timer area (step S247). Next, a target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S248), an illegal win occurrence flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S249), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S260). ).

On the other hand, if it is not the fraud monitoring period (step S242; NO), a winning monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S250), and a winning number counter updating process (step S251) for setting a winning ball is performed. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S252), and it is determined whether or not update of the notification timer is permitted (step S253). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step S253; NO), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. Further, when update of the notification timer is permitted (step S253; YES), if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S254). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.
The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is one lower count switch 124, and is not permitted when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the other lower count switch 124. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification timer from being updated twice as much as the unauthorized notification about the variable winning device 27, and to be up in half of the specified time (for example, 60000 ms).
That is, since the error monitoring is performed with the two lower count switches 124 for the lower prize-winning opening (the variable winning device 27), if timers are updated with both switches, double timer updating is performed, and as a result Since the illegal timer expires in half of the specified time, the timer is updated only at the timing of the lower count switch 124 on which monitoring processing is performed later.
Note that when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the upper count switch 125 or the second start port switch 121 in the ordinary power system, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S255). If the value is not 0 (step S255; NO), that is, if the time has not expired, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step S255; YES), that is, if the time has expired or the time has already expired, a target fraud cancel command is prepared (step S256), and an illegal win cancel flag is set as the fraud flag. Prepare (step S25). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S258).

  When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S258; YES), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the target number of illegal winnings is cleared ( In step S259), the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (step S260). In addition, when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S258; NO), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value is compared with the value of the fraud flag area (step S260).

If the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S60; YES), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared illegal flag does not match the value of the target illegal flag area (step S260; NO), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (step S261), and command setting processing is performed ( Step S262), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated.
Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, so that the start and end of error notification are set. Will be.

[Winner counter update process]
Next, the winning number counter updating process (step S230) in the above-described winning opening switch / error monitoring process and the winning number counter updating process (step S251) in the fraud & prize winning monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the input number counter update process, first, the number of winning port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning port monitoring table acquired in the above-described winning port switch / error monitoring process (step S281).
Here, the information defined in the winning table in the winning port monitoring table prepared in the winning port switch / error monitoring process is as follows.
・ Data for determining the number of repetitions and input (monitor switch bit)
-Lower address of the winning number counter area Next, it is checked whether or not there is an input of a detection signal (more precisely, a change in input) from the monitored winning opening switch (step S272). If it is determined that there is no input (S272; NO), the process jumps to step S277. If it is determined that there is an input (S272; YES), the value of the target winning number counter area is loaded in the next step S273.

In the next step S274, the loaded winning number counter is updated (+1), and it is checked whether or not it overflows in the subsequent step S275. If it is determined that the counter overflow has not occurred (step S275; NO), the process proceeds to step S276 where the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area and then the process proceeds to step S277.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S275 that a counter overflow has occurred (S275; YES), step S276 is skipped and the process jumps to step S277. The maximum storage number (for example, 255 for the 1-byte size and 65535 for the 2-byte size) is determined by the size of the winning number counter area provided, and if it exceeds that, the value returns to “0” and pays. You will lose information on the number of prize balls you should have. In order to avoid this, in step S274, the contents of the area are not updated suddenly, but the update is performed after confirming that (+1) is set to “0” outside the area.
In step S277, it is determined whether the monitoring process for all the switches has been completed. If the process has been completed (step S277; YES), the input number counter update process is terminated, and if not completed (step S277; If NO, the process returns to step S272 and the above process is repeated. With the above processing, a winning ball corresponding to the winning is set.

[Command setting processing]
Next, the command setting process (step S262) in the above-described fraud & prize winning monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. The command setting process is a process common to the command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.
In this command setting process, first, command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written to the serial transmission buffer (step S281), the serial transmission buffer status is read (step S282), and it is determined whether the command is being transmitted. (Step S283).

  If a command is being transmitted (step S283; YES), command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the serial transmission buffer (step S286). If the command is not being transmitted (step S283; NO), the circuit may be abnormal, so the transmission circuit is initialized (step S284), and the command data (MODE (upper byte)) is rewritten to the serial transmission buffer ( After step S285), command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the serial transmission buffer (step S286).

  The serial transmission buffer status is read (step S287), and it is determined whether a command is being transmitted (step S288). If the command is being transmitted (step S288; YES), the command setting process is terminated. If the command is not being transmitted (step S288; NO), the transmission circuit is initialized (step S289) because the circuit may be abnormal, and the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is rewritten to the serial transmission buffer. (Step S290), the command setting process is terminated.

  Thus, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game control device 100 and make it difficult to analyze the command. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, it is not necessary to take in a command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced. Note that the command may be transmitted to the payout control apparatus 200 by serial communication.

[Error check processing]
Next, the error check process (step S233, step S236) in the above-described winning opening switch / error monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the error check process, first, an error monitoring table corresponding to an error scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored for errors is to be monitored this time. Is acquired (step S301).
The information defined on the prepared gaming machine error monitoring table includes the following.
(A) Data for determining switch status (b) Error notification command (c) Error notification end command (d) Error occurrence monitoring timer comparison value (e) Error release monitoring timer comparison value (f) Address of switch status area ( G) Error monitoring timer area address (H) Error flag area address

Next, the state of the target switch acquired this time is checked, and it is determined whether the switch (including the signal) to be monitored is on, that is, a state indicating an error (step S302).
If the switch is not on (step S302: NO), an error release flag is prepared as an error flag (step S303), and a target error notification end command is prepared (step S304). Thereafter, the target error cancellation monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S305), and the value of the target switch control area is compared with the current switch state (step S309).
On the other hand, if the switch is on (step S302: YES), there is a possibility that an error will occur, so an error flag is prepared as an error flag (step S306). For example, as one of the errors defined in the gaming machine error monitoring table, if the shooting ball is out, the shooting ball out switch 216 detects that there is no gaming ball in the chute that supplies the game ball to the storage tank 51. If turned on, step S302 becomes YES. If YES, an error occurrence flag is prepared in step S306.
Next, a target error notification command is prepared (step S307). Thereafter, the target error occurrence monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S308), and the value of the target switch control area is compared with the current switch state (step S309).

  If the value of the target switch control area matches the current switch state (step S309; YES), that is, if the switch state has not changed, a timer is determined to determine whether error handling is necessary. The target error monitoring timer is updated by one (step S312), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target error monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (a reference value for determining that an error handling is necessary) (step S313). ). Further, if the value of the target switch control area does not match the current switch state (step S309; NO), that is, if the switch state has changed, it is determined that no error handling is necessary and the target switch The current switch state is saved in the control area (step S310), the target error monitoring timer is cleared (step S311), the target error monitoring timer is updated by one (step S312), and the target error monitoring timer is updated. It is determined whether the value of has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S313).

If the value of the target error monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S313; NO), the error check process is terminated. When the value of the target error monitoring timer reaches the monitoring timer comparison value (step S313: YES), the error monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of the comparison value -1 (step S314). The error flag is compared with the value in the target error flag area (step S315).
Here, when it is determined in step S313 that the target error monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value, it is considered that the error occurrence or cancellation state has been determined. However, there may be a situation in which error occurrence is confirmed when an error has already occurred, or error cancellation is confirmed when no error is occurring. Therefore, after the process of step S314, step S315 is performed. Then, by comparing the prepared error flag with the value of the target error flag area, it is checked whether the currently determined error state is the same as the current error flag state.

If the prepared error flag matches the value of the target error flag area (step S315; YES), the error status has not changed, so it is determined that no action is required, and an error has occurred. End the check process. Also, if the set error flag does not match the value of the target error flag area (if the error flag is not the same) (step S315; NO), it means that the error state has changed to a new error state. The error flag is saved in the target error flag area (step S316), and the process proceeds to step S317. That is, the value of the target error flag area is changed to that of the error state determined this time, and the process proceeds to step S317. In step S317, a command setting process is performed to set a command corresponding to the currently determined error state. As a result, a measure corresponding to the current error state is performed. For example, if the shot ball is out, an error display notifying the user is notified or the notification is canceled. After step S317, the error check process is terminated.
In this way, if an error occurs, a corresponding error flag is set to prepare a treatment command, and if the error is resolved, the corresponding error flag is cleared and a resolution command is set. In particular, in this error check process, not only the occurrence of an error is monitored, but also the cancellation is monitored and the process is shared.
Note that such error check processing is the same for errors such as glass frame opening and front frame opening.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, the special game process (step S78) in the timer interruption process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure game process, the input of the first start opening switch 120 and the second start opening switch 121 is monitored, the whole process related to the special figure change display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.
In the special game process, first, in step S321, a start port switch monitoring process for monitoring winnings of the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121 is performed.
In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in the normal variable winning device 26 that forms the start winning port 25 and the second start winning port, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted, Prior to the start of the figure variation display game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which a game result based on a prize is determined in advance. The details of the start port switch monitoring process (step S321) will be described later.
Next, in step S322, a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed. This is a process for monitoring the detection of a game ball by the lower count switch 124 provided in the variable winning device 27 and the upper count switch 125 provided in the second variable winning device 33.

Next, in step S323, if the special figure game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to zero. And it is determined whether the value of a special figure game process timer is 0 (step S324). If the value of the special figure game process timer is 0 (step S324; YES), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, the special figure referred to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. The figure game sequence branch table is set in the register (step S325), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step S326). Then, the return address after the end of the branch process is saved in the stack area (step S327), and the game branch process (step S328) is performed according to the game process number.
The special figure game process timer is a timer value set to a predetermined value in each process after branching by a process number described later (steps S329 to S335: corresponding to process number = 0 to process number = 6). Yes, this special figure game processing timer is set to have a timing to execute step S329 and subsequent steps when the time is up. As a result, when it is time to execute step S325 and subsequent steps when step S323 is executed, the determination result of step S324 becomes affirmative, and step S325 and subsequent steps (including steps S336 to S339) are executed. . And when step S323 is performed and it is not the timing which should perform step S325-S335, the determination result of step S324 becomes negative and it becomes the structure by which only step S336-S339 is performed.

  In the branch at the process number in step S328, the process number 0 goes to step S329 (special figure normal process), the process number 1 goes to step S330 (special figure changing process), and the process number 2 goes to step S331 (special figure displaying process). ), Process number 3 to step S332 (fanfare / interval process), process number 4 to step S333 (large winning opening open process), and process number 5 to step S334 (large winning opening remaining ball process). The process number 6 advances to step S335 (big hit end process). The customer waiting state (during demonstration) is process number 0.

The specific contents of the branch in the process number are as follows.
In step S329 (ordinary figure normal processing), when the number of special figure hold (the number of special figure starting memory that is suspended because the special figure fluctuation display game is not executed) is zero and the special figure fluctuation display game is not being executed, Processing for displaying the waiting state on the display device 41 is performed. Further, in the special figure routine process, a process for starting the next special figure change display game (special figure change start process) is performed. In this special figure fluctuation start process, the start memory of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is monitored, and if there is any special figure start memory, the corresponding fluctuation display (first or second fluctuation display) is started. Is set (the setting of the variation pattern command transmitted to the effect control device 300, etc.) is set, the process number is set to 1, and the process returns. If the special figure hold number is zero and the next special figure variation display game is not executed, the process returns as it is (the process number remains 0).

Next, in step S330 (process during special figure change), a process for variably displaying the special figure is performed until the change time set in the special figure change start process elapses. And if the said fluctuation | variation time passes, after performing the process which transmits the command (symbol stop command) which stops the symbol of a special figure to the production | presentation control apparatus 300, it returns with the process number set to 2.
Further, in step S331 (processing during special figure display), a process for displaying the fluctuation display result of the special figure for a certain time (1 second to 2 seconds) is performed. Also, if the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, fanfare command setting according to the type of jackpot, fanfare time setting according to the big win opening pattern of each jackpot, processing during fanfare / interval Set the information necessary to do If it is a big hit, the process number is set to 3, and if not, the process number is set to 0 and the process returns.

Next, in step S332 (fanfare / interval processing), fanfare processing for outputting a fanfare sound or the like from the speaker 12a or the like is executed immediately after the big hit, and an interval period display or the like is realized in the big hit interval period. Interval processing is executed, and the process number is set to 4 at the timing when the large winning opening of the variable winning device 27 is started. Also, here, setting of the opening time of the big winning opening, updating of the number of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening are performed.
Next, Step S333 (processing during opening of the big prize opening) is a process while the big prize opening 27a of the variable prize winning device 27 and the second variable prize winning device 33 are being opened. Also, here, if the big hit round is not the final round, the interval command is set, while if it is the final round, the ending command is set, and the information necessary for performing the winning ball remaining ball processing is set. . When the grand prize opening is finished, the processing number is set to 5.

Next, in step S334 (big winning opening remaining ball processing), in order to perform processing for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening, or if the big winning round is the final round, the big winning end processing is performed. Set necessary information. Specifically, for example, in order to reliably count the game balls that have entered the big prize opening 27a of the variable prize winning device 27 (the same applies to the second variable prize winning device 33 big prize opening) just before the end of the big prize opening. After this fixed time has elapsed, if the big hit round remains, the process number is set to 3, and if the big hit round does not remain, the process number is set to 6.
Next, in step S335 (big hit end process), after the big hit ends, a process for executing the special figure normal process S329 is performed, the process number is returned to 0, and the process returns.

Next, when one of the above processes corresponding to the process number is completed, the process proceeds to step S336, and a table (special chart) for controlling display on the collective display device 35 of the special figure 1 (display of the special figure 1). 1 fluctuation control table) is prepared, and in the next step S337, the control process (design fluctuation control process) for the fluctuation display of this special figure 1 is performed.
Next, the process proceeds to step S338, where a table (special figure 2 fluctuation control table) for controlling display on the collective display device 35 of special figure 2 (display of special figure 2) is prepared. In the next step S339, this table is displayed. The control process (symbol fluctuation control process) for the fluctuation display of this special figure 2 is performed, and then the process returns.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, the start port switch monitoring process (step S321) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the start port switch monitoring process, first, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the start winning port 25 (first start port) (step S351), the special start port switch common process (step S352) is performed. The details of the special figure start port switch common process in step S352 will be described later together with the special figure start port switch common process in step S356.

Next, it is checked whether or not the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variation winning device 26) is in operation, that is, whether or not the ordinary variation winning device 26 is activated and the game ball is open. (Step S353) If it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is operating (Step S353; YES), the process proceeds to Step S355, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S353 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step S353; NO), it is determined whether or not a normal electric power fraud has occurred (step S354). In determining whether the electric power fraud is occurring or not, it is determined that the fraud is occurring when the number of illegal winnings to the normal variation winning device 26 is equal to or larger than the number of fraud determination (for example, 5).
The normally variable winning device 26 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud occurs, and when there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as an illegal winning number. Then, when the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

If it is determined in step S354 that normal power fraud has not occurred (step S354; NO), after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the second start opening (ordinary variable winning device 26) (step S356), The start port switch common process (step S366) is performed, and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated.
Further, if it is determined in step S354 that the power transmission fraud has occurred (step S354; YES), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the special start port switch common process (steps S352 and S356) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the first start port switch 120 or the second start port switch 121.
In the special figure start port switch common process, first, of the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121, whether or not there is an input to the monitored start port switch (for example, the first start port switch 120). If it is checked (step S361) and it is determined that there is no input to the monitored start port switch (step S361; NO), the special-purpose start port switch common process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S361 that there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step S361; YES), it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step S362).

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step S362; NO), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the special figure start port switch common processing is terminated. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step S362; YES), after saving the start port winning flag of the start port switch to be monitored (step S363), the target random number latch register is monitored. The extracted jackpot random number is loaded and prepared (step S364).

Subsequently, information regarding the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch (for example, the first start port switch 120) of the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121 is displayed outside the pachinko machine 1. The number of times to be output to the management device 140 (the number of times the start port signal is output) (the number of times that another output must be output) is loaded (step S365). Then, the loaded value (starting port signal output count) is updated (+1) (step S366), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step S367). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step S367; NO), the updated value is saved in the RWM start port signal output number area (step S368), and the process proceeds to step S369. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step S367; YES), the process jumps to step S368 and proceeds to step S369.
Then, in step S369, of the first start port switch 120 and the second start port switch 121, the update target special figure holding corresponding to the monitored start port switch (for example, the first start port switch 120) is suspended ( A process for determining whether or not the number of (starting memory) is less than the upper limit value is performed.

If it is determined in step S369 that the number of special figure hold is less than the upper limit (step S369; YES), a process for updating (+1) the special figure hold number to be updated (for example, the special figure 1 hold number, etc.) ( After performing step S372), a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the monitoring target start switch and the special figure hold number is prepared (step S373), and command setting processing (step S374) is performed.
Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the special figure hold number corresponding to the monitoring target start switch is calculated (step S375), and the big hit random number is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM (step S376). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step S377), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step S378). Further, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step S379). Then, a special figure hold information determination process (step S380) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 101C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the start winning area of the start winning opening 25 or the normal variable winning device 26, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. A start winning storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start memory is provided. The start winning storage means (game control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 25) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. And various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening (ordinary variation winning device 26) are stored as the second start storage up to a predetermined number.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S369 that the special figure hold number is not less than the upper limit value (step S369; NO), a decorative special figure hold number command (pending overflow command) is prepared (step S370), and command setting processing (step S371) is performed, and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the special figure hold information determination process (step S380) in the above-described start port switch common process will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetching process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.
In the special figure hold information determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the conditions for executing the prefetch effect are satisfied (step S391). If not satisfied (step S391; NO), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. To do. Moreover, when satisfy | filling (step S391; YES), the process regarding the following prefetch effect is performed.
Here, the conditions for executing the prefetching effect are as follows.
・ Special figure 1: Normal variable winning device 26 is not supported (normal power support is supported) and other than big hit ・ Special figure 2: No condition (can be executed all the time)
When such a condition is satisfied, a prefetch process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start-up storage is performed.

In the process related to the prefetch effect performed when the conditions for executing the prefetch effect are satisfied (step S391; YES), first, whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not is a big hit. A big hit determination process (step S392) is performed to determine. The big hit determination process determines a big hit based on whether or not the random number extracted at the timing of the start winning prize is within the big hit range. When the big hit is determined, the big hit information is saved in the big hit flag area.
If the determination result is a big hit (step S393; YES), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step S394).
Here, the information defined on the jackpot symbol random number check table includes the following.
・ Random number judgment value (represents distribution rate)
Stop symbol pattern corresponding to the determination value Next, the big hit symbol random number is checked to obtain the corresponding big hit symbol pattern (step S395), and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the pre-read stop symbol pattern region (step S396). On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step S393; NO), a stoppage stop symbol pattern is set (step S396), and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the prefetch stop symbol pattern region (step S397).

  Thereafter, a pre-read symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S398), and command setting processing is performed (step S399). Next, special figure information setting processing (step S400) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed to prepare a latter half fluctuation pattern setting information table corresponding to the target starter switch (step S400). S401), a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step S402).

  Then, a read-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first-half variation number indicating the first-half variation pattern and the latter-half variation number representing the second-half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special-figure variation display game is prepared (step S403), and command setting processing is performed ( Step S404), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step S400 and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step S402 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary process.

  Through the above processing, a prefetch symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and a prefetch variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory (whether it is a big hit or the type of the fluctuation pattern) is controlled before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variable display game. It is possible to notify.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). It is a pre-determination means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step S322) in the above special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the big prize opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the big prize opening (the variable prize winning device 27 or the second variable prize winning device 33) is open, that is, in the special gaming state (step S411). If the special winning opening is not open (step S411; NO), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the big winning opening is open (step S411; YES), 0 is set to the winning counter for counting the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening added in the current big winning opening switch monitoring process. (Step S412). The winning counter is a counter provided for counting the number of balls entered in the opening of one round of the big winning opening and adding it to the big winning opening count in the process of step S429 described later.
Next, it is determined whether or not the lower prize winning opening (variable winning device 27) is open, that is, in the special gaming state in which the variable winning device 27 is opened (step S413).

If the lower prize winning opening is open (step S413; YES), it is determined whether or not the big winning prize remaining ball processing is being performed at the end of one round (step S414). This is to determine whether or not the big winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed in order not to monitor the winning at the lower big winning opening (variable winning apparatus 27) during the remaining ball processing.
If the winning prize remaining ball processing is being performed (step S414; YES), the winning prize switch monitoring process is terminated. If the winning ball remaining ball processing is not in progress (step S414; NO), it is determined whether there is an input to the lower winning port switch 1 (one lower count switch 124) (step S415).

  If there is no input to the lower major prize opening switch 1 (step S415; NO), it is determined whether there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch 2 (the other lower count switch 124) (step S419). If there is an input to the lower prize winning switch 1 (step S415; YES), the winning counter is updated by +1 (step S416), and a lower prize winning count command is prepared (step S417). Then, command setting processing (step S418) is performed, and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the lower large prize opening switch 2 (the other lower count switch 124) (step S419).

  If there is no input to the lower large prize opening switch 2 (step S419; NO), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step S428). If there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch 2 (step S419; YES), the winning counter is updated by +1 (step S420), and a lower major prize opening count command is prepared (step S421). Then, command setting processing (step S422) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter is 0 (step S428).

  On the other hand, when the lower major prize opening is not being opened (step S413; NO), that is, the upper major prize opening (second variable prize winning device 33) is being opened (during the special gaming state where the second variable prize winning device 33 is opened). If YES in step S423, it is determined whether there is an input to the upper prize winning opening switch (upper count switch 125) (step S423). If there is no input to the top prize winning opening switch (step S423; NO), the big winning prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If there is an input to the top prize winning opening switch (step S423; YES), it is determined whether the big winning prize remaining ball processing is being performed (step S424).

  When the winning prize remaining ball processing is not in progress (step S424; NO), the winning counter is updated by +1 (step S425), and an upper winning prize count command is prepared (step S426). If the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (step S424; YES), step S425 is jumped to prepare a top winning port count command (step S426). Thereafter, command setting processing (step S427) is performed, and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step S428). In the case of the top prize winning opening, the top prize winning count command is transmitted even during the processing of the remaining prize winning ball in order to produce an effect by winning.

In the determination of whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step S428), if the value of the winning counter is 0 (step S428; YES), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
If the value of the winning counter is not 0 (step S428; NO), the value of the winning counter is added to the number of large winning mouth counts (step S429). This is because when a ball is won at each of the top and bottom big winning gates, a command indicating that a prize has been won is transmitted to the payout control device 200 and counted by a prize counter (step S416, step S420, step S425) for later processing. In this step S429, it is added to the actual number of winning prizes.
Next, it is determined whether or not the number of the big winning count is equal to or more than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round: for example, 10) (step S430).

  If the number of winning prizes is not greater than or equal to the upper limit (step S430; NO), the winning prize switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the number of winning prizes exceeds the upper limit (step S430; YES), the number of winning prizes is kept at the upper limit (step S431), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step). S432). Then, a pointer is loaded from the big hit control pointer upper limit value area (step S433), the loaded pointer is saved in the big hit midpoint control pointer area (step S434), and the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. The processing of step S433 and step S434 is to perform processing for closing the big prize opening based on the fact that the number of big prize winning counts is equal to or greater than the upper limit value. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round is completed.

[Design variation control processing]
Next, the details of the symbol variation control process (steps S337 and S339) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of special symbols such as the first special symbol and the second special symbol and setting the display data of the special symbols. In the symbol fluctuation control process, first, it is checked whether the special figure fluctuation control flag relating to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is changing among the first special figure and the second special figure ( Step S441).
If the special figure changing flag is changing (step S442; YES), a symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is acquired (step). S443).
Here, the information defined on the variation control table prepared in the special figure game process is as follows.
・ Lower address of the fluctuation control area ・ Pointer of the display table 2 (for stoppage) ・ Pointer of the display table 1 (for fluctuation) Next, of the first special figure and the second special figure, the special figure (e.g. The flashing control timer according to 1 special figure is updated by -1 (step S444), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0, that is, the time is up (step S445).

  When the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (step S445; NO), display data corresponding to the value of the target variation symbol number area is acquired (step S448). When the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (step S445; YES), the initial value of the blinking control timer is saved in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (step S446), and the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Among them, the variable symbol number related to the control target special figure (for example, the first special figure) is updated by +1 (step S447), and the display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is acquired (step S4448). ). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step S449), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the special figure changing flag is not changing (step S442; NO), a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is acquired (step S450). . Then, display data corresponding to the value of the target variation symbol number area is acquired (step S451), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step S449), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. As a result, among the special figure 1 display and special figure 2 display that are LED segments in the collective display device 35, the special figure display (for example, the special figure 1 display) to be controlled corresponds to the symbol number. Will be displayed.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, details of the special figure routine process (step S329) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure routine processing, first, it is checked whether or not the second special figure holding number (second starting memory number) is 0 (step S461).
If it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step S461; YES), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) is 0 (step S466). Then, if it is determined that the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (step S466; YES), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step S471), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not been started (step S471; NO) saves the customer waiting demo flag in the customer waiting demo flag area (step S472).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step S473), a command setting process (step S474) is performed, a special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step S475) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. On the other hand, if the customer waiting demonstration has been started in step S471 (step S471; YES), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step S475) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. Details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step S475) will be described later with reference to FIG.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 in step S461 (step S461; NO), a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number after the -1 update is prepared (step S462). Then, command setting processing (step S463) is performed. Next, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step S464) is performed, the special figure fluctuation mid-process transition setting process (step S465) of special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure ordinary process is terminated.
In step S466, if the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (step S466; NO), a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the updated special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step S467). Then, command setting processing (step S468) is performed. Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step S469) is performed, the special figure fluctuation mid-process transition setting process (step S470) of the special figure 1 is performed, and the special figure ordinary process is terminated.
At the time of performing the process for preparing the decoration special figure hold number command (steps S467 and S462), the subtraction number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure variation display game, and the current special figure 1 hold number or A hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number minus -1 from the special figure 2 hold number is prepared. In practice, the process of updating the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number by -1 is the fluctuation start information setting process (FIG. 41) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step S469) or the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step S464). Step S611).

In this way, the special figure 2 hold count is checked before the special figure 1 hold count check, and if the special figure 2 hold count is not 0, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step S464) is executed. Will be. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as the variable display based on the first start memory. Priority control means for executing with priority over the game
In the first embodiment, the transmission order when transmitting a command from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of symbol variation is the order of the number of holds, the stop symbol, and the variation pattern.

[Special figure transition setting process 1]
Next, details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step S475) in the special figure normal process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, “0” is set as the process number in step S481 (for example, a table for shifting to the special figure normal process is prepared and the process number “0” related to the special figure normal process is set in the table. "" Is set), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area in step S482.
Next, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared in step S483, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower major prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area in step S484, and the upper big prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area is illegal in step S485. Save the flag during the monitoring period. In this case, since there are large winning mouths (the variable winning device 27 and the second variable winning device 33) at the top and bottom, the fraud monitoring period flags are saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area corresponding to each large winning mouth, respectively. is there. After step S485, the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 ends.
As a result, various data for shifting to the special figure normal processing, for example, the process number “0” related to the special figure normal processing is set, and the respective flags (each big prize illegal (Monitoring information) is set.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing 1]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 (step S469) in the special figure usual process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process that is performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, first, as shown in FIG. 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step S491), and the big hit flag 1 for judging whether or not the first special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit is shifted information or a big hit. A big hit flag 1 setting process (step S492) for setting information is performed. Details of the big hit flag 1 setting process in step S492 will be described later.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step S493) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol for setting the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step S494) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step S495). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step S496) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the first special figure variation display game. (Step S497) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated.
Details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process in step S493, the special figure information setting process in step S494, the variation pattern setting process in step S496, and the variation start information setting process in step S497 will be described later.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (step S492) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area in step S501. This is because information on the deviation is set in advance before the big hit determination. Next, in step S502, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared. Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step S503) is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. This is to check whether the jackpot random number corresponding to the special figure 1 extracted this time is in the jackpot range (a value between the jackpot lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value: matching the jackpot judgment value). If it is within the range of the big hit, it can be judged as a big hit (the detailed routine will be described later).

The check result in step S503 is determined in step S504. If the determination result is a big hit (YES), the process proceeds to step S505, and the big hit information is overwritten in the big hit flag 1 area in which the lost information is saved in step S501. Then, the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the answer is NO in step S504 (when there is a loss), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. Therefore, at this time, the processing ends in a state in which the shift information is saved in the jackpot flag 1, and the jackpot flag 1 is not set.

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, details of the jackpot determination process (step S503) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, processing for setting a lower limit judgment value for jackpot judgment is performed in step S511. Thereafter, in step S512, it is checked whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value, that is, the big hit random number value read in step S502 in FIG. 34 is the lower limit value of the big hit random number hit judgment value. Check if it is less than
The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.
If it is determined in step S512 that the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value, the process branches to step S517, sets a deviation as the determination result, and returns.

On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value in step S512, the process proceeds to step S513 to determine whether or not the probability is high. This is to determine whether or not the jackpot probability is high due to the probability variation, that is, whether or not the probability of the hit result in the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (probability variation state). Judgment. If the probability is high, in step S514, processing for setting an upper limit determination value for jackpot determination in the high probability is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S516.
If it is determined in step S513 that the probability is not high, the process branches to step S515 to perform processing for setting an upper limit determination value for jackpot determination in the low probability, and then proceeds to step S516.
In this way, when the upper limit judgment value during the high probability and the low probability is set, if the value of the target big hit random number is between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value (zone), You will be able to judge.
Therefore, in step S516, it is checked whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (exceeded the upper limit determination value), and in step S516, it is determined that the big hit random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S516). YES), since it can be determined that it is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S517 to set a deviation as the determination result and return.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S516 that the value of the target big hit random number is equal to or less than the upper limit determination value (not exceeding the upper limit determination value) (step S516; NO), the target big hit random number value becomes the lower limit determination value and the upper limit determination. From the time between the values (zone), it is determined that the game is a big hit, and the big hit is set as the determination result in step S518 and the process returns.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step S493) in the special figure 1 variation start process 1 described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, it is checked in step S521 whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (whether the big hit information is saved). The jackpot symbol random number is loaded from (for equation 1) (step S522). Next, a special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step S523).
Here, the information defined on the special figure 1 big hit symbol table includes the following.
・ Random number judgment value (indicating distribution rate)
Stop symbol number corresponding to determination value Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S524, where a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area. By this process, the type of special result is selected. The stop symbol number is used to set a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, the seven-segment special symbol 1 display in the collective display device 35).

  Thereafter, a big hit stop symbol information table is set (step S525), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step S526). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol type (disconnected, 16R probability variation, 11R probability variation, 2R probability variation, 11R normal variation, etc.) on the display device 41. Next, a probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the probability variation determination flag area (step S527). The probability variation determination flag is for setting a probability state after the end of the special gaming state.

  Further, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step S528), and the big prize opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and the big prize opening is released. Save in the information area (step S529). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S532).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not big hit in step S521 (step S521; NO), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step S530), and the stop symbol pattern is stopped as a stop symbol pattern. The area is saved (step S531), and a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S532).
There are 11 types of decoration special figure commands, for example, and the special figure type in the effect control device 300 can be determined based on the difference in type.
Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step S533), and a command setting process (step S534) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step S535), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step S536). The stop symbol setting process in FIG.

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure information setting process (step S494) in the special figure 1 variation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure is in a short time (short time state) (step S541).
Here, for example, after the jackpot is over, the time for the special figure and the usual figure is shortened from the normal time, the time efficiency is increased, and the probability per ordinary figure is increased to increase the ordinary electric utility (general power) (No. 2). The opening of the winning prize opening 26) (including the extension of the opening time of ordinary electric trains) includes support for winning the starting opening (that is, the electric utility support), of which This is related to the special figure, which is a state in which the fluctuation time of the special figure is shortened and the public power support is provided.
If it is not in the special drawing time (step S541; NO), the normal variation pattern selection group information table is set (step S542). If the special drawing time is short (step S541; YES), the time variation variable pattern selection group information table is set (step S543). After step S542, the process proceeds to step S544. Moreover, also after step S543, it progresses to step S544.

Then, when proceeding to step S544, the special figure holding number corresponding to the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag is loaded, and thereafter, the fluctuation pattern selection group information corresponding to the special figure holding number is acquired and saved in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area. (Step S545). Thereby, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the type of special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) for starting the fluctuation, and the number-of-holds information that is information on the number of starting memories for the type of special figure, The variable distribution information 1 obtained from the game state information including information on whether or not the time is short is saved. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is used to select a fluctuation group later.
A variation group includes a plurality of variation patterns. When determining a variation pattern, the variation group is first selected, and then one variation pattern is selected from the variation group. ing.

Next, a distribution base pointer table is set (step S546), and a distribution base pointer corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step S547). Further, the effect mode number is added to the acquired pointer (step S548), the value after the addition is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step S549), and the special figure information setting process is terminated.
Thereby, the variable distribution information 2 obtained from the stop symbol pattern information and the effect mode information is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is used to select a fluctuation group later. In addition, as for the production mode, one production mode is set from a plurality of production modes according to the probability state, the presence / absence of the short-time state, the progress status of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S496) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG.
Note that the fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation that is a fluctuation aspect from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

In the variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group selection address table is set (step S551), and an address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step S552). Then, it is determined whether the production mode number is less than 2 (either 0 or 1) (step S553).
When the production mode number is not less than 2 (step S553; NO), it is determined whether the stop symbol pattern is a discontinuation stop symbol pattern (step S554). This is to determine whether or not the distribution (pattern) is different depending on the number of holds.
Next, when the stop symbol pattern is not an outlier stop symbol pattern (step S554; NO), the variable pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target variable pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step S557).

On the other hand, when the production mode number is less than 2 (step S553; YES), or when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier stop symbol pattern (step S554; YES), the variable distribution information 1 from the table prepared in step S552. The address of the table corresponding to is acquired (step S555). The process of step S555 is performed when the distribution (pattern) differs according to the number of holds.
Next, the acquired address is prepared as the address of the latter-half variation group (step S556), and the variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step S557).
When the production mode number is less than 2 or when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier stop symbol pattern, the address is obtained by taking into account the variable distribution information 1 obtained from the hold number information that is information related to the start memory number. Thus, the variation pattern selection mode is made different depending on the number of starting memories.

  Thereafter, a 2-byte distribution process (step S558) is performed, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step S559), and the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (holding number 1) The fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded and prepared (Step S560). Then, a sorting process (step S561) is performed, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step S602). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, a first half variation group table is set (step S563), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and 2 (including the determined second half variation number) (step S564). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step S565), and a random number is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step S566). ). Thereafter, a distribution process (step S567) is performed, the first variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first variation number area (step S568), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set.

[2-byte sort processing]
Next, details of the 2-byte sorting process (step S558) in the above-described variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the leading data of the latter-half variation group table (selection table) prepared in the variation pattern setting process is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (step S571). ). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the case of a variation group table (for example, a part of the variation group table when the result is out of order), since there is no need for distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top. ing.

  If the first data in the latter-half variation group table is a code without distribution (step S572; YES), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step S577), and the 2-byte distribution process is terminated. To do. On the other hand, if the first data in the latter-half variation group table is not a code without distribution (step S572; NO), the first distribution value specified in the latter-half variation group table is acquired (step S573).

  Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step S573 from the random value loaded in step S557 (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1) (step S574). It is determined whether the new random value is smaller than “0” (step S575). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step S575; NO), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step S576), the process proceeds to step S573, and the subsequent processes are performed. Do. That is, in step S573, after the distribution value specified next in the variation group selection table is acquired, the distribution value is subtracted using the determined random number as the new random value in step S575, and a new random value is further subtracted. A numerical value is calculated (step S574). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step S575).

  The above processing is executed until it is determined in step S575 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step S575; YES). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation selection tables is selected from at least one latter-half variation selection table defined in the latter-half variation group table. If it is determined in step S575 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step S575; YES), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the distribution result (step S577), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. Exit.

[Distribution processing]
Next, details of the sorting process (steps S561 and S567) in the above-described variation pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
The sorting process is based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 to select the latter half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the latter half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group), or based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3, the first half fluctuation selection table ( This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

  In this distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the top data of the prepared latter half variation selection table (selection table) and first half variation selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”). (Step S581). Here, like the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern or first half fluctuation pattern. In the case of a selection table having no distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

  If the first data in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code without sorting (step S582; YES), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result (step S587), and the sorting is performed. The process ends. On the other hand, if the first data of the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is not a code without distribution (step S582; NO), one distribution value first defined in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table. Is acquired (step S583).

  Subsequently, after subtracting the distribution value acquired in step S583 from the random number value (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 2 or the fluctuation pattern random number 3) loaded in step S560 or S566, a new random value is calculated ( In step S584, it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step S585). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step S585; NO), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step S586), the process proceeds to step S583, and thereafter Process.

  That is, in step S583, the distribution value specified next in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is acquired, and then the distribution value is subtracted using the determined random number value as a new random number value in step S585. Further, a new random value is calculated (step S584). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step S585). The above processing is executed until it is determined in step S585 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step S585; YES). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation number or the first-half variation number is selected from at least one latter-half variation pattern or first-half variation pattern defined in the latter-half variation selection table or the first-half variation selection table. If it is determined in step S585 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step S585; YES), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step S587), and the distribution process ends. To do.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the variation start information setting process (step S497) in the above-described special figure 1 variation start process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the change start information setting process, first, the RWM random number storage area of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step S601), and then the first half change corresponding to the first half change number acquired in the change pattern setting process. A process of acquiring a value in the time value table (step S602) is performed, and subsequently, a process of acquiring a first-half variation time value corresponding to the first-half variation number (step S603) is performed, and further, acquired by the latter-half variation pattern setting process. The process of setting the latter half fluctuation time value table corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is performed (step S604).

Next, a process of acquiring the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number (step S605) is performed, and then a process of adding the acquired first half variation time value and the latter half variation time value is performed (step S606). After that, the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S607).
Subsequently, after the fluctuation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is calculated and prepared (step S608), the value of the second half fluctuation number is prepared as a fluctuation command (ACTION) (step S609), and command setting processing ( Step S610) is performed.

Next, the special figure holding number corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is updated by −1 (step S611), the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is set (step S612), and the random number storage region is shifted. (Step S613), and clear the shifted empty area to 0 (step S614).
Thereafter, as a process related to the extension of the stop time for displaying the result of the special figure variation display game, first, the stop extension information area is cleared (step S615). Then, when the stop symbol pattern is an off-stop symbol pattern (step S616; YES), the effect mode number is 2 (step S617; YES), and the remaining number of rotations (game number) in the effect mode is 1. (Step S618; YES) determines whether or not the special figure high probability (high probability state) is in progress (Step S619).

When it is not in the special figure high probability (step S619; NO), the stop extension information 1 is saved in the stop extension information area (step S620), and a stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information is prepared (step S622). A command setting process (step S623) is performed, and the variation start information setting process is terminated. Thereby, the stop time is set to the special figure extension display time 1 (first extension stop time) that is longer than the normal special figure display time (normal stop time).
If the special figure high probability is present (step S519; YES), the stop extension information 2 is saved in the stop extension information area (step S621), and a stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information is prepared (step S621). S622), command setting processing (step S623) is performed, and the variation start information setting processing is terminated. Thereby, the special time extension display time 2 (second extended stop time) in which the stop time is longer than the normal special figure display time is set.

On the other hand, when the stop symbol pattern is not an outlier stop symbol pattern (step S616; NO), when the effect mode number is not 2 (step S617; NO), or when the remaining number of rotations (game number) in effect mode 2 is not 1. (Step S618; NO) ends the variation start information setting process. In this case, the extension of the stop time is not set, and the normal stop time is set.
In this way, the stop time of the special figure fluctuation display game is set at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the specific rotation speed, and the state of the production mode. To be done. Thereby, for example, it is possible to set an effect that is continuous between the variation time and the stop time, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Through the above processing, information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information related to the pattern and a stop information command including information related to extension of the stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 (step S464) in the special figure ordinary process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. Is what you do.
When the routine starts, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step S631), and the second special figure fluctuation display game is displayed. A big hit flag 2 setting process (step S632) for setting shift information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not is a big hit. Details of the big hit flag 2 setting process in step S632 will be described later.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step S633) relating to the setting of the special symbol 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol for setting the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information which is a table in which information is set for performing various information setting processes (see step S634, see FIG. 37) and referring to various information regarding the fluctuation pattern setting of the second special figure fluctuation display game. A table is prepared (step S635). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (see step S636, see FIG. 38) for setting a variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the second special figure variation display game. (See step S637, FIG. 41), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (step S632) in the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
In this process, the same process as that in the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 34 is performed on the second start-up memory. In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step S641). This is because information on the deviation is set in advance before the big hit determination. Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step S642). Note that for the number of reservations 1 is an area for storing information (random number or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (see step S643, see FIG. 35) is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. This is to check whether the jackpot random number corresponding to the special figure 2 extracted this time is in the jackpot range (a value between the jackpot lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value: matching the jackpot judgment value) If it is within the range of the big hit, it can be judged as a big hit.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step S643) is a big hit (step S644; YES), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step S641 (step S645). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step S643) is not a big hit (step S644; NO), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. Therefore, at this time, the processing ends in a state where the shift information is saved in the jackpot flag 2, and the jackpot flag 2 is not set.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step S633) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In this process, the same process as the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 36 is performed on the second start memory.
When the routine starts, it is checked in step S651 whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (whether the big hit information is saved). If it is a big hit (step S651; YES), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (hold) The jackpot symbol random number is loaded from (for formula 1) (step S652). Next, a special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step S653).
Here, the information defined on the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table includes the following.
・ Random number judgment value (indicating distribution rate)
Stop symbol number corresponding to determination value Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S654, where a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area. By this process, the type of special result is selected. The stop symbol number is used to set a stop symbol in a special symbol display (here, a seven-segment special symbol 2 display in the collective display device 35).

  Thereafter, a big hit stop symbol information table is set (step S655), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step S656). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol type (disconnected, 16R probability variation, 11R probability variation, 2R probability variation, 11R normal variation, etc.) on the display device 41. Next, a probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the probability variation determination flag area (step S657). The probability variation determination flag is for setting a probability state after the end of the special gaming state.

  Further, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step S658), and the big winning opening release information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and the big winning opening is released. Save in the information area (step S659). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S662).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 2 is not big hit in step S651 (step S651; NO), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step S660), and the stop symbol pattern is stopped as the stop symbol pattern. The area is saved (step S661), and a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step S662).
There are 11 types of decoration special figure commands, for example, and the special figure type in the effect control device 300 can be determined based on the difference in type.
Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step S663), and a command setting process (step S664) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step S665), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step S666). The stop symbol setting process in FIG.

  Through the above-described special figure 1 stop symbol setting process and special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, the game control device 100 is changed to a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36). One variation display game is executed, and a variation display game executing means for executing the second variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at the second start winning opening (ordinary variation winning device 37). In addition, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control unit that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination unit (game control device 100).

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 1)]
Next, the details of the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) (step S470) in the special-figure normal process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “1” (corresponding to the process number related to the special figure changing process) is set in step S671, and the process number (here, “1”) is set in the special game process number area in step S672. Save. Next, in step S673, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared, and in step S674, a signal related to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area.
Next, in step S675, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area. In step S676, the blinking control timer (the special figure 1 display which is an LED segment in the collective display device 35) is displayed in the special figure 1 blink control timer area. The initial value (for example, 200 ms) of the flashing cycle timer) is saved and the routine is terminated.
In this way, the process for shifting to the special figure changing process for the special figure 1 is performed.

[Special figure changing process transition setting process (Special figure 2)]
Next, the details of the special-fluctuation changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) (step S465) in the special-figure normal process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “1” (corresponding to the process number related to the special figure changing process) is set in step S681, and the process number (here, “1”) is set in the special game process number area in step S682. Save. Next, in step S683, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared, and in step S684, a signal related to the start of fluctuation in the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area.
Next, in step S685, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area. The initial value (for example, 200 ms) of the flashing cycle timer) is saved and the routine is terminated.
In this way, the process for shifting to the special figure changing process with respect to the special figure 2 is performed.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, details of the special figure changing process (step S330) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure changing process, it is first determined whether there is stop extension information (stop extension information 1 or 2) (step S691). If there is no stop extension information (step S691; NO), the normal special figure display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step S692), and the special figure display process transition setting process (step S696). To complete the special figure display process.

If there is stop extension information (step S691; YES), it is determined whether the stop extension information is 1 (step S693). If it is the stop extension information 1 (step S693; YES), the special figure extension display time 1 (for example, 3500 ms) is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step S694), and the special figure display process transition setting process (step S694) S696) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is not stop extension information 1 (step S693; NO), that is, if it is stop extension information 2, special figure extension display time 2 (for example, 14300 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S695). A special figure display process transition setting process (step S696) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.
As described above, the special figure display time is controlled as follows, for example.
・ Normal special drawing display time: 600 ms
・ Special figure extension display time 1: 3500ms
・ Special figure extension display time 2: 14300ms
In this way, in the special figure fluctuation processing, it is not based on whether or not the jackpot is won or the latter half fluctuation number, but is set based on the stop extension information set at the start of the fluctuation of the special figure (whether the game is true, the specific rotation speed, the production mode state, etc. ) To determine the display time after stopping.

[Special map display process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure display mid-process transition setting process (step S696) in the special figure changing process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, “2” (corresponding to the process number related to the special figure display process) is set in step S701, and the process number (here, “2”) is set in the special figure game process number area in step S702. Save. Next, in step S703, a signal related to the special figure 1 fluctuation end process is saved in the test signal output data area, and in step S704, a signal related to the special figure 2 fluctuation end process is saved in the test signal output data area.
In step S705, the control timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the symbol determination number signal control timer area. After that, in step S706, the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area has special information as control information for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display (the special figure 1 display which is an LED segment in the collective display device 35). The stop flag related to the variable stop on the display shown in FIG. 1 is saved. In step S707, the stop flag is saved in the special figure 2 variable control flag area, and the routine is terminated.
In this way, a process for shifting to the special figure display process is performed.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, details of the special figure display process (step S331) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the special figure display process, first, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process 1 is loaded (step S711), and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM is cleared (step S711). Step S712) is performed.
Next, it is checked whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step S713). Then, in step S719, a signal related to the start of the special figure 2 big hit is saved in the test signal output data area, and the process proceeds to step S720.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S713 that the big hit flag 2 is not big hit (step S713; NO), the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded. (Step S714), a process of clearing the RWM big hit flag 1 region (Step S715) is performed.
Subsequently, it is checked whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step S716). (Step S717), and the process proceeds to Step S720.
If it is determined in step S716 that there is no big hit (NO), the process proceeds to step S736. At this time, the processing is advanced after determining whether there is a short time.

Now, after saving the test signal relating to the special figure 1 big hit in step S717 described above or saving the test signal relating to the special figure 2 big hit in step S719, processing for setting the round number upper limit value table (step S720) is performed.
Next, the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the round number upper limit value is saved in the round number upper limit area (step S721). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the round LED pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step S722).
Next, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded and prepared from the decoration special figure command area of the RWM (step S723), and a command setting process (step S724) is performed. After that, a probability information command at the time of low probability related to information for setting the probability of hitting results in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game to be a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step S725). Command setting processing (step S726) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step S727), and the command setting process (step S728). )I do.

Next, the winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the probability state of the winning result in the usual figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S729). Thereafter, the big hit fanfare time (for example, 6000 ms or 48 ms) corresponding to the special winning opening information is saved in the special game process timer area (step S730). Then, the winning prize opening illegal winning number area of the winning prize opening (the first special variable winning prize apparatus 27 or the second special variable winning prize apparatus 33) corresponding to the winning prize opening information is cleared (step S731), and the special winning opening is opened. The fraud monitoring period outside flag is saved in the big prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area corresponding to the information (step S732).
Next, the special figure game mode flag is loaded (step S733), and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag saving area (step S734). Thereby, information on the probability state when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored later.

Thereafter, a transition setting process 1 (fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1) (step S735) for setting various data for transition to the fanfare / interval process is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.
Specifically, the process number “3” relating to the fanfare / interval process, the process of setting information relating to switching of various states, and the like are performed, and the special-fluctuating process is terminated.
Here, as information for switching the various states, for example, a signal indicating that the game state for output is a special game state (big hit state) on the external information terminal board 55, a general-purpose variation display game, and a special diagram variation A test signal indicating that the probability of a winning result in the display game is a normal probability state (low probability state), information on clearing the number of winnings to the big winning opening during the big winning opening fraud monitoring period, and the special gaming state Information related to clearing the number of rounds, information to turn off the game state display LED related to the display of a high probability state, information to set the probability of a hit result in a normal fluctuation display game as a normal probability state (low probability state), power failure Information for turning off the gaming state display LED (high probability notification LED) relating to the display of the high probability state that is turned on at the time of restoration, information for controlling the special figure variation display game (for example, in the special figure variation display game) Information indicating that the probability of a hit result is a normal probability state (low probability state), and the probability of being a hit result in a normal map change display game or a special figure change display game that is output to the effect control device 300 when a power failure is restored. For example, information indicating a normal probability state (low probability state), information on clearing the number of remaining time reduction fluctuations after a big hit), and the like.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not big hit in step S716 (step S716; NO), the production mode information check process (step S736) related to the setting of the production mode is performed, and the special figure variation display game in which the time is shortened. A time reduction variation frequency update process (step S737) for managing the execution frequency is performed. Then, the special figure normal process shift setting process 1 (see step S738, FIG. 32) for setting various data for shifting to the special figure normal process, specifically, the process number “ The process of setting “0” or the like is performed, and the special figure displaying process is terminated.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step S735) in the above special figure display process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, “3” (corresponding to the processing number related to fanfare / interval processing) is set as a processing number in step S741, and the processing number (here, “3”) is set in the special figure game processing number area in step S742. Save. Next, in step S743, a signal related to the start of the big hit is saved in the external information output data area, and in step S744, a signal related to the end of the high probability & short time is saved in the test signal output data area.

Next, the process proceeds to step S745, where the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared, and in the subsequent step S746, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area, and in step S747, the normal number is saved. Save the usual figure low probability & no ordinary power support flag in the figure game mode flag area.
Next, in step S748, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared, in step S749, the high probability notification flag area is cleared to turn off the gaming state display LED related to the display of the high probability state, and in step S750, the special figure game mode flag is cleared. The special figure low probability & no short time flag is saved in the area, and the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure restoration in step S751. Next, in step S752, the time-varying variable number area for managing the number of special figure variable display games that can be executed in the short-time state is cleared. As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state are terminated, and a normal probability state and a normal operation state are obtained.

Thereafter, the number of effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step S753), and the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step S754). This is once cleared because the game control device 100 (main board) manages the production mode.
Next, the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step S755), the effect mode 1 command is saved in the effect mode command area (step S756), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 ends. . As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared (that is, the initial value in the default state) with the occurrence of the special gaming state.

[Direction mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check process (step S736) in the special figure display process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step S761). When the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step S761; YES), the effect mode information check process is terminated. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of executed special figure variation display games, and for example, in the high probability state, the effect mode that continues until the next big hit is selected. is there.

  If the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (step S761; NO), the effect remaining number of revolutions, which is the number of times the special figure variation display game can be executed until the effect mode is changed, is updated by -1 (step S762). Then, it is determined whether or not the effect remaining rotational speed has become 0 (step S763). When the remaining effect rotation number becomes 0 (step S763; YES), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step S764), and the next mode transition is made. The address of the table corresponding to the information is acquired (step S765).

  Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step S766), the effect remaining speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect remaining speed area (step S766). S767), the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be transitioned is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step S768). Thereafter, a command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step S769), the command is saved in the effect mode command area (step S770), a command setting process (step S771) is performed, and an effect mode information check process is performed. finish.

On the other hand, when the remaining effect rotation speed is not 0 (step S763; NO), that is, when the current effect mode continues even in the next special figure variation display game, the remaining effect rotation speed is the specified rotation speed (for example, 8 times). It is determined whether or not there is (step S772). If the remaining effect rotation speed is not the specified rotation speed (step S772; NO), the effect mode information check process ends.
If the remaining effect rotation speed is the specified rotation speed (step S772; YES), an effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step S773), a command setting process (step S774) is performed, and an effect mode information check process is performed. finish. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the switching before the specified rotational speed for switching the effect mode.
Thus, by managing the effect mode with the game control device 100, for example, it is possible to perform control such as generating a specific reach only in a specific effect mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Time shortening fluctuation count update processing]
Next, the details of the time shortening variation frequency update process (step S737) in the above special figure display process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the time shortening fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (high probability state) (step S781). When the special figure high probability is in progress (step S781; YES), the time shortening variation frequency update process is terminated. If it is not in the special figure high probability (step S781; NO), it is determined whether the special figure is short (short time state) (step S782).

If it is not during the special drawing time reduction (step S782; NO), the time shortening variation number update process is terminated. If the special drawing time is short (step S782; YES), the time shortening variation number for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game to be in the short time state is updated by -1 (step S783), and the time shortening variation number is updated. Is determined to be 0 (step S784). If the time shortening variation count is not 0 (step S784; NO), that is, if the time-short state continues in the next special figure variation display game, the time shortening variation count updating process is terminated.
If the time shortening variation count is 0 (step S784; YES), that is, if the time-short state ends in the current special figure variation display game, a probability information command (time-short end) is prepared (step S785). As the probability information command (short time end), the same command as that at the low probability is used.
Next, a command setting process (step S786) is performed, and then a time reduction end setting process is performed (step S787), and the time shortening variation number updating process is terminated.

[Time-saving end setting processing]
Next, details of the time reduction end setting process (step S787) in the above-described time reduction variation number update process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the time-short end setting process, first, a signal related to time-short end is saved in the external information output data area (step S791), and a signal related to time-short end is saved in the test signal output data area (step S792).
Next, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step S793), and the ordinary low probability & no power support flag is saved in the ordinary game mode flag area (step S794). Further, a special figure low probability & no short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step S795), a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step S796), and the short time ends. The setting process ends.
In this way, the number of time reductions is managed by the game control device 100, and necessary information (state) is set when the time reduction ends.
A detailed description of the types of special results and the opening / closing pattern of the big prize opening (variable winning device) in the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) of the present embodiment will be described later.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process (step S332) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIGS.
In the fanfare / interval process, first, after performing the process of updating (+1) the number of rounds in the special gaming state (step S801), the special prize opening information is opened / closed by the upper prize winning opening (second variable winning device 33). It is determined whether the patterns are 1 to 3 (step S802).
Here, as an opening / closing pattern of the upper prize winning opening (second variable prize winning device 33), as shown in FIG. 95 (described later in detail), the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 1 to the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 5 are performed. Therefore, in step S802, it is determined whether the opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 are present.

When the winning prize opening information is the upper winning prize opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 (step S802; YES), the control pointers (S (start value), E (end) corresponding to the upper winning prize opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 are set. Value)) is set (step S809), and the process proceeds to step S820 in FIG. By setting the start value and the end value of the control pointer, it is possible to set the opening / closing and closing time of the big winning opening in one round based on the big winning opening control table.
In the case of the upper grand prize opening / closing pattern 1 to 3, since the execution time of one round is short, a series of images are displayed from the start to the end of the special game state instead of every round. A round command corresponding to the number of rounds is not transmitted.
In addition, when the winning prize opening information is not the upper winning prize opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 (step S802; NO), a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step S803), and command setting processing is performed. (Step S804) is performed.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the round to be started is the first round (1R) (step S805). If it is the first round (step S805; YES), the big prize opening information is the lower big prize opening (variable prize apparatus) 27) It is determined whether the pattern is an open / close pattern (step S806).
Here, as the opening / closing pattern of the lower prize winning opening (the variable winning device 27), as shown in FIG. 96 (described later in detail), the lower big winning prize opening / closing pattern 1 to the lower great prize winning opening / closing pattern 3 Since there are three types of opening / closing patterns, in step S806, it is determined whether the pattern is one of the lower prize winning opening / closing patterns 1 to 3.
When the big prize opening information is the lower big prize opening / closing pattern (step S806; YES), the control pointer (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the lower big prize opening / closing pattern is set (step S806). S810), the process proceeds to step S820 in FIG.
In addition, the lower first prize opening opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 perform the same operation in the first round.
If the big prize opening information is not the lower big opening opening / closing pattern (step S806; NO), it is determined whether the big winning opening opening information is the upper big opening opening / closing pattern 4 (step S807).

  When the winning prize opening information is the upper winning opening / closing pattern 4 (step S807; YES), the control pointer (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the upper winning opening / closing pattern 4 is set. (Step S808), the process proceeds to step S820 in FIG. In addition, when the winning prize opening information is not the upper winning opening / closing pattern 4 (step S807; NO), the control pointer (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the upper winning opening / closing pattern 5 is set. (Step S811), and then the process proceeds to Step S820 in FIG.

On the other hand, when the started round is not the first round (1R) (step S805; NO), it is determined whether the started round is 2 to 11 rounds (step S812), and the started round is 2 to 11 rounds. If it is round (step S812; YES), it is determined whether the big prize opening information is an upper prize opening opening / closing pattern (step S813). If the big prize opening information is not the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern (step S813; NO), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to 2 to 11 rounds of the lower big winning opening opening / closing pattern are set (step S813). After that, the process proceeds to step S820 in FIG.
Further, when the special winning opening opening information is the upper winning opening / closing pattern (step S813; YES), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the second and subsequent rounds of the upper winning opening / closing pattern are set (step After that, the process proceeds to step S820 in FIG.

  If the started round is not 2 to 11 rounds (step S812; NO), it is determined whether the big prize opening information is an upper prize opening opening / closing pattern (step S816). If the winning prize opening information is the upper winning opening / closing pattern (step S816; YES), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the second and subsequent rounds of the upper winning opening / closing pattern are set (step S816). After that, the process proceeds to step S820 in FIG. If the big prize opening information is not the upper big opening opening / closing pattern (step S816; NO), it is determined whether the big winning opening opening information is the lower big opening opening / closing pattern 2 (step S817).

When the big prize opening information is the lower big prize opening / closing pattern 2 (step S817; YES), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the 12th and subsequent rounds of the lower big prize opening / closing pattern 2 are set (step S817). After that, the process proceeds to step S820 in FIG.
If the winning prize opening information is not the lower winning prize opening / closing pattern 2 (step S817; NO), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the 12th and subsequent rounds of the lower winning prize opening / closing pattern 3 are set ( Step S819), and then the process proceeds to step S820 in FIG.

  In step S820 of FIG. 55, the start value (S) of the set control pointer is saved in the jackpot control pointer area (step S820), and the set control pointer end value (E) is set in the jackpot control pointer upper limit area. Save (step S821). Then, solenoid information setting processing (step S822) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the big prize opening information is a lower big prize opening / closing pattern (step S823).

When the big prize opening information is the lower big prize opening / closing pattern (step S823; YES), the big prize opening opening process transition setting process 1 is performed (step S824), and the fanfare / interval processing ends.
Further, when the special prize opening information is not the lower prize opening opening / closing pattern (step S823; NO), the special winning opening open process transition setting process 2 is performed (step S825), and the fanfare / interval process is terminated.
Through the above processing, one of the opening / closing patterns shown in FIGS. 95 and 96 to be described later is set.

[Solenoid information setting process]
Next, details of the solenoid information setting process (step S822) in the above-described fanfare / interval process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the solenoid information setting process, first, a big winning opening control address table is set (step S831), and the address of the big winning opening control table corresponding to the big hit control pointer is acquired (step S832). Thereafter, output data is acquired and saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step S833), the opening / closing time value is acquired and saved in the special figure game process timer area (step S834), and the solenoid information setting process is performed. finish.
With this process, the opening and closing of the special winning opening and its time are set.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the process for setting the process for setting a large winning opening during the fanfare / interval process 1 (step S824) will be described with reference to FIG.
In the process for setting a process for opening a special prize opening, first, the process number is set to “4” related to the process during the opening of a special prize opening (step S841), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area ( Step S842). Thereafter, a signal relating to the opening of the lower prize winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step S843), and information on the big winning prize count number area storing the number of winning prizes to the big winning prize is cleared (step S844). . Then, the lower big prize opening controlling flag is saved in the big prize opening discrimination flag area (step S845), and the big prize opening opening process transition setting process 1 is ended.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 2]
Next, the details of the process for setting the process for setting a large winning opening during the fanfare / interval process 2 (step S825) will be described with reference to FIG.
In the process for setting a process for opening a special prize opening, first, the process number is set to “4” related to the process during the opening of a special prize opening (step S851), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area ( Step S852). Thereafter, a signal related to the opening of the upper prize winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step S853), and information on the special winning prize count number area for storing the number of winning prizes to the big winning prize is cleared (step S854). . Then, the top winning mouth opening control flag is saved in the big winning mouth distinguishing flag area (step S855), and the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, details of the special winning opening opening process (step S333) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the big prize opening opening process, first, the big hit control pointer is updated by +1 (step S861), and it is determined whether the value of the control pointer has reached the value of the control pointer upper limit value area (step S862).
When the value of the control pointer does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit value area (step S862; NO), solenoid information setting processing (step S869, see FIG. 56) is performed. Thereby, the opening / closing mode of the big prize opening according to the updated control pointer is set. Then, a process for setting a process for opening a special prize opening is performed (step S870), and the process for opening a special prize opening is ended.
As shown in FIG. 61, in the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 3, the process number is set to “4” related to the special winning opening open process (step S901), and the processing number is set in the special game process number area. After saving (step S902), the special winning opening open process transition setting process 3 ends.

  Returning to FIG. 59, when the value of the control pointer reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area (step S862; YES), the big prize opening information is the upper big prize opening short opening pattern (upper big prize opening release pattern 1). -3) is determined (step S863). When the winning prize opening information is the upper winning prize opening short opening pattern (step S863; YES), the big winning opening remaining ball process transition setting process (step S868) is performed, and the process of opening the big winning opening is ended. In this case, a series of images are displayed from the start to the end of the special game state, and no interval command or ending command is transmitted.

Further, when the big prize opening information is not the upper prize opening short opening pattern (step S863; NO), the current round number in the special game state being executed and the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM, Are compared to determine whether the current round is the final round (step S864). If it is not the final round (step S864; NO), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step S865), a command setting process (step S867) is performed, and a winning prize remaining ball process transition setting process ( Step S868) is performed, and the process for opening the special winning opening is completed.
If it is the final round (step S864; YES), an ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special gaming state is prepared (step S866), and a command setting process (step S867) is performed. Then, a special winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process (step S868) is performed, and the special winning opening open process is terminated.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the big winning opening remaining ball processing shift setting process (step S868) in the above-described big winning opening releasing process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the winning prize remaining ball processing transition setting process, first, the processing number is set to “5” related to the winning ball remaining ball processing (step S891), and the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area (step S891). S892). Thereafter, the winning prize remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms), which is the time required for the remaining ball processing, is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S893). Then, in order to close the opening / closing member 27b of the variable prize winning device 27 or the opening / closing member 33a of the second variable prize winning device 33, off data for turning off the first big prize winning solenoid 133 or the second big prize winning solenoid 134 is provided. The winning prize opening solenoid output data area is saved (step S894), and the winning prize opening remaining ball process transition setting process is terminated.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the big winning opening remaining ball process (step S334) in the special figure game process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the winning ball remaining ball processing, first, the current round number reaches the upper limit value by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit area. It is checked whether or not (round) (step S891).
If the current round in the special game state is not the final round (step S911; NO), the current round number and the interval time corresponding to the special winning opening information are saved in the special game processing timer area (step S912). ), The fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 2 (step S913) is performed, and the winning prize remaining ball process is terminated.
Note that the interval time is set to the time corresponding to the current round number and the special prize opening information (for example, 68 ms if the upper special prize opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 are set). The interval period between rounds is a period from the end of the round to the time that the winning ball remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms) elapses, and further from the elapse of the winning ball remaining ball processing time until the interval time elapses. For example, in the case of the upper prize winning opening / closing patterns 1 to 3, it is 1448 ms.

On the other hand, if the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step S911; YES), the game mode flag is loaded from the special-purpose game mode flag saving area that stores the probability state when the special result is derived. (Step S914). Then, the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag and the special winning opening release information is saved in the special game processing timer area (step S915), and the big hit end process transition setting process (step S916) is performed, and the big winning prize remaining ball The process ends.
As described above, the ending period (ending time) is set based on the big prize opening information and the game mode flag at the time of the big hit instead of the symbol information.
The ending period (ending time) is not limited to the above, and may be set based on symbol information, for example.

The ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special gaming state is that the winning ball remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms) elapses from the end of the final round, and the ending time from the elapse of the winning ball remaining ball processing time. This is the period until elapses. For example, when the special result is 2R probability variation and the special result is not in the short-time state at the time of deriving the special result, that is, when the special result is in the production mode other than the short-time state, the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern is selected. If it is 1, the ending time is 21020 ms. Therefore, the length of the ending period is 22400 ms, including 1380 ms that is spent as the extra winning ball remaining ball processing time before this ending time, and the ending effect is executed on the display device 41 and the like in this ending period.
Further, when the special result is 2R probability change and the time is short when the special result is derived, that is, when the special mode is the production mode selected in the time short state when the special result is derived, the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern is selected. If it is 2, the ending time is 20 ms. Therefore, the length of the ending period is 1400 ms, including 1380 ms that is spent as the winning ball remaining ball processing time before this ending time.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2]
Next, details of the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 2 (step S913) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2, first, “3”, which is the process number related to the fanfare / interval process, is set (step S921), and the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step S922). ).
Next, a signal relating to the end of opening of the lower prize winning opening (variable winning prize apparatus 27) is saved in the test signal output data area (step S923), and a signal relating to the opening completion of the upper prize winning opening (second variable winning prize apparatus 33). The test signal output data area is saved (step S924). Then, the special winning opening determination flag area is cleared (step S925), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 is ended.

[Big jackpot end process transition setting process]
Next, details of the jackpot end process transition setting process (step S916) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the jackpot end process transition setting process, first, “6” is set as the process number related to the jackpot end process (step S931), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step S932). Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of opening of the lower prize winning opening (variable winning apparatus 27) is saved in the test signal output data area (step S933), and a signal relating to the opening completion of the upper winning prize opening (second variable winning apparatus 33) is tested. Save in the signal output data area (step S934).

Next, information on the special winning count area for storing the number of winning prizes is cleared (step S935), and information on the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step S936). ), Information on the round number upper limit area storing the upper limit value of the round number in the special gaming state is cleared (step S937).
Then, the information in the round number upper limit information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value for the number of rounds is cleared (step S938), and the big winning opening opening information area for storing the flag for determining the opening information for the big winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step S939), and the information in the big hit control pointer area for setting the opening / closing mode of the big prize opening is cleared (step S940). Thereafter, the big hit control pointer upper limit value area for storing the end value of the big hit control pointer is cleared (step S941), the big winning opening discrimination flag area is cleared (step S942), and the big hit end process transition setting process is ended. To do.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, details of the jackpot end process (step S335) in the above-described special figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the jackpot end process, first, the probability variation determination flag set based on the type of special result that triggered the current special gaming state is set when the high probability state is set after the special gaming state ends. It is determined whether the data is high probability data (step S951).
If it is not high probability data (step S951; NO), jackpot end setting processing 1 is performed (step S95). Since this is a state that is not a high-probability rush, a process for shifting to a mode that shortens the time after the big hit ends is set.
On the other hand, when the data is high probability data (step S951; YES), jackpot end setting processing 2 is performed (step S953). Since this is a state of high probability rushing, it sets processing for shifting to a mode in which probability fluctuation (high probability start) occurs after the big hit.
Next, a probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag is prepared (step S954), and a command setting process (step S955) is performed.

Next, as a process of saving information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, an effect mode information setting table corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step S956). Then, referring to the set production mode information setting table, the production mode number of the production mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired and saved in the production mode number area (step S957). Further, the effect remaining speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired and saved in the effect remaining speed region (step S958), and the next mode transition of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is performed. Information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step S959).
Thereafter, a command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step S960), the command is saved in the effect mode command area (step S961), and command setting processing (step S962) is performed. Then, special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is performed (step S963), and the big hit end process is terminated.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (step S952) in the above jackpot end process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, a signal related to the start of time reduction is saved in the external information output data area in step S971. A signal related to the start of a short time in this region is, for example, a big hit 2 signal ON. In step S972, a signal related to the start of time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area. The signals related to the start of a short time in this area are as follows.
・ Turn on special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction status signal
・ Turn on special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction status signal
-Normal symbol 1 high probability state signal ON
・ Turn on the normal signal 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal
・ Turn on the normal extension 1 signal

Next, in step S973, the ordinary figure high probability & ordinary power support flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area, and in step S974, the special figure low probability & hourly flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area.
Next, in step S975, the probability information command (time reduction) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, and in step S976, the time reduction fluctuation initial value (eg, 70) is saved in the time reduction fluctuation area, and the process returns.
By the above processing, after the special gaming state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time shortened state. In addition, by setting an initial value (eg, 70) of the time variation number in the time variation region, the time reduction state ends when the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times (eg, 70 times).

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (step S953) in the jackpot end process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, a signal related to the start of high probability is saved in the external information output data area in step S981. The signal relating to the start of high probability in this region is, for example, a big hit 2 signal ON. In step S982, a signal related to the start of high probability is saved in the test signal output data area. The signals for the high probability start in this region include:
・ Turn on special symbol 1 high probability state signal
・ Turn on special symbol 2 high probability state signal
・ Turn on special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction status signal
・ Turn on special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction status signal
-Normal symbol 1 high probability state signal ON
・ Turn on the normal signal 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal
・ Turn on the normal extension 1 signal

Next, in step S983, the ordinary figure high probability & ordinary power support flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area, and in step S984, the special figure high probability & hourly flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area. Thereafter, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery in step S985, the time shortening variation frequency area is cleared in step S986, and the jackpot end setting process 2 ends.
With the above processing, after the special gaming state is ended, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state and the time is reduced until the next special result mode is derived.
That is, the specific game in which the game control device 100 can generate a specific game state (short-time state) that extends a period during which the normal variation winning device 37 is open for a predetermined period after the special game state ends. It serves as state generation control means.

[Special Figure Normal Process Transition Setting Process 3]
Next, details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step S963) in the above jackpot end process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “0” (corresponding to the processing number related to the special figure normal processing) is set in step S991, and the processing number (here “0”) is set in the special figure game processing number area in step S992. Save. Next, in step S993, a signal relating to the end of jackpot is saved in the external information output data area.
Here, the signals relating to the end of the big hit include OFF of the big hit 1 signal and OFF of the big hit 3 signal.

In step S994, a signal related to the end of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area. Here, the signals relating to the end of the jackpot are as follows.
・ Turn off the condition device operating signal
・ Off signal during continuous operation of equipment
・ Off signal per special symbol or signal per special symbol 2
Next, in step S995, the probability variation determination flag area is cleared, in step S996, the round LED pointer area indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared, and in step S997, the number in the short time is saved in the game state display number area. In step S998, a fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area. In step S999, a fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area. The process transition setting process 3 ends.

Next, a description will be given of a flowchart relating to the usual game process. Here, “step B” is used as a step number.
[Normal game processing]
First, the details of the usual game process (step S79) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 122 is monitored, the whole process related to the usual figure change display game is controlled, the display of the usual figure is set, and the like.
First, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 122 is performed. The details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) will be described later.
Next, a general power prize winning switch monitoring process (step B2) for monitoring the input from the second start port switch 121 is performed. The details of the general power winning switch monitoring process (step B2) will be described later.

Next, if the usual game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step B3). Note that the minimum value of the normal game processing timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the usual game process timer has become 0 (step B4).
If the value of the normal game process timer is 0 (step B4; YES), that is, if it is determined that the time is up or has already been up, the normal figure referred to branch to the process corresponding to the normal game process number. A process of setting the game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and a process of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the usual game process number is performed using the table (step B6).
Then, after performing the process of saving the return address after the branch process to the stack area (step B7), the game branch process (step B8) is performed according to the game process number.

In step B8, if the game process number is “0”, the start of fluctuation of the normal fluctuation display game is monitored, the start of fluctuation of the normal fluctuation display game, the setting of effects, A usual figure process (step B9) for setting information necessary for the execution is performed.
Note that details of the normal processing (step B9) will be described later.
If the game process number is “1” in step B8, a normal map change process (step B10) for setting information necessary for performing the normal map display process is performed.
The details of the normal map changing process (step B10) will be described later.
In step B8, if the game process number is “2”, if the result of the normal variation display game is a win, it is determined whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is being supported (during the short-time state). In response to the setting of the opening time of the corresponding electric train and the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the normal map, the normal map display processing (step B11) is performed.
The details of the normal map display process (step B11) will be described later.

In step B8, if the game process number is “3”, the process during the normal map process for setting the information necessary to continue the process during the normal map process or to perform the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process ( Step B12) is performed.
The details of the normal processing (step B12) will be described later.
If the game process number is “4” in step B8, the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step B13) is performed for setting information necessary for performing the end process for each normal figure.
The details of the ordinary electric power remaining ball process (step B13) will be described later.
If the game process number is “5” in step B8, a normal figure end process (step B14) for setting information necessary for performing the normal figure normal process (step B9) is performed.
Note that details of the normal hit end process (step B14) will be described later.
Then, after preparing various tables for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (collective display device 35) (step B15), the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the general symbol display (collective display device 35) is prepared. The symbol variation control process (step B16) according to is performed, and the regular game process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the usual game process timer is not 0 (step B4; NO), that is, the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B15 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is checked whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 122 (step B21). Then, if it is determined that there is an input to the gate switch 122 (step B21; YES), the number of common map holds is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the number of common map holds is less than an upper limit (for example, 4) (step B22). ). If it is determined that the number of reserved maps is less than the upper limit (step B22; YES), a process (step B23) of updating (+1) the number of reserved maps is performed (step B23).

Then, after performing the process (step B24) of calculating the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of pending reservations (step B24), the process of extracting the winning random number and saving it in the random number storage area of the RWM (step B25) To complete the gate switch monitoring process.
In addition, when it is determined in step B21 that there is no input to the gate switch 122 (step B21; NO), or when it is determined in step B22 that the number of reserved maps is not less than the upper limit value ( Step B22; NO) The gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Penden winning switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the general power winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-described general game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the general power prize winning switch monitoring process, first, whether or not the normal figure changing display game is in a hit state and the normal fluctuation winning device 26 is performing a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) of opening operation (whether the normal figure winning figure is being hit) It is checked whether or not (step B31). When it is determined that the normal map is being reached (step B32; YES), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the second start port switch 121 (step B32), and there is an input to the second start port switch 121 (step B32). If it determines with (Step B32; YES), the process (step B33) which updates the count number of a utility counter (+1) will be performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated utility counter has reached an upper limit value (for example, 9) (step B34), and it is determined that the count number has reached the upper limit value (step B34; YES). Then, a pointer (a hit end value) is loaded from the normal control pointer upper limit value area during hitting (step B35). Then, the loaded pointer is saved in the normal control pointer area per ordinary figure (step B36), the ordinary figure game processing timer is cleared (step B37), and the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated.
In other words, if there is a pay-per-use prize exceeding the upper limit value during the normal hit state, the hit end value is saved in the middle control processing pointer area at that time, and the normal hit state is not complete. Let it finish.

  In step B31, it is determined that the map is not being hit (step B31; NO), or in step B32, it is determined that there is no input to the second start port switch 121 (step B32; NO). ), Or when it is determined in step B34 that the count number has not reached the upper limit (step B34; NO), the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, details of the usual figure routine process (step B9) in the above-mentioned usual figure game process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the usual map routine processing, first, it is determined whether or not the number of pending drawings is “0” (step B41). After shifting to B62 and performing the normal chart normal process transition setting process 1, the normal chart normal process is terminated. The normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 performs a process for repeating the normal figure normal process next time, and will be described in detail later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B41 that the number of reserved maps is not 0 (step B42; NO), a hit random number is loaded from the RWM random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (step B42). It is determined whether the probability of a hit result in the variable display game is higher than usual (that is, at the time of high probability of usual figure), that is, whether the time is short (step B43).
If it is not at the time of normal probability (step B43; NO), it is determined whether the value of the hit random number matches the low probability determination value that is the determination value at the time of normal probability (step B44). If the value of the hit random number does not match the low probability determination value (step B44; NO), the shift information is saved in the hit flag area (step B45), and the shift stop symbol number is set in the normal stop symbol (step B45). B46), the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per common map is cleared to 0 (step B51).
On the other hand, if the value of the hit random number matches the low probability determination value (step B44; YES), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B49), and the hit stop symbol number is set to the normal stop symbol. (Step B50), the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per common map is cleared to 0 (Step B51).

  In step B43, when the normal probability is high (step B43; YES), the high probability lower limit determination value, which is the lower limit value among a plurality of consecutive determination values used when the hit random number is the normal probability, is determined. If the value of the hit random number is not less than the high probability lower limit decision value (step B47; NO), a plurality of consecutive decision values used when the value of the hit random number is normally high It is determined whether it is larger than the high probability upper limit determination value which is the upper limit value in (step B48).

If the value of the hit random number is not larger than the high probability upper limit determination value (step B48; NO), that is, if it is a hit, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B49), and the stop symbol is hit by the normal stop symbol A number is set (step B50), and the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per common map is cleared to 0 (step B51).
In step B47, if the value of the hit random number is less than the high probability lower limit determination value (step B47; YES), or if the value of the hit random number is greater than the upper limit determination value in step B48 (step B48; YES) ), That is, in the case of an outage, the outage information is saved in the hit flag area (step B45), the outage stop symbol number is set in the normal figure stop symbol (step B46), and the random number storage area per common figure (holding number 1 Is cleared to 0 (step B51). That is, the determination value that determines that the hit of the normal figure is the same when the values of the hit random numbers coincide with each other is a single value when the normal figure has a low probability, and a plurality of continuous values when the normal figure has a high probability.

After clearing the random number storage area (for holding number 1) per ordinary figure to 0 (step B51), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B52). Then, a decorative common figure variation pattern command corresponding to the stop symbol is prepared (step B53), and a command setting process (step B54) is performed. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the common map display game on the display device 41 or the like.
After that, the random number storage area per usual figure is shifted (step B55), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B56), and the usual figure holding number is updated by -1 (step B57). That is, in accordance with the execution of the usual map change display game related to the oldest number of reserved maps 1, the process of moving up the ranks of the numbers 2 to 4 of the reserved maps after the reserved number 1 I do. As a result of this processing, the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area from 2 to 4 is shifted from the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area to 1 for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area. Will be. Then, the value for the usual figure reservation number 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the usual figure reservation number is decremented by one.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the power transmission support is in progress (during the short-time state) (step B58). ) Is set (step B59). If the power transmission support is in progress (step B58; YES), a normal map change time (for example, 1 second) at the time of power transmission support is set (step B60). Then, the normal chart process transition setting process (step B61) is performed, and the normal chart routine process is terminated.

[Usual map transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the normal figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step B62) in the above normal figure normal process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “0” (corresponding to the process number related to the normal figure normal process) is set as a process number for shifting to the normal figure normal process in step B71, and the normal figure game process number area is processed in step B72. Save the number (here "0"). Next, in step B73, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area, and the process returns. As a result, the normal process is shifted to the normal processing next time.

[Process transition setting process during normal map change]
Next, details of the process transition setting process (step B61) during the normal map change in the above normal map normal process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “1” (corresponding to the process number related to the process of changing the normal map) is set in step B81, and the process number (here, “1”) is set in the normal game process number area in step B82. Save. Next, in step B83, a signal related to the start of normal diagram change (for example, the normal symbol 1 change signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area, and in step B84, the changing flag is saved in the normal figure change control flag area. Next, in step B85, the flashing control timer initial value (for example, 200 ms), which is the initial value of the timer of the flashing cycle of the general display (the general display LED of the collective display device 35), is saved in the general flashing control timer area. Then, the process transition setting process during normal map change is terminated. As a result, the process shifts to the normal map change process next time.

[Processing during normal map changes]
Next, the details of the normal-fluctuating process (step B10) in the above-described normal game process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, a process for setting a transition to a normal map display process is performed in step B91. This is a setting for shifting to the normal map display processing, and details will be described later. After this processing, it returns.

[Transition setting process during normal map display]
Next, the details of the process for setting the transition to the normal map display process (step B91) in the process for changing the normal map will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “2” (corresponding to the processing number related to the processing for displaying the normal map) is set in step B101, and the processing number (here, “2”) is set in the general game processing number area in step B102. Save. Next, a normal map display time is set (for example, 600 ms) in step B103. Next, in step B104, the normal figure display time is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area, and in step B105, a signal related to the end of the normal figure change (for example, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area. . Next, in step B106, the stop flag is saved in the usual figure fluctuation control flag area and the process returns. As a result, the process moves to the normal map display process next time.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, details of the processing for displaying a normal map (step B11) in the above-described normal game processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the process of displaying a normal map, first, a process of loading a hit flag (hit information or out-of-game information) set in the normal map normal process (step B111) and clearing the RWM hit flag area (step B112) is performed. Do.
Next, it is determined whether or not the loaded hit flag is a hit (step B113). (Description with FIG. 73) is performed, and the process for displaying the normal map is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step B113 that the hit flag is a win (step B113; YES), a process (step B114) is performed to determine whether the power transmission support is in progress (during time reduction).
If the normal power support is not in progress (step B114; NO), the normal power open time (for example, 100 ms) when there is no general power support is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B115). In addition, the hit start pointer value (control pointer value) when there is no general power support is saved in the control pointer area during normal map (step B116), and the hit end pointer value (control pointer value) when there is no general power support is saved. Save in the control pointer upper limit value area per figure (step B117). Thereby, the opening mode of the normal variation winning device 26 in the normal operation state is set, and for example, it is possible to open twice. Thereafter, a normal process transition setting process (step B121) is performed. This is a setting for shifting to the normal processing during the normal map, and details will be described later. After this processing, it returns.
The hit start pointer value (control pointer value) when there is no ordinary power support is set to “0”, the hit end pointer value is set to “2”, and the hit start pointer value (control pointer value) at the time of ordinary power support is “ 3 ”and the hit end pointer value is set to“ 9 ”.

  On the other hand, if the power transmission support is in progress (step B114; YES), the power transmission open time (for example, 1352 ms) at the time of power transmission support is saved in the normal game processing timer area (step B118). Further, the hit start pointer value (control pointer value) at the time of normal power support is saved in the control pointer area during the normal map (step B119), and the hit end pointer value (control pointer value) at the time of normal power support is saved to the normal map. Save in the middle control pointer upper limit area (step B120). As a result, an opening mode of the normal variation winning device 26 in the short-time state is set, and for example, it is possible to open four times. After that, a normal process transition setting process (step B122) is performed, and the normal chart display process is terminated.

[Normal processing transition setting process per ordinary figure]
Next, details of the process for setting the transition to the normal map process (step B121) in the process for displaying the normal map will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “3” (corresponding to the process number related to the normal process per ordinary figure) is set in step B131, and the process number (here, “3”) is set in the usual game process number area in step B132. Save. Next, in step B133, a signal related to the start of the normal signal (for example, the signal per normal symbol is turned ON) and a signal related to the start of the normal electric operation (for example, the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned ON) are output in the test signal output data area. To save. Next, in step B134, ON data is saved in the ordinary power solenoid output data area, and in step B135, the ordinary power count number area for storing the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 26 is cleared. In the monitoring period, the normal power fraud winning number area for storing the number of winnings in the normal variation winning apparatus 26 is cleared. Save outside the period) and return. As a result, the next time, the routine shifts to the normal processing.

[Usual processing per map]
Next, the details of the normal hit processing (step B12) in the above-described normal game processing will be described with reference to FIG.
In the middle processing per map, first, the processing control pointer per base map is loaded and prepared (step B141), and then the value of the loaded control pointer per base map is set in the middle control pointer upper limit value area per base map. It is determined whether or not a value (value of hit end: for example, “4” or the like) has been reached (step B142).
If the value of the control pointer during the normal map does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal map (step B142; NO), the control pointer during the normal map is updated by +1 (step B143), A normal electric operation transition setting process (step B144) is performed, and the process during the normal map is terminated.
Further, when the value of the control pointer during the normal map reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal map (the value of the hit end) (step B142; YES), the process control pointer during the normal map in step B143. Without performing the process of updating (+1) the area, the normal power operation transition setting process (step B144) is performed, and the normal process is terminated.

[Normal electric operation transition setting process]
Next, details of the normal power operation transition setting process (step B144) in the above-described normal process will be described with reference to FIG.
The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process for performing drive control of the normal electric solenoid 132 for opening and closing the normal variation winning device 26, and the process branches according to the value of the control pointer.
When the routine starts, branching is performed using a control pointer in step B151. Here, the process branches according to the value of the control pointer loaded and prepared in step B141. Specifically, when the value of the control pointer is any of 0, 3, 5, and 7 in step B151, the process proceeds to step B152 to control the blockage of the normal variation winning device 26. The wait time (for example, 2800 ms or 1000 ms) after closing of the corresponding normal variation winning device 26 is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area, and the ordinary electric solenoid output data area is turned off to turn off the ordinary electric solenoid 132 in step B153. Set off-data and end the normal operation transition setting process. As a result, the closing time after the normal variation winning device 26 is opened becomes the above-mentioned wait time, and the normal variation winning device 26 is blocked during this period.

  On the other hand, if the value of the control pointer is any one of 1, 4, 6 and 8 in step B151, the process proceeds to step B154 to control the release of the normal variation winning device 26, and therefore the normal corresponding to the control pointer is controlled. The normal power open time (for example, any one of 100 ms, 5200 ms, and 1352 ms), which is the open time of the variable winning device 26, is saved in the general game processing timer area, and the general power solenoid 132 is turned on to turn on the general power solenoid 132 in step B155. The ON data is set in the solenoid output data area, and the normal power operation transition setting process is terminated. As a result, the opening time of the normal variable winning device 26 becomes the above-mentioned normal power opening time, and the normal variable winning device 26 is opened during this period.

  If the value of the control pointer is either 2 or 9 in step B151, the process proceeds to step B156, where the release control of the normal variation winning device 26 is terminated and the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step B13) is performed. In order to do this, “4” is set as the process number. Next, in step B157, the process number (here, “4”) is saved in the usual game process number area. Next, in Step B158, the ordinary electric ball remaining time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the ordinary game processing timer area, and then in Step B159, off data is set in the ordinary electric solenoid output data area in order to turn off the ordinary electric solenoid 132. Save and end the normal operation transition setting process.

[Penden residual ball processing]
Next, details of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (step B13) in the above-described ordinary game process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, in step B161, an end process transition setting process is performed. This is a setting for shifting to a normal hit end process, which will be described in detail later. After this processing, it returns.

[Usual map end process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal call end process transition setting process (step B161) in the above-described ordinary electric power remaining ball process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, “5” (corresponding to the processing number related to the end processing per ordinary figure) is set in step B171, and the processing number (here, “5”) is set in the ordinary game processing number area in step B172. Save. Next, in step B173, the normal ending time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the normal game processing timer area, and in step B174, a signal related to the end of the operation of the normal variable winning device 26 (for example, the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal) OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area. Next, in step B175, the normal power count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 26 is cleared. Then, in step B176, the normal control pointer area per normal map is cleared, in step B177, the normal control pointer upper limit value area per normal map is cleared, and the normal chart end process transition setting process ends. As a result, next time, the process shifts to the end process for each figure.

[End processing per regular map]
Next, the details of the normal game end process (step B14) in the above-described normal game process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine is started, a normal process transition setting process 2 is performed in step B181. This is a setting for shifting to normal processing, which will be described in detail later. After this processing, it returns.

[Usuzu usual process transition setting process 2]
Next, details of the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step B181) in the above-mentioned normal figure end process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the routine starts, in step B191, “0” (corresponding to the process number related to the normal routine process) is set, and in step B192, the process number (here, “0”) is set in the general game process number area. Save. Next, in step B193, a signal related to the end of the normal symbol (for example, the signal per normal symbol is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area. Next, in step B194, a fraud monitoring period flag (a flag that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 26) is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area, and the process returns. As a result, next time, the routine shifts to normal processing.

The flowchart related to the usual game process has been described above. Next, a description will be given of a subroutine after step S80 in the above-described timer interrupt process.
Here, description will be made using “step C” as the step number.
[Segment LED editing processing]
First, the details of the segment LED editing process (step S80) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
The segment LED editing process is a process related to the segment LEDs provided in the collective display device 35 (FIGS. 2, 4, and 5). As described above, the collective display device 35 displays ordinary maps and special diagrams. In addition, a special figure or a general chart start memory hold display (special figure hold display, general figure hold display) and a game state display are performed.
These displays are configured by, for example, a plurality of indicators (for example, one lamp or a seven-segment indicator) using LEDs as light emission sources. More specifically, for example, special figure 1 hold indicator, special figure 2 hold indicator, universal figure hold indicator, first game state display unit, second game state display unit, error display unit, round display unit, etc. The segment LED editing process includes segment LEDs having functions, and performs settings related to their drive.

In the segment LED editing process, first, a general chart hold number table in which the display mode on the general map hold indicator is defined (step C1), display data corresponding to the general map hold number is acquired, and the general map hold is obtained. The data is saved in the segment area of the display (for example, the segment area of the general-purpose hold display) (step C2). Next, a special figure 1 hold number table in which the display mode on the special figure 1 hold indicator is defined is set (step C3), and display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired to display the special figure 1 hold display. The data is saved in the segment area (for example, the segment area of the special figure 1 holding display) (step C4).
Thereafter, a special figure 2 hold number table in which the display mode on the special figure 2 hold indicator is defined is set (step C5), and display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired to obtain the special figure 2 hold indicator. Are saved in the segment area (for example, the segment area of the special figure 2 holding display) (C6). Further, a round display LED display table in which a display mode in the round display unit is defined is set (C7), display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer is acquired, and a segment area of the round display unit (for example, round display) (Step C8).

Next, a game state display table in which display modes on the first game state display unit and the second game state display unit in the collective display device 35 are defined (step C9), and display data corresponding to the game state display number is set. Is acquired and saved in the segment area of each game state display section (for example, the segment area of the first game state display section or the second game state display section) (step C10). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the high probability notification flag relating to notification that the probability state of jackpot is a high probability state when the power failure is restored (step C11). If the high-probability notification flag is on (step C11; YES), that is, if the high-probability state is being notified, the segment LED editing process is terminated.
If the high probability notification flag is not on (step C11; NO), the off data of the high probability notification LED is saved in the segment area of the third gaming state display section (for example, the segment area of the error display section) ( Step C12), the segment LED editing process is terminated.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S81) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the magnet fraud monitoring process, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 126 is checked to determine whether there is an abnormality, and fraud notification is set to start or end.
In the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 126 and taken into the third input port 162 (input port 3), the magnetic sensor 126 is turned on, that is, an abnormal magnetism is detected. Is determined (step C21). Note that in step C21 in FIG. 86, the process is for detecting magnet fraud, so the notation "magnet sensor is on?"
When the magnetic sensor 126 is on (step C21; YES), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer for measuring the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by one (step C22), and the timer It is determined whether the time is up (step C23).

When the magnet fraud monitoring timer is up (step C23; YES), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C24), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value ( For example, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step C25). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step C26), a magnet fraud flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C27), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area. (Step C33). That is, when the magnetic sensor 126 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, 8 interruptions), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.
That is, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred by continuously inputting the magnetic sensor detection signal by interrupting it eight times. This is because the sensing of the magnetic sensor 126 is 4 ms, and it is determined that the fraud has occurred at 32 ms. Therefore, if the magnetic sensor detection signal is turned ON and interrupted eight times, it can be determined that the fraud is occurring.

  On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 126 is not on (step C21; NO), that is, when no abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step C28), and the magnet fraud that defines the magnet fraud notification time is defined. If the notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step C29). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to zero. Next, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step C30). In addition, also when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not expired (step C23; NO), the process proceeds to step C29.

When the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step C30; NO), that is, when the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated.
In addition, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step C30; YES), that is, when the time is up or when the time has already expired, and when the fraud notification period ends, If not, a command for terminating magnet fraud notification is prepared (step C31). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step C32), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step C33).

When the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step C33; YES), the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step C33; NO), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step C34), command setting processing is performed (step C35), and the magnet fraud monitoring processing is terminated. .
Here, in FIG. 86, the arrow indicates the processing route (normal route) when there is no magnet fraud and is normal. That is, in the normal case, the process route of step C21, step C28, step C29, step C30, step C31, step C32, step C33, RET is passed. Normally, this normal route is repeated.

[Radio fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S82) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the radio fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 127 and the start or end of fraud notification is set.
In the radio wave fraud monitoring processing, first, the radio wave sensor 127 is turned on, that is, abnormal from the state of the detection signal output from the radio wave sensor 127 and taken into the third input port 162 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 163. It is determined whether or not it is a state in which a valid radio wave is detected (step C41). When the radio wave sensor is on (step C41; YES), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step C42).

  Then, a radio fraud notification command is prepared (step C43), a radio fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a radio fraud flag (step C44), and it is determined whether the prepared radio fraud flag matches the value of the radio fraud flag area. (Step C49). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

On the other hand, if the radio wave sensor is not on (step C41; NO), that is, if no abnormal radio wave is detected, -1 is updated unless the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is 0 (step S41). C45). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (step C46).
If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (step C46; NO), that is, if the time is not up, the radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is 0 (step C46; YES), that is, when the time is up or when the time has already expired, and when the period of the unauthorized notification ends, If not, a command for terminating radio fraud notification is prepared (step C47), a radio fraud release flag is prepared as a radio fraud flag (step C48), and the prepared radio fraud flag is a value in the radio fraud flag region. (Step C49).

If the prepared radio fraud flag matches the value of the radio fraud flag area (step C49; YES), the radio fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step C49; NO), the prepared radio fraud flag is saved in the radio fraud flag area (step C50), command setting processing is performed (step C51), and radio fraud monitoring processing is terminated. .
Here, in FIG. 87, the arrow indicates a processing route (normal route) when there is no radio wave fraud and is normal. That is, in the normal case, the process route of step C41, step C45, step C46, step C47, step C48, step C49, and RET is passed. Normally, this normal route is repeated.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S83) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS.
In the external information editing process, based on the monitoring results in the payout command transmission process (step S74), the prize opening switch / error monitoring process (step S77), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S81), and the radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S82). Then, processing to create information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device and set the information in an output buffer is performed.

As shown in FIG. 88, in the external information editing process, first, a main prize ball signal editing process (step C61) for setting information related to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a start opening signal for editing a winning opening winning signal. Edit processing (step C62) is performed. Next, the unique information signal editing process is performed in step C63. This is to acquire unique information (unique ID) of the main board, and details will be described later.
Next, in step C64, if the security signal control timer is not 0, "-1" is updated. The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer has become 0 (step C65). The security signal control timer is for outputting a security signal for a predetermined time when power is turned on by clearing the RAM, and a timer initial value (for example, 256 ms) is set in step S27.
If the value of the security signal control timer is 0 in step C65, that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the routine proceeds to step C66, where it is determined whether the unique information output request has been made. The unique information here is unique information of the main board, that is, unique ID.
If the unique information output request is not requested in step C66, the process proceeds to step C67 to set the unique information signal output request flag when the power is turned on, and sets the unique information signal output requested flag when the power is turned on in step C68. . As a result, the unique ID (the unique information of the main board) is output to the outside when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (for example, when the store is opened). After step C68, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area in step C69, and the process proceeds to step C72 and subsequent steps.

Further, if the unique information output request has already been made in step C66, the process jumps to steps C67 and 68 and proceeds to step C69.
On the other hand, if the security signal control timer has already expired in step C65 or has expired after the update of “−1”, the process branches to step C70 to clear the output request flag of the specific information signal when the power is turned on. After the security signal OFF data is saved in the external information output data area in C71, the process proceeds to step C72 and subsequent steps. That is, if the security signal control timer has already expired, the external output of the security signal related to power-on is not set.

Next, in Steps C72, 73, 74, 75, and 76, whether the magnet is fraudulent, the radio wave is fraudulent, the lower university prize opening fraud is occurring, the upper university winning prize fraud is occurring, or the electric power fraud is occurring Respectively. In these processes, a determination is made based on the monitoring result in the “error check process” of FIG. That is, based on whether or not an error flag (error occurrence flag) is set in the “error check process” of FIG.
If any one or more frauds have occurred, the process proceeds to step C77 to save the on data of the security signal in the external information output data area, and further outputs the on data of the gaming machine error status signal to the test signal in step C78. Save to the data area and proceed to Step C80. As a result, fraud and gaming machine error states are output to the outside.
On the other hand, if step C72 is NO, step C73 is NO, step C74 is NO, step C75 is NO, step C76 is NO, that is, if steps C72, 73, 74, 75, and 76 are all NO, step C76 The process branches from step C79 to save OFF data of the gaming machine error state signal in the test signal output data area, and then proceeds to the processing after step C80.

After step C78 or step C79, the process then proceeds to step C80, where it is determined whether or not a glass frame open error has occurred. In this process, the determination based on the monitoring result in the “error check process” of FIG. 24 is performed instead of directly monitoring the opening of the glass frame 5 (door) based on the signal of the glass frame open detection switch 211. . That is, it is determined whether a glass frame opening error is in progress based on whether or not an error flag (error occurrence flag) is set in the “error check process” of FIG.
If the glass frame opening error is not in progress, the process proceeds to step C81 to determine whether or not the front frame opening error is in progress. In this process, a determination is made based on the monitoring result in the “error check process” of FIG.
If the front frame opening error is in progress, the process proceeds to step C82. Further, if the glass frame opening error is in progress at step C80, the process also proceeds to step C82.
That is, if the glass frame opening error or the front frame opening error is in progress, the process proceeds to step C82, where it is determined whether or not the unique information output has been requested in step C82. The unique information signal output request flag when the glass frame / front frame is opened is set. In step C84, the unique information signal output requested flag is set when the glass frame / front frame is opened, and then the process proceeds to step C85. Accordingly, at this time, when the glass frame 5 or the front frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 is opened (for example, including unauthorized opening), a unique ID (specific information of the main board) is output to the outside. .
On the other hand, if the unique information output request has been made in step C82, the process jumps to step C85.

When the process proceeds from step C84 or step C82 to step C85, on-data of the door / frame opening signal (that is, the opening signal of the glass frame 5 (door) / front frame 4 (frame)) is output to the external information output data in step C85. In step C86, the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area, and the process proceeds to step C89. This is because an error signal is output to the outside when an event of door or frame opening occurs.
On the other hand, if NO in step C81, that is, if the glass frame opening error or the front frame opening error is not occurring, the door or frame opening event does not occur, so there is no need to set such output data. From step C87, the output request flag for the specific information signal when the glass frame / front frame is opened is cleared. In step C88, the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area. Proceed to

In step C89, it is determined whether or not a big hit operation is being performed. If the big hit operation is being performed, it is determined in step C90 whether or not specific information output has been requested. In step C92, the unique information signal output request flag is set, and in step C92, the unique information signal output requested flag is set. Then, the process proceeds to step C93. Therefore, at this time, when the big hit of the pachinko machine 1 occurs, the unique ID (the unique information of the main board) is output to the outside.
On the other hand, if the unique information output request has been made at the time of the big hit in Step C90, Steps C91 and 92 are jumped and the process proceeds to Step C93.
In step C93, the ON data of one jackpot signal is saved in the external information output data area, and the process proceeds to step C94.

On the other hand, when the big hit is not in operation at step C89 (NO), the process branches to step C95 to clear the output request flag of the unique information signal at the big hit, and at step C96, the off data of one big hit signal is output to the external information. Save to the data area and proceed to Step C94. Therefore, when no big hit occurs, there is no output of the unique ID (the unique information of the main board) to the outside.
When the process proceeds from step C93 or step C96 to step C94, if the symbol determination count control timer is not 0 in step C94, (-1) is updated, and in the following step C97, the symbol determination count control timer is 0 (time up). Check whether or not. The symbol determination frequency control timer is a timer for controlling the on time of the symbol determination frequency signal.
If the symbol determination count control timer is not up (NO), the process proceeds to step C99, where the ON data of the symbol determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area and the process returns. When the routine is repeated and it is determined in step C97 that the symbol determination count control timer has timed up (YES), the process proceeds to step C98, where the off-data of the symbol determination count signal is saved in the external information output data area to edit the external information. The process ends.
In this way, every time the special symbol pattern finishes changing, it is output as external information.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step C61) in the above-described external information editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the main prize ball signal editing process, a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning a prize opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10) is output to an external device. It is processing.
In the main prize ball signal editing process, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step C101). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step C102). If the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step C102; YES), it is determined whether the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0 (step C103).

If the main prize ball signal output count is not 0 (step C103; NO), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by -1 (step C104), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area outputs the main prize ball signal output count. The control timer initial value is saved (step C105). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (eg, 128 ms) of the on state (eg, high level) of the main prize ball signal and the time (eg, 64 ms) of the off state (eg, low level). It is time (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, on data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C107), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.
If the main prize ball signal output count is 0 (step C103; YES), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S103). C108), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step C102; NO), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step C106). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).
If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step C106; YES), the process proceeds to step C107. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step C106; NO), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step C108), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.
In this way, the main prize ball signal is output from the game control device 100 to the external device (for example, the management device 140) as one pulse of the main prize ball signal for every 10 winning balls to be paid out. Note that the payout control device 200 outputs a 1-pulse prize ball signal generated every 10 payouts to an external device (for example, the management device 140).
That is, the game control device 100 (main board) updates the main prize ball number signal output count by +1 for each 10 payout schedule (each time a payout command is transmitted) (subroutine in the payout command transmission process), and then updates ( The main award ball number signal is output for the number of output times set). Then, in response to the main award ball signal output for every 10 payout schedules as described above, the award ball signal is transmitted when 10 payouts are actually made from the payout control device 200 (payout board). By matching the schedule and the result, it is possible to cope with illegal payout.

In addition, the management device 140 as an external device can determine from the main winning ball signal when the winning has occurred, which helps the hall sales policy.
Specifically, it can be determined whether a winning occurs during a big hit or a winning that occurs during a normal game. For example, it is not strange to win a lot of prizes during a big hit, but if there are a lot of prizes during normal games, it can be judged that the nail adjustment is too sweet. become.
On the other hand, if the main prize ball signal is not output to the external device, but only the prize ball signal from the payout control device 200 that is output when the payout is completed, the payout is performed because the ball has run out during the big hit. In other words, it is impossible to determine when a winning has occurred when, for example, when the replenishment is delayed after the jackpot is over.
For this reason, if the replenishment is delayed after the end of the jackpot, there will be a large number of winnings (payouts) during normal games, which may lead to inadequacies in sales data. There is sex.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, both the main prize ball signal and the prize ball signal from the payout control device 200 are used together, and the main prize ball signal is output immediately after winning a prize. The problem disappears.

[Start signal editing process]
Next, details of the start port signal editing process (step C62) in the external information editing process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
The start port signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the first start port switch 120 or the second start port switch 121.
In the start port signal editing process, first, if the start port signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step C111). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (step C112). If the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (step C112; YES), it is determined whether the number of start port signal outputs is 0 (step C113).

If the start port signal output count is not 0 (step C113; NO), the start port signal output count is updated by -1 (step C114), and the start port signal output control timer initial value is entered in the start port signal output control timer area. Is saved (step C115). The initial value of the start port signal output control timer is a time obtained by adding the ON state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the OFF state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the start port signal ( For example, 192 ms). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the start port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C117), and the start port signal editing process is terminated.
When the number of start port signal outputs is 0 (step C113; YES), off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step C118). Then, the start port signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not 0 (step C112; NO), it is determined whether the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step C116). Note that the fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (step C116; YES), the process proceeds to step C117. If the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step C116; NO), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( Step C118), the start port signal editing process is terminated.

[Inherent information signal editing processing]
Next, the details of the unique information signal editing process (step C63) in the external information editing process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step C121 whether serial communication is in progress. This is to determine whether or not the game control device 100 is executing serial communication with the management device 140 (or the card unit 551). If serial communication is being performed, the game control device 100 returns this time.
If the serial communication is not in progress, the processing after step C122 is executed. The game control device 100 and the management device 140 are unidirectional communication, and only signal transmission from the game control device 100 to the management device 140 is allowed. Therefore, whether or not serial communication is in progress is determined by checking whether or not the serial transmission circuit in the game control device 100 is communicating.
If the serial communication is not in progress, it is checked in step C122 whether the output request flag for the specific information signal is set. If NO (the output request flag is not set) in step C122, the routine is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if YES in step C122 (output request flag is set), the process proceeds to step C123 to clear the output request flag of the unique information signal.
Here, the output request flag of the specific information signal is independently set corresponding to “security signal at power-on”, “door / frame opening signal”, and “big hit 1 signal”. If a plurality are established at the same time, priority is given and processing is performed one by one. Therefore, not all output request flags are cleared at once.
Next, in step C124, CPU specific information acquisition processing is performed. This is a process of acquiring unique information, and details will be described later. After step C124, the process returns.

[CPU specific information acquisition processing]
Next, the details of the CPU unique information acquisition process (step C125) in the unique information signal editing process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step C131, a start code is written into a serial transmission buffer in the game control apparatus 100. This is a code for causing the management device 140 on the receiving side to specify that it is the start of serial communication. Next, in step C132, it is determined whether or not the acquisition is only the chip code (main board unique ID). If the acquisition is only the chip code, the process jumps to step C137, and the chip code identification code is written in the serial transmission buffer. The chip code as the individual identification information (unique ID) is read out, written into the serial transmission buffer, and the process returns. As a result, the unique ID is acquired and output to the management apparatus 140.

  On the other hand, if the acquisition is not only the chip code in step C132, the process proceeds to step C133 and the manufacturer code identification code is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the manufacturer code is read out and written in the serial transmission buffer in step C134. Next, in step C135, the product code identification code is written in the serial transmission buffer, and in step C136, the product code is read out and written in the serial transmission buffer, and then the process proceeds to step C137. As a result, the manufacturer code and the product code are acquired and output to the management device 140. Therefore, when the acquisition is not only the chip code in step C132, the manufacturer code, the product code, and the chip code are sequentially acquired and output to the management apparatus 140.

In this way, by using the serial transfer (transmission) function provided in advance in the game control apparatus 100, it is not necessary to prepare a transfer (transmission) process again with a program (for example, a game program). Increased efficiency.
In addition, the number of wirings is reduced as compared with parallel transfer (transmission), thereby reducing the cost.
In addition, as described above, the unique ID or the like is not transmitted from the game control device 100 to the management device 140 by serial communication, but may be transmitted by parallel communication, for example.
For example, of the CPU unique information, the manufacturer code is 3 bytes, the product code is 32 bytes, and the chip code is 4 bytes. As described above, since the CPU specific information is very long information, in this embodiment, the information to be transmitted is made variable according to the situation so as to avoid the occurrence of communication congestion.
This background will be described.
For example, if all data related to CPU-specific information is sent each time an event of opening the glass frame 5 or the front frame 4 (opening of the door or frame) occurs, if the door or frame is opened and closed intentionally, a large amount There is a possibility that communication will occur and communication congestion may occur.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the CPU-specific information is transmitted with variable length according to the situation, so that the occurrence of communication congestion can be avoided.
In addition, it is good also as fixed length which transmits not only the above but a manufacturer code, a product code, and a chip code each time, for example. In that case, the manufacturer code identification code, the product code identification code, and the chip code identification code may not be inserted.

Next, the types of special results and the open / close patterns of the special prize opening (variable prize winning device) in the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.
There are four types of special results: 2R variation, 11R variation, 11R normal and 16R variation. The 2R probability variation, 11R probability variation and 16R probability variation have 2, 11, and 16 rounds in the special gaming state, respectively, and the probability state is set to the high probability state until the next special result is derived after the special gaming state ends. In addition, this is a special result that is considered to be a short-time state.
On the other hand, in the 11R normal, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is 11 rounds, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to the normal probability state, and the special figure variation display for a predetermined number of times (eg, 70 times) This is a special result that takes a short time until the game is executed.

  In addition, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) according to the present embodiment includes a lower prize opening (variable prize winning device 27) and an upper prize winning opening (second variable prize winning device 33), each having a plurality of opening / closing patterns. Yes. One opening / closing pattern is selected from the plurality of opening / closing patterns in accordance with the type of special result. In the following opening / closing pattern, the value shown as the opening time of the big winning opening indicates the maximum opening time, and when a predetermined number of game balls flow into the winning opening before the maximum opening time elapses in one round Closes the grand opening without waiting for the maximum opening time to elapse and the round ends.

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an opening / closing pattern of the upper university winning opening (second variable winning device 33).
As the opening / closing patterns of the upper prize winning opening (second variable winning apparatus 33), there are five types of opening / closing patterns from the upper winning prize opening / closing pattern 1 to the upper winning prize opening / closing pattern 5.
Details are as follows.
In the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 1 shown in FIG. 95 (a), when the special result is 2R probability variation and the special result is not derived from the short-time state (that is, there is no general power support when the big hit occurs (general figure low probability) ) Case).
In the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 1, the opening time of 52 ms is set in the first round (1R), and the opening time of 52 ms is set in the next round (2R) after the interval period of 1448 ms is interposed. Then, after the ending time of 22400 ms elapses, the special game state ends.

In the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 2 shown in FIG. 95 (b), when the special result is 2R probability variation and the special result is derived in a short time state (that is, there is a general power support when a big hit occurs (general high) Probability) case).
The upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 2 has the same opening / closing manner as the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 1, but the ending time is 1400 ms.
The upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 3 shown in FIG. 95 (c) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation. In the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 3, the round in which the opening time of 52 ms is set is 16 rounds with the interval period of 1448 ms, and after the ending time of 1400 ms elapses, the special gaming state is ended.

The upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 4 shown in FIG. 95 (d) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation. In the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 4, first, in the first round (1R), the opening of 52 ms is performed 16 times with the closing time of 1448 ms similarly to the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 3.
Up to this point, the opening / closing mode is the same as that of the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 3, and it is difficult to recognize which opening / closing pattern the player has as the same effect on the display device 41 or the like. Thereafter, a promotion video is displayed on the display device 41 during the closing time of 6300 ms to notify that it is the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 4, and the opening of 26168 ms is performed to finish the first round. After the end of the first round, a round in which an opening time of 27000 ms is set with an interval period of 2000 ms is repeated 15 times, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.
In this way, if the first round (1R) of the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 3 and the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 4 is set to the same opening / closing cycle (52 ms open, 1448 ms close), any big hit occurs. The player has difficulty in recognizing until the end of the cycle, and has the effect of enhancing the interest of the game.

The upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 5 shown in FIG. 95 (e) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation.
In the upper prize winning opening / closing pattern 5, in the first round (1R), first, 52 ms is opened, then 26948 ms is opened with a closing time of 5948 ms, and the first round is completed. After the end of the first round, a round in which an opening time of 27000 ms is set with an interval period of 2000 ms is repeated 15 times, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

Next, FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an opening / closing pattern of the lower major prize opening (variable prize winning device 27).
There are three types of opening / closing patterns from the lower major winning opening / closing pattern 1 to the lower major winning opening / closing pattern 3 as the opening / closing patterns of the lower major winning opening (the variable winning device 27).
Details are as follows.
The lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 1 shown in FIG. 96A is selected when the special result is 11R probability change or 11R normal.
In the lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 1, in the first round (1R), first, the opening is performed for 200 ms, and then the opening is performed for 28000 ms with the closing time of 5800 ms, and the first round is completed. After the end of the first round, a round in which an opening time of 27000 ms is set across an interval period of 2000 ms is repeated 10 times, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

The lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 2 shown in FIG. 96 (b) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation.
In this lower big prize opening / closing pattern 2, the opening / closing mode is the same as that of the lower big prize opening / closing pattern 1 or 3 until the end of the eleventh round. It is difficult to recognize whether the pattern is an open / close pattern. After the end of 11 rounds, a round in which an opening time of 200 ms is set with an interval period of 1500 ms is repeated 5 times, and after the ending time of 1400 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

The lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 3 shown in FIG. 96 (c) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variation.
In this lower big prize opening / closing pattern 3, the opening / closing mode is the same as that of the lower big prize opening / closing pattern 1 or 2 until the end of the eleventh round. It is difficult to recognize whether the pattern is an open / close pattern. Then, after the end of the 11th round, a promotion video is displayed on the display device 41 in an interval period of 13000 ms to notify that the lower prize winning opening / closing pattern 3 is present. Thereafter, a round in which an opening time of 27000 ms is set is repeated 5 times with an interval period of 2000 ms, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

Next, control of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 to 159.
Here, description will be made using “step D” and “step E” as step numbers.
The special drawing controlled by the production control device 300 is a special drawing for production displayed on the display device 41, and the special drawing in the description of the control process of the production control device 300 below is the special drawing for this production. (Decoration that is not this special figure).

Further, in general, a “character” means a character or an animal having a property or character, or a property or character, and a computer term may mean a character. However, in the description of the effect control device 300 below, particularly in the case of the description of the image display control using VDP, a series of movies, background images, images of special patterns (special design decorative pattern and fourth pattern), characters of characters, etc. A grouped still image or moving image such as an image may be referred to as a character, and such image data (still image or moving image data) may be referred to as character data (or character data).
Further, in the following description of the effect control device 300, an object means a display control target that is coherent in the case of display control, and includes display elements (background image, special design decorative image, notice character image). , A grouped image such as a hold display image). For example, in the case of this example, there is a distinction in the decorative design of the special design by the difference in the variable display area (reel) of the left design, the right design, and the middle design, and each of these distinctions has the current design, the next design, There is a distinction that the display position in the scroll direction is different from the previous symbol. That is, for example, for the left symbol, there are the current symbol of the left symbol, the next symbol of the left symbol, and the symbol of the previous symbol of the left symbol. However, in the control process, for example, the entire left symbol including the current symbol, the next symbol, and the previous symbol may be classified as one display element.

[Power-on reset processing]
First, the power-on reset process of the production control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
This power-on reset process starts when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started.
When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is started, the interrupt is first prohibited in step D1, the CPU 311 is initially set in step D2, the VDP 312 is initially set in step D3, and the interrupt is then set in step D4. Then, the main process of step D5 is started. When the main process is started, the main process is executed until the power is turned off (including a power failure).

[Main processing]
Next, the main process (step D5) in the above power-on reset process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the main process is started, a wireless module initialization process for initializing the wireless module 360 is first executed in step D11, and steps D12 to D19 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D20. Note that this example is an example in which communication between sub-boards in different pachinko machines (in this case, between the production control devices, hereinafter simply referred to as sub-sub) is performed by wireless communication, but is limited to wireless communication Instead, it may be wired communication.

In step D12, the base address of the VDP 312 register is set. This is because the address space varies depending on the type of the CPU 311 and its setting, so that the base address is set and various designations are made based on the difference from the address.
In step D13, display data generation is permitted. This is processing for permitting the display circuit 608 to access the VRAMs 606 and 607 to generate display data.
In step D14, the size of the image development area of the VDP 312 is set.
In step D15, a random number seed is set. This is processing for setting a generation sequence of pseudo-random numbers using, for example, a srand function. Here, as an argument given to the srand function, a fixed value such as 0 (zero) may be used, or a value created based on an ID value of a CPU or the like so as to be different for each gaming machine is used. Also good.

In step D16, the storage area for motion management (including the motion management area and the address area of the motion management area) in the RAM 311a is initialized.
In step D17, the storage area for scenario management in the RAM 311a (including the scenario management area and the address area of the scenario management area) is initialized.
Here, “motion” means a production operation that is made into blocks (parts) (in this example, specifically, a display production on the display device 41 is made into a block), and “scenario” is production. Flow (which determines which motion is executed when, etc.). The “motion management area address area” means a storage area for storing the start address of the motion management area. Similarly, the “address area of the scenario management area” means a storage area for storing the start address of the scenario management area.

  In step D18, a terminal ID is set. This is a process of setting an ID for each machine (that is, for each gaming machine) based on the setting of the setting SW 371, for example. As the terminal ID to be set, the individual ID of the wireless module 360 or the like may be used. However, it is easier to specify the location information of the gaming machine in the island by manually setting with the setting SW or the like, and in the game hall It is easy to assign to the unit number. In other words, with the wireless module ID, it is difficult to specify the position information from the magnitude of the numerical value unless it is arranged in ascending order at the time of installing the gaming machine. For example, if the values of the terminal IDs are set in the order of the installed positions, it is easy to specify the installed position information from the terminal ID values. However, the method of setting the terminal ID from the ID of the wireless module has an advantage that it can be set automatically without bothering human hands. On the other hand, since setting of the terminal ID by the setting SW needs to set a different number for each stand by a human operation, there is a possibility that it may be impossible when busy such as when a gaming machine is introduced. Further, when using the ID of the communication module, there is an advantage that the cost is not increased because the setting SW is unnecessary. Because of such advantages and disadvantages, it is necessary to select the terminal ID setting method according to the effect that is desired to be performed in the inter-sub-board communication. In this example, the effect of causing the notice character to appear on the display device 41 of each gaming machine sequentially from the leftmost gaming machine in the island (that is, the arrangement of gaming machines in the island (from left, ID1, ID2, ID3,... ID10, etc. In order to be able to realize an effect that needs to be specified), a setting method using the setting SW that makes it easy to specify the position information of the stand is given as an example. This terminal ID is provided for identifying a transmission destination and a transmission source in inter-sub-board communication.

In step D19, initial setting (for example, processing for saving a predetermined initial value) of an area to be initialized (for example, an effect flag area (a storage area used as various flags described later)) is performed.
Next, when proceeding to Step D20, Steps D20 to D32 are executed, and the process proceeds to Step D33.
In step D20, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared.
In step D21, an effect button input process is executed. This is a process of performing editing when the effect button 9 (for example, a configuration including a push button and a select button) is pressed when it is valid. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at high speed, the process of sensing the input of the button may be performed within this process, or may be performed within a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown).

In step D22, random number update processing is executed. This is a process of updating the pseudo random number at least once every control cycle of the main process by using, for example, a rand function. Since the rand function generates a random number based on a specified generation sequence every time recalculation is performed, it is only necessary to execute the function. A random number that is updated by +1 may be used as in the main board (game control apparatus 100).
In step D23, a received command check process (described later) is executed.

In step D24, inter-sub transmission start processing is executed. This is processing for permitting an inter-sub-transmission interrupt when there is a request for inter-sub-command transmission. Depending on the performance, it may not be desired to send the command immediately, so time adjustment is also performed (details will be described later).
In step D25, inter-sub-reception task processing is executed. This is a process that mainly analyzes the received inter-subcommand (details will be described later).
In step D26, inter-sub ack response task processing is executed. This is a process of performing monitoring when an ack (reply) is requested to another unit (details will be described later).
In step D27, an inter-sub effect setting process is executed. This is a process of controlling the effect corresponding to the received inter-subcommand (details will be described later).

In step D28, scenario setting processing is executed. This is a process of analyzing a scenario based on the received command from the game control apparatus 100 (details will be described later).
In step D29, a process of filling the drawing area with black is executed. This is a process for completely erasing the past display of the frame buffer. For example, an image having a black square as a whole is arranged in the frame buffer so that dust or the like is not displayed.
In step D30, a motion control process is executed. This is a process for executing the scenario analyzed in step D28 (details will be described later).

In step D31, an effect display editing process is executed. This is processing for setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the VDP 312 on the drawing contents on the display device 41 (set in steps D28 to D30) (details will be described later). In this effect display editing process, commands are set in a table form, and the commands set in this way are sequentially transmitted to the VDP 312 in step D34 (instructed to draw a screen) described later.
In step D32, the drawing command preparation end setting is executed. This is processing for setting that the preparation of all commands to the VDP 312 set in step D31 is completed.

  In step D33, it is determined whether it is the frame switching timing. If it is the frame switching timing, steps D34 to D37 are sequentially executed. If it is not the frame switching timing, this step D33 is repeated. Here, the frame switching timing is a time corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 seconds≈33.333 ms) created based on a cycle (for example, 1/60 seconds) of a V blank interrupt (also referred to as a V sink interrupt). It is the timing that arrives at a target interval. Subsequent processes (steps D34 to D37 and subsequent steps D20 to D32) are executed at the frame switching timing for each processing cycle by the process of step D33. Note that time management that needs to be synchronized with the contents of the effects is performed in units of frames (that is, in units of the processing cycles). When the processing cycle is 1/30 seconds, for example, 3 frames is 100 ms. This is similar to the case where the main board (game control device) manages time values in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt period.

In step D34, the VDP 312 is instructed to draw a screen.
In step D35, sound control processing is executed (description is omitted).
In step D36, a decoration control process for controlling various LEDs and the like is executed.
In step D37, motor / SOL control processing for controlling various motors and SOL (solenoid) is executed. After executing Step D37, the process returns to Step D20, and the same process as when the process proceeds to Step D20 is repeated.

  Note that the control processing in steps D35 to D37 is performed in these steps in which operation switching is executed in units of processing cycles in order to match the presentation of the screen. The process of actually outputting data (especially signals for controlling driving of various LEDs and motors) to the port is performed within a short-cycle timer interrupt (not shown). However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there is a case where a signal is not output by a timer interrupt only by instructing by serial communication or the like.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
Next, command reception interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process for receiving the command transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 (main board) by the effect control apparatus 300 (sub board), and the data constituting the command falls within the normal range. The content to check whether it is included is also included.
The communication between the main board and the sub board may be performed by parallel communication using a strobe signal (STB signal), but in this example, it is performed by serial communication. That is, both the boards communicate using, for example, the function of the serial communication circuit mounted on the CPUs 101A and 311.

  In serial communication in this case, since transmission / reception is automatically performed in hardware, unlike in parallel communication, there is an advantage that processing time is not exclusively used for communication in both substrates. In the case of parallel communication, the production control device must perform reception processing with the highest priority in accordance with the timing at which the game control device transmits, making it difficult to create a program. Further, during communication, both boards need to execute communication processing. However, in serial communication, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated and notified when a command is received, and all that remains is to retrieve it from the serial reception buffer. In serial communication, it is not necessary to perform interrupt processing with the highest priority, and interrupts can be prohibited when interrupted. In serial communication, the processing on the transmission side can be as simple as putting a command in the serial transmission buffer. In serial communication, both boards are efficient because other processes can be executed while the hardware is transmitting and receiving data. In addition, physically, in the past (in the case of parallel communication), eight or more wires were necessary, but at least one wire can be realized in serial communication. Even when serial communication is used, communication between the game control device 100 (main board) and the production control device 300 (sub board) is not bidirectional communication, but only unidirectional communication (main board → sub board). (Only direction). This prevents fraud using communication from the sub board to the main board.

This command reception interruption process is started when the above-described command reception interruption occurs in the production control device 300 (sub-board). That is, when the CPU 311 on the sub board completes receiving the command transmitted by the CPU 101A on the main board through the serial communication, a command reception interrupt is generated, and this command reception interrupt process is started. Here, this command reception interrupt has a higher interrupt priority than the above-described V blank interrupt. The command reception interrupt occurs irregularly as described above, but when the main board transmits commands continuously, the command reception interrupt occurs on the sub board corresponding to the transmission interval (for example, 4 msec). The interval is also the same interval (for example, 4 msec).
The command from the main board includes MODE data (1 byte) and ACTION data (1 byte), which are sequentially transmitted. Hereinafter, such data constituting a command is referred to as command data or command data.
When this routine is started, the reception monitoring timer is first stopped in step D41, and then a command is loaded from the serial reception buffer in step D42, and the process proceeds to step D44.

In step D44, whether the command data loaded in step D42 is in the MODE range is determined based on the value of the data. If it is in the MODE range, the process proceeds to step D45. Proceeding to step D48 as being within the range. The MODE range is a range of values within 1 byte that can be set as MODE data, and the ACTION range is a range of values within 1 byte that can be set as ACTION data. .
When the process proceeds to step D45, the command data loaded at step D42 is stored as the reception MODE. Next, at step D46, the MODE reception flag is set to “OK”. Next, at step D47, the value of the reception monitoring timer is reset to zero. Then, the timing operation of the reception start timer is started, and then the process returns. As used in step D45 above, simply storing means storing in a predetermined storage area so that it can be read for use in later control processing (the same applies hereinafter).

  Proceeding to step D48, it is determined whether the value of the MODE reception flag is “OK”. If it is “OK”, it is further determined at step D49 whether the reception monitoring timer has timed out. Proceed to If the value of the MODE reception flag is not “OK” in step D48 and if the time-out has occurred in step D49, the command could not be received normally, so “NG” is set in the MODE reception flag in step D59. Then return. If the value of the MODE reception flag is not “OK” in step D48, it is abnormal because, for example, command data in the ACTION range has been received, but command data in the MODE range has not been received prior to that. If the time-out has occurred at step D49, it is abnormal because the command data in the ACTION range is not received within the specified reception monitoring time counted by the reception monitoring timer from the time when the command data in the MODE range is received. .

In step D50, the command data loaded in step D42 is stored as a reception ACTION. Next, in step D51, the value of the MODE reception flag is set to “NG”, and the flow proceeds to step D52.
In step D52, it is determined whether or not the value of the command reception counter is larger than 31, and if it is larger, it returns because it exceeds the capacity of a command buffer, which will be described later. move on. Although the command reception counter value is 0 to 31 and the process proceeds to step D53, the values 0 to 31 are values corresponding to the capacity of the command buffer described later, and the system control cycle (the above-described processing cycle; It is sufficient that the number of commands that can be transmitted from the main board in 1/30 seconds) is exceeded.

In step D53, a presentation operation corresponding to reception MODE and reception ACTION is prepared. Next, in step D54, a reception command range check process (described later) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D55.
In step D55, it is determined whether or not the range check is OK. If it is not OK, the process returns to discard the command (reception MODE and reception ACTION). If OK, the process returns after sequentially executing steps D56 to D58. Here, the determination result of the range check in step D55 is a range check OK (step D55 is Yes) if the command range normal flag is set in the receive command range check process described later, and the receive command range check process described later. If the command range abnormality flag is set at, the range check is not OK (step D55 is No).

In step D56, the reception MODE and the reception ACTION are stored in the command buffer. The command buffer is a so-called ring buffer in this example, and has a specified capacity (the number of commands that can be stored). This command buffer is constituted by a storage area in the RAM of the CPU 311, for example.
In step D57, updating is performed to increase the value of the command reception counter by one.
In step D58, since the data is stored (that is, written) in the command buffer, the command write index value is updated by 1 in the range of 0 to 31. The command write index is a command buffer write pointer, and the value of this command write index is in the range of 0 to 31 in this example, but this range is the capacity of the command buffer (in this case, 32). As described above, the number of commands that can be transmitted from the main board in one cycle of the system control cycle (the above-mentioned processing cycle; for example, 1/30 second) is greater than the number of commands. That's fine.

[Received command range check processing]
Next, details of the received command range check process (step D54) in the above-described command reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D61, it is determined whether the value of the received MODE stored in step D45 is within the normal range. If it is within the range, steps D62 and D63 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D64. The MODE values are not all of the values in the MODE range in which the command contents are defined, and there are values that are not defined and are not used. In the determination of D61, it is determined that it is not the normal range.
In step D61 or step D92 described later (or both steps D61 and D92), the MODE data is also checked for missing teeth. Good.
Note that the missing tooth check of MODE data means that it is determined whether or not the MODE data to be checked corresponds to an invalid value in a portion where values that MODE can take are not continuous. If there is no discontinuous portion in the MODE value, this missing tooth check is unnecessary.

In step D62, a minimum value (ACTION_min) is acquired from the possible values of ACTION corresponding to the value of the reception MODE stored in step D45. In the present application, “acquiring” data in the control process in this manner means that data is extracted from the ROM (PROM 321 in the production control device 300 of this example).
In step D63, the maximum value (ACTION_max) among the possible values of ACTION corresponding to the value of the reception MODE stored in step D45 is acquired.

  Note that an ACTION check table as shown on the left side of FIG. 160 is registered in the PROM 321. In steps D62 and D63, a corresponding value is acquired from the ACTION check table. The ACTION check table corresponds to each MODE value, ACTION lower limit data corresponding to the minimum value (ACTION_min), ACTION upper limit data corresponding to the maximum value (ACTION_max), and a match check table (described later). ) Specifying data (for example, the head address of the match check table) is defined respectively. In the case of FIG. 160, for example, if the MODE value is 89h (decorative pattern 1), the ACTION lower limit is 00h and the ACTION upper limit is 72h. In step D63, 72h is acquired as the maximum value (ACTION_max). Note that the data of the ACTION check table and the like, that is, various information used in the control processing of the effect control device 300 (for example, data of various tables) is stored in advance in the PROM 321 together with the operation program.

In step D64, it is determined whether the value of the reception ACTION stored in step D50 is smaller than the minimum value acquired in step D62. If smaller, the process proceeds to step D67. Proceed to step D65.
In step D65, it is determined whether the value of the reception ACTION stored in step D50 is larger than the maximum value acquired in step D63. If it is larger, it is abnormal. Proceed to step D66.
If the process proceeds to step D66, it is normal, so the command range normal flag is set and the process returns. If the process proceeds to step D67, it is abnormal, so the command range abnormality flag is set and the process returns.

[Received command check processing]
Next, details of the received command check process (step D23) in the above-described main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D71, the value of the command reception counter is loaded as the command reception number, and then in step D72, it is determined whether the command reception number is not zero. If not, steps D73 to D75 are sequentially performed. After execution, the process proceeds to step D76, and if zero, the process returns. In the present application, as in step D71, “loading” data in the control process means that data is extracted from the RAM (RAM in the CPU 311 in the effect control apparatus 300 of this example).

In step D73, the content of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) is subtracted by the number of command receptions.
If A is the value of the command reception counter and B is the number of received commands, “A = B” immediately after execution of step D71. Then, “A = A−B = 0” is a normal movement immediately after execution of step D73. However, in the aspect of this example, the effect control device interrupts a command reception interrupt from the game control device (main board). Since the highest priority is given without prohibition, there is a possibility that the value of A increases during the processing from step D71 to the processing of step D73. Therefore, if the process at step D73 is set to “A ← 0” (that is, the process of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the command count is shifted. Therefore, at step D73, the subtraction process “A−B” is performed. Is going. However, when serial communication is used for transmission / reception of commands from the main board as in this embodiment, interrupts are disabled so that the value of A does not increase between the processing of step D71 and the processing of step D73. Thus, the processing content of step D73 may be set to “A ← 0”.

In step D74, the contents of the received command buffer (corresponding to the command buffer in step D56, hereinafter simply referred to as command buffer) (that is, command data stored at the address corresponding to the read pointer) are stored in the command area (in some cases, command To the storage area). The command area is a storage area in the RAM of the CPU 311 that constitutes a buffer in a so-called FIFO format (first-in first-out format), for example.
In step D75, since the data in the command buffer has been read out, the value of the command read index, which is the command buffer read pointer, is updated by 1 in the range of 0 to 31. Here, the range of 0 to 31 may be the same range as the command write index updated in step D58.

  When the process proceeds to step D76, it is determined whether or not copying of commands for the number of received commands has been completed (that is, whether or not steps D74 and D75 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands). Returning to step D74, the process is repeated from step D74. If completed, the process proceeds to step D77.

When the process proceeds to step D77, the contents of the command area (the data stored first in the data not yet read in the command area, that is, the data to be read next) are loaded (that is, read), With respect to the data of the loaded command (hereinafter referred to as the current command), a received command analysis process (described later) is executed in the next step D78, and then the process proceeds to step D79.
In step D79, the address of the command area (address of data to be read next) is updated, and the process proceeds to step D80.
In step D80, it is determined whether or not analysis of commands for the number of received commands has been completed (that is, whether or not steps D77 to D79 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands). If not completed, the process returns to step D77. The process is repeated from step D77, and if completed, the process returns.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, details of the received command analysis process (step D78) in the received command check process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D91, the upper byte of the data of the current command loaded in step D77 is stored in MODE and the lower byte is stored separately in ACT, and then the process proceeds to step D92. In the case of a fluctuation-type command for instructing a special pattern fluctuation pattern, the upper byte data stored as MODE commands the first half fluctuation pattern, and the lower byte data stored as ACT commands the second half fluctuation pattern. Is.

In step D92, it is determined whether the MODE value separated in step D91 is in the normal range. If it is not in the normal range, the process returns. If it is in the normal range, the process proceeds to step D93. As described above, there is a MODE value that is not defined and is not used. When the MODE value is not used, it is determined in step D92 that the value is not in the normal range (described above). Same as step D61).
In step D93, it is determined whether the ACT value separated in step D91 is in the normal range. If not in the normal range, the process returns. If it is in the normal range, the process proceeds to step D94. The determination in step D93 is performed in the same manner as steps D62 to D65 described above. That is, the effective ACT value is different for each MODE, and the upper and lower limits of the effective value of ACT are defined in the above-described ACTION check table (FIG. 160). It is checked whether the ACT value is within the range, and if it is within the range, it is determined that it is within the normal range (the missing tooth check has not been performed at this time).

In step D94, the start address of the match check table corresponding to the separated MODE value is acquired from the above-described ACTION check table, and then the process proceeds to step D95. In the case of FIG. 160, for example, if the MODE value is 89h (decorative symbol 1), the start address of the match check table is tMOD89, which is acquired in step D94.
Here, the coincidence check table is, for example, shown on the right side of FIG. 160, in which all ACT values (ACTION values) valid for the corresponding MODE value are registered in order from the top address. Yes, provided for each MODE value. The match check table shown on the right side of FIG. 160 corresponds to the case where the MODE value is 89h, and all ACT values (11h, 12h, 21h, 22h) that are valid for this MODE value (89h). Etc.) are registered in order from the top address (first row) of the table, and the check end code (−1) is registered at the last address (last row) of the table.
Note that in the case of a MODE in which valid ACTION values are fixed in a continuous range, the match check table is unnecessary, and therefore the data of the start address of the match check table in the ACTION check table is NULL. In the case of FIG. 160, for example, if the MODE value is 80h (waiting for customers), the head address of the match check table is NULL, which is acquired in step D94. In addition, for the MODE line in which the match check table is defined, the effective action is missing, so after checking the upper limit / lower limit, further comparison judgment can be made using the corresponding match check table. Is performed (steps D96 to D99 described later).

  In step D95, it is determined whether the head address of the match check table obtained in step D94 is NULL. If it is NULL, the process proceeds to step D100, and if not NULL, the process proceeds to step D96. The fact that the head address of the match check table is NULL means that the valid ACT values for MODE are continuous, and only the range check in step D93 is OK. Jump to step D100 without executing D99.

  When the process proceeds to step D96, loop processing (repetition processing) with steps D96 and D99 as loop ends is executed. That is, when the process proceeds to step D96, branching is performed at step D99, and the operation of sequentially executing steps D97 and D98 described later is repeated until an end condition described later is satisfied. In the loop processing, data (corresponding row data in the match check table) corresponding to the address of the match check table (hereinafter referred to as match check table address) acquired in step D94 and updated in step D98 described later is stepped. The end condition is that the value matches the ACT value separated in D91, and the process is repeatedly executed until the end condition is satisfied. However, when the determination result in step D97 described later is YES, the loop process is exited (the loop process is ended even if the end condition is not satisfied).

  That is, when the process proceeds to step D96, first in step D97, it is determined whether the data corresponding to the match check table address is a check end code. If not, the next step D98 is executed. In step D98, the match check table address is updated to the next record. When the match check table address is updated to the next record, the row in the match check table corresponding to the match check table address is switched to the next row (one lower row on the right side of FIG. 160). Next, when step D98 is executed, the process proceeds to step D99, where it is determined whether or not the data corresponding to the updated match check table address matches the ACT value separated in step D91. Therefore, the loop process is terminated and the process proceeds to step D100. If there is a mismatch, the process returns to step D96 and the loop process is repeated.

  In the loop processing of steps D96 to D99 described above, a check (including a missing tooth check) is performed as to whether or not the ACT combination is normal for MODE. There are a plurality of valid ACTs for one MODE, but these values are not always continuous, so whether or not the command is a valid value is compared. Since only valid values are defined in the coincidence check table, it is compared and confirmed one by one to see if it matches any of them. For example, if the MODE value separated in step D91 is 89h and the ACT value is 31h, in the case of FIG. 160, the data in the fifth row of the match check table is 31h, so the loop processing is 4 When it is repeated a number of times, the above end condition is satisfied, and the process proceeds from step D99 to step D100. Further, assuming that the MODE value separated in step D91 is 89h and the ACT value is 13h or the like, in the case of FIG. 160, 13h or the like does not exist in the match check table (13h or the like is not included in the match check table). (This is missing data that does not have a continuous part), so even if the above loop processing is repeated until the last line, the above end condition is not satisfied, and the data is the check end code when the last line is reached. Therefore, the determination result in step D97 is YES, and the process returns from the loop process. If the determination result in step D97 is YES as described above, the ACT value is abnormal. Therefore, as in the case where the determination result in steps D92 and D93 is NO, the command is determined to be abnormal. It returns without executing D100 or later.

Next, step D100 and subsequent steps will be described.
As described above, when it is not determined that the command value (MODE and ACT data separated in step D91) is abnormal in the processing up to step D99, step D100 is executed through step D95 or D99. .
In step D100, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the variable command range. If it is within this range, a variable command process (described later) is executed in step D101, and the process returns. move on. Here, the MODE data is the MODE data separated and stored in step D91 (the same applies to step D102 described later). A fluctuation command (sometimes referred to as a fluctuation command or a fluctuation pattern command) is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure, and the range that the data of the fluctuation command can take is a fluctuation command range. In step D100, the MODE tooth missing check may not be performed or may be performed.

In step D102, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is within the jackpot command range. If it is within this range, the jackpot command process (described later) is executed in step D103, and the process returns. Proceed to D104. The jackpot command is a command for instructing an operation related to a big hit effect (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.), and the range that the data of the jackpot command can take is the jackpot command range.
When the process proceeds to step D104, it is determined whether the MODE data is within the symbol command range. If it is within this range, symbol command processing (to be described later) is executed at step D105, and the process returns. Proceed to D106. The symbol system command (sometimes referred to as symbol command or decorative special symbol command) is a command for instructing information relating to the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what to stop symbol of special symbol). The range that the data can take is the symbol-type command range.

In step D106, it is determined whether the MODE data is within the single-shot command range. If it is within this range, a single-shot command process (described later) is executed in step D107, and the process returns. Proceed to D108. Unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands, commands that are established independently are called single-shot commands. Single-shot commands (sometimes referred to as single-shot commands) include a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, and a model designation command. The range that the single command data can take is the single command range.
In step D108, it is determined whether the MODE data is a prefetch command. If it is a prefetch command, the prefetch command processing (detailed explanation is omitted) is executed in step D109 and the process returns. Returns to step D109 without executing step D109. Here, the prefetch command is a command for instructing the presence / absence of a prefetch effect (for example, a special jackpot notice) and the determination of the content of the effect at the time of occurrence.

In this example, the order of command reception at the start of fluctuation is different from the conventional configuration. Conventionally, the order is the variation pattern command → stop symbol command → holding number command, but in this example, the order is suspension number command → stop symbol command → variation pattern command. Here, the pending number command is independent and has no direct relation to the fluctuating production, so changing the transmission order is not so important, but the order of the symbol command (stop symbol command) and the variation command (fluctuation pattern command) has been changed. Has the following background and effects.
That is, it is possible to say that the content of the variation effect is determined by the variation pattern command, and the stop symbol is only one parameter in the effect content, and nothing can be done only by receiving the symbol command. The change pattern command has been treated as a “screen display change command” and the design command as an “internal parameter change command”. However, in the conventional configuration, even if a screen display change command is received, Because the design parameters were not received, it was not possible to prepare for production immediately. Furthermore, it is necessary to monitor whether the symbol command is sent within the specified time, which increases the burden on the production control device.
However, in this example, since the order is reversed, when the variation pattern command is received, if the received symbol information matches, it is possible to immediately prepare for production. Even if a symbol command is received first, only the symbol is not changed first because it is not a command for changing the screen display. This is because the symbol information is only stored in the RAM. Further, even if a symbol command is missed, there is an advantage that the symbol command can be changed if the symbol information stored in the previous RAM matches. On the other hand, if the conventional configuration is missed, the symbol information is lost and cannot be changed. That is, in this example, it can be said that the possibility that the player misses the command miss is extremely low (remarkably lower than before). In addition, the symbol command and the variation command are a pair of commands, but since the relationship between them is reduced and the commands can be handled as independent commands, there is an effect that the program development efficiency is improved.

[Variable command processing]
Next, details of the variable command processing executed in step D101 in the above-described received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined whether or not the special figure type is unconfirmed in step D111. If the special figure type is not yet confirmed, the process returns. If it is not yet confirmed (that is, when the special figure type is set), step D112 is performed. Then, a variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process (described later) is executed, and the process proceeds to Step D113. The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set in step D171 (to be described later) of the symbol system command processing.

In step D113, based on the information (valid command information or invalid command information) returned in the variation pattern corresponding symbol determination processing (described later) in step D112, it is determined whether the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent. If it is inconsistent (when invalid command information is returned), it returns. If it is not inconsistent (when valid command information is returned), it returns after executing steps D114 and D115 in sequence.
The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol type includes, for example, a missing symbol, a 16R probability variation big hit symbol, and the like. Also, the inconsistency in step D113 is contradictory when performing an effect, such as when a symbol command of 16R probability variation big hit symbol is received after receiving a deviation variation command (variation pattern command). It means a combination (a combination of a variation command and a symbol type).

In step D114, a variation effect setting process (described later) is performed to produce an effect according to the variation command.
In Step D115, the P machine state (pachinko machine state) is set as changing. Here, “changing” means that the special figure is changing (not during a customer waiting demonstration, during a big hit, or during a fanfare, etc.).

[Fluctuation pattern compatible symbol judgment processing]
Next, details of the variation pattern corresponding symbol determination processing executed in step D112 of the above-described variation command processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D121, the symbol type information saved in step D173, which will be described later in the symbol system command processing, is loaded, and the process proceeds to step D122.
The symbol type information here is information indicating the symbol type of the stop symbol of the special display (decorative symbol) variable display game. In the case of this example, the symbol types can be classified into five types: “offset symbol”, “2R probability variation big hit symbol”, “16R probability variation big hit symbol”, “11R probability variation big hit symbol”, and “11R normal big hit symbol”. In detail, for example, “16R probability variation big hit symbol” is further divided into five types A to E, and “11R probability variation big hit symbol” is further divided into three types A to C, so there are 11 types in total. There are stop symbol patterns. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and for example, a type such as a big hit symbol of another number of rounds or a small hit symbol may be set, and the setting of the symbol type varies depending on the specifications of the model. Here, 2R and 16R indicate the number of rounds of the big hit, and the probable big hit symbol is a big hit symbol that becomes a probable change state (a state in which the probability of a big hit is higher than the normal state) after the big hit, It is a big hit symbol that becomes a normal state (a state that is not a probability variation state) after the big hit. Also, the missing symbol is a symbol (a symbol that is not a big hit) in which the result of the variable display game is lost.

  In step D122, it is determined whether the MODE data (upper byte data separated in step D91 described above) is within the variable command range. If within this range, the process proceeds to step D123. Proceed to step D133 because the command is abnormal. In step D122, for example, the same determination as in step D100 described above is performed again. In this step D122, the configuration may be such that the MODE tooth missing check is not performed or may be performed. Further, the determination contents of step D122 and step D100 described above may be different. For example, the MODE tooth missing check may be performed only in one of the above-described step D100 and step D122.

  In step D123, it is determined whether the symbol type information loaded in step D121 is a missing symbol. If it is a missing symbol, in step D124, an ACT consistency check table corresponding to MODE data is set and the procedure proceeds to step D141. If not, the process proceeds to step D125. Here, the off-time ACT matching check table is a table including all data that can be used as ACT (lower byte data of the command) in the case of the off-line symbol.

The PROM 321 stores a ACT alignment check address table at the time of failure as shown on the left side of FIG. Get and set The ACT matching check address table at the time of detachment defines an address (in this case, the start address of the ACT matching check table at the time of losing) corresponding to the value of each MODE in the variable command range. It is a thing. The loss ACT matching check table is, for example, shown on the right side of FIG. 161. In the case of a loss symbol, all ACT values (ACTION values) that are valid for the corresponding MODE value are the head. These are registered in order from the address, and are provided for each MODE value. The ACT matching check table shown on the right side of FIG. 161 corresponds to the case where the design value is CBh (10.4 seconds normal fluctuation reach) in the case of an outlier design, and the value of this MODE (CBh). All the valid ACT values (02h, 03h, 04h, 05h, etc.) are registered in order from the top address (first line) of the table, and the check end code (last line) is registered at the last address (last line) of the table. -1) is registered.
In addition, such an ACT matching check address table and an ACT matching check table include symbol types other than the outlier symbols (“2R probability variation big hit symbol”, “16R probability variation big hit symbol”, “11R probability variation big hit symbol”, and “11R normal big hit symbol”. Symbol “) is also provided in the same manner, and is used in the same manner as step D124 in steps D126, D128, D130, and D132 described later.

  Proceeding to step D125, it is determined whether the symbol type information loaded in step D121 is a 2R probability variation big hit symbol. If it is a 2R probability variation big hit symbol, a 2R probability variation big hit ACT matching check table corresponding to the MODE data is set in step D126. Proceeding to step D141, if it is not the 2R probability variation big hit symbol, it proceeds to step D127. Here, the 2R probability variable big hit ACT matching check table is a table including all data that can be ACT (lower byte data of the command) in the case of the 2R probability variable big hit symbol.

  Proceeding to step D127, it is determined whether the symbol type information loaded in step D121 is a 16R probability variation big hit symbol. Proceed to step D141, and if it is not the 16R probability variable big hit symbol, proceed to step D129. Here, the 16R probability variation big hit ACT matching check table is a table including all data that can be ACT (lower byte data of the command) in the case of the 16R probability variation big hit symbol.

  In step D129, it is determined whether or not the symbol type information loaded in step D121 is an 11R probability variable big hit symbol. Proceed to step D141, and if it is not the 11R probability variable big hit symbol, proceed to step D131. Here, the 11R probability variation big hit ACT matching check table is a table including all data that can be ACT (lower byte data of the command) in the case of the 11R probability variation big hit symbol.

In step D131, it is determined whether or not the symbol type information loaded in step D121 is an 11R normal big hit symbol. The process proceeds to step D141, and if it is not the 11R normal big hit symbol, it is determined that the command is abnormal and the process proceeds to step D133. Here, the 11R normal jackpot ACT matching check table is a table including all data that can be ACT (lower byte data of the command) in the case of the 11R normal jackpot symbol.
In step D133, the command returns invalid command information.

  When the processing proceeds to step D141, loop processing (repetition processing) with steps D141 and D144 as loop ends is executed. That is, by branching at step D144, the operation of sequentially executing step D142 and step D143 is performed in the ACT consistency check table (set in any of the immediately preceding steps D124, D126, D128, D130, D132). Repeat until the end.

Here, in step D142, it corresponds to the address of the ACT consistency check table (hereinafter referred to as ACT consistency check table address) acquired in any of steps D124, D126, D128, D130, and D132 and updated in step D143 described later. It is determined whether the data (corresponding row data in the ACT matching check table) matches the value of the ACT separated in step D91. If they match, this loop is repeated (loop processing with steps D141 and D144 as loop ends). The process proceeds to step D146, and if they do not match, the process proceeds to step D143.
In step D143, the ACT consistency check table address is updated to the next record, and the process proceeds to step D144.
In step D144, it is determined whether step D142 has been repeatedly executed up to the last data of the ACT matching check table. If step D142 has been repeated up to the last data, the process proceeds to step D145. Return to D141 and repeat the process. Specifically, in step D144, it is determined whether the data corresponding to the ACT consistency check table address updated in step D143 is a check end code (-1). Proceeding to step D145, if it is not a check end code, the process returns to step D141 to repeat the processing.

If any of the data in the ACT matching check table matches the data of the ACT separated in the above-mentioned step D91 by the repeated loop processing of steps D141 to D144, the process proceeds to step D146. If there is no matching data in the ACT consistency check table, the process proceeds to step D145.
In step D145, invalid command information is returned as being abnormal, and the process returns. In step D146, the value of valid command information is returned as normal.

In step D113 described above, the consistency between the variation command and the symbol type is determined based on the information returned in any one of steps D133, D145, and D146.
For example, if the symbol type information loaded in step D121 is received in advance and the symbol type information loaded in step D121 is a missing symbol, the MODE value of the variable command separated in step D91 is CBh and the value of ACT is If it is 06h, the data in the fifth row of the ACT consistency check table in FIG. 161 is 06h. Therefore, when step D142 is repeated five times, the determination result in step D142 becomes YES, and the process returns to step D146. The valid command information is returned, and the determination result in step D113 is NO (matched). In the same case, assuming that the MODE value separated in step D91 is CBh and the ACT value is 01h, for example, 01h does not exist in the ACT consistency check table of FIG. No matter how many times it is repeated, the determination result in step D142 is NO. Since the data becomes the check end code when the last line is reached, the loop process is ended and the process proceeds to step D145, and invalid command information is returned. Thus, the determination result of step D113 is YES (mismatch). In addition, when the MODE value separated at step D91 is not the variable command range (when step D122 is NO), the MODE value separated at step D91 is the variable command range (YES at step D122). Nevertheless, if the symbol type information loaded in step D121 is not any symbol type (when steps D123, D125, D127, D129, and D131 are all NO), invalid command information is returned in step D133. The determination result at step D113 is YES (inconsistency).
As described above, according to the variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process (the above-mentioned step D122) and the above-described step D133, the consistency check is performed to determine whether the variation pattern command is suitable for the stop symbol. Since the variation performed depends on the type of stop symbol (the symbol type such as the above-mentioned loss symbol, 16R probability variation big hit symbol, etc.), it is checked in advance whether the variation pattern command is suitable for the symbol. This is to prevent abnormal fluctuation display effects from being performed without executing steps D114 and D115 described above. Note that the variation patterns are not necessarily perfectly separated for each symbol. For example, there are variation patterns shared by the 16R probability variation big hit symbol and the 2R probability variation big hit symbol.

[Big hit command processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot command process executed in step D103 in the received command analysis process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D151, the MODE data (upper byte data separated in step D91 described above, the same applies to steps D154, D157, and D160 described later) is a fanfare effect (when a big hit occurs). It is determined whether or not a fanfare effect is to be commanded. If the fanfare effect is to be commanded, steps D152 and D153 are executed in sequence, and then the process returns. If not, the process proceeds to step D154.
In step D152, a fanfare effect setting process (not shown) for performing a fanfare effect according to the command is executed.
In step D153, fanfare is set as the P machine state.

Proceeding to step D154, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is for commanding a round effect (effect during a big hit round). If no round effect is instructed, the process proceeds to step D157.
In step D155, a round effect setting process (not shown) for performing a round effect according to the command is executed.
In step D156, the P machine state is set to “round”.

Proceeding to step D157, it is determined whether or not the MODE data commands an interval effect (effect between the rounds of big hits). After the execution, the process returns, and if the interval effect is not commanded, the process proceeds to step D160.
In step D158, an interval effect setting process (not shown) for performing an interval effect according to the command is executed.
In step D159, the interval P is set as the P machine state.

Proceeding to step D160, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is for instructing an ending effect (effect at the end of jackpot). If the ending effect is instructed, steps D161 and D162 are executed in sequence before returning. If the ending effect is not commanded, the process returns.
In step D161, an ending effect setting process (description is omitted) for performing an ending effect according to the command is executed.
In step D162, the ending status is set as the P machine state.
Note that the above is an example of the jackpot command processing, and processing other than the above (for example, processing for effects other than fanfare, rounds, intervals, and endings) may be possible.

[Design command processing]
Next, details of the symbol system command processing executed in step D105 in the above-described received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D171, a special figure type corresponding to MODE data (upper byte data separated in the above-mentioned step D91 and the same in step D172 described later) (see FIG. 1 or special figure). 2 information) is set. For example, if the MODE data is 85h, the special figure 1 is set as the special figure type, and if the MODE data is 86h, the special figure 2 is set as the special figure type. In this way, whether the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 can be determined from the MODE data, and in this step D171, the special figure type is determined and set from the MODE data.

  In step D172, a symbol type setting table corresponding to MODE data is set. The symbol type setting table is a table for determining the symbol type corresponding to the symbol command (the category of symbols such as the above-mentioned loss symbol, 16R probability variation big hit symbol, etc.), and the ACTION data (for example, 11h to 1Bh) of the symbol command 11 is a table in which the correspondence between the symbol type and the symbol type is defined. Since the ratio of symbols varies between Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 (the probability variation ratio is the same), this symbol type setting table is provided separately for each MODE. Select and set the one corresponding to.

Next, in step D173, based on the symbol type setting table set in step D172, the symbol type corresponding to the ACT data (the lower byte data separated in step D91 described above) is acquired and used as symbol type information. Save. After step D173, the process returns.
The special symbol type and symbol type information set in steps D171 and D173 in response to the symbol command in this way are used in the processing of steps D111 and D112 described above for the variation command received following the symbol command. Even if the special figure type information is used for the determination in step D111, the data previously set in step D171 is stored and held until step D171 is newly executed. Further, the symbol type information is configured to store and hold the data previously set in step D173 until it is newly executed after step D112 is used.

[Single command processing]
Next, details of the single command processing executed in step D107 in the received command analysis processing described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 and 108. FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D181, MODE data (upper byte data separated in step D91 described above, the same applies to steps D191, D193, D195, D197, D199, D204, and D207 described later). It is determined whether a customer waiting demo is instructed. If the customer waiting demo is instructed, the process proceeds to step D182. If not, the process proceeds to step D191. The customer waiting demonstration is a customer waiting demonstration effect (also referred to as a customer waiting effect) and includes an effect including a customer waiting demonstration displayed on the display device 41. The customer-waiting demonstration effect is not limited to display on the display device 41, but may be effected by display on another display device, lighting of lamps (including blinking), or sound output.

When the process proceeds to step D182, it is determined whether the P machine state (pachinko machine state) is in the customer waiting demo. If the customer waiting demo is in progress, the process returns. If not in the customer waiting demo, the steps D183 and D184 are executed in sequence. Proceed to D185.
In step D183, a customer waiting scenario data setting process (described later) is executed in order to perform a customer waiting effect. In the description of the control processing of the effect control device 300, scenario control data means data set in a scenario management area or an address area of the scenario management area described later in order to control the flow of a specific effect. In this step D183, scenario control data for performing a customer waiting effect is set.
In step D184, the customer waiting A (customer waiting state A) is set as the P machine state. The customer waiting effects include a customer waiting state A, a customer waiting state B, a customer waiting movie (without sound), and a customer waiting movie (with sound).

Proceeding to step D185, it is determined whether data transmission between subs is being performed (that is, whether data transmission is being performed to an effect control device of a different pachinko machine). If not, the process returns after executing Steps D186 to D190.
In step D186, an inter-sub command (broadcast transmission setting) for the customer waiting demo synchronization (inter-sub synchronization in the customer waiting demo display) is prepared. Edit processing (described later in FIG. 126) is executed.

In step D188, an initial value is set in an ack waiting timer (a timer used in step D521 described later). Whether or not the sub-board (production control device) of the pachinko machine that has received the inter-sub command returns ack to the sub-board of the pachinko machine that has transmitted the inter-sub command varies depending on the type of command (steps described later). D480a). In this example, the inter-sub-command for waiting for a customer demo synchronization includes a content requesting a reply of ack. That is, in this example, the inter-sub-command for the customer waiting demo synchronization is a command that requires an ack response.
In step D189, an inter-submission effect start waiting timer (a timer used in step D532 described later) is set.
In step D190, an inter-sub transmission request flag is set. The inter-sub-transmission request flag is used for determination in step D461 described later.

When the process proceeds to step D191, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is for instructing the value of the special figure 1 holding number. After executing the setting process (described later), the process returns.
When the process proceeds to step D193, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is for instructing the value of the special figure 2 hold number. After executing the setting process (omitted from the description), the process returns. The special figure 1 hold information setting process will be described in detail later, but the special figure 2 hold information setting process is the same as the special figure 1 hold information setting process (only the difference between special figure 1 and special figure 2). Therefore, the description is omitted.

Proceeding to step D195, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is for commanding the production mode switching preparation (data of the production mode switching preparation command). After executing the switching setting process (not described), the process returns, and when the preparation for switching the production mode is not instructed, the process proceeds to Step D197. The effect mode switching setting process is a control process for performing an operation according to the effect mode switching preparation command, and includes a scenario data setting process.
Proceeding to step D197, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is for reporting power failure recovery (command data for power failure recovery), and if power failure recovery is informed, after executing power failure recovery setting processing in step D198 Return to step D199 if the power failure recovery command is not issued. The power failure recovery setting process in step D198 is for displaying a message such as “Game restarted” on the display device 41, or flashing the lamps in a predetermined manner to notify the player of the power failure recovery, etc. And includes scenario data setting processing for that purpose.

Proceeding to step D199, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is information (command data at power-on) that informs power-on (power-on with the initialization switch (RAM clear switch) turned on). If it is an instruction to turn on, the process returns after sequentially executing Steps D200 to D203, and if not, the process proceeds to Step D204. The power-on command is a power-on command that informs the effect control device 300 that the game control device 100 has cleared the RWM, and is transmitted in step S29 described above. This power-on command is sent to cause the effect control device 300 to clear the effect state and to perform an RWM clear notification (an operation to display that the RWM has been cleared, for example, on the display device 41).
In step D200, various initial screen information is set. The setting contents of various initial screen information include clearing the special figure type / symbol type, setting 0 for the special figure 1 holding number and the special figure 2 holding number, for example, left = 7, middle = 5 for the current symbol and the stopped symbol In this case, the off-set symbol of right = 3 is set.

In step D201, an index of the suspension motion control table corresponding to the number of suspensions (= 0) at this time is calculated and saved. Here, the index of the motion control table for holding is an index for designating a row (record) of the motion control table for holding. The on-hold motion control table is a motion control table for displaying on-hold display of a special memory. Further, the processing of this step D201 is executed for the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number, respectively.
Here, the motion control table is a control table for executing each blocked effect (mainly effect display), and is also simply referred to as a motion table. The data of the motion table can be easily produced by a graphical input operation using a mouse or the like with commercially available application software that can be executed on a PC (personal computer). Pre-stored in the PROM 321.
In step D202, a scenario data setting process for power-on (description is omitted) is executed.
The power-on scenario data setting process includes an initialization process for setting the operation position of the motor of the frame effect device 45 to an initial position, and a control process for executing the RWM clear notification. May be.
In step D203, the customer waiting A (customer waiting state A) is set as the P machine state.

When the process proceeds to step D204, it is determined whether or not the MODE data is for commanding a special symbol stop. If it is a command for special symbol stop, steps D205 and D206 are sequentially set (description omitted). ) Is executed, and the process proceeds to step D207 if it is not an instruction to stop the special symbol.
In step D205, a symbol stop scenario data setting process (not described) is executed.
In step D206, normal is set as the P machine state. Here, “normal” indicates that the special figure is not a big hit, is not changing, or is waiting for a customer (waiting for a customer). In addition, after the normal setting is made here, for example, the special drawing changes or the customer waits in accordance with the next command from the main board.

When the process proceeds to step D207, it is determined whether the MODE data notifies probability information (data of probability change information command). If probability information is notified, the process returns after executing probability information setting processing in step D208. If the probability information is not instructed, the process proceeds to another process step (not shown) (for example, another step for determining MODE data).
Here, the probability information setting process is a setting process for switching the screen at the time of the end of probability change (when transitioning from a high probability state to a low probability normal state) when a probability change occurs after a big hit, and a scenario for that Data setting processing may be included.
This single-shot command processing includes steps that are not shown or described. For example, the corresponding processing when receiving other non-variable commands (such as error commands) is omitted. In addition, scenario control data is not set for all commands. For example, when an error command indicating that the frame is open is received, the screen of the display device 41 is not changed, so that the scenario control data is not set.

[Customer waiting scenario data setting process]
Next, the details of the customer waiting scenario data setting process executed in step D183 in the single command processing described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, steps D211 to D234 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
In step D211, scenario layer number 0 is prepared. Here, “preparing” means temporarily storing data in a predetermined storage area for subsequent processing (the same applies to other steps described later). The scenario layer is a conceptual scenario layer (layer) for hierarchically controlling the flow of performance. The scenario layer number is a number assigned to each scenario layer, and in this example, it is from 0 to 7. In this example, the scenario layer with the scenario layer number 0 (hereinafter referred to as scenario layer 0) is mainly used for display control of the background image, and the scenario layer 1 is display control of the cut-in notice character (character means character). Control objects are basically assigned to each scenario layer. However, only the scenario layer 0 is used for the customer waiting effect, and motion information such as symbols for the customer waiting effect is managed in the scenario layer 0.

In step D212, the address of the customer waiting scenario data table is prepared. A scenario data table (also simply called a scenario table) is a table in which data for controlling the flow of a specific performance (data specifying which motion table is executed at what timing, etc.) is set. Each effect is stored in advance in the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300. The customer waiting scenario data table is a scenario table for a customer waiting effect, and has a structure shown in FIG. 177, for example. In addition, as shown in FIG. 177, the scenario table of this example is one in which opcode and operand data (scenario data) are set in each row (each record).
In step D213, a scenario data setting process described later is executed based on the data (address and scenario layer number data) prepared in the immediately preceding steps D211 and D212.

In step D214, scenario layer number 1 is prepared.
In step D215, an address (NULL) of the scenario data table is prepared.
In step D216, a scenario data setting process to be described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D214 and D215.
In step D217, scenario layer number 2 is prepared.
In step D218, an address (NULL) of the scenario data table is prepared.
In step D219, a scenario data setting process described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D217 and D218.

In step D220, scenario layer number 3 is prepared.
In step D221, an address (NULL) of the scenario data table is prepared.
In step D222, scenario data setting processing described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D220 and D221.
In step D223, scenario layer number 4 is prepared.
In step D224, an address (NULL) of the scenario data table is prepared.
In step D225, scenario data setting processing described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D223 and D224.

In step D226, scenario layer number 5 is prepared.
In step D227, an address (NULL) of the scenario data table is prepared.
In step D228, scenario data setting processing to be described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D226 and D227.
In step D229, scenario layer number 6 is prepared.
In step D230, an address (NULL) of the scenario data table is prepared.
In step D231, a scenario data setting process to be described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D229 and D230.

In step D232, scenario layer number 7 is prepared.
In step D233, an address (NULL) of the scenario data table is prepared.
In step D234, a scenario data setting process described later is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D232 and D233.
Note that scenario layers 1 to 7 for preparing addresses (NULL) in steps D215, D218, D221, D224, D227, D230, and D233 are scenario layers in which a scenario data table is not set, that is, uncontrolled scenario layers.

[Scenario data setting processing]
Next, details of the scenario data setting process executed in steps D213, D216, D219, D222, D225, D228, D231, and D234 in the above-described customer waiting scenario data setting process will be described with reference to FIG. Note that this scenario data setting process is common to various effects, and the step of executing this scenario data setting process is another routine (for example, step D318 of the reachless variation setting process described later). There are many. All steps described as “scenario data setting processing” are shown in FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D241, it is determined whether the address of the prepared scenario data table (for example, one prepared in steps D212, D215, etc.) is NULL, and if it is NULL, after executing step D247, If not NULL, steps D242 to D246 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.

  In the above-described customer waiting scenario data setting process, when this routine is executed in step D213, the address of the customer waiting scenario data table which is not NULL is prepared in the immediately preceding step D212, so that the step D241 is executed. The result of the determination is NO and steps D242 to D246 are executed. If this routine is executed in other steps D216, etc., NULL is prepared in the immediately preceding step D215, etc. The determination result of D241 is YES, and step D247 is executed.

  In step D242, the top address of the scenario management area corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number (for example, the one prepared in step D211, the same applies hereinafter) is set. In the case of this example, the RAM 311a of the effect control device 300 is configured to have a scenario management storage area called “scenario management area address area” and “scenario management area”. Of these, the scenario management area includes an area for storing a scenario timer value (scenario timer area), an area for storing a PB timer (push button timer) value (PB timer area), and PB detection. The structure includes an area (PB detection flag area) for storing the value of the flag (push button detection flag) and an area (scenario data table area) for storing the address of the scenario data table. Also, there are scenario management areas having the same structure corresponding to each scenario layer. In this example, there are 8 scenario layers, so there are also 8 scenario management areas (scenario management areas 0 to 7). . In step D242, in order to identify one of the plurality of scenario management areas as described above, the start address of the scenario management area corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number (hereinafter referred to as the corresponding scenario management area) is set. doing.

The address area of the scenario management area is an area for storing the start address of the scenario management area for each scenario layer. In this example, since there are eight scenario layers, the corresponding eight start addresses (scenarios) 8 addresses for storing (layer 0 address to scenario layer 7 address).
Next, in step D243, the start address of the scenario management area set in the immediately preceding step D242 is stored (that is, written) in the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number.

Next, in Step D244, 0 is written as the value of the scenario timer in the corresponding scenario management area (that is, the value is cleared).
Next, in step D245, 0 is written as the value of the PB timer in the corresponding scenario management area (that is, the value is cleared). Note that the value of the PB detection flag in the corresponding scenario management area may be cleared, but it may be cleared when necessary (when PB detection is started), so the value of the PB detection flag is set here. Absent.
Next, in step D246, the address of the prepared scenario data table (for example, the one prepared in step D212) is written in the scenario data table area of the corresponding scenario management area.
On the other hand, in step D247, NULL is written in the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number.

According to the scenario data setting process described above, the scenario management storage area (“scenario management area address area” and “scenario management area”) corresponding to the prepared scenario layer number is to be executed for the future. Scenario control data is set.
For example, in the above-described customer waiting scenario data setting process, the scenario data setting process is executed in steps D213, D216, D219, D222, D225, D228, D231, and D234, whereby the scenario in the address area of the scenario management area is executed. The top address of the scenario management area 0 is set as the layer 0 address, and NULL is set from the remaining scenario layer 1 address to the scenario layer 7 address. The address of the customer waiting scenario data table prepared in step D212 is set in the scenario data table area of the scenario management area 0. As a result, the control of the customer waiting effect is executed only in the scenario layer 0.

[Special Figure 1 Hold Information Setting Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 hold information setting process executed in step D192 in the single-shot command process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D251, the data of the special figure 1 holding number at that time is loaded, and this loaded data is stored as the previous holding number, and then in step D252, the command (step D91) is stored. The value of the number of holdings commanded in MODE and ACT data separated in step 1) is stored as the special figure 1 holding number, and then the process proceeds to step D253.

In step D253, it is determined whether the number of new reservations (the figure 1 reservation stored in step D252) matches the previous reservation (the value stored in step D251). If not, step D254 to step D257 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D258.
In step D254, the index of the motion control table for hold corresponding to the new hold number is calculated and saved. The index is data that specifies the number of a plurality of storage areas that form a group. In particular, an index that specifies a motion table is referred to as a motion index (described later in detail). In this step D254, a motion index for specifying the motion control table for holding corresponding to the new number of reservations is calculated and saved in a storage area (holding index area) for storing it.
In step D255, scenario layer number 6 is prepared.
In step D256, the address of the special figure 1 holding scenario data table (X holding) is prepared. Here, the special figure 1 holding scenario data table (X holdings) means a scenario table that is different for each holding number for producing an effect corresponding to the new holding number. For example, if the number of new reservations is 2, for example, it is a special figure 1 reservation scenario data table (two reservations).
In step D257, the above-described scenario data setting process is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D255 and D256.

When the process proceeds to step D258, it is determined whether or not the number of holdings has increased (that is, the number of new holdings> the number of previous holdings). If it has increased, the process proceeds to step D259.
In step D259, a display pattern of on-hold normal lighting is set in the color information area corresponding to the new on-hold number, and in the next step D260, it is determined whether the P machine state is a big hit. If the result of determination in step D260 is that it is a big hit, the process returns, and if it is not a big hit, the next step D261 requests output of the start opening winning sound, and then returns. The big hit includes the above-described fanfare, round, interval, and ending.

In step D262, the special figure 1 prefetch information area is shifted, and in the next step D263, the color information area is shifted, and then the process returns.
Since the process proceeds to step D259 when there is a start prize in FIG. 1, in order to perform a hold display (display of a held start memory) and a winning sound output for production by this start prize. Steps D259 and D261 are executed. However, during the big hit, the process branches at step D260 and no winning sound is output. Further, the process proceeds to step D262 when the number of reserved start-ups in FIG. 1 is reduced, so that the display of the number of holds for which pre-reading display (for example, jackpot notice or fluctuation pattern notice) is displayed is shifted. In addition, steps D262 and D263 are executed in order to shift the prefetch information (various information (flags and the like) such as prefetched variation pattern and stop symbol information and prefetch effect information) to an area corresponding to the number of reservations.
In the effect control apparatus 300, in the above-described step D109 (prefetch command processing), the prefetch information is set as the analysis result of the prefetch command for each hold. The storage area for the pre-read information needs to be shifted corresponding to the decrease in the number of reservations in the same manner as the random number storage area is shifted at the start of fluctuation on the main board. Step D262 described above is present. Step D263 is a process for similarly shifting the storage area of the information of the reserved display color corresponding to the pre-read information (that is, the color of the hold display that varies depending on the presence or absence of the pre-read effect for the pre-read effect). It is.

[Variation production setting processing]
Next, details of the changing effect setting process executed in step D114 in the above-described changing command process will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. FIG.
When this routine is started, first, steps D271 to D275 are executed, and the process proceeds to step D276.
In step D271, a variation pattern classification process (to be described later) for selecting a roughly classified pattern (a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special drawing, which is determined by the roughly classified pattern data described later) according to the received command is executed. .
In Step D272, the notice distribution table 1 corresponding to the broad pattern returned in the variation pattern classification process in Step D271 and various effect information is prepared. Here, the production information is information on the stop symbol (especially because the details of the big hit symbol, since the deviation can be understood by a broad pattern), information on the probability state such as a high probability / short time state, the number of holdings, and the production control device 300 (In this embodiment, a game mode command is also sent from the game control device). In this step D272 (or steps D274 and D277 described later), the notice distribution table is set in consideration of various production information. For example, even with the same variation pattern command, the notice distribution ratio ( (Incidence rate) can be changed.
In Step D273, a random number lottery process A (described later) is executed.
In step D274, the notice allocation table 2 corresponding to the major pattern returned in step D271 is prepared.
In Step D275, a random number lottery process B (described later) is executed.

In step D276, it is determined whether the main pattern returned in step D271 is “ordinary deviation”. If “normal deviation”, the process proceeds to step D279. After the execution, go to Step D279.
In step D277, the notice distribution table 3 corresponding to the major pattern returned in step D271 is prepared.
In step D278, a random number lottery process C (described later) is executed.
In step D279, a basic BGM number (basic BGM song number) is set. Next, in step D280, notice effect setting processing 1 (described later) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D281.

When the process proceeds to step D281, it is determined whether or not the first-half variation type determined in the processing so far is a normal variation. If it is a normal variation, the process proceeds to step D282. The processing step (variation processing when the first-half variation type is not normal variation) is performed.
The first-half variation type is a variation notice type that is distributed on the side of the production control device in the same MODE (for example, the first half-second normal variation). In addition, “normal” in “normal fluctuation” means that it is not a special fluctuation such as a so-called slip or shortening fluctuation. Also, in order to avoid complication, only the state of the notice distribution when the first half variation type is normal (not slipping or shortening) is shown in the flowchart (FIG. 112). And the process of various fluctuations when the first half fluctuation type is not a normal fluctuation is executed in the steps after the flow in which the determination result in step D281 is NO (not shown by the wavy line in FIG. 112). After the subsequent processing is executed, the process proceeds to step D290 in FIG. Further, since the first half fluctuation can be normal in either case of big hit or out of date, each scenario data setting process for notice (steps D286 to D289 described later) may be executed in any case of out of big hit. is there. However, since the first-half fluctuation dedicated to big hits is also conceivable, the setting process is not always limited to both.

Proceeding to step D282, it is determined whether the notice type (data in the effect distribution result area described later) determined in the process so far (step D273, etc.) specifies scroll notice. Proceeding to step D283, if it is a scroll notice, a scroll notice scenario data setting process (not shown) is executed at step D286, and then proceeding to step D290.
When it proceeds to step D283, it is determined whether or not the notice type determined in the process so far is to designate a scroll character notice. If it is not a scroll character notice, the process proceeds to step D284. After executing the scroll character notice scenario data setting process (not shown) in step D287, the process proceeds to step D290.

When the process proceeds to step D284, it is determined whether or not the notice type determined in the process so far specifies a PB notice. If not, the process proceeds to step D285. After executing the PB notice scenario data setting process (described later), the process proceeds to step D290.
In step D285, it is determined whether or not the notice type determined in the process so far specifies flashback notice. If it is not a flashback notice, the process proceeds to step D290. After executing the flashback notice scenario data setting process (not shown) in step D289, the process proceeds to step D290.

When the process proceeds to step D290, it is determined whether or not the special figure type is special figure 2. If special figure 2, the process proceeds to step D295 after executing steps D291 and D292. In the case), after executing steps D293 and D294, the process proceeds to step D295.
In step D291, a motion index for specifying the suspension motion control table corresponding to FIG. 2 is calculated and saved in a storage area (pending index area) for storing the motion index.
In step D292, a motion index for specifying the motion control table for the fourth symbol (figure 2) is calculated and saved in a storage area (fourth symbol index area) for storing it.
In step D293, a motion index for specifying the suspension motion control table corresponding to FIG. 1 is calculated and saved in a storage area (pending index area) for storing the motion index.
In step D294, a motion index for specifying the motion control table for the 4th symbol (figure 1) is calculated and saved in a storage area (4th symbol index area) for storing it.

FIG. 165 is an example of a motion list table stored in the ROM 321 of the effect control device. The motion list table is a data table of a motion table in which data relating to a large number of motion tables is arranged in each row (each record). The data in each row of this motion list table table is data related to one motion table. Each row of the motion list table includes the number of frames, the number of motion commands, the name of the motion table, the number of behaviors, and the behavior table name as data items (data categories). However, this category setting is an example, and other parameters may be set. The contents of each data item are as follows.
The number of frames (display frame number) indicates how many frames of motion data (data constituting the motion table) are defined in the motion table.
・ The number of motion commands indicates the number of commands defined in the motion table.
The motion table name indicates the name (= address) of the motion table.
-The number of behaviors indicates the number (type) of behaviors used in the motion table.
The behavior table name indicates the name (= address) of the behavior table in which the behavior (processing address) at the time of the motion control is defined.
If the number of behaviors is 0, the behavior table is naturally unnecessary.
Here, the behavior is a function for setting the operation of the object (display element). In this example, image data (character data) defined on the motion table is mainly used to change according to the situation.

  Also, on the right side of the motion list table in FIG. 165, the display contents corresponding to the value of the motion index are shown. In this case, in step D292 described above, 62 is calculated as the value of the motion index for specifying the motion control table for the fourth symbol (figure 2 variation). In step D294 described above, 61 is calculated as the value of the motion index that specifies the motion control table for the fourth symbol (figure 1 variation).

  Next, when proceeding to step D295, the value of the special figure stop symbol area is saved in the current symbol area. Here, the value of the special figure stop symbol area is data set in step D354 described later. The current symbol area is a storage area for storing the symbol number of the current symbol to be displayed (a storage area containing the symbol number of the current symbol to be displayed on the screen at that time). The symbol number of the symbol) is updated one after another with the variation during the variation display. Note that the fluctuation display of the special figure starts the next fluctuation display (including the symbol display waiting for the customer) from the stop pattern of the previous fluctuation display, but in order to perform this operation with certainty, the previous fluctuation display is performed in this step D295. The display stop symbol is saved and used for the next fluctuation display. This is particularly meaningful when a new variation command is received during variation display. That is, when a new fluctuation command is received during the fluctuation display, the process of step D295 is performed, so that the next fluctuation should not be started from the symbol displayed at the time of reception, but should be stopped at the previous fluctuation. Changed to a symbol and starts to change. In this case, if step D295 is not present, there is a problem that the player does not know which symbol should have stopped, starting from the symbol displayed at that time (variable command reception time). However, in this example, since there is step D295, it will be replaced by the symbol that should have stopped due to the previous change, and the player will start the change, so the player knows the previous stop symbol, so such a problem Is resolved.

Next, after passing through step D295, the process proceeds to step D296, where it is determined whether or not the MODE data (first half fluctuation pattern data) separated in step D91 is a command for normal fluctuation in the first half of 12 seconds. If not, the process proceeds to step D297. If not, the process proceeds to step D299. Here, “normal” in “normal fluctuation in the first half of 12 seconds” means that it is not a special fluctuation such as a shortening fluctuation.
In this example, in the case of a normal fluctuation in the first half of 12 seconds, there can only be a fluctuation pattern without reach action. In this case, since the reach action is not performed, the time value of the second half fluctuation is set as 0, and the fluctuation pattern is 12 seconds in total (that is, the normal fluctuation of 12 seconds; “normal” here means the fluctuation that is not reach). ). That is, the latter half fluctuation time value indicated by the ACT data (second half fluctuation pattern) separated in step D91 is a zero second fluctuation.

Proceeding to step D297, it is determined whether or not the ACT data commands no reach action (0-second fluctuation). If no reach action, no reach action fluctuation setting process (described later) is executed in step D298, and the process returns. If there is no reach action, it is abnormal and the process returns without executing step D298.
Proceeding to step D299, it is determined whether or not the MODE data (first half fluctuation pattern) commands a normal fluctuation in the first half of 10.4 seconds ("normal" here is not a shortening fluctuation or the like), If it is a command for instructing a normal variation in the first half of 10.4 seconds, the process proceeds to step D300. In this example, in the case of a normal fluctuation in the first half of 10.4 seconds, there can only be a fluctuation pattern with a reach action. In this case, since the time value of the second half variation changes with the contents of the reach action, the variation pattern is defined as a total of (10.4 + α) seconds. There are a plurality of types of ACT data (second half variation pattern) for the same MODE, and this number varies depending on the specifications of each gaming machine.

In step D300, it is determined whether or not the ACT data (second-half fluctuation pattern) is for instructing a deviation of deviation from normal-1. If normal-1 is to instruct a deviation, normal -1 is lost in step D304. After executing the setting process (description omitted), the process returns, and if it does not instruct the fluctuation of deviation from normal-1, the process proceeds to step D301. Note that the deviation from normal-1 is a fluctuation pattern that deviates with normal reach action.
In step D301, it is determined whether or not the ACT data (second-half fluctuation pattern) is for instructing a deviation deviation from normal + 1. After executing (not shown), the process returns, and if it is not intended to command a deviation of normal + 1, the process proceeds to step D302. Note that a deviation from normal +1 is a variation pattern that deviates with normal reach action.

  Proceeding to step D302, it is determined whether or not the ACT data (second-half fluctuation pattern) is for instructing a deviation of military commander -1. After executing the setting process (description omitted), the process returns. Note that the warrior -1 slippage is a fluctuation pattern that comes off with the warrior reach action.

  Proceeding to step D303, it is determined whether or not the ACT data (second half fluctuation pattern) commands a change in military commander development-1. If a command for a military commander development-1 command is given, a military commander development is performed in step D307. -1 returns after executing the deviation setting process (not described), and if the warlord development -1 does not command deviation fluctuation, the process proceeds to other steps omitted in the wavy line in FIG. In addition, the general deviation of warlord development -1 is a fluctuation pattern that comes off with the warrior development reach action. In addition, after the flow in which the determination result in step D303 is NO (location not shown by a wavy line), other reach effects in the case of a normal variation in the first half of 10.4 seconds (including a variation display effect in the case of a big hit, for example) If the same processing as in steps D303, D307, etc. is executed for the above, and the ACT data does not correspond to any of them, it is abnormal and the process returns.

  On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step D308 through step D299, it is determined whether or not the MODE data (first half fluctuation pattern) commands 12.8 second pseudo-run 1 fluctuation, and 12.8 second pseudo-run 1 fluctuation is determined. If so, the process proceeds to Step D309, and if it is not to command the 12.8-second pseudo-ream 1 fluctuation, the process proceeds to another step omitted with a broken line in FIG. Note that, after the flow in which the determination result in step D308 is NO (location not shown by the wavy line), the same processing as steps D303, D307, etc. is executed for the variable display effect when the MODE data is other than the above. If the MODE data does not correspond to any of the above, it is abnormal and returns.

  Proceeding to step D309, it is determined whether or not the ACT data (second-half fluctuation pattern) is for instructing a deviation of military commander -1. After executing the setting process (description omitted), the process returns, and if warlord-1 does not instruct a change in deviation, the process proceeds to another step omitted with a broken line in FIG. In addition, after the flow in which the determination result of step D309 is NO (location not shown by a wavy line), other reach effects in the case of 12.8 second pseudo-run 1 change (for example, a change display effect in the case of a big hit) ), The same processing as in steps D309 and D310 is executed, and if the data of the ACT does not correspond to any, it is abnormal and the process returns.

[Change setting process without reach]
Next, details of the non-reach fluctuation setting process executed in step D298 in the above-described fluctuation effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, MODE = normal variation in the first half of 12 seconds is only out of place. For this reason, a symbol generation flag, which will be described later, set in this routine is merely an off symbol.
When this routine is started, first in step D311, it is determined whether the first half type of variation set in the previous process (steps D271 to D278) is a super shortening variation. An out-of-order symbol generation flag is prepared and the process proceeds to step D314. If it is not a super short variation, in step D313, a non-shifted symbol generation flag is prepared and the process proceeds to step D314.
The ultra-shortening variation is an example of variation in such a case where even if the command from the main board is a normal fluctuation in the first half of 12 seconds, the sub board may select to perform reach movement. .
Further, the loose eye means a state in which a plurality of symbols constituting the special symbol are not a symbol that is a reach or a big hit (including a combination such as “776” if the combination is not a reach type combination).

When the process proceeds to step D314, the process returns after executing steps D314 to D330 in sequence.
In step D314, a stop symbol setting process (described later) is executed based on the symbol generation flag prepared in step D312 or D313.

  In step D315, the address (scenario table name) of the scenario table corresponding to the ACT and the first half type of variation is saved in the symbol variation scenario table area. The symbol variation scenario table area is a storage area of the RAM 311a of the effect control apparatus 300 for temporarily storing the address of the symbol variation scenario table to be used in the future, and includes the left symbol area, the right symbol area, and the middle symbol. In addition, each symbol area is divided into 1st (early), 2nd (first half), and 3rd (second half) areas, and a total of nine areas for storing the addresses of one scenario table (= 3) × 3) On the other hand, the PROM 321 of the effect control device 300 includes a command (hereinafter referred to as a symbol variation list table) for selecting a scenario table for symbol variation according to the command received from the game control device and the first variation type for each command. (For each ACT data). FIG. 168 shows an example of the symbol variation list table (when there is no outlier reach variation). In step D315, first, the symbol variation list table corresponding to the ACT is selected, and then the setting pattern corresponding to the first variation type is selected from the plurality of setting patterns in the selected symbol variation list table and selected. Saves the address of the scenario table of the setting pattern in the symbol variation scenario table area.

For example, in the case of FIG. 168, there are 8 patterns (normal fluctuation, right 3 fluctuation, right 2 fluctuation, left 3 fluctuation, left 2 fluctuation, centering fluctuation, group male fluctuation, and super shortening fluctuation) with indexes 0 to 7.
When the first half type of variation is, for example, normal variation, in step D315, the topmost setting pattern with the index value 0 shown in the right side of FIG. 168 is selected, for example, for the 1st (early) design of the left symbol MS_LZ100 is saved in the area, MS_LZ300 is saved in the 2nd (first half) area of the left design, NULL is saved in the 3rd (second half) area of the left design, and the right design and the middle design are similarly at the top. The address of the scenario table will be saved.
In the present application, the period of the movement of the symbol within the first half variation time is “early” (1st), and the remaining period within the first half variation time is “first half” (2nd). Even if the same first half variation time, the movement of the symbol may be scrolled down as it is or hopped up once (a kind of notice), so that the movement does not go all the way "early + first half = first half fluctuation" It is the composition. The second half fluctuation time is “second half” (3rd). In addition, in this embodiment, the production contents are set for each period obtained by dividing the production at the time of special figure variation into a plurality of times in this way, and the whole production at the time of special figure fluctuation is combined as the production content of each period. It is a combination formula. This has the advantage that the total amount of data that must be stored in the nonvolatile memory for storing control data (PROM 321 in this example) is reduced. That is, for example, if all tables are prepared for each production content that has a slightly different movement, the amount of data becomes enormous, but such a combination improves the problem.

In step D316, scenario layer number 0 is prepared.
In step D317, an address of the background scenario table corresponding to the current game mode and the like is prepared.
In step D318, the above-described scenario data setting process is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D316 and D317.
In step D319, scenario layer number 1 is prepared.
In step D320, the left symbol scenario 1st table address (the address of the scenario table stored in the 1st (early) area in the left symbol area) is prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area described above.
In step D321, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D319 and D320.

In step D322, scenario layer number 2 is prepared.
In step D323, the right symbol scenario 1st table address (the address of the scenario table stored in the 1st (early) area in the right symbol area) is prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area described above.

In step D324, the above-described scenario data setting process is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D322 and D323.
In step D325, scenario layer number 3 is prepared.
In step D326, the medium symbol scenario 1st table address (the address of the scenario table stored in the 1st (early) area in the medium symbol area described above) is loaded from the symbol variation scenario table area described above and prepared.
In step D327, the above-described scenario data setting process is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D325 and D326.

In step D328, scenario layer number 7 is prepared.
In step D329, an address of the fourth symbol scenario table (scenario table for the fourth symbol) is prepared.
In step D330, the above-described scenario data setting process is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D328 and D329.
According to the routine described above (variation setting processing without reach), the scenario layer (in this case, scenario layers 0, 1, 2, 3, and 7) that requires setting of scenario control data in the case of variation without reach is performed. For example, a combination as shown in FIG. 168 is selected as the scenario table.

[Stop symbol setting process]
Next, details of the stop symbol setting process executed in step D314 in the above-described reachless variation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. In this example, there are three symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) in which special graphics for production are arranged side by side. These symbols are nine types (symbol numbers 0 to 8). The case where there is.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D331 whether the above-mentioned special figure type is a special figure 2 fluctuation. If it is special figure 2, step D332 is executed and then the process proceeds to step D334. In the case of FIG. 1), after executing step D333, the process proceeds to step D334.
In step D332, the shifted symbol number is saved in the special symbol 2 symbol of the special symbol stop symbol area.
In step D333, the symbol number is shifted to the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol in the special symbol stop symbol area.

  When the process proceeds to step D334, it is determined whether or not a misalignment is prepared as the symbol generation flag. If it is set, the process proceeds to step D337 after executing steps D335 to D336, and if not set, the process proceeds to step D345. In addition, the symbol generation flag of the disparity pattern is prepared in the above-described step D313.

Step D335 is a process of setting one symbol number selected at random from nine types of symbol numbers 0 to 8 as the left symbol lx.
Step D336 is a process of setting one symbol number selected at random from eight symbol numbers 0 to 7 as the right symbol rx.
Proceeding to step D337, it is determined whether the right symbol rx set at step D336 is equal to or greater than the left symbol lx set at step D335. If right symbol rx ≧ left symbol lx, the symbol of the right symbol rx is determined at step D338. The number is incremented by 1 and the process proceeds to step D339. If the right symbol rx ≧ the left symbol lx is not satisfied (that is, if the right symbol rx <the left symbol lx), the process proceeds to step D339 without executing step D338.
By the processing of steps D335 to D338, the left symbol lx and the right symbol rx are set randomly, and the left symbol lx and the right symbol rx are always set to different symbol numbers. The reason for selecting from the range of symbol number 7 or less in step D336 is to ensure that one can be increased in step D338.

Proceeding to step D339, it is determined whether the left symbol lx and the right symbol rx are combinations that can be an appearance prohibition symbol. If the combination can be an appearance prohibition symbol, the procedure proceeds to step D340. move on. Here, the “prohibited appearance” symbol is a symbol that is prohibited from appearing as a disjointed pattern. For example, in the case of a specification that uses a combination of 3, 5, and 7 as a chance chance, such as “357”, “375”, “537”,..., Prohibition control is performed so that the chance eye does not appear at the time of fluctuation. When necessary, this chance is a symbol that is prohibited from appearing. Steps D339 to D343 are processing for this prohibition control. In the case of a model that only needs to be separated, this prohibition control is unnecessary, and only the processing in the right column (step D344) is sufficient.
More specifically, for example, if a combination of 3, 5, and 7 is an appearance prohibited symbol, in step D339, the symbol number of the left symbol lx and the right symbol rx is any of 3, 5, and 7 different from each other. If the number is two, the process proceeds to step D340 because it can be an appearance prohibition symbol.

Proceeding to step D340, the cx value at which the combination of “left symbol lx, middle symbol cx, right symbol rx” becomes an appearance prohibited symbol is stored in a storage area called nocx. For example, if the left symbol lx is 3 and the right symbol rx is 5, then if the middle symbol cx is 7, then the special symbol combination is “3, 7, 5” and the symbol is prohibited from appearing. Therefore, the value 7 of the symbol cx is set to nocx.
After step D340, in step D341, a process of setting one symbol number randomly selected from the eight symbol numbers 0 to 7 as the middle symbol cx is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D342.

Proceeding to step D342, it is determined whether medium symbol cx ≧ nocx. If medium symbol cx ≧ nocx, the value of medium symbol cx is incremented by one at step D343, and the procedure proceeds to step D354, where intermediate symbol cx ≧ nocx must be satisfied. For example, the process proceeds to Step D354 without executing Step D343.
According to the processing of these steps D341 to D343, the value of the middle symbol cx is always different from nocx, and the combination of “left symbol lx, middle symbol cx, right symbol rx” is not necessarily an appearance prohibited symbol. It becomes.
When the process proceeds to step D344, a process of setting one symbol number selected at random from eight kinds of symbol numbers 0 to 7 as the middle symbol cx is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D354.

When the process proceeds to step D345, it is determined whether or not reach-1 is set as the symbol generation flag. If it is set, the process proceeds to step D347 after executing step D346. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step D353. It should be noted that the symbol generation flag for reach-1 is set in steps D304 and D306 described above.
In step D346, a process of storing one value selected at random from ten values 0 to 9 as tmprnd is executed.
In step D347, it is determined whether the value of tmprnd is 0. If it is 0, steps D348 and D349 are sequentially executed, and then the procedure proceeds to step D352.

In step D348, a process of storing one value randomly selected from the odd four types of values 1, 3, 5, and 7 as the number of the left symbol lx is executed. Note that the description in the drawing of step D348 is described using a programming language, “rand” indicates a function for generating a random number, “mod” indicates an operation for obtaining a remainder of division, and “ rand () mod 4 ”is a value selected at random from 0, 1, 2, and 3. In step D348, the value of “rand () mod 4” is doubled and added by 1, so that one of the values 1, 3, 5, and 7 is selected at random.
In step D350, a process of storing one value randomly selected from five types of even values 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8 as the number of the left symbol lx is executed.
In step D349 or D351, the value of the right symbol rx is made the same as the value of the left symbol lx in order to obtain the reach symbol (that is, the right symbol is the same as the left symbol).

  Here, according to the processing of steps D346 to D348 and step D350, the odd and even appearance ratios of the reach symbols can be changed. In this case, since the process proceeds from step D347 to step D348 only in the case of tmprnd = 0, the odd-numbered symbol appearance ratio is 1/10, whereas the ratio from step D347 to step D350 (that is, even-numbered symbol). The appearance ratio) is 9/10. This is done for the following reason. In other words, since there is a re-lottery effect, the reach pattern when a big hit is inevitably likely to be an even number. Therefore, the appearance rate of the odd reach is lowered in order not to reduce the jackpot reliability of the odd reach. Of course, the ratio of the odd and even appearance rates may not be a ratio of 1: 9. Further, in this example, an example in which a symbol is obtained by calculation as in steps D348 and D350 is illustrated, but a symbol may be selected by a random number and a data table.

When the process proceeds to step D352, the result obtained by subtracting 1 from the value of the left symbol lx is set as the value of the middle symbol cx so that −1 is deviated, and then the process proceeds to step D354.
When the process proceeds to step D353, a process of generating a combination of symbols (including a jackpot symbol) corresponding to another symbol generation flag is executed, and then the process proceeds to step D354.
In step D354, the values of the left symbol lx, middle symbol cx, and right symbol rx set in the steps so far are stored in the left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol of the stop symbol region, respectively, and then the process returns.
Note that the steps D334 to D352 described above are processing in the case of a missed break and reach-1 in the case of a miss. Actually, there are many other types of stop symbols, but in order to avoid complications, these other types of processing are collectively shown in step D353. Illustration and description are omitted.
In the case of generating the big hit symbol, for example, a method of determining only the left symbol and copying it to the middle / right symbol can be considered. In addition, a case where the number is limited to “777” or a combination of stop symbols is defined on a plurality of tables regardless of calculation, and one of them is selected by a random number is conceivable.
In step D332 and D333 described above, only the 4th symbol outlier is set. However, in the case of winning, in step D353, the 4th symbol hitting symbol corresponding to the symbol generation flag is set. Yes. Also, the symbol generation flag has various setting contents such as “2R probability variation big hit symbol”, “16R probability variation big hit symbol”, etc. For example, in the case of the flag “2R probability variation big hit symbol”, left middle right There are multiple combinations in the 4th pattern as shown in Fig. 174 so that multiple patterns such as "357", "573", etc. are created for the designs (left design, middle design, and right design as decorative designs). Which combination appears is determined by a random number. The combination of the colors of the 4th pattern corresponds to the winning category on a one-to-one basis. For example, the combination of “upper blue, lower blue” is a big hit that does not change and “upper blue, lower yellow” is a positive change big hit It corresponds. Although different for each model, meanings are defined in advance for the color combinations of the 4th pattern in the specifications of the gaming machine. In this example, there is only one pattern of “upper white, lower white” in the case of a deviation, and the white color itself is used only when it is out of place. 115, only the symbol number is set. Therefore, for example, symbol number = 0 is set for both of the special figures 1 and 2 in the case of losing, and the symbol number = 0 is “ It is defined as a combination of “upper white, lower white”. In the winning symbols, for example, the fourth symbol number is from 1 to 36 (for example, from 1 to 18 at random variation, from 19 to 36 at non-probable variation). 1 and 2 may be different. For example, even if “upper blue, lower blue” in Special Figure 1 is not a certain change, it can be a combination of certain changes in Special Figure 2. For this reason, the symbol number and color combination tables are separate for special figures 1 and 2. In this way, there are many color combinations of the 4th symbol, and the meaning (definition) of the color combinations in the 4th symbol's Special Fig. 1 and 2 is changed in the form of the left middle right symbol. This is because it is difficult to discriminate even with a combination of the colors of the 4th pattern, in the same way that it is not known.

[Variation pattern classification process]
Next, details of the variation pattern classification process executed in step D271 in the above-described variation effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D361 whether the MODE data is a variable command, and if it is a variable command, the process proceeds to step D362, and if it is not a variable command, the process proceeds to step D368.
In step D362, it is determined whether the ACT data is in the valid range. If the data is in the valid range, step D363 is executed, and the process proceeds to step D364. If not, the process proceeds to step D368.

In step D363, variation pattern check data corresponding to the MODE data is acquired. The fluctuation pattern check data is set for each MODE data of the fluctuation command, and 0 is set as the fluctuation pattern check data for MODE data that is not used in the model.
In step D364, it is determined whether the variation pattern check data acquired in step D363 is 0. If 0, the process proceeds to step D368, and if not 0, the process returns after executing steps D365 to D367 in sequence.

In step D365, a broad pattern table corresponding to the MODE data is set.
In step D366, broad pattern data corresponding to the ACT data is acquired based on the broad pattern table set in step D365.
In step D367, the broad pattern data acquired in step D366 is returned and the process returns.
In step D368, 0 is returned and the process returns.

  Here, the general pattern table is as shown in FIG. 162, for example, and is provided for each MODE data. FIG. 162 shows a major pattern table C3 that is set when MODE data has a normal fluctuation in the first half of 12 seconds, and a major pattern table CB that is set when MODE data has a normal fluctuation in the first half of 10.4 seconds. The large pattern table CC set when the MODE data is 12.8 pseudo-continuous 1 fluctuation is shown as a specific example. These broad pattern patterns are arranged in a matrix (matrix) corresponding to high-order data and low-order data of ACT, and rows are determined corresponding to high-order data 0 to 4 of ACT. By determining the columns corresponding to the lower data 0 to F of the ACT, the pattern data is roughly classified, and the size of the table is 5 rows × 16 columns. A breakdown example of the broad pattern data is as follows. That is, 0: invalid data, 1: no reach fluctuation, 2: normal reach, 3: female system reach, 4: military commander reach, 5: plane completed warlord development system reach, 6: group male system reach, 7: Chance eye reach big hit (2R probability change), 8: Normal reach big hit (2R probability change), ... 16: Normal reach big hit (16R probability change, 11R probability change, 11R normal), 17: Female reach big hit (16R probability change, 11R probability change, 11R Normal), 18: Military Command Reach Big Hit (16R Probability, 11R Probability, 11R Normal), 19: Plane Completed Commander Reach Big Hit (16R Probability, 11R Probability, 11R Normal), 20: Gunma Reach Big Hit (16R Probability, 11R probability change, 11R normal), and so on.

In the case of the example in FIG. 162, for example, if the MODE data is the normal fluctuation in the first half of 12 seconds and the ACT data is 01h, the large pattern table C3 is selected and set in step D365, and the large pattern in step D366. “1” (displacement without reach change) in the first row and the second column (corresponding to the ACT data 01h) of the table C3 is acquired as broadly classified pattern data. The same applies when MODE and ACT are other data.
In the present embodiment, since the number of the latter half variation patterns (ACT data) is in the range of 01h to 4Bh, the table has the above size (5 rows × 16 columns), but this is an example. Alternatively, a more finely divided configuration may be used, or conversely, for example, a configuration in which roughly different pattern data portions having the same value are roughly divided may be used.

In addition, in order to prepare the notice distribution table corresponding to the MODE and ACT data in the above-described step D272 and the like, the broadly classified pattern data indicates to which classification the variation pattern commanded by the MODE and ACT data belongs. It is the data shown. That is, there is this broad pattern data in order to check the system of the variation pattern from the command value and to set the corresponding notice allocation table. This is because the occurrence rate of the notice changes depending on the type of reach.
The broad pattern table is a table for determining the broad pattern data as described above. In this general pattern table, the general pattern data is 0 as shown in FIG. 162 where there is no combination of MODE and ACT data. Therefore, if there is no combination of MODE and ACT data, step D367 returns 0 as in step D368. In addition, when 0 is returned in this way, for example, it is handled in the same way as normal losing. If it is handled in the same way as normal, there is an advantage that even if there is an abnormality in the confirmed command, the special figure can be changed temporarily, so that the player can be kept uneasy. . However, when 0 is returned, there is a mode in which the change start setting is not performed as a configuration in which, for example, step D271 is executed in the change effect setting process and then the process is returned without executing step D272 and the subsequent steps. In this way, the special figure can be prevented from fluctuating in the case of command abnormality.

[Random lottery processing A]
Next, details of the random number lottery process A executed in step D273 in the above-described variation effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG. This routine is a process of selecting a distribution result in the notice distribution table 1 prepared for the distribution group A in step D272 described above by random number for each type.
When this routine is started, steps D371 to D380 are repeatedly executed until the notice type number A is incremented by 1 from the initial value 1 until the final value na (for example, na = 9), and then the process returns. That is, in step D371, immediately after the routine starts, the notice type number A is set to 1, and the process proceeds to step D372. In step D380, if the notice type number A is less than na, the process returns to step D371, and if the notice type number A is na, the process returns. Then, when returning to step D371, the value of the notice type number A is increased by 1, and the process proceeds to step D372. The closing price na differs depending on the model.

  Note that the notice allocation table prepared in steps D272, D274, and D277 is a matrix-like data table (matrix) as shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, for example, in the same row (stage) for each type of distribution. The distribution values of various distribution results are arranged side by side. The value of the notice type number A corresponds to one of a plurality of rows in this table. For example, A = 1 is the first row from the top, A = 2 is the second row from the top,. It corresponds as follows. That is, the notice type number is a parameter indicating the vertical arrangement position (number line) of a specific distribution value in the notice distribution table. In addition, a distribution table address is provided as a parameter indicating the horizontal arrangement position (number of columns) of a specific distribution value in one row of the notice distribution table. In this example, since there are 1000 types of random values ranging from 0 to 999 in this example, the allocation values are numbers in the range of 0 to 999 that are set to be 1000 when all the distributed values in the same row are added. is there. The same applies to other distribution tables and other notice type numbers B and C.

  When the process proceeds to step D372, a process of storing one value selected at random from 0 to 999 as rdm is executed, then the distribution number is set to 0 (initial value) at step D373, and then a notice is given at step D374. After setting the value of the sorting table address corresponding to the type number A (value indicating the first column of the row corresponding to the value of the notice type number A), the process proceeds to step D375. Here, as described above, the distribution table address designates the horizontal position (hereinafter referred to as the current address) in the same row in the notice distribution table prepared in step D272 described above.

Proceeding to step D375, the distribution value of the current address at that time is compared with the value of rdm. If the value of rdm is greater than or equal to the distribution value, the process proceeds to step D376, where the value of rdm is If it is less than the distribution value, the process proceeds to step D379.
In step D376, a value obtained by subtracting the distribution value from the rdm value is set as a new rdm value. Next, in step D377, the current address of the distribution table is increased by one (distribution table). In the same row, an update for shifting the current address by one column in the direction away from the head is performed, and then an update for increasing the distribution number by 1 is performed in step D378, and then the process returns to step D375 to repeat the process.

  According to the processes of steps D375 to D378, the process of updating the current address by subtracting the distribution value from the value of rdm is repeated until the value of rdm becomes less than the distribution value. Then, when the value of rdm becomes less than the distribution value (that is, when the determination result of step D375 is NO), the current address update count (that is, the distribution number value) and the notice at that time The value of the type number A indicates one specific position (that is, one distribution result) in the notice distribution table, and the distribution result is selected based on a random number.

Proceeding to step D379, a distribution number corresponding to the number of times the current address is updated (that is, the number of times the steps D376, D377, etc. are repeatedly executed) is used as a preliminary announcement data value, and the preliminary announcement data value corresponds to the effect distribution result area. Save to the area, and then go to Step D380.
When the process proceeds to step D380, as described above, when the notice type number A is less than na, the process returns to step D371, and when the notice type number A is na, the process returns.
The effect distribution result area is an area in the RAM 311a where the effect distribution result such as the notice data value is saved.

[Random number lottery processing B]
Next, the random number lottery process B executed in step D275 in the above-described variation effect setting process will be described. This routine is a process for selecting a sorting result for each type by a random number in the notice sorting table 2 (for example, the one shown in FIG. 167) prepared for the sorting group B in step D274 described above.
Since the details of this routine are the same as those in the random number lottery process A described above, illustration and detailed description thereof are omitted.

[Random number lottery processing C]
Next, the random number lottery process C executed in step D278 in the above-described variation effect setting process will be described. This routine is a process of selecting a distribution result in the notice distribution table 3 prepared for the distribution group C in step D277 described above by random number for each type.
Since the details of this routine are the same as those in the random number lottery process A described above, illustration and detailed description thereof are omitted.

In the step D379 in the random number lottery process A and the steps of the same process contents in the random number lottery processes B and C, the contents of the effect specified by the notice data value (the value of the distribution number determined from the number of updates of the current address) ( Various information (such as the number of SU notices) corresponding to the effect pattern) is stored in a predetermined storage area (eg, SU notice number area, SU1 cut-in area, SU2 cut-in area, SU3 cut-in area described later) in the effect distribution result area, A replacement determination area, a replacement target SU determination area, a serif SU area, a serif SU2 pattern area, a serif SU3 pattern area, and a reach character area).
According to the random number lottery processes A, B, and C described above, a distribution result is selected in advance for all the notice type number values in all the groups A, B, and C, and the contents of the effect corresponding to the distribution result Each piece of information for designating is stored in advance in a predetermined storage area.

  For example, when the “warrior development reach failure change table” shown in the lower part of FIG. 166 is prepared and the notice type number is 1 (that is, in the case of the first row of the table), the step “Normal” is selected as the production pattern when the random value rdm generated in D372 is within the range of 0 to 799, and “Right 3” is selected when within the range of 800 to 874. When the leftmost column is selected, the distribution number = 0, and the distribution number is incremented by 1 every time the right column is advanced. In this case, since the distribution rate is 0 at the rightmost three (“midline”, “group male”, “super shortened”), in this example, the distribution number (notification data value) is any one of 0-4.

  FIG. 167 is a specific example of the notice allocation table 2 prepared in step D274 of the variable effect setting process. FIG. 166 and FIG. 167 are only a part, and there are a lot of notice allocation tables for each type of hit / miss and variation. Further, since there are an enormous number of actual distributions in the notice distribution table, only the excerpt is shown in the figure for convenience of explanation. The flowchart of this embodiment also describes only the cut-in step-up, but in reality, settings are made for more various notices.

The contents of the distribution types L11 to L23 in FIG. 167 are as follows.
L11: Sorting to determine whether the character of the cut-in notice is a still image or a movie (naturally, the movie is hotter (the probability of being a big hit is high). The reach of the movie is determined). There are still image patterns and moving image patterns for the characters and female characters to be distributed in L20 to L22. Here, if it is determined to be a moving image, the final step is the moving image. Note that the cut-in image itself is a moving image even if it is a still image. This means that the character in the cut-in image is stationary. In the case of a moving image, this means that after the appearance character has cut in a still image state, the character begins to move from that state after one breath (ie, slashing with a sword).
L12: Distribution for determining how many times cut-in is performed (during one change). In the figure, up to three stages are shown for simplicity of explanation, but there are actually four or more stages.
L13: A distribution for determining a place where a female character may appear when cut-in is performed three times (interlocking with the result of L23. If L23 is not present, this distribution is nullified). The reliability increases as women appear continuously.
L15: A distribution for determining a place (similar to L13) where a female character may appear when cut-in is performed twice.
L20: Sorting to determine the character (brown man) that appears for the third time in the cut-in. If L12 is the result of the distribution up to two times, this distribution becomes nothing.
L21: Sorting to determine the character (busho man) that appears in the second cut-in. If L12 is the result of the distribution up to one time, this distribution becomes nothing.
L22: Sorting to determine the character (brown man) that appears for the first time in the cut-in. If the distribution result indicates that L12 is none (the number of cut-ins is 0), this distribution is not performed.
L23: Distribution for determining whether to reflect the results from L13 to L22. It mainly determines whether or not to replace male characters with female characters. If the distribution result of L23 is “None”, the result of L13 or L15 is not used. If the distribution result of L23 is “appearance”, the result of L13 or L15 is used. The female character that appears at each step is fixed. If the distribution result of L23 is “all”, the results of L13 and L15 are not used, and all steps are replaced with women. If the distribution result of L23 is “story”, the story movie appears as a cut-in. The movie for the story is dedicated and fixed at each step (it may not be fixed). In the case of this “story”, a cut-in irrelevant to the results of L13 to L22 appears, and the story may be advanced to the number of times L12. This “story” is a hot performance and the reach is confirmed. Further, if the distribution result of L23 is “premium”, a premium-only character appears in the last step of the result of L12. This “premium” appears when the jackpot is confirmed. This “premium” may or may not be only when the probable big hit is confirmed.

  Of the three random number lottery processes, the random number lottery process A (notice distribution table 1) is mainly used in the early stage of the change (the notice that appears immediately after the start of change, the pattern of the movement of the symbol at the start of change, etc.). Sorting is performed. Random number lottery processing B (notice distribution table 2) is used to sort the notice pattern mainly before the start of reach and the operation pattern from symbol slowdown to temporary stop (slip and symbol feed number). is there. In addition, the random number lottery process C (notice distribution table 3) is to select a notice that appears mainly during reach.

[Notification effect setting process 1]
Next, details of the notice effect setting process 1 executed in step D280 in the above-described variation effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG. As the notice effect setting process 1, the case where the step-up notice is set according to the random number lottery result (results of the random number lottery processes A, B, and C described above) is exemplified. The contents of are different. Note that the step-up notice is a step-by-step notice of jackpot while changing the notice contents and the reliability of the notice. In the drawings and specification of the present application, “SU” means step-up of this step-up notice.
When this routine is started, first, steps D381 to D390 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D391.

In step D381, the distribution result is loaded from the SU notice count area in the effect distribution result area.
In step D382, scenario layer number 4 is prepared.
In step D383, the address of the SU notice scenario table corresponding to the number of SU notices loaded in step D381 is prepared.
In step D384, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D382 and D383.

In step D385, the distribution result is loaded from the SU1 cut-in area of the effect distribution result area.
In step D386, military commander data corresponding to the SU1 cut-in number loaded in step D385 is acquired and saved in the SU1 cut-in area of the motion index area (storage area for storing the motion index).
In step D387, the distribution result is loaded from the SU2 cut-in area of the effect distribution result area.
In step D388, military commander data corresponding to the SU2 cut-in number loaded in step D387 is acquired and saved in the SU2 cut-in area of the motion index area.

In step D389, the distribution result is loaded from the SU3 cut-in area of the effect distribution result area.
In step D390, military commander data corresponding to the SU3 cut-in number loaded in step D389 is acquired and saved in the SU3 cut-in area of the motion index area.
In the above steps D385 to D390, the data of the motion table for performing the assigned military commander character is temporarily stored. Note that the data stored here is not necessarily used. After that, depending on the result of determination in cut-in character replacement determination processes 1 to 3 (steps D395 to D397) described later, for example, data of female characters is replaced. Is done. Here, if the number of SUs is less than the result (for example, SU1 is selected), the character data with the lowest reliability is saved in the upper SU area, but it is used as a result. There is no control.

In step D391, it is determined whether the number of SU notices loaded in step D381 is 0. If not, the process proceeds to step D392, and if it is 0, the process returns.
In step D392, it is determined whether the number of SU notices loaded in step D381 is 1. If not, the process proceeds to step D393. If it is 1, the process proceeds to step D395.
In step D393, it is determined whether the number of SU notices loaded in step D381 is 2. If it is not 2, the process proceeds to step D394. If it is 2, the process proceeds to step D396.
In step D394, it is determined whether the number of SU notices loaded in step D381 is 3. If not, the process returns. If it is 3, the process proceeds to step D397.
If it progresses to step D395, the cut-in character replacement determination process 1 (after-mentioned) will be performed and it will return after that.
If it progresses to step D396, the cut-in character replacement determination process 2 (after-mentioned) will be performed and it will return after that.
If it progresses to step D397, the cut-in character replacement determination process 3 (after-mentioned) will be performed and it will return after that.

[Cut-in character replacement judgment process 1]
Next, details of the cut-in character replacement determination process 1 executed in step D395 in the above-described notice effect setting process 1 will be described with reference to FIG. This routine is executed when the SU notice number is 1. However, when the SU notice number is 1, only the first character appears in the step-up notice. Absent.
When this routine is started, first, in step D401, the distribution result is loaded from the replacement determination area of the effect distribution result area.
Next, in step D402, it is determined whether the replacement is a complete replacement based on the distribution result loaded in step D401. If the replacement is complete, the process returns after executing step D403. If not, the process returns without executing step D403. To do.
In step D403, the index of the cut-in SU1 motion control table is replaced based on the distribution result loaded in step D401.

[Cut-in character replacement judgment process 2]
Next, details of the cut-in character replacement determination process 2 executed in step D396 in the notice effect setting process 1 described above will be described with reference to FIG. Note that this routine is executed when the number of SU notices is 2, but when the number of SU notices is 2, the number of characters appearing in the step-up notice is limited to the second person. There are only three patterns: replacement (replacement only for the first person), partial replacement (replacement for the second person only), and full replacement (replacement for both the first and second persons).
When this routine is started, first, in step D405, the distribution result is loaded from the replacement determination area of the effect distribution result area.
Next, in step D406, it is determined whether or not replacement is not performed based on the distribution result loaded in step D405. If there is no replacement, the process returns. If not, the process proceeds to step D407.

In step D407, it is determined whether the replacement is partial replacement based on the distribution result loaded in step D405. If partial replacement is performed, the distribution result is loaded from the replacement target SU determination area of the effect distribution result area in step D408. Then, the process proceeds to step D409, and if not partially replaced, the process proceeds to step D413.
In step D409, it is determined whether the replacement object is SU1 (first character) based on the distribution result loaded in step D408. If SU1, the index of the cut-in SU1 motion control table is added to the distribution result in step D411. After the replacement, the process returns, and if not SU1, the process proceeds to step D410.

Proceeding to step D410, it is determined whether the replacement object is SU2 (second character) based on the distribution result loaded at step D408. After the replacement, the process returns. If not, the process returns.
On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step D413, it is determined whether the replacement is all replacement based on the distribution result loaded in step D405. If all replacement is performed, the process returns after executing steps D414 and D412 in order, and if not all, It returns without executing D414 and D412.
In step D414, the index of the motion control table for cut-in SU1 is replaced based on the distribution result loaded in step D405. In step D415, the index of the motion control table for cut-in SU2 is similarly replaced.

[Cut-in character replacement judgment process 3]
Next, details of the cut-in character replacement determination process 3 executed in step D397 in the above-described notice effect setting process 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. FIG. Note that this routine is executed when the SU notice count is 3, but when the SU notice count is 3, there are up to a third character appearing in the step-up notice. There are various replacement patterns. In this example, there are two types of replacement: normal total replacement and special total replacement (for story and premium described later).
When this routine is started, first, in step D421, the distribution result is loaded from the replacement determination area of the effect distribution result area.
Next, in step D422, it is determined whether or not replacement is not performed based on the distribution result loaded in step D421. If there is no replacement, the process returns. If not, the process proceeds to step D423.

In step D423, it is determined whether the replacement is a partial replacement based on the distribution result loaded in step D421. If the partial replacement is performed, the distribution result is loaded from the replacement target SU determination area in the effect distribution result area in step D424. Then, the process proceeds to step D425, and if not partially replaced, the process proceeds to step D430.
In step D425, it is determined whether the replacement target is SU1 (first character) based on the distribution result loaded in step D424. If SU1, the index of the motion control table for cut-in SU1 is added to the distribution result in step D433. After the replacement, the process returns. If not SU1, the process proceeds to step D426.

In step D426, it is determined whether the replacement object is SU2 (second character) based on the distribution result loaded in step D424. If SU2, the index of the cut-in SU2 motion control table is added to the distribution result in step D434. After the replacement, the process returns, and if it is not SU2, the process proceeds to step D427.
In step D427, it is determined whether the replacement target is SU3 (third character) based on the distribution result loaded in step D424. If it is SU3, the index of the motion control table for cut-in SU3 is added to the distribution result in step D435. After the replacement, the process returns. If not SU3, the process proceeds to step D428.

In step D428, it is determined whether the replacement target is SU1 and SU2 (first and second characters) based on the distribution result loaded in step D424. If SU1 and SU2, the cut-in SU1 is determined in steps D436 and D437. After replacing the index of the motion control table for cut-in SU2 based on the distribution result, the process returns, and if not SU1 and SU2, the process proceeds to step D429.
In step D429, it is determined whether the replacement target is SU2 and SU3 (second and third characters) based on the distribution result loaded in step D424. If SU2 and SU3, the cut-in SU2 is determined in steps D438 and D439. The process returns after replacing the index of the motion control table for cut-in SU3 based on the distribution result, and returns if not SU2 and SU3.

Proceeding to step D430, it is determined whether the replacement target is a normal all replacement based on the distribution result loaded in step D421. After the index of the motion control table for SU3 is replaced based on the distribution result, the process returns, and if not all normal replacement, the process proceeds to step D431.
In step D431, it is determined whether the replacement target is for a story based on the distribution result loaded in step D421. If it is for a story, the motions for cut-in SU1, cut-in SU2, and cut-in SU3 are performed in steps D443 to D445. After the index of the control table is replaced based on the distribution result, the process returns. If it is not for a story, the process proceeds to step D432.

  Proceeding to step D432, it is determined whether the replacement target is for premium based on the distribution result loaded at step D421. Return after replacing the index of the control table based on the distribution result, and return if not for premium.

[PB preview scenario data setting process]
Next, details of the PB notice scenario data setting process executed in step D288 in the above-described variation effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D451, the distribution result is loaded from the line SU area of the effect distribution result area.
Next, in step D452, it is determined whether or not the line SU is a SU2 system (SU2 system has one character appearing) based on the distribution result loaded in step D451, and if it is a SU2 system, steps D453 to D455 are executed in sequence. The process proceeds to D459, and if it is not the SU2 system (that is, if the appearing characters are two SU3 systems), Steps D456 to D458 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to Step D459.

In step D453, the distribution result is loaded from the line SU2 pattern area of the effect distribution result area.
In step D454, a serif SU2 scenario address table (list table of serif SU2 scenario table) is set.
In step D455, based on the distribution result loaded in step D453, the address of the scenario table corresponding to the line SU2 pattern of the distribution result is obtained from the table set in step D454 and prepared.

  Note that the scenario table of the serif SU2 pattern for which the address is acquired in step D455 is shown in the upper part of FIG. 176, for example. In the scenario table in the upper part of FIG. 176, the first to fourth lines (index numbers 0 to 3 shown on the right side of the table) are common parts, and the fifth to sixth lines (index numbers 4 to 5) are buttons. It is an operation part when not pressed, and the seventh to fifteenth lines (index numbers 6 to 14) are operation parts when a button is pressed. Then, the motion index No. set as the operand on the second line is displayed. A specific example of the motion table corresponding to (70) is the motion table (Mdat_0070) shown in the lower part of FIG. Here, the white button character registered by the additional 1 code in the motion table (Mdat_0070) is a character that shines white when the button is not pressed, and the black button character is also displayed when the button is pressed. In this state, the character that is turned off is shown. Further, according to this motion table (Mdat_0070), by displaying each character alternately at regular time intervals, an animation display in which buttons appear and are depressed is realized. In the control of the motion table, unless the motion is deleted, when the table reaches the bottom, the head returns to the head (see motion control processing described later).

In step D456, the distribution result is loaded from the line SU3 pattern area of the effect distribution result area.
In step D457, a serif SU3 scenario address table (list table of serif SU3 scenario table) is set.
In step D458, based on the distribution result loaded in step D456, the address of the scenario table corresponding to the line SU3 pattern of the distribution result is obtained from the table set in step D457 and prepared.

In step D459, scenario layer number 5 is prepared, and the flow advances to step D460.
In step D460, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding step D459 and the immediately preceding step D455 or D458, and then the process returns.
According to this routine described above, a PB notice effect such that a special character appears by the operation of the PB (push button 9), or the character or character line after the PB is pressed can be performed. .

[Inter-submission transmission start processing]
Next, details of the inter-sub transmission start process executed in step D24 in the above-described main process will be described with reference to FIG. Note that inter-sub transmission refers to transmission in inter-sub communication. Inter-sub-communication is communication (in this example, wireless communication) performed between sub-boards (in this example, the production control device) of pachinko machines with different game rooms.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D461 whether there is an inter-sub transmission request (that is, whether the inter-sub transmission request flag set in step D190 described above or step D480 described later is set). If there is an inter-sub transmission request (if the inter-sub transmission request flag is set), the process proceeds to step D462, and if there is no inter-sub transmission request (if the inter-sub transmission request flag is not set), the process returns. .
In step D462, it is determined whether the value of the inter-sub transmission start waiting timer is greater than 0. If it is greater than 0, the process proceeds to step D466. If it is less than 0, the process returns after executing steps D463 to D465 sequentially. .

In step D463, the inter-sub transmission request flag is cleared (set to a state where it is not set).
In step D464, an intersub transmission permission flag is set.
In step D465, an inter-sub transmission interrupt is permitted. The inter-sub transmission interrupt is permitted in this step D465 if data to be transmitted by inter-sub communication is generated, and is inhibited by a routine (inter-sub-transmission interrupt processing) (not shown) when there is no data to be transmitted.
In step D466, the inter-sub transmission start waiting timer is updated (that is, the timer value is decreased by a certain value). The inter-sub transmission start waiting timer is a timer whose initial value is set in step D479, which will be described later, and which is cleared (value is set to 0) in step D491, which will be described later.

[Inter-task reception task processing]
Next, details of the inter-sub-task reception task process executed in step D25 in the above-described main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D471, there is an inter-sub-task reception task request (that is, there is inter-sub-communication reception data (reception data of inter-sub-command), and inter-sub-unit reception interrupt processing is omitted). Whether or not the inter-sub-task reception task request flag set in step 1 is set), and if there is an inter-sub-sub-task reception task request (if the inter-sub-sub-task reception task request flag is set), the process proceeds to step D472, If there is no request (if the inter-sub-task reception task request flag is not set), the process returns.

Proceeding to step D472, the SB_MODE data of the received inter-subcommand command (the value copied from the sb_mode area of the inter-sub-communication data buffer to the SB_MODE area in the inter-sub-reception interrupt process not shown) is loaded from the SB_MODE area, and step D473 is executed. Proceed to
Proceeding to step D473, it is determined whether or not the SB_MODE data loaded in step D472 indicates terminal ID notification. Advances to step D481 after sequentially executing steps D482 to D485.

In step D482, the received terminal ID (a value copied from the transmission source ID area of the inter-sub-communication data buffer to the inter-sub-command transmission source ID area in the inter-sub-reception reception interrupt process (not shown)) from the inter-sub-command transmission source ID area. Load it.
In step D483, the terminal presence / absence information in the terminal information area corresponding to the terminal ID loaded in step D482 is set to “present”.
In step D484, an initial value is set in the terminal lifetime timer in the terminal information area corresponding to the terminal ID loaded in step D482. Note that by providing a terminal lifetime timer, a time limit is provided for the gaming machine with the received terminal ID to recognize “is”. In other words, it is necessary to periodically check the existence of each other between the gaming machines that perform inter-sub-communication, and the process (not shown) based on this terminal lifetime timer (for example, until the terminal lifetime timer expires) If the same terminal ID notification is not received again, this confirmation is periodically performed by a process of updating the terminal presence / absence information corresponding to the terminal ID to “none”. This has the following advantages. In other words, if a certain gaming machine loses power or a wireless module suddenly breaks down, for example, if communication between gaming machines that have established communication with each other is no longer established, the opponent exists. It is useless to keep communicating on the premise that there is a difference, and there is a possibility that the effect of the inter-sub presentation will be reduced. For example, as an inter-submission effect, instructions are sent sequentially from the leftmost gaming machine on the island to the adjacent gaming machine by inter-subcommunication, and images of specific characters (characters) are sequentially sent from the leftmost gaming machine on the island to each gaming machine. In the case of performing a continuous effect (a kind of cooperation effect) such that the display device 41 is displayed so as to flow to the right, there is a possibility that the continuous effect is interrupted and interrupted at a gaming machine in which the communication is not established. is there. However, if the terminal presence / absence information is updated by periodically performing the above confirmation, it is possible to prevent the inter-submission effect from being requested for a gaming machine whose presence is “none” in the middle. Efficient inter-substage production can be performed reliably, such as performing the above-mentioned interlocking production by skipping a table whose power has been turned off.
However, since the inter-substage production does not affect the game result, there is a problem even if there is the above-mentioned adverse effect (for example, the adverse effect that the presentation is not performed as a result of requesting the production to the other party that no longer exists). The idea of not being also established. In the case of a specification according to such a concept, the terminal lifetime timer is not necessary.
In step D485, the game state in the terminal information area corresponding to the terminal ID loaded in step D482 is changed to the received game state data (from the game state area of the inter-sub-communication data buffer in the inter-sub-reception interrupt processing not shown). The value copied in the command game state area) is stored.

  When the process proceeds to step D474, it is determined whether the SB_MODE data loaded at step D472 indicates an ack response. If the data does not indicate an ack response, the process proceeds to step D476, and if it indicates an ack response, step D486 is performed. Then, after setting the ack reception flag, the process proceeds to step D481.

In step D476, it is determined whether the SB_MODE data loaded in step D472 is an effect command. If it is not an effect command, the process proceeds to step D481, and if it is an effect command, the process proceeds to step D477.
In step D477, it is determined whether inter-sub data transmission is in progress. If inter-sub data transmission is in progress, the process proceeds to step D481. Note that inter-sub data transmission is data transmission (for example, command transmission) in inter-sub communication. In the present application, a command transmitted / received by inter-sub-communication is referred to as inter-sub-command.

In addition, the processes in steps D478 to D480 are processes for performing an effect according to the received inter-sub command (particularly an effect command).
In Step D478, various inter-sub commands or parameters for various effects corresponding to the received inter-sub command contents are set.
In step D479, an inter-sub transmission start wait timer is set so as to transmit the inter-sub command set in step D478 to the sub-board of another gaming machine. Similarly, in step D480, an inter-sub transmission request flag is set.

Depending on the contents of the production, there may be a case where the inter-sub command is not generated. In such a case, the setting of the inter-subcommand is not performed in step D478, and the processing of steps D479 and D480 for transmitting the inter-subcommand is not executed, and the process proceeds to step D480a.
In step D480a, it is determined whether the SB_MODE data loaded in step D472 is a command that requires an ack response. If the command does not require an ack response, the process proceeds to step D481, and if the command requires an ack response. Proceeds to step D481 after sequentially executing steps D488 to D491.

Steps D488 to D491 are processes for returning an ack response in response to an ack request.
In step D488, the received transmission source ID is prepared as a transmission destination ID command.
In step D489, data of SB_MODE and SB_ACT of the ack response are prepared. Note that SB_MODE and SB_ACT are data constituting an inter-subcommand command, and are data of the eighth and ninth bytes in the packet configuration example (described later) shown in FIG.
In step D490, inter-sub-transmission data editing processing (described later) is executed.
In step D491, the inter-sub transmission start waiting timer is cleared (the timer value is set to 0).

In step D481, the inter-sub-task reception task request flag is cleared, and then the process returns.
Since step D477 is provided, when inter-sub data is being transmitted, the operation requested by the inter-sub command (effect command) is not performed. This is because the inter-sub command does not always need to be handled unlike the command from the main board, and being transmitted means that it is requesting another unit or returning ack. This is because it is not necessary to respond to the request from the table. Moreover, there is a possibility that the contradiction will appear in the production if all the requests are met, but this configuration has the advantage that there is no possibility of such a contradiction. However, this idea is a basic idea, and if there is an effect that is desired to be performed in any state, there may be a mode in which the requested operation is performed even during transmission.

[Inter-submission transmission data editing processing]
Next, details of the inter-sub-transmission data editing process executed in step D490 (or step D187 of the single-shot command process described above) in the inter-sub-task reception task process will be described with reference to FIG. It is assumed that the configuration of packets transmitted and received between the subs is the configuration shown in FIG. 159 described later.

When this routine is started, steps D501 to D514 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
In step D501, packet start code (STX) data (for example, 02H) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 0. Here, the inter-sub transmission buffer 0 is a part of a transmission buffer area (inter-sub transmission buffer area) for inter-sub communication, and the storage area at the address 0 in the inter-sub transmission buffer area is inter-sub transmission. Buffer 0 (hereinafter, the same applies to other addresses 1, 2, 3,... 11).
In step D502, the inter-sub transmission data count (SIZE) data (for example, data indicating 12 bytes) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 1.

In step D503, the terminal ID (the terminal ID assigned to the effect control device 300 or the wireless module 360 of the effect control device 300) or the group ID (the pachinko machine belongs) as data of the transmission source ID (SID). ID for identifying a group of pachinko machines) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 2.
In step D504, the data (terminal ID and group ID) of the transmission destination ID (DID) is set in the intersub transmission buffer 3. Note that, in the data of the transmission source ID (SID) and the transmission destination ID (DID), the upper bit of one byte is the group ID, and the lower bit is the terminal ID.
In step D505, the inter-sub-maker code (MAKER) data is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 4.
In step D506, the data of the year code (YEAR) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 5.

In step D507, the inter-sub model code (TYPE) data is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 6.
In step D508, the data of the inter-subcommand command (SB_MODE) (for example, prepared in step D489 described above) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 7.
In step D509, the data of the inter-sub command ACT (SB_ACT) (for example, the data prepared in step D489 described above) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 8.
In step D510, data of its own game state STS (that is, the game state of the pachinko machine) (for example, data indicating that it is the fifth round of the big hit now) is set in the inter-sub transmission buffer 9.

In step D511, a checksum of setting data (that is, data from STX to STS) from the intersub transmission buffer 0 to the inter sub transmission buffer 9 is calculated. The checksum calculation method is not particularly limited. For example, simple addition may be performed with a 1-byte size.
In step D512, the checksum calculation result (SUM) data calculated in step D511 is set in the inter-sub-transmission buffer 10.
In step D513, packet end code (ETX) data (for example, 03H) is set in the inter-sub-transmission buffer 11.
In step D514, the address of the inter-sub transmission buffer 0 is set as data of the inter-sub transmission pointer (parameter for designating the address of the inter-sub transmission buffer area). This inter-sub transmission pointer is used in inter-sub transmission interrupt processing (routine for performing processing such as sequentially writing data in the inter-sub transmission buffer area to the serial transmission buffer of the CPU for inter-sub transmission).

[Inter-sub ack response task processing]
Next, details of the inter-sub ack response task process executed in step D26 in the above-described main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D521 whether the value of the ack waiting timer is 0, and if it is 0, the process returns. If not, the ack waiting timer is updated in step D522 (the value is reduced by a specified value). After that, the process proceeds to Step D523. Note that the initial value of the ack waiting timer is set in step D188 described above.

Proceeding to step D523, it is determined whether or not an ack response has been received (that is, whether or not an ack reception flag has been set). If not (when the ack reception flag is not set), the process returns without executing steps D524 to D526. The ack reception flag is set in step D486 described above.
In step D524, the ack reception flag is cleared.
In step D525, the ack waiting timer is cleared.
In step D526, since the ack response has been received, various parameter settings are made to correspond to the effects waiting for the ack response.

[Inter-submission effect setting processing]
Next, details of the inter-sub effects setting process executed in step D27 in the main process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, at step D531, it is determined whether or not there is an inter-submission request (that is, whether or not an inter-subtitle request flag is set). If there is no inter-sub production request (a state where the inter-sub production request flag is cleared), the process returns. The inter-submission effect request flag is set in step D478 described above.

In step D532, it is determined whether the value of the inter-submission production start wait timer is 0. If it is 0, the flow advances to step D533. Return). The inter-submission production start wait timer is a timer set in step D189 described above.
In step D533, the received inter-subcommand commands SB_MODE and SB_ACT (hereinafter, inter-subcommand commands include SB_MODE and SB_ACT) are loaded, and in the next step D534, the loaded data is inter-sub linked notice. It is determined whether the command is an inter-system command, and if it is an inter-sub-linkage advance notice-type command, the process proceeds to step D539, and if it is not an inter-sub-linkage advance notice-type command, the process proceeds to step D535. Note that the inter-sub-linked notice command is a command for a linked effect that links the notice effect with a plurality of pachinko machines performing inter-sub communication. For example, there is an effect in which images of the same character are sequentially displayed on each gaming machine so that the image of the same character moves in the horizontal direction in the island, and there is a synchronous effect in which the same effect is performed simultaneously in synchronization.

  Proceeding to step D539, an effect operation table corresponding to the effect designated by the SB_MODE and SB_ACT data of the inter-subcommand command loaded at step D533 is set, and then the process proceeds to step D537. Note that setting the effect operation table in step D539 means setting scenario data for executing the effect specified by the data of the inter-sub command.

  In step D535, it is determined whether the data of the inter-subcommand command loaded in step D533 is a customer waiting timing adjustment command. If it is a customer waiting timing adjustment command, the process proceeds to step D540. Proceed to D536. The customer waiting timing adjustment command is a command for performing the effect of matching the timing of the customer waiting demonstration display with a plurality of pachinko machines performing inter-sub-communication. In this case, the customer waiting demo is synchronized from the beginning. Command to be executed.

In step D536, if the inter-subcommand data loaded in step D533 is a normal value, parameters for various effects corresponding to this data are set, and then the process proceeds to step D537.
Proceeding to step D540, it is determined whether or not a customer waiting demonstration performance is being performed (that is, whether or not a customer waiting demonstration performance is being performed). Therefore, the process proceeds to step D537, and if the customer waiting demonstration is being performed, the process proceeds to step D541 to adjust the customer waiting timing.
In step D541, the scenario table of the customer waiting demonstration of the pachinko machine (that is, the own machine) that has received the inter-sub command is reset to perform the customer waiting demonstration effect from the beginning, and then step D542 is performed. Proceed to
When the process proceeds to step D542, the P machine state is set to the customer waiting A, and the process proceeds to step D537.

  According to step D541, the customer waiting demonstration effect is started from the beginning of the symbol display (customer waiting A). As a result, the customer waiting demonstration effect is displayed on the pachinko machine that transmitted the customer waiting timing adjustment command determined in step D535, and the own machine and other pachinko machines that have received this customer waiting timing adjustment command. It starts synchronously from the beginning of (customer waiting A). The customer waiting demonstration effect started in this way is controlled by the reset customer waiting demonstration scenario table.

In step D537, the inter-submission effect request flag is cleared, and then the process returns.
In addition, in this example, the processing of the effect that synchronizes the notice effect and the effect of matching the timing of the customer waiting demonstration effect is given as a specific example of the process for the inter-sub effect. However, the content of the inter-submission effects is not limited to such an aspect, and instead of the aspect of this example or in addition to the aspect of this example, the inter-substance effects may be configured to be performed.
In this example, in order to avoid complication, the setting process of the other types of inter-sub effects is collectively shown in step D536, and the details and illustration thereof are omitted.

[Scenario setting process]
Next, details of the processing executed in step D28 in the above-described main processing will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D551 to D566 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
In step D551, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 0 (scenario layer number 0) is prepared, and in the next step D552, scenario analysis processing (described later) is executed based on the preparation of step D551. . Here, “preparing an address area” means preparing an address of the address area itself in order to read data set in the address area in a later process.

Similarly, in step D553, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to scenario management area 1 (scenario layer number 1) is prepared, and based on this preparation, scenario analysis processing is executed in the next step D554.
In step D555, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 2 (scenario layer number 2) is prepared, and based on this preparation, scenario analysis processing is executed in the next step D556.
In step D557, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 3 (scenario layer number 3) is prepared, and based on this preparation, scenario analysis processing is executed in the next step D558.
In Step D559, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 4 (scenario layer number 4) is prepared, and scenario analysis processing is executed in the next step D560 based on this preparation.
In step D561, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 5 (scenario layer number 5) is prepared, and based on this preparation, scenario analysis processing is executed in the next step D562.
In step D563, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 6 (scenario layer number 6) is prepared, and scenario analysis processing is executed in the next step D564 based on this preparation.
In Step D565, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 7 (scenario layer number 7) is prepared, and scenario analysis processing is executed in the next Step D566 based on this preparation.

  In this example, there are eight scenario layers as described above, and the scenario layer numbers are 0-7. Of these eight scenario layers, scenario layer 0 is basically for background, scenario layer 1 is for left symbol, scenario layer 2 is for right symbol, and scenario layer 3 is middle symbol. Scenario layer 4 is for notice 1, scenario layer 5 is for notice 2, scenario layer 6 is for holding, and scenario layer 7 is for the fourth symbol.

  However, it is not restricted to this aspect. For example, although the present embodiment uses a flowchart with eight scenario layers, the number of scenario layers is not limited to this. In particular, the layers used for backgrounds and notices increase or decrease depending on the model specifications, and this embodiment is described as limited to a few as possible. Further, the control target of each scenario layer is not limited to the above embodiment, and various allocations are possible. For example, scenario layer 0 is for background, scenario layer 1 is for cut-in notice, scenario layer 2 is for left symbol, scenario layer 3 is for right symbol, scenario layer 4 is for middle symbol Yes, the scenario layer 5 may be reserved, the scenario layer 6 may be for other notices, and the scenario layer 7 may be for the fourth symbol.

  As described above, the address area of the scenario management area is provided for each scenario layer, and when there is something to be controlled, the corresponding scenario management area X (where X = 0 to 7). If the address of the scenario management area is stored in the address area and there is nothing to control, the address area of the corresponding scenario management area X is set to NULL (see steps D243 and D247 described above). . For example, since no hold display is performed in a movie waiting for a customer, an address (address of scenario management area 0) is set in the background area (address area of scenario management area 0). NULL is set in (address area of scenario management area 6).

[Scenario analysis processing]
Next, details of the scenario analysis process executed in step D552 and the like in the scenario setting process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D571, the value of brk (data used for repetition of processing to be described later) is set to 0, and then in step D572, the address area of the prepared scenario management area X is set. After the data of the set data (the address of the scenario management area X or NULL) is loaded, the process proceeds to step D573. Here, the “address area of the prepared scenario management area X” means, for example, when this routine is executed in the above-described step D552, the address area (scenario) prepared in the immediately preceding step D551. If this routine is executed in step D554 described above, this is the address area prepared in step D553 immediately before (address area of scenario management area 1), etc. The case is prepared in the previous step as well.

When the process proceeds to step D573, it is determined whether the data at the address loaded at step D572 is NULL. If NULL, control returns because control is not necessary. If not, the process proceeds to step D574.
Proceeding to step D574, the value of the scenario timer in the scenario management area of the address loaded at step D572 is read, and it is determined whether the value of this scenario timer is smaller than 0. If it is greater than or equal to 0, step D575 is executed and the routine proceeds to step D576. The value of the scenario timer is first set to 0 in the above-described step D244 every time scenario control data is set. Since 0 is the lower limit, it is determined as abnormal if it is less than 0. In step D575, if the value of the scenario timer is not 0, an update is performed to decrease the value of the scenario timer by 1.
When it proceeds to step D576, it is determined whether or not the value of the scenario timer is greater than 0. If it is greater than 0, the time is not yet up, so the process returns. If it is 0 or less, the process proceeds to step D577.

  According to these steps D574 to D576, wait timer management is performed. That is, only the time corresponding to the value of the scenario timer set in the scenario timer area in the target scenario management area (the scenario management area of the address loaded in step D572) is the target scenario table (in the target scenario management area). The operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table at the address set in the scenario data table area is realized. Here, the “operation for delaying the control of the scenario table” means to wait for the progress of the scenario table (waiting there without proceeding to the next line of the scenario table. The production is continued at that time). . For example, in the 20th line (// 19) in FIG. 177, since the constant wait code is set and the wait time value is (300), the line stays in this line for a time corresponding to 300 frames. This operation corresponds to “an operation that delays the progress of control of the scenario table”. In the scenario table, between a line in which a code (a constant wait code or the like (including a PB wait code) is included) between a wait time value and a wait time value is set, and a line in which a constant wait code or the like is set next. All the opcodes in the line () are executed at the same time. When the value of the scenario timer becomes 0 or less as a result of the update in step D575, it is determined that the scenario timer has timed out, so that the control process for the target scenario table proceeds to proceed through step D576 to step D577. It becomes the composition which advances to. However, the target scenario table control process (step D584 and subsequent steps) is executed after the timer management process for the PB valid time described later.

That is, when the process proceeds to step D577, the value of the target PB timer (the value of the PB timer area in the scenario management area at the address loaded in step D572) is read to determine whether the value of this PB timer is greater than zero. If it is greater than 0, the time is not up, so the process proceeds to step D578, and if it is 0 or less, the time is up, so the process proceeds to step D583.
In step D578, it is determined whether the PB operation flag is set. If the PB operation flag is set, the process proceeds to step D579. If the PB operation flag is not set, the target PB timer is determined in step D582. After the update for reducing the value of 1 by 1, the process proceeds to step D583. Here, the PB operation flag is a flag that is set when a pressing operation of PB (push button 9) is detected in the effect button input process executed in step D21 in the main process described above.

Proceeding to step D579, the value at this point of the target PB timer (that is, the remaining time of the PB valid time when PB is pressed) is stored as the PB effect addition time, and then at step D580, the target PB timer is stored. The timer value is set to 0, and in step D581, a flag is set in the PB detection flag area of the target scenario management area (that is, data indicating that the PB detection flag is set is set). In these steps D579 to D581, since the PB was pressed, the remaining time of the PB timer is stored as the PB effect addition time (for step D696 described later), the PB timer is reset to 0, and the PB is operated. A PB detection flag indicating that this has been done is set in the scenario management area for scenario control.
In step D583, it is determined whether the value of the target PB timer is greater than 0. If it is greater than 0, the PB operation is not detected and the time is not up, so the process returns. Since the PB operation is performed or the time is up, the process proceeds to step D584.

According to steps D577 to D583, timer management for the PB valid time is performed. That is, when a PB timer value larger than 0 is set in the PB timer area in the target scenario management area (the scenario management area at the address loaded in step D572), this PB timer value is handled. The operation of delaying the control of the target scenario table (the scenario table of the address set in the scenario data table area in the target scenario management area) for the PB valid time is realized for the time to be set. Here, “the operation of delaying the control of the scenario table and providing the PB valid time” means that the value of the target PB timer is 0 (that is, the PB timer is timed up) or the PB is pressed. Until it is done, it means to wait for the progress of the scenario table (waiting there without proceeding to the next line of the scenario table, continuing to produce at that time). For example, in the 28th line (// 27) in FIG. 177, since the constant wait code is set and the wait time value is (30), the time corresponding to 30 frames remains in this line, and after this time has passed, the next time is reached. Although the operation proceeds to the 29th line, the operation according to the 28th line is the “operation for delaying the control of the scenario table” by the scenario timer described above. On the other hand, in the next 29th line (// 28), since the PB waiting code is set and the valid time value is (2970), this valid time value (2970) is set in the PB timer in step D702 described later. If there is no PB press operation, the effective time corresponding to a maximum of 2970 frames remains in this line, and if there is a PB press operation within this effective time, the process immediately proceeds to the next line. In this way, the PB timer is set. The operation of waiting for the pressing operation of the PB for the effective time (PB effective time) is equivalent to the “operation for providing the PB effective time by delaying the control of the scenario table”. Then, without the PB operation, the value of the PB timer becomes 0 or less by updating the step D582 and the PB timer expires or the PB valid time until the PB timer expires is set. If PB is operated in the meantime, the process proceeds to step D583 via step D582 or steps D579 to D581, and in this case, the determination result in step D583 is NO (the PB timer is 0), and the process proceeds to step D584.
However, if the value of the PB timer set in the PB timer area is 0 from the beginning, the process proceeds from step D577 to step D583, and further proceeds from step D583 to step D584, and the control proceeds immediately (this In this case, the PB valid time is 0 (none). Since the PB valid time is provided in the case of a notice effect or the like, in other cases, the value of the PB timer area is set to 0 and no PB valid time is provided.

Next, in step D584 and subsequent steps, control processing for the target scenario table is executed. This will be described below.
When the processing proceeds to step D584, the processing from step D584 to step D623 at the loop end is repeatedly executed until a value other than 0 is set as the value of brk. That is, in step D623, which is the rear loop end, the value of brk at that time is read. If the value of brk is 0, the process returns to step D584 and the process is repeated from the next step D585.

That is, when the process proceeds to step D584, first, steps D585 to D588 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D589.
In Step D585, the address of the scenario table is loaded from the scenario data table area in the target scenario management area. For example, in the case of scenario layer number 0 in the customer waiting demonstration, the address of the scenario table shown in FIG. 177 is loaded in step D585.
In step D586, the operation code of a specific line (specified line) of the scenario table specified by the address loaded in step D585 is acquired. As described above, the scenario table is one in which opcodes and operand data (scenario data) are set in each row as shown in FIGS. 169, 176, and 177, for example. For example, in the case of FIG. 169, if the target is the scenario management area 0 (scenario layer number 0) and the designated row is the first row, the “motion continuation code” that is the data of the opcode in the first row of the top scenario layer 0 Is acquired in step D586. In the case of FIG. 177, for example, if the designated line is the first line, the “motion 1 deletion code” (specific data, for example, “51h”), which is the operation code data of the first line, is obtained in step D586. To be acquired. Alternatively, in the case of FIG. 177, for example, if the designated line is the 16th line, “motion 10 registration code” (specific data, for example, “4Ah”), which is the operation code data of the 16th line, is acquired in step D586. Is done.

In step D587, the opcode obtained in the immediately preceding step D586 is prepared by separating it into upper bits and lower bits. For example, when the opcode data is “51h” described above, the upper bit “5” and the lower bit “1” are separately prepared. The upper and lower bits of the opcode have meanings (however, the lower bits may have no meaning). For example, among “51h” which is the “motion 1 deletion code”, the upper bit “5” means the motion deletion, and the lower bit “1” is the target (in this case, the motion deletion target) motion. This means that the layer is motion 1.
In step D588, an operand of a specific row (specified row) of the scenario table designated by the address loaded in step D585 is acquired and prepared. For example, in the case of FIG. 169, if the target is the scenario management area 0 (scenario layer number 0) and the designated row is the first row, “motion index No. .. (51) "is acquired and prepared in step D588. In the case of FIG. 177, if the designated line is the 16th line (the operation code is “motion 10 registration code”), “motion index No. (−1)” which is the operand data of the 16th line is set in step D588. Get and prepare.

When the process proceeds to step D589, the prepared opcode high-order data (data prepared by separating in step D587, the same applies hereinafter) is determined, and if it is data (motion registration code) for instructing motion registration, motion registration processing ( After executing (to be described later), the process proceeds to step D621, and if it is not data for commanding motion registration, the process proceeds to step D590.
When the process proceeds to step D590, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is the data (motion deletion code) for instructing the motion deletion, a motion deletion process (described later) is executed in step D602, and then the process proceeds to step D621. If it is not the data for commanding, the process proceeds to step D591.

In step D591, the prepared operation code upper data is determined, and if it is data (motion continuation code) for instructing motion continuation, motion continuation processing (described later) is executed in step D603, and then processing proceeds to step D621. If it is not the data for commanding, the process proceeds to step D592.
In step D592, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data for instructing a constant wait (constant wait code), constant weight processing (described later) is executed in step D604, and then the process proceeds to step D621. If it is not the data for commanding, the process proceeds to step D593.

In step D593, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data for instructing a variable weight (variable weight code), variable weight processing (described later) is executed in step D605, and then the process proceeds to step D621. If it is not the data for commanding, the process proceeds to step D594.
When the process proceeds to step D594, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is the data for instructing the PB wait (PB wait code), the PB wait process (described later) is executed in step D606, and then the process proceeds to step D621. If it is not the data for commanding, the process proceeds to step D595.

In step D595, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data (PB determination branch code) for instructing the PB determination branch, PB determination branch processing (described later) is executed in step D607, and then the process proceeds to step D621. If it is not the data for instructing the PB determination branch, the process proceeds to step D596.
When the process proceeds to Step D596, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is the data for stopping the symbol (stop symbol set code), the symbol stop process is executed at Step D608 and then the procedure proceeds to Step D621 to command the symbol stop. If it is not data, the process proceeds to step D597.

When the process proceeds to step D597, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data (design reverse calculation replacement code) for instructing symbol reverse calculation replacement, after performing symbol reverse calculation replacement processing (described later) in step D609, step D597 is performed. The process proceeds to D621, and if it is not the data for instructing the symbol reverse calculation replacement, the process proceeds to Step D598.
In step D598, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data (fluctuation scenario switching code) for commanding switching of the fluctuation scenario, the fluctuation scenario switching process is executed in step D610 and then the flow advances to step D621. If it is not the data for commanding, the process proceeds to step D599.

When the process proceeds to step D599, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data for commanding repetition (repetition code), the process proceeds to step D621 after iterative processing is executed at step D611. Proceed to step D600.
When the process proceeds to step D600, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is the data for instructing the end (end code), the end process is executed in step D612 and then the process proceeds to step D621. Proceed to other steps not shown. In addition, other steps (not shown) (steps indicated by wavy lines in FIG. 131) determine the contents of the prepared opcode upper data, as in steps D589 to D612 described above, and the determination result is other than A process corresponding to the case of the type of data (code) is executed and the process proceeds to step D621. If the prepared opcode upper data does not correspond to any type of data (code), the process returns. It has become.

Next, when proceeding to step D621, the data set at this time is read into the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the target scenario layer number, and it is determined whether this data is NULL. Is set to 1 and the process proceeds to step D623. If it is not NULL, the process proceeds to step D623 without executing step D622.
Then, when proceeding to step D623, as described above, the value of brk at that time is read. If the value of brk is 0, the process returns to step D584 and the processing is repeated from the next step D585, and the value of brk is not 0. In this case, this routine is terminated and the process returns.

For this reason, in one of the processes of steps D601 to D612, the value of brk is set to a non-zero value, or NULL is set in the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the target scenario layer number. Then, the loop processing with steps D584 and D623 as loop ends is completed and the process returns. Until the loop process is completed in this way, the address of the scenario data table area in the scenario management area (the address for designating the scenario table and its row) is appropriately changed, and the loop process is repeated until a series of steps are repeated. The production control is executed.
The above subroutine group (steps D601 to D612) is an example, and changes depending on the specifications of the model.

[Motion registration process]
Next, the details of the motion registration process executed in step D601 in the scenario analysis process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, steps D631 and D632 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D633.
In step D631, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is updated to the next record (address specifying the next row of the table). This is an update process for advancing the designated line when the above-mentioned step D585 is executed next time to the next line. By performing this update process, the designated line of the target scenario table is changed to the next line. The above loop processing (steps D584 to D623) is repeated.

  In step D632, the address of the motion management area is prepared from the address area of the motion management area corresponding to the lower bit data of the opcode separated in step D587. In the case of this example, the RAM 311a of the effect control device 300 is configured to have storage areas for motion management called “motion management area address area” and “motion management area”. Of these, the motion management area is the number of objects (maximum number) of objects that are subject to display control (not necessarily displayed on the screen) (for example, in the case of the left symbol, the next symbol, the current symbol, the previous symbol) 3), an area for displaying the number of frames, an area for storing the frame number indicating the number of frames processed (frame number area), and the number of rows in the motion table. An area for storing the command position indicating (command position area), and an area for storing the address data (corresponding to the motion index) indicating which table to use among a plurality of motion list tables (motion list) Table area) and display information areas corresponding to the number of displays.

  Also, there are motion management areas with the same structure corresponding to the motion layers (in this example, there are motions 0 to 13), and there are 14 motion layers in this example. There are also 14 management areas (motion management areas 0 to 13). Furthermore, corresponding to this motion management area, there are 14 address areas in the motion management area in this example (motion 0 address to motion 13 address). In step D632, in order to identify one of the plurality of motion management areas as described above, a motion management area corresponding to the motion layer number specified by the data of the lower bits of the operation code (hereinafter, corresponding motion management area) is specified. Read out from the address area of the corresponding motion management area and prepare. In this application, a motion layer number (0 to 13 in this example) is simply expressed as a motion number, or used as a motion management area X (X is a number corresponding to a motion number). There is a case.

  There are as many display information areas as the number of displays (number of objects) in the motion management area, and each display information area has a display type, an effect type, an effect parameter, an X coordinate of the display upper left point, and an upper left display point. Y coordinate, X coordinate of upper right display point, Y coordinate of upper right display point, X coordinate of lower left display point, Y coordinate of lower left display point, image index, background color, foreground color, IPicture (I picture) only movie It includes an area for storing time frame count and behavior index data.

  Here, the display type is the type of the object (including information indicating whether it is a still image or a moving image (movie) and information indicating the type of movie (I picture or not)). The effect type is information indicating the type of effect (processing such as imparting transparency) to be added to the image. The effect parameter is a parameter of the effect (for example, transparency in the case of providing transparency). The X coordinate and the Y coordinate are data for specifying the display position of the image. In this example, for the polygon display function (the function of displaying a solid as a polyhedron), the display upper left point, the display upper right point, and the display lower left point 3 There are point coordinates. The image index is a number that identifies a still image or a movie. The frame count for a moving picture of only IPicture is data indicating what frame data is IPicture (that is, I frame). The behavior index is an index for behavior (design replacement). The behavior (replacement of symbols) replaces only the character (still image or moving image) at the same size and the same display position, and is different from the cut-in character replacement described in steps D385 to D390 described above. In the above-described cut-in character replacement, the size and display position of the character can be changed by the replacement.

Next, in step D633, it is determined whether the address of the motion management area loaded in step D632 is NULL. If NULL, the process proceeds to step D635. If not NULL, the motion data initialization process 1 (described later) is performed in step D634. Is executed, the process proceeds to step D635.
In step D635, the head address of the motion management area corresponding to the lower bit data of the operation code separated in step D587 is set and prepared, and the process proceeds to step D636.
In step D636, the head address prepared in step D635 is set in the address area of the motion management area corresponding to the lower bit data of the operation code, and the process proceeds to step D637.

  In these steps D632 to D636, anyway, finally, in step D636, the head address of the motion management area corresponding to the lower bits of the opcode separated in step D587 is set as the address area of the corresponding motion management area. However, if data at an address other than NULL has already been set in the address area of the corresponding motion management area, the motion data initialization process 1 (for setting the opening of the development area used for moving picture development, etc.) This will be executed in step D634.

Next, when proceeding to Step D637, it is determined whether the operand data prepared in Step D588 is 0 or more. If it is 0 or more, Steps D638 to D640 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns. If it is less than 0 (ie, a negative value). For example, steps D641 to D643 are sequentially executed and then the process returns.
In step D638, the operand data (the operand data prepared in step D588, and so on) is prepared as a motion index.
In step D639, the data prepared in step D638 is set in an area for storing the in-use motion index corresponding to the lower operation code (hereinafter referred to as the in-use motion index area). The in-use motion index area is an area for storing data of a motion index (in-use motion index) that designates a row to be controlled in the motion list table for each motion number, and is provided for each motion number. Yes. In this step D639, the data prepared in step D638 is set (that is, stored) in the in-use motion index area corresponding to the motion number specified by the lower bit of the opcode separated in step D587.
In step D640, motion data initialization processing 2 (described later) for initializing data such as the number of displays is executed.

On the other hand, in step D641, the motion index data corresponding to the lower part of the opcode is loaded from the corresponding motion index area and prepared. The motion index area includes the storage area (holding index area, fourth pattern index area) described in steps D291 to D294 described above and the storage area (SU1 cut-in described in steps D386, D388, and D390 described above). Area, SU2 cut-in area, and SU3 cut-in area). In this step D641, the motion index specified by the lower bit of the opcode separated in step D587 and the current state of the gaming machine (whether or not the probability change is in progress) out of the plurality of motion index areas in the RAM. Prepare motion index data from the area.
Next, in step D642, the data prepared in step D641 is set in the in-use motion index area corresponding to the lower part of the operation code.
In step D643, motion data initialization processing 2 (described later) for initializing data such as the number of displays is executed.

  Among the steps D637 to D643 described above, the determination result of step D637 is YES (operand is 0 or more), the route for executing steps D638 to D640, and the determination result of step D637 is NO (operand is less than 0). Thus, the route for executing steps D6412 to D643 is different as follows. That is, the former route is a route that uses the motion index value (fixed value) set in the scenario table stored in the ROM for control, and the latter route is stored in the motion index area in the RAM. This is a route that uses the value of the motion index (not a fixed value) for control. If you want to change the motion index to be used depending on the state of the gaming machine (whether or not it is in probability change), a negative value (for example, “−1”) is set as the operand value, and the latter route is executed. It becomes the composition which is done.

[Motion data initialization process 1]
Next, details of the motion data initialization process 1 executed in step D634 (or step D674 described later) in the motion registration process described above will be described with reference to the left side of FIG. In the description of the control process of the effect control device 300, the motion control data is data such as the number of displays and frame numbers stored in the motion management area.
When this routine is started, first, step D651 to step D655 are repeatedly executed until the variable i is incremented from the initial value 0 by an increment 1 until the final value (the final value = the number of displays−1) is reached. move on. That is, in step D651, immediately after the routine starts, the variable i is set to 0 and the process proceeds to step D652. In step D655, if the variable i is less than the closing price, the process returns to step D651, and if the variable i is the closing price, the process proceeds to step D656. Then, when returning to step D651, the value of variable i is increased by 1, and the process proceeds to step D652. The closing price value is a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the display number data set in the motion management area (hereinafter referred to as the target motion management area) corresponding to the lower bits of the opcode separated in step D587. . That is, in this routine, the loop processing of steps D651 to D655 is repeatedly executed for the number of displays, and then the process proceeds to step D656.

In step D652, the address of the display information area corresponding to the variable i in the target motion management area is set, and then the process proceeds to step D653. In this step D652, for example, if the variable i = 0, the address of the first display information area among the display information areas corresponding to the display number in the target motion management area is set.
In step D653, the display type data in the display information area to which the address is set in the previous step D652 is read, and it is determined whether or not the display type is a moving image. If the display type is a moving image, the decompression area (the area used for decompressing the compressed moving image data) is set to release in step D654, and then the process proceeds to step D655. If it is not a moving image, step D654 is executed. Do not proceed to step D655. When the process proceeds to step D655, as described above, if the variable i is less than the closing price, the process returns to step D651, and if the variable i is the closing price, the process proceeds to step D656.

  Next, when proceeding to step D656, the process of initializing the parameters of the target motion management area is performed at steps D656 to D658, and then the process returns. That is, the display number is set to 0 in step D656, the frame number is set to -1 in step D657, and the command position is set to 0 in step D658.

[Motion data initialization process 2]
Next, details of the motion data initialization process 2 executed in steps D640 and D643 (or step D689 described later) in the motion registration process described above will be described with reference to the right side of FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in steps D661 to D663, processing for initializing parameters of the target motion management area is performed, and then the process proceeds to step D664. That is, the display number is set to 0 in step D661, the frame number is set to -1 in step D662, and the command position is set to 0 in step D663.
In step D664, the motion list table area in the target motion management area has an address corresponding to the in-use motion index (the data set in step D642) (address for specifying the motion list table and its row). And then return.

[Motion deletion processing]
Next, details of the motion deletion process executed in step D602 in the scenario analysis process described above will be described with reference to the left side of FIG.
When this routine is started, first, steps D671 and D672 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D673.
In step D671, as in step D631, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is updated to the next record (address for specifying the next row of the table).
In step D672, as in step D632, the address of the motion management area is prepared from the address area of the target motion management area, and the process proceeds to step D673.

Next, in step D673, it is determined whether the address of the motion management area loaded in step D672 is NULL. If NULL, the process proceeds to step D675. If not NULL, the motion data initialization process 1 is executed in step D674. Later, the process proceeds to Step D675.
In step D675, NULL is set in the address area of the target motion management area, and the process advances to step D676.
In step D676, the in-use motion index data corresponding to the lower bit data of the operation code (the operation code separated in step D587, and so on) is cleared, and then the process returns.
The motion deletion process described above is executed when the control of the character or the like is finished, and thereby the motion information (data in the address area of the motion management area and data in the motion index area in use) is deleted.

[Motion continuation processing]
Next, details of the motion continuation process executed in step D603 in the scenario analysis process described above will be described with reference to the right side of FIG.
When this routine is started, first, steps D681 and D682 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D683.
In step D681, as in step D631, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is updated to the next record (address specifying the next row of the table).
In step D682, the data of the motion index in use corresponding to the lower bits of the operation code is loaded.

Proceeding to step D683, it is determined whether the data of the in-use motion index loaded at step D682 matches the operand acquired at step D588. If they match, the process returns. To do. Here, it is determined whether the currently controlled motion is the same as the motion specified in the scenario table. If they are not the same, step D684 and subsequent steps are executed to perform new motion registration.
In step D684 and subsequent steps, processing similar to the motion registration processing (route using the scenario table value) described above is performed.
That is, in step D684, as in step D632, the address of the motion management area is loaded from the address area of the target motion management area and prepared, and the process proceeds to step D685.

Next, in step D685, it is determined whether the address of the motion management area loaded in step D684 is NULL. If NULL, the process proceeds to step D687. If not NULL, the motion data initialization process 1 is executed in step D686. Later, the process proceeds to step D687.
In step D687, the head address of the target motion management area is set and prepared, and the process proceeds to step D688.
In step D688, the head address prepared in step D687 is set in the address area of the target motion management area, and the process proceeds to step D689.
In step D689, the motion data initialization process (the above-described motion data initialization process 2) is executed.
In step D690, the operand data is set in the in-use motion index area corresponding to the lower bit of the opcode, and then the process returns.
In the motion continuation process described above, if the motion information specified in the scenario table is the same as the content currently controlled, the process is continued as it is, and if it is different, a new registration process is executed. Thus, for example, if the background during normal fluctuation does not change due to reach or the like, the movie continues over a plurality of fluctuations. However, when reach occurs, a new reproduction from the head is started.

[Constant wait processing]
Next, details of the constant weight processing executed in step D604 in the scenario analysis processing described above will be described with reference to the upper side of FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D691, update processing similar to that in step D631 is executed.
In step D692, the operand data is set in the scenario timer area of the target scenario management area.
Next, in step D693, the value of brk is set to 1 and the process returns.
According to this routine, a time value or the like for waiting for a specified fixed time is set. For example, in the case of the 20th line (// 19) in the scenario table shown in FIG. 177, this routine is executed because the operation code is a constant wait code, and the operand wait time is (300). 300 (10 seconds = 300 × 1/30) is set as the value of the scenario timer area. Since the value of brk becomes 1 in step D693, the loop processing (steps D584 to D623) in the scenario analysis processing described above is completed.

[Variable weight processing]
Next, details of the variable weight process executed in step D605 in the scenario analysis process described above will be described with reference to the lower side of FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D695, update processing similar to that in step D631 is executed.
Next, in step D696, a value obtained by adding the PB effect addition time (the value set in step D579) to the operand data is set in the scenario timer area of the target scenario management area.
Next, in step D697, the value of brk is set to 1 and the process returns.

  In this routine, a time value or the like for waiting for a variable time when the effect time changes due to the player's button operation (PB operation) is set. As a result, the effect that is performed thereafter becomes longer as the button is pressed sooner after the button instruction is received, and an operation is performed in which the effect is performed only for a short time when pressed with the effective time. For example, in the case of the 11th line (// 10) in the scenario table shown in the upper part of FIG. 176, this routine is executed because the operation code is a variable wait code, and the effective time value of the operand is (55). In D696, the 55 + PB effect addition time is set as the value of the scenario timer area. Here, the PB effect addition time becomes larger as the player performs the PB operation sooner after the effect for prompting the player to perform the PB operation is performed (see step D579). For this reason, the earlier the player performs the PB operation, the longer the effect to be performed thereafter.

[PB waiting process]
Next, details of the PB waiting process executed in step D606 in the above-described scenario analysis process will be described with reference to the upper side of FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D701, update processing similar to that in step D631 is executed.
In step D702, the operand data is set in the PB timer area of the target scenario management area.
Next, in step D703, the PB detection flag area flag in the target scenario management area is cleared.
Next, in step D704, the value of brk is set to 1 and the process returns.

  In this routine, the setting for starting the push button effect is performed. For example, in the scenario table shown in the upper part of FIG. 176, first, the motion deletion process of motion 9 is executed in the first line (// 0), and then the motion registration process of motion 8 in the second line (// 1) (see FIG. After the execution of the motion table “MDat0070” corresponding to the push button ON / OFF effect motion table “MDat0070” shown in FIG. 165, the next 3rd line (// 2) opcode is the PB wait code. Therefore, since this routine is executed and the effective time value of the operand is (90), 90 is set as the timer area value in the above step D702, and the push button effect of 3 seconds (= 90 × 1/30) is started. Is done. In step D703, in order to start the push button effect, the value of the PB detection flag indicating that the PB (push button) is operated is initially set to OFF (the flag is not set).

[PB decision branch processing]
Next, details of the PB determination branch process executed in step D607 in the scenario analysis process described above will be described below with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step D711 whether the flag of the PB detection flag area in the target scenario management area is set (that is, whether the PB detection flag is set). In step D713, if not set (if the PB detection flag is OFF), the process advances to step D712.
In step D712, the same update process as in step D631 is executed, and the process returns.
When the process proceeds to Step D713, the same update process as in Step D631 is executed, and the process proceeds to Step D714.
When the process proceeds to step D714, it is determined whether or not the address update process of step D713 has been completed for the operand data prepared in step D588, and if completed, the process returns. If not completed, the process returns to step D713 to perform the process. repeat.

  This routine is executed when the PB timer that counts the valid time without pushing the push button in the above-mentioned push button effect has expired or when the timer is forced to zero because the PB is pushed within the valid time. Process. If the time is up without pressing PB, the process proceeds to step D712 through step D711, and the designated line of the scenario table advances by one line and returns. If PB is pressed within the valid time, the process proceeds to step D713 via step D711, and the specified line of the scenario table jumps by the amount specified by the operand.

  For example, in the case of the scenario table shown in the upper part of FIG. 176, when the control up to the third line is completed as described above, this routine is executed because the operation code in the next fourth line (// 3) is the PB determination branch code. Since the operand table skip count is (3), if PB is pushed within the valid time and the process proceeds to step D713, the determination result in step D714 is NO until step D713 is executed three times. As a result, in the scenario table, the next designated line jumps to the seventh line (// 6). Then, when jumping to the seventh line, an effect after the seventh line (in the case of the upper side in FIG. 176, an effect in which a warrior character appears on the display screen as motion 8 and outputs a speech of the speech) is started. On the other hand, even when this routine is executed as described above, if PB is not pushed within the valid time, the routine returns only after step D712 is executed once (this routine ends). The designated line on the upper side is the next 5th line (// 4), the motion deletion process of motion 8 is executed by this 5th line, and then the end process described later is executed by the 6th line, and the push described above The button production simply ends (no warrior character appears).

[Design stop processing]
Next, details of the symbol stop process executed in step D608 in the scenario analysis process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D721, update processing similar to that in step D631 is executed, and then the flow proceeds to step D722.
When the process proceeds to step D722, it is determined whether the lower bit data of the opcode designates the left symbol. If it is the left symbol, the process returns after executing step D727, and if not, the process proceeds to step D723. In step D727, the value of the special figure stop symbol area (left) (the value set in step D354 described above) is set as the current symbol (left).
When the process proceeds to step D723, it is determined whether the lower bit data of the operation code designates the right symbol. If it is the right symbol, the process returns after executing step D728, and if not, the process proceeds to step D724. In step D728, the value of the special figure stop symbol area (right) (the value set in step D354 described above) is set as the current symbol (right).

When the process proceeds to step D724, it is determined whether the lower bit data of the operation code designates a middle symbol. If it is a middle symbol, the process returns after executing step D729, otherwise proceeds to step D725. In step D729, the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (medium) (the value set in step D354 described above) is set as the current symbol (medium).
Proceeding to step D725, it is determined whether the low-order bit data of the opcode designates Fig. 1 Fig. 4 symbol (4 symbol of Fig. 1), and if it is Fig. 1 Fig. 4 symbol, step D730 is executed. Return to step D726 if it is not the 4th symbol in FIG. In step D730, the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol) is set as the current symbol (special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol).

Proceeding to step D726, it is determined whether the low-order bit data of the operation code designates special figure 2 4th figure (4th figure of special figure 2). After execution, the process returns. If not, the process returns. In step D731, the value of the special symbol stop symbol region (special symbol 2 4 symbol) is set as the current symbol (special symbol 2 4 symbol).
This routine is a process of setting a stop symbol when the variable display of symbols such as decorative special symbols is stopped. For example, if the sixth line in the scenario table MS_LZ100 shown in FIG. 169 is the designated line, the operation code is the stop symbol set code (left symbol), so this routine is executed and the determination result in the above step D722 becomes YES. Step D727 is executed to set the stop symbol of the left symbol of the special figure.

[Design reverse calculation process]
Next, the details of the symbol reverse calculation replacement process executed in step D609 in the scenario analysis process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D741, update processing similar to that in step D631 is executed.
Next, in step D742, it is determined whether the lower bit data of the opcode designates the left symbol. move on.
In step D743, a remainder (operand mod 9) obtained by dividing the operand data by 9 is set as a frame difference.

In step D744, the result of subtracting the frame difference (value set in step D743) from the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (left) is set as the symbol number.
When the process proceeds to step D745, it is determined whether the symbol number set in step D744 is less than 0 (a negative value). If it is less than 0, step D746 is executed and then step D747 is executed and the process returns. Return to step D747 after executing step D747 without executing step D746.
In step D746, a value obtained by adding 9 to the symbol number is set as a new symbol number.
In step D747, the value of the symbol number (set in step D744, and if negative, the value adjusted in step D746) is set as the current symbol (left).

Next, when proceeding to step D748, it is determined whether the lower bit data of the opcode designates the right symbol. Proceed to D754.
In Step D749, a remainder (operand mod 9) obtained by dividing the operand data by 9 is set as a frame difference.

In step D750, the result obtained by subtracting the frame difference (value set in step D749) from the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (right) is set as the symbol number.
Then, when proceeding to Step D751, it is determined whether or not the symbol number set at Step D750 is less than 0. After executing step D753 without executing, the process returns.
In step D752, a value obtained by adding 9 to the symbol number is set as a new symbol number.
In step D753, the value of the symbol number (set in step D750 and adjusted in step D752 if negative) is set as the current symbol (right).

Next, when proceeding to step D754, it is determined whether or not the lower bit data of the opcode designates a middle symbol. To do.
In step D755, a remainder (operand mod 9) obtained by dividing the operand data by 9 is set as a frame difference.

In step D756, the result of subtracting the frame difference (value set in step D755) from the value of the special symbol stop symbol area (medium) is set as the symbol number.
Then, when proceeding to Step D757, it is determined whether or not the symbol number set at Step D756 is less than 0. Return to step D759 after executing step D759.
In step D758, a value obtained by adding 9 to the symbol number is set as a new symbol number.
In step D759, the value of the symbol number (set in step D756 or corrected in step D758 if negative) is set as the current symbol (medium).

The symbol reverse calculation replacement process described above is a process of replacing the symbol with a symbol several symbols before the scheduled stop (the symbol that is the previous symbol by the number of symbol feeds) such as the moment of slowdown after the end of high-speed fluctuation.
For example, if the third line in the scenario table MS_LZ100 shown in FIG. 169 is the designated line, the opcode is the left symbol reverse calculation replacement code, so this routine is executed and the determination result in the above step D742 becomes YES. Steps D743 to D747 are executed to set the current symbol (left). In this case, the operand is data meaning the number of symbols to be sent, and in the third line of the MS_LZ100, the operand is the number of frames to be sent (2). Therefore, in step D743, the remainder of the division of 2 ÷ 9 is 2 Is set as the frame difference, and the symbol number is set in step D744 using the value of the frame difference. For example, if the value of the special figure stop symbol area (left) is 1, -1 (= 1-2) is set as the symbol number, and if the value of the special figure stop symbol area (left) is 7, 5 (= 7-2) is set as the symbol number. If the symbol number set in step D744 is a negative value (for example, -1), step D746 is executed and the symbol number is changed to a rounded value (for example, if -1, 8 = -1 + 9). After that, in step D747, the symbol number is registered as the current symbol (left).

  The above operation is the same for the right symbol (steps D748 to D753) and the middle symbol (steps D754 to D759). Further, “9” in step D743 and the like represents the number of symbols in each reel (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol). This may not be 9 depending on the model, and may have a different value for each reel. “9” in step D335 or the like of the “stop symbol setting process” described above also represents the number of symbols.

[Change scenario switching process]
Next, details of the change scenario switching process executed in step D610 in the scenario analysis process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D761, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the left symbol scenario 2nd (command to switch the left symbol variation display to 2nd (first half)), and the left symbol scenario. If it is 2nd, it returns after executing step D762 thru | or 765 sequentially, and when it is not the left symbol scenario 2nd, it will progress to step D767.
In step D762, scenario layer number 1 is prepared because it is a left symbol.

In Step D763, the address of the left symbol scenario 2nd table (scenario table for 2nd (first half) for the left symbol) is loaded and prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area. In the symbol variation scenario table area, as described in step D315, various symbol variation scenario tables (for 1st (early), 2nd (first half), and 3rd (second half) scenario tables, In this step D763, 2nd (first half) scenario table addresses are prepared for the left symbol.
In step D764, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D762 and D763.
In step D765, the address of the scenario management area 1 is set in the address area of the prepared scenario management area (for example, the address area of the scenario management area prepared in step D553 etc.), and the process returns. As a result, the scenario management area 1 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Next, proceeding to step D767, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the right symbol scenario 2nd (instructing switching of the right symbol variation display to 2nd). If it is the right symbol scenario 2nd, steps D768 to 771 is executed in order, and then the process returns. If it is not the right symbol scenario 2nd, the process proceeds to Step D772.
In step D768, scenario layer number 2 is prepared because it is the right symbol.

In step D769, the address of the right symbol scenario 2nd table (for the right symbol and the 2nd scenario table) is loaded from the symbol variation scenario table area and prepared.
In step D770, the above-described scenario data setting process is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D768 and D769.
In Step D771, the address of the scenario management area 2 is set in the address area of the prepared scenario management area, and the process returns. As a result, the scenario management area 2 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Next, when proceeding to step D772, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the middle symbol scenario 2nd (instructing switching of the middle symbol variation display to 2nd). If it is the middle symbol scenario 2nd, steps D773 to After executing 776 sequentially, the process returns, and if it is not the middle symbol scenario 2nd, the process proceeds to step D777.
In step D773, scenario layer number 3 is prepared because it is a medium symbol.

In step D774, the address of the medium symbol scenario 2nd table (the scenario table for 2nd for the medium symbol) is loaded from the symbol variation scenario table area and prepared.
In step D775, the above-described scenario data setting process is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D773 and D774.
In Step D776, the address of the scenario management area 3 is set in the address area of the prepared scenario management area, and the process returns. As a result, the scenario management area 3 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Next, when proceeding to step D777, it is determined whether or not the data of the operand is the left symbol scenario 3rd (command to switch the left symbol variation display to 3rd (second half)), and if it is the left symbol scenario 3rd. After executing Steps D778 to 781 sequentially, the process returns, and if not the left symbol scenario 3rd, the process proceeds to Step D782.
In step D778, scenario layer number 1 is prepared because it is a left symbol.

In step D779, the address of the left symbol scenario 3rd table (the scenario symbol for 3rd (second half) for the left symbol) is loaded from the symbol variation scenario table area and prepared.
In step D780, the above-described scenario data setting process is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D778 and D779.
In step D781, the address of the scenario management area 1 is set in the address area of the prepared scenario management area, and the process returns. As a result, the scenario management area 1 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Next, proceeding to step D782, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the right symbol scenario 3rd (instructing switching of the right symbol variation display to 3rd). If it is the right symbol scenario 3rd, steps D783 to D783 are performed. After executing 786 sequentially, the process returns, and if it is not the right symbol scenario 3rd, the process proceeds to step D787.
In step D783, scenario layer number 2 is prepared because it is a right symbol.

In step D784, the address of the right symbol scenario 3rd table (scenario table for the 3rd symbol for the right symbol) is loaded from the symbol variation scenario table area and prepared.
In step D785, the scenario data setting process described above is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D783 and D784.
In step D786, the address of the scenario management area 2 is set in the address area of the prepared scenario management area, and the process returns. As a result, the scenario management area 2 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

Next, when proceeding to step D787, it is determined whether the data of the operand is the middle symbol scenario 3rd (instructing switching of the middle symbol variation display to 3rd), and if it is the middle symbol scenario 3rd, steps D788 to After the 791 is executed in sequence, the process returns, and when it is not the middle symbol scenario 3rd, the process returns.
In step D788, scenario layer number 3 is prepared because it is a medium symbol.

In Step D789, the address of the medium symbol scenario 3rd table (the scenario table for 3rd for the medium symbol) is loaded and prepared from the symbol variation scenario table area.
In step D790, the above-described scenario data setting process is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps D788 and D789.
In step D791, the address of the scenario management area 3 is set in the address area of the prepared scenario management area, and the process returns. As a result, the scenario management area 3 is newly set as the target scenario management area.

According to the variation scenario switching process described above, scenario switching in the above-described symbol variation section, that is, scenario switching from 1st (early) to 2nd (first half), or from 2nd (first half) to 3rd (second half). Is done. That is, the variation display effect of the decoration special drawing is divided into three sections, usually “early, first half, second half”, and the scenario of each section is switched and connected by this routine. For example, if the 9th line (// 8) of the last line in the scenario table MS_LZ100 shown in FIG. 169 is the designated line, the operation code is the variable scenario switching code, and the operand is the left symbol scenario 2nd. Is executed, the determination result in step D761 is YES, and steps D762 to D765 are executed, and a new scenario table for 2nd (first half) for the left symbol (for example, MS_LZ300 shown in FIG. 169) is controlled. It is set as a scenario table, and settings for executing this scenario table are made.
Depending on the type of variation, the time values for the breaks of “early, first half, second half” are different. There are also fluctuations without 3rd (second half) (such as fluctuations without reach).

[Repetition processing]
Next, details of the iterative process executed in step D611 in the above-described scenario analysis process will be described with reference to the upper side of FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D795, the table address in the scenario data table area of the target scenario management area is returned to the previous record (address specifying the previous line of the scenario table).
Next, in step D796, it is determined whether or not the table address has been returned to the previous record by executing the operand for the operand acquired in step D588. In step D795, the process is repeated.

  The repetitive processing described above is used when returning to a predetermined stage of the scenario table and repeating the operation in the same scenario. For example, if the 52nd line (// 51) of the last line in the scenario table shown in FIG. 177 is a designated line, the operation code is a repetition code and the operand is the return number (22), so this routine is executed. When step D795 is executed 22 times, the determination result in step D796 is YES, and this routine is terminated. As a result, the designated line of the scenario table is the 30th line before the 22th line (// 29). Return to. The 30th line of the scenario table shown in FIG. 177 is a line that starts a movie of a customer waiting demonstration effect (the operation code is a motion 0 registration code and the operand is a motion index No. (13)). Following the movie, it has a table structure in which a symbol display of a customer waiting demonstration is performed. Therefore, after that, the movie display and the symbol display as a demonstration for waiting for a customer are repeated, and data for one loop (data from the 30th line to the last line of the scenario table shown in FIG. 177) is prepared. It will be over.

〔End processing〕
Next, details of the termination process executed in step D612 in the scenario analysis process described above will be described below with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, in step D798, NULL is set in the address area of the prepared scenario management area, and the process returns. As a result, the target scenario management area is not set, and the scenario ends.
For example, when the 15th line (// 14) of the last line of the scenario table shown in the upper part of FIG. 176 is a designated line, the operation code is an end code, so this routine is executed and the target scenario management area in step D798 above The address area is set to NULL, and the scenario ends. As described above, this routine is executed when a series of scenarios are all completed.

[Motion control processing]
Next, details of the motion control process executed in step D30 in the above-described main process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, the loop processing of steps D801 to D818 is repeatedly executed while increasing the number X of the target motion management area from 0, and the loop processing end condition (control for all motion management areas 0 to 13). Returns when the process ends. That is, at the start of this routine, first, in step D801, the number of the target motion management area is set to 0 (X = 0), and the process proceeds to step D802 to execute the process after step D802. The management area number is incremented by 1 (that is, X = X + 1). In step D818, it is determined whether the end condition (X = 14) is satisfied. If it is satisfied, the process returns. If not, step D801 is determined. The process returns to step D802 and proceeds to step D802.

Hereinafter, Step D802 and the subsequent steps will be described on the assumption that the number of the target motion management area is X (actually, any of 0 to 13 in this example).
In step D802, the initialization flag used in this routine is cleared. In the next step D803, the address of the motion management area X is loaded from the address area of the motion management area X, and then the process proceeds to step D804.
In step D804, it is determined whether or not the data at the address loaded in step D803 is NULL. If not, the process proceeds to step D805.

In step D805, based on the address loaded in step D804, data in the motion list table area in the motion management area X (that is, data for designating the motion list table to be controlled this time and data for specifying the row thereof) is loaded and prepared. Proceed to step D806.
In step D806, data of the number of display frames in a row of the motion list table (hereinafter referred to as a designated row) designated by the data loaded in step D805 is read, and the number of display frames (the number of frames for executing a certain motion). If it is less than or equal to 0, the process proceeds to step D817, where it is abnormal. For example, if the first row in the motion list table shown in FIG. 165 is the designated row, the number of frames (the number of display frames) is “1”, so the determination result in step D806 is NO and step D807 is performed. Proceed to For example, if the fourth row in the list table is a designated row, the number of frames (the number of display frames) is “216”, so the determination result in step D806 is also NO and the process proceeds to step D807. As described above, since the period of time for each motion is different, the number of display frames corresponding to each motion table is defined, and the number of display frames should be defined for at least one frame. If the definition value on the motion list table for the number of frames is 0 or less, it is abnormal.

  In step D807, the value of the frame number in the motion management area X is read to determine whether the value of the frame number is less than 0. If it is less than 0, a motion is newly registered (during motion registration). After executing step D808 (setting an initialization flag), the process proceeds to step D809. If it is not less than 0, the process proceeds to step D809 without executing step D808 because it is not during motion registration. Note that the frame number is set to “−1” in steps D657 and D662 in the above-described motion data initialization processing 1 and 2 at the time of motion registration, so if the motion is registered, the initialization flag is set in step D808. The This initialization flag is a flag that is cleared in step D802 described above and determined in step D812 described later.

Proceeding to step D809, it is determined whether the frame number value in the motion management area X has reached the number of final frames (ie, the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of display frames described above). If the number of frames is greater than or equal to the number of frames, Steps D810 and D811 are sequentially executed, and then Step D812 is performed.
In step D810, the above-described motion data initialization process 1 is executed, and in step D811, an initialization flag is set as in step D808.
Here, the fact that the frame number (starting from 0) has reached the final frame number means that the control of the target motion table has been completed up to the final frame. Therefore, if the determination result in step D809 is YES (the frame number has reached the final frame number), the motion data initialization process 1 and the initialization flag are set in the same way as in the motion registration, and the same The motion table is executed again from the beginning.

When proceeding to step D812, it is determined whether the initialization flag is set. If the initialization flag has not been set (that is, if it has been cleared), the process proceeds to step D816 after executing step D819.
In steps D813, D814, and D815, the frame number, display number, and command position values in the motion management area X are set to 0, respectively.
In step D819, an update is performed to increase the value of the frame number in the motion management area X by one. The process proceeds to step D819 because the initialization flag is not set (that is, when the target motion table is being executed), so that the frame numbers need to be sequentially increased.

  Note that the value of the display number set to 0 in step D814 (a value indicating the number of objects under control) is added or deleted during the motion command execution process described later (for example, in step D881 described later). Updated (+1 or -1). In addition, the value of the command position set to 0 in step D815 (a value indicating the number of lines in the motion table) is also updated during a motion command execution process described later (for example, in step D880 described later). A command position value of 0 indicates that the designated line in the motion table is the first line. Further, the value of the display number is the number of objects under control, not the number of objects (such as symbols and warning characters) that are actually displayed on the screen at the same time.

Next, when the process proceeds to Step D816, a motion command execution process (described later) for executing control of the target motion table is executed, and the process proceeds to Step D817.
In step D817, the address of the motion management area address area itself is updated. That is, an update for increasing the value of the motion management area number X by 1 is executed. As a result, the target motion management area and the target motion layer are switched to the next. For example, if the motion management area 1 (motion layer is motion 1) is the control target before execution of step D817, the motion management area 2 (motion layer is motion 2) becomes the control target after execution. .
Then, if step D817 is executed, the process proceeds to step D818. If the above-described end condition (in this example, the number X = 14) is satisfied, the process returns. If not, the process returns to step D801. The process is repeated from step D802.

[Motion command execution processing]
Next, details of the motion command execution process executed in step D816 in the above-described motion control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143. FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D821, from the motion list table area in the motion management area X (target motion management area), the data of the address of the motion list table (also referred to as motion list table) (ie, the motion list table) The motion list table to be controlled this time and data for designating the row) are loaded, and the process proceeds to Step D822.

  In step D822, the value of the command position in the motion management area X is read, and the value of this command position is the number of motion commands (the number of motion commands in the specified row of the motion list table specified by the address loaded in step D821). If the number of motion commands is greater than or equal to the number of motion commands, all commands (all rows in the target motion table) have been executed, and the process returns. The process proceeds to step D823 to execute the next motion table for the next one frame. For example, if the fourth line in the motion list table shown in FIG. 165 is a designated line, the number of motion commands is “1830”, and therefore the value of the command position in the motion management area X is “1830” in step D822. If it is not less than “1830”, the process proceeds to step D823. The value of the command position in the motion management area X is initially initialized to 0 in steps D658, D663, etc. in the above-described motion data initialization processes 1 and 2, and each row (command) of the motion table in step D843 described later. Each time is executed, +1 is updated. Therefore, if this value is equal to or greater than “1830”, all rows of the target motion table have been executed, and the process returns.

Proceeding to step D823, the address (motion table name) of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D821), Proceed to step D824. For example, if the fourth row in the list table for motion shown in FIG. Take out). The motion list table area of the RAM (RAM 311a) stores the address (points to the address of the table in the ROM) of the leftmost column (the position of the number of frames) of the motion list table. In step D821, this address is loaded from the motion list table area of the RAM. In step D823, the value of “motion table name (address)” indicated by the address two records ahead of the address loaded in step D821 is read from the ROM.
In this example, since the motion table address corresponds to the motion table name, if the motion table name is obtained, the motion table address is obtained.

  The motion table is a control table for executing each of the blocked display effects, as described above, but will be described in detail here. In this application, an example of the motion table at the time of the push button notice is shown on the lower side of FIG. 176 described above, and an example of the motion table at the start of the left symbol normal fluctuation is shown in FIG. Many such motion tables are registered in the ROM (PROM 321 in this example). As shown in these drawings, in each row of the motion table, a command code is set at the head, and subsequently, a parameter corresponding to the command is set. However, there may be no parameters.

  For example, in the first line of FIG. 170, a command “additional 1 code” and a parameter “character No. (symbol“ 2 ”)” are set, and in the second line, a command “behavior code” Parameters “object index (0)” and “behavior index (0)” are set, and the command “move 1 code”, “object index (0)”, and “X coordinate (0)” are set in the seventh line. ”,“ Y coordinate (−493) ”,“ image width data (296) ”, and“ image height data (490) ”are set, and only the command“ end code ”is displayed on the 10th line. Is set. Here, the object index is a number assigned to an object to distinguish each object, and is automatically set in the order of registration with an additional code. For example, the symbol “2” additionally registered in the first row of FIG. 170 becomes the object index (0), and the symbol “1” additionally registered in the third row becomes the object index (1). The additionally registered symbol “9” becomes the object index (2), and the value of the object index increases based on the number of characters (number of objects) to be displayed.

The smaller the value of the object index, the deeper the screen is displayed as the context of the display layer. That is, when the display positions overlap, an object having a large object index value is preferentially displayed on the screen.
Also, in the example of FIG. 170, three characters appear, but management is performed so that the total number of characters in all other categories (such as a notice) used at the same time becomes 128. In other words, the VDP 312 in this example can display and control 128 characters simultaneously. Since characters can be arranged outside the screen, the number is not limited to 128 on the screen.
In addition, the example in the figure is data for the first four frames of the motion table of the normal variation (first half) of the left symbol. The delimiter to the end code is data for one frame. For example, the data from the first line to the tenth line is the data for the first frame. In addition, numerical values such as coordinate data and size data simply describe values that are meaningful in the present embodiment, and may include data including information after the decimal point. Actually, the data is a fixed decimal with a 16-bit sign (a 2's complement of a sign bit, an integer part 13 bits, and a fraction part 2 bits).
If the same state as the previous frame is continued, only the end code needs to be defined.

The types and meanings of the motion table commands in this example are as follows.
"Additional code": A command to add an object. There are an additional 1 code, an additional 2 code, and an additional 3 code, respectively, according to the type of object to be added (bitmap, moving image, single color rectangle).
“Insert code”: a command for inserting an object as a specific object index. Depending on the type of object to be inserted (same as above), there are an insertion 1 code, an insertion 2 code, and an insertion 3 code. By executing this insertion code, the value of the object index of the already registered object is lost.
"Move code": A command that specifies the display position and display size of an object. Depending on the designation method (one point designation, three point designation), there are movement 1 code and movement 2 code.
"Effect code": A command that commands an effect that applies transparency or other processing to the image. There are an effect 1 code for specifying an effect type, an effect 2 code for specifying an effect parameter (for example, a transparency value (%)), and an effect 3 code for specifying an effect color.
"Delete code": A command to command deletion of an object.
"Change code": a command for instructing a change in which an object character (such as a symbol or a character) continues to move in the middle of movement and remains unchanged.
"Decode code": A command for instructing decoding (decoding) of moving image data.
“Replacement code”: a command for instructing replacement of objects (for example, control for switching characters of object index 0 and object index 1).
"Behavior code": A command to command replacement of an object character.
“End code”: a command indicating the end of data for one frame.
Note that the motion table commands are not limited to those described above, and may include a mode in which commands other than those described above are further included, or a mode in which any of the above commands is deleted.

Next, the processing after step D823 will be described.
After step D823, the process proceeds to step D823, and loop processing using steps D824 and D844 as loop ends is repeatedly executed until an end condition (command = end) is satisfied. That is, immediately after the motion registration or the like, the command position k in the target motion management area X is set to 0 (value specifying the first row of the motion table) by the above-described steps D658, D663, and D815 (k = 0), each time the loop processing of steps D824 to D844 is repeated, the value of the command position k in the motion management area X is increased by 1 (k = k + 1) in steps D843 and D880, which will be described later, and the above end condition in step D842 It is determined whether (command at the command position k is an end command) is satisfied, and if satisfied, the process returns via step D844, and if not satisfied, the process returns to step D824 via step D844 and proceeds to step D825. It has become.

Hereinafter, Step D825 and the subsequent steps will be described on the assumption that the command position value of the target motion management area X is k.
Proceeding to step D825, the row corresponding to the command position k in the target motion table (the motion table at the address acquired in step D823) (for example, the first row if k = 0, the second row if k = 1, ... k = N, the command of the Nth line) is acquired, and then in step D826 to D841, command determination is sequentially performed regarding whether or not each code corresponds to this command, and any command determination result is YES Then, the corresponding process (any of steps D851 to D866) is executed, and the process proceeds to step D844.

That is, it is determined in step D826 that the code is an additional code. If YES, a bitmap addition process (a process for adding a still image as an object, details will be described later) is performed in step D851, and then the process proceeds to step D844. Proceed to
In step D827, it is determined whether the code is an additional 2 code. If YES, an activation addition process (a process of adding a moving image as an object, details will be described later) is performed in step D852, and then the process proceeds to step D844. If NO, the process proceeds to step D828.
In step D828, it is determined whether the code is an additional 3 code, and if YES, a monochrome rectangle addition process (a process of adding a monochrome rectangle image that does not use character ROM (image ROM 322) data as an object, details are omitted) is performed in step D853. Later, the process proceeds to step D844, and if NO, the process proceeds to step D829.
In step D829, it is determined whether the code is an insertion 1 code. If YES, a bitmap insertion process (a process of inserting a still image as an object, details are omitted) is performed in step D854, and then the process proceeds to step D844. If NO, the process proceeds to step D830. move on.

In step D830, it is determined whether the code is an insertion 2 code. If YES, operation insertion processing (processing for inserting a moving image as an object, details omitted) is performed in step D855, and then the process proceeds to step D844. If NO, the process proceeds to step D831.
In step D831, it is determined whether the code is an insertion 3 code. If YES, the process proceeds to step D844 after performing a monochrome rectangle insertion process (a process of inserting the monochrome color image as an object, details omitted) in step D856. Proceed to D832.
In step D832, it is determined whether or not the code is a movement code. If YES, a one-point designated object movement process (a process for setting the display position and display size of an object using a one-point designation method, details will be described later) is performed in step D857. The process proceeds to step D844, and if NO, the process proceeds to step D833.
In step D833, it is determined whether the code is a movement 2 code. If YES, a 3-point designated object movement process (a process for setting the display position and display size of the object using the 3-point designation method, details are omitted) is performed. Later, the process proceeds to step D844, and if NO, the process proceeds to step D834.

In step D834, it is determined whether it is an effect 1 code. If YES, effect type designation processing (described later) is performed in step D859, and then the process proceeds to step D844. If NO, the process proceeds to step D835.
In step D835, it is determined whether it is an effect 2 code. If YES, effect parameter designation processing (described later) is performed in step D860, and then the process proceeds to step D844. If NO, the process proceeds to step D8.
In step D836, it is determined whether it is an effect 3 code. If YES, an effect color designation process (effect color setting process, details are omitted) is performed in step D861, and then the process proceeds to step D844. If NO, the process proceeds to step D837.
In step D837, it is determined whether the code is a deletion code. If YES, an object deletion process (processing to delete an object, details will be described later) is performed in step D862, and then the process proceeds to step D844. If NO, the process proceeds to step D838.

In step D838, it is determined whether the code is a change code. If YES, an object change process (object change process, details will be described later) is performed in step D863, and then the process proceeds to step D844. If NO, the process proceeds to step D839.
In step D839, it is determined whether the code is a decode code. If YES, an object moving image decoding process (details will be described later) is performed in step D864, and then the process proceeds to step D844. If NO, the process proceeds to step D840.
In step D840, it is determined whether the code is a replacement code. If YES, an object replacement process (object replacement process, details omitted) is performed in step D865, and then the process proceeds to step D844. If NO, the process proceeds to step D841.
In step D841, it is determined whether the code is a behavior code. If YES, the process proceeds to step D844 after performing a behavior index setting process (details will be described later) in step D866. If NO, the process proceeds to step D842.

Next, in step D842, it is determined whether the code is an end code. If YES, the process proceeds to step D843, and if NO, the process proceeds to step D843.
In step D843, an update for increasing the value of the command position k by 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step D844.
In step D844, if the determination result in step D842 is YES, the process returns. If NO, the process returns to step D824 to execute step D826 and subsequent steps for the updated command position k.

A specific example of the operation for one frame by the loop processing of steps D824 to D844 will be described below with reference to FIG.
That is, first, since the command position k = 0 and the first line in which the additional 1 code is set is the designated line, YES is determined in step D826, and the bitmap adding process in step D851 is executed. The symbol “2” on the line is registered as the object index 0.
Next, k = 1, the second line in which the behavior code is set is the designated line, and object index 0 and behavior index 0 are set as parameters. Therefore, the result of step D841 is YES, and the behavior in step D866 is set. The index setting process is executed, and the behavior index 0 is set for the object index 0 (ie, the symbol “2”).

Next, k = 2 and the third line in which the additional 1 code is set is the designated line. Therefore, YES is determined in the step D826, and the bitmap adding process in the step D851 is executed, and the third line is present. The symbol “1” is registered as the object index 1.
Next, k = 3, the fourth line in which the behavior code is set is the designated line, and object index 1 and behavior index 0 are set as parameters. Therefore, the result of step D841 is YES, and the behavior in step D866 is set. The index setting process is executed to set the behavior index 0 for the object index 1 (that is, the symbol “1”).

Next, k = 4, and the fifth line in which the additional 1 code is set is the designated line. Therefore, the result of step D826 is YES, and the bitmap addition process in step D851 is executed, and the fifth line is present. The symbol “9” is registered as the object index 2.
Next, k = 5, and the sixth line in which the behavior code is set is the designated line, and object index 2 and behavior index 0 are set as parameters. The index setting process is executed to set the behavior index 0 for the object index 2 (that is, the symbol “9”).

Next, since k = 6, the 7th line in which the movement 1 code is set is the designated line, and the object index 0 or the like is set as a parameter. The object moving process is executed, and the display setting of the image of the object index 0 (that is, the symbol “2”) according to the coordinate data and the display size data in the seventh row is performed.
Next, since k = 7, the 8th line in which the movement 1 code is set is the designated line, and the object index 1 or the like is set as a parameter. The object moving process is executed, and the display setting of the image of the object index 1 (that is, the pattern “1”) is performed according to the coordinate data and the display size data in the eighth row.

Next, since k = 8, the 9th line in which the movement 1 code is set is the designated line, and the object index 2 and the like are set as the parameters. The object moving process is executed, and the display setting of the image of the object index 2 (that is, the symbol “9”) according to the coordinate data and the display size data in the ninth row is performed.
Next, k = 9, and the 10th line in which the end code is set is the designated line. Therefore, YES is determined in the step D842, the loop process is ended in the step D844, and the process returns.
Thus, the first frame shown in FIG. 170A is completed. It should be noted that the third and subsequent frames indicated by (b), (c), and (d) in the figure are similarly executed every frame period (the aforementioned processing period; for example, 1/30 second).

[Bitmap addition processing]
Next, details of the bitmap addition process executed in step D851 in the motion command execution process described above will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, this routine is a process of adding a still image character as a display object.
When this routine is started, first, in step D871, the address of the motion list table (that is, the data for specifying the motion list table to be controlled this time and its row) is loaded from the motion list table area in the motion management area X. Then, the process proceeds to Step D872.
Proceeding to step D872, it is determined whether the value of the display number in the motion management area X is equal to or greater than the maximum number of display elements. If the value is equal to or greater than the maximum number of display elements, an object cannot be added and the process returns. If there is, step D873 to D881 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns. Here, the maximum number of display elements is a limit value of the number of displays (number of objects to be controlled) that can be handled in one motion in consideration of the hardware limit of the VDP 312 and the capacity of the VRAM 312a (the area where the moving image is developed). For example, it is set to 18 (still image 16 + moving image 2). However, 18 is only an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  In step D873, an address of the display information area corresponding to the display number is set. For example, when an object is added for the first time, the number of displays is 1, so the address of the display information area corresponding to the number of displays 1 in the motion management area X is set. Specifically, for example, the display information area of the motion management area 5 (the motion management area for the left symbol) is 3 for the first next symbol, the second current symbol, and the third previous symbol. There are pieces. Now, for example, assuming that the motion management area X = 5 (left symbol), the target motion table is as shown in FIG. 170, and the command position k = 0, the command on the first line as the designated line is This routine is executed because it is an additional one code. In this case, among the three display information areas of the motion management area 5, the first display information area for the next symbol corresponding to the display number 1 is displayed in the display information area. Since the data of the object (character No. (symbol “2”)) specified by the parameter on the first line is set, in step D873, the address of the display information area for the first next symbol is set. Is set. Similarly, if k = 2 (the designated line is the third line), the character No. 3 in the third line is displayed in the second display information area for the current symbol corresponding to the display number 2. (Symbol “1”) is set, the address of the display information area for the second current symbol is set, and k = 4 (the designated line is the fifth line), corresponding to the display number 3 The character No. 5 in the fifth line is displayed in the display information area for the third previous symbol. The data of (symbol “9”) is set, and the address of the display information area for the third previous symbol is set.

  The “display number” set (saved) in the motion management area basically represents the MAX number of objects to be displayed (that is, the number of all objects set as control targets). In such additional processing, the number of objects increases, so the “display number” fluctuates by +1 (for example, updated in step D881 to be described later), but when such additional processing is no longer performed. The display number indicates the MAX number of the displayed object.

Next, in step D874, each data in one display information area (hereinafter referred to as a target display information area) specified by the address set in step D873 is cleared to zero. This is because once the values of the target display information area are all set to 0, initial values are set in necessary areas. Here, only one display information area corresponding to the number of displays is cleared to zero.
Next, in step D875, an undefined value (for example, “−1”) is saved as the value of the behavior index in the target display information area. This is for setting the state without behavior as an initial value. In this example, even when the value of the behavior index is 0 (when the behavior index 0 is specified as the parameters in the second, fourth, and sixth lines in FIG. 170), the behavior (replacement of symbols, etc.) is still present. is there.

In step D876, still image information is saved as display type data in the target display information area. That is, here, information indicating that the object to be added is a still image is set.
Next, in step D877, the motion table address (motion table name) is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D871). This is the same processing as in step D823 described above.

In step D878, a still image index corresponding to the command position k is acquired. Here, the still image index is a registration number of a still image character registered in the character ROM (image ROM 322), and is a parameter for designating a row of a still image ROM member list table as shown in FIG. 163, for example. . Now, for example, if the motion management area X = 5 (left symbol), the target motion table is as shown in FIG. The object with character no. In step D878, “1” is acquired as the value of the still image index for designating the row corresponding to the symbol “2” in the table of FIG. 163.
In step D879, the still image index value acquired in step D878 is saved as an image index. The image index is information indicating a specific character (an image such as a still image or a moving image) as a display target, and is information used in step E51 or the like in an effect display editing process described later.

Next, in step D880, the command position is updated to the next record. That is, an update is performed to increase the value k of the command position by 1. This is because when the motion command execution process is executed in the next cycle, the next row of the motion table is controlled as the designated row.
Next, in step D881, since an object is added by this routine, an update is performed to increase the value of the display number in the motion management area X by 1, and then the process returns.

The contents of each parameter of the still picture ROM member list table shown in FIG. 163 are as follows.
Image address offset: Indicates an offset value to the address where the character is stored in the character ROM.
Palette address offset: Indicates an offset value to an address where palette data used by the character is stored in the character ROM. In this example, since the described character uses the same palette, all are 0. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the palette may be changed as required by the character. Locations using different pallets will have different offset values.
-Image width and height; represents the size of the original image of the character. For example, the unit is pixel. In this example, since only the character at the time of normal fluctuation and the character of the push button are only the same size, in actuality, there are various values for each character. Also, even in normal symbols, for example, the size of the person drawn on the symbol may be slightly different, and the size of the appearance may be different, but in order to make it easier to handle with internal control, the size of the character in the transparent part Adjust the height and set the characters to the same size if they are in the same category.

Width on VRAM; indicates the width when the character is expanded in VRAM. In this example, only the “reversible compression 32-bit image” is used as the compression type, so the width is the same as the original image. If lossy compression is used or the number of bits in the color palette is reduced, the size will be reduced.
Image compression type: Indicates the compression type of each character stored in the character ROM. Examples of the compression type include the following types 0 to 6. There may be other types.
0: No 32-bit full color image compression 1: No 8 bit full color image compression 2: No 4 bit full color image compression 3: Lossless compression 32 bit full color image 4: Lossless compression 8 bit full color image 5: Lossless compression 4 bit full color image 6: Lossless compression image / image The compressed size of image data (character data) after compression. It is used as a parameter when data is transferred from the character ROM 322 to the VRAM 312a (606, 607).
The category setting of the still image ROM member list table described above is an example,
Other parameters may be set.

[Video addition processing]
Next, details of the moving image addition process executed in step D852 in the above-described motion command execution process will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, this routine is a process for adding a moving image character as a display object.
When this routine is started, first, in step D891, as in step D871, the address of the motion list table is loaded, and the flow advances to step D892.
When the process proceeds to step D892, it is determined whether the value of the display number in the motion management area X is equal to or greater than the maximum display element number as in step D872. If YES, steps D893 to D897 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D898.

In step D893, the address of the display information area corresponding to the number of displays is set as in step D873.
In step D894, as in step D874, each data in one display information area (target display information area) specified by the address set in step D893 is cleared to zero.
In step D895, as in step D875, an undefined value (eg, “−1”) is saved as the behavior index value in the target display information area.
In Step D896, as in Step D877, the address of the motion table is obtained from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in Step D891).

  In Step D897, a moving image index corresponding to the command position k is acquired. Here, the moving image index is a registration number of a moving image character registered in the character ROM (image ROM 322), and is a parameter for designating a row of the moving image ROM member list table as shown in FIG. 164, for example. If the parameter of the object in the designated row of the target motion table (data set in the next column of the additional two codes) is, for example, the animation symbol “1”, in step D897, the table of FIG. In “”, “0” is acquired as the value of the moving image index designating the line corresponding to the animation symbol “1”.

  Next, in step D898, the encoding type (described later) data in the designated row of the moving image ROM member list table corresponding to the moving image index value acquired in step D897 is read, and the encoding of the moving image to be added based on this data is read. It is determined whether the type is an I picture moving image. If the type is an I picture moving image, the process proceeds to step D899. If the type is not an I picture moving image, the process proceeds to step D904. In the case of FIG. 164, since the encode type data is “0”, it is an I picture moving image. Therefore, when this data is “0”, the process proceeds to step D899, and when other than “0”, the process proceeds to step D904. Become. Note that the I picture means frame data of an image that can be decoded independently without performing inter-frame prediction, and the I picture moving picture means a moving picture composed of only I pictures.

Next, when the process proceeds to Step D899, Steps D899 to D901 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to Step D902.
In Step D899, the initial value “−1” is set as data of the frame count number for I picture in the target display information area (frame count at the time of moving picture of only I picture). If “−1” is set as the initial value, the frame count for I picture starts from “0”.
In step D900, I picture moving image information is saved as display type data in the target display information area. That is, here, information indicating that the object to be added is an I picture moving image is set.
In step D901, the moving image index value acquired in step D897 is saved as an image index.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step D904, steps D904 and D905 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step D906.
In step D904, a loop reproduction flag is set in order to instruct the VDP 312 to loop the moving image. In addition, the setting which does not loop is also possible.
In step D905, a moving image decoding area securing process for securing a storage area of the RAM 311a for decoding moving image data is executed.
In step D906, it is determined whether the area has been correctly allocated as a result of the video decoding area securing process. If YES, steps D907 and D908 are executed, and the process advances to step D902. If NO, the process returns. Note that if the area cannot be properly secured due to overcapacity or the like, the answer is NO.
In step D907, the normal moving image information is saved as display type data in the target display information area. That is, information indicating that the object to be added is a normal moving image (that is, not an I picture moving image) is set here.
In step D908, the index value of the area allocated by the moving image decoding area securing process is saved as an image index.

Next, when proceeding to Step D902, Steps D902 and D903 are executed in sequence and then the process returns.
In step D902, the command position is updated to the next record as in step D880.
In step D903, as in step D881, updating is performed to increase the value of the display number in the motion management area X by one.

The contents of each parameter of the moving image ROM member list table shown in FIG. 164 are as follows.
Movie address offset: Indicates an offset value to the address where the movie is stored in the character ROM.
-Width and height of the movie: Indicates the size of the original image of the movie. For example, the unit is pixel. As in the case of still images, the size of movies in the same category is adjusted with the transparent portion so as to be the same.
-Number of frames of moving image: Indicates how many continuous pictures the movie is composed of. In this embodiment, since 1 second = 30 frames of control, a movie is created in consideration of this. If the control is executed so as to be 60 frames per second, double speed reproduction is performed. The reverse is also true.

Α value setting: Information indicating whether the movie includes alpha channel information. 0 = no alpha, 1 = alpha present. If you have alpha, you can change the transparency of the movie. If not, it is only opaque.
-Encoding type: Indicates how the movie is structured. There are the following types 0-2.
0 = Configuration only with I picture 1 = Configuration including I picture and one reference P picture (P-picture is created by referring to one previous I-picture or P-picture)
2 = a configuration including two P reference pictures in addition to the above 1 (refer to two past I or P and two past I or P to create the P picture)
However, the encoding type is not limited to the above, and a configuration including a B picture, for example, may be used.
In addition, the category setting of the moving image ROM member list table described above is an example,
Other parameters may be set.

[One-point specified object movement processing]
Next, details of the one-point designated object moving process executed in step D857 in the above-described motion command execution process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D911 to D924 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
In step D911, as in step D871, the address of the motion list table is loaded.
In Step D912, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in Step D911).

In step D913, an object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D912. For example, FIG. 170 is the target motion table, and if k = 6 (the designated line is the 7th line), this command is executed because the command is a movement 1 code, but in this case, the 7th line Since the object index is (0), 0 is acquired as the object index in step D913.
In step D914, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D913 is set. For example, in FIG. 170, when k = 6 (the designated row is the seventh row), the object index 0 is the symbol “2” (next symbol) added in the first row, so the first index corresponding to the next symbol is displayed. The address of the display information area is set.

In step D915, X coordinate data corresponding to the command position k is acquired.
In step D916, the X coordinate acquired in step D915 is used as the X coordinate of the display upper left point and the X coordinate of the display lower left point in the target display information area (the display information area in which the address is set in step D914, hereinafter the same in this routine). Save the coordinate data.
In step D917, Y coordinate data corresponding to the command position k is acquired.
In step D918, the Y coordinate data acquired in step D917 is saved as the Y coordinate of the upper left display point and the Y coordinate of the upper right display point in the target display information area.

In step D919, image width data and image height data corresponding to the command position k are acquired.
In step D920, the image width data acquired in step D919 is added to the X coordinate data acquired in step D915, and in the next step D921, the addition result is saved as the X coordinate of the display upper right point in the target display information area. .
In step D922, the image height data acquired in step D919 is added to the Y coordinate data acquired in step D917. In the next step D923, the addition result is saved as the Y coordinate of the display lower left point in the target display information area. To do.
In step D924, the command position is updated to the next record as in step D880.

  According to the steps D915 to D923, the following operation is realized. For example, when k = 6 in FIG. 170 (the designated row is the seventh row), the X coordinate data is “0”, the Y coordinate data is “−493” (minus indicates a position outside the screen on the upper side of the screen), image The width data is “296” and the image height data is “490”. Therefore, “0” is acquired in step D915, “−493” is acquired in step D917, and “296” and “490” are acquired in step D919. The addition result in step D920 is “296” (= 0 + 296), and the addition result in step D922 is “−3” (= −493 + 490). Accordingly, in step D916, “0” is saved as the X coordinate of the upper left display point and the lower left display point, and “−493” is saved as the Y coordinate of the upper left display point and the upper right display point in step D918. Then, “296” is saved as the X coordinate of the display upper right point, and “−3” is saved as the Y coordinate of the display lower left point in step D923. As a result, the display position of the target object (in this case, the next symbol “2”) is set as three coordinates (display upper left point, display lower left point, display upper right point). In this case, the position of the upper left corner on the screen is the origin (X coordinate = 0, Y coordinate = 0), and all the Y coordinates set as described above are negative values. The display position is set outside the screen on the upper side of the screen, and the image of the next pattern is not yet visible on the screen.

As described above, according to this routine, although one point is designated, three points are designated as a result. This is because the object (character) has a quadrangular shape, so if there are the upper left reference point coordinates and the object height and width data, the upper right point and lower left point as in steps D920 and D922 above. This is because the coordinates are obtained. As described above, in the display information area in the motion management area, there are areas into which the coordinate values of the three points determined in this way are entered. In steps D916, D918, D921, and D923, registration in each area is performed. .
The three-point designated object moving process executed in step D858 in the motion command execution process described above will not be described in detail with reference to a flowchart, but this process is also substantially the same as the one-point designated object moving process described above. To be done. However, in the case of specifying 3 points, each coordinate data is on the motion table, so the addition processing as in steps D920 and D922 described above is unnecessary, and all the coordinate data acquired from the motion table are all intact. The processing contents are simply saved in each area of the display information area.

[Effect type specification processing]
Next, details of the effect type designation process executed in step D859 in the motion command execution process described above will be described with reference to the flowchart on the left side of FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D931 to D940 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
In step D931, as in step D871, the address of the motion list table is loaded.
In Step D932, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in Step D931).

In step D933, the object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D932. For example, FIG. 181 shows the target motion table, and if k = m + 5 (specified line is m + 6 line), this command is executed because the command is the effect 1 code. In this case, however, k = m + 5 Since the object index is (1), 1 is acquired as the object index in step D933.
In step D934, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D933 is set. For example, in the case of k = m + 5 in FIG. 181, the object index 1 is the character “Wolf” added by k = m + 2 (m + 3 line), so the display information area corresponding to this character “Wolf” An address is set.

In step D935, data of the effect type corresponding to the command position k is acquired.
In step D936, the data acquired in step D935 is saved as the effect type in the target display information area (the display information area to which the address is set in step D934, the same in this routine).
For example, in the case of k = m + 5 in FIG. 181, since the effect type is (1), this is acquired in step D935 and set in the target display information area in step D936.
Next, in steps D937, D938, and D939, the effect parameter, foreground color, and background color data in the target display information area are cleared.
In step D940, the command position is updated to the next record as in step D880.

  In this routine described above, for example, the type of blending method for displaying a plurality of objects in a superimposed manner is set. That is, for example, the effect type (1) is a kind of effect that imparts transparency (transparency), and the effect that imparts transparency is the same as the image of the rear (back side) layer that overlaps at the same display position. It can be said that it is a process of blending (blending) with the image of the layer. In this routine, the type of blending is set.

[Effect parameter specification processing]
Next, details of the effect parameter designation process executed in step D860 in the above-described motion command execution process will be described with reference to the flowchart on the right side of FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D941 to D947 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
In step D941, the address of the motion list table is loaded as in step D871.
In step D942, the address of the motion table is obtained from the designated row of the target motion list table (designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D941).

In step D943, an object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D942. For example, FIG. 181 shows a target motion table, and if k = m + 7 (specified line is m + 8 line), this command is executed because the command is the effect 2 code. In this case, however, k = m + 7 Since the object index is (1), 1 is acquired as the object index in step D943.
In step D944, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D943 is set. For example, in the case of k = m + 7 in FIG. 181, since the object index 1 is the character “wolf smoke” added at k = m + 2 (m + 3 line), the address of the display information area corresponding to this character “wolf smoke” is set. Is done.

In step D945, the effect parameter data corresponding to the command position k is acquired.
In step D946, the data acquired in step D945 is saved as an effect parameter in the target display information area (the display information area in which the address is set in step D944, the same in this routine).
For example, in the case of k = m + 7 in FIG. 181, since the effect parameter is (7), this is acquired in step D945 and set in the target display information area in step D946.

Here, the effect parameter indicates the ratio of the transparency (darkness) of the object when blending. Assuming that the value of the effect parameter is P, in this example, data obtained by converting the percentage of transparency into a numerator of “P / 255” is defined on the table. Specifically, for example, when 100% is normal display (no transparency), the parameter P for displaying at a density of about 10% is 25 (≈255 × 10/100). On the contrary, as in the above-described specific example, the transparency when the value of the parameter P is 7 is about 2.7% (= 100 × 7/255), which is quite thin. However, when the 100% display is performed, the effect type specifying process and the effect parameter specifying process which is the routine are not executed.
Next, in step D947, the command position is updated to the next record, as in step D880.

[Object deletion processing]
Next, details of the object deletion process executed in step D862 in the motion command execution process described above will be described with reference to the flowchart on the left side of FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step D951, as in step D871, the address of the motion list table is loaded.
Next, in step D952, it is determined whether the value of the display number in the motion management area X is 0 or less. If it is 0 or less, there is no display number (that is, there is no object to be deleted), and the process returns. If not, the process proceeds to step D953.
When the process proceeds to Step D953, Steps D953 to D955 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to Step D956.
In step D953, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D951).

In step D954, an object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D953. For example, FIG. 181 shows a target motion table, and if k = o + 1 (specified line is o + 2), this command is executed because the command is a deletion code. In this case, an object with k = o + 1 Since the index is (1), 1 is acquired as the object index in step D954.
In step D955, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D954 is set. For example, in the case of k = o + 1 in FIG. 181, since the object index is 1, the address of the display information area corresponding to the object index 1 is set at this time.

Proceeding to step D956, it is determined whether or not the display type data in the motion management area X is normal moving picture information. The process proceeds to D958, and if it is not normal moving image information (ie, if it is an I picture moving image), the process proceeds to Step D958 without executing Step D957.
When the process proceeds to Step D958, Steps D958 to D960 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
In step D958, the information in the display information area after the acquired object index is shifted (moved) forward. That is, in the motion management area X, the data in the display information area after the address set in step D955 is shifted to the previous display information area by one. As a result, the data in the display information area at the address set in step D955 is deleted, and the object corresponding to the deleted data is deleted.
In step D959, the command position is updated to the next record as in step D880.
In step D960, since the object is deleted by this routine, an update for reducing the value of the display number in the motion management area X by 1 is executed.

[Object change processing]
Next, details of the object change process executed in step D863 in the motion command execution process described above will be described with reference to the flowchart on the right side of FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D961 to D967 are sequentially executed, and then the process returns.
In step D961, the address of the motion list table is loaded as in step D871.
In step D962, the motion table address is obtained from the designated row of the target motion list table (the designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D961).
In step D963, the object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D962.

In step D964, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D963 is set.
In step D965, the index (the still image index or the moving image index described above) of the changed character (character after the change) corresponding to the command position k in the target motion table is acquired.
In step D966, the index value acquired in step D965 is saved as an image index. Thereby, the object change which changes only an image (characters, such as a symbol and a character) is implement | achieved.
In step D967, the command position is updated to the next record as in step D880.

[Object video decoding process]
Next, details of the object moving image decoding process executed in step D864 in the above-described motion command execution process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, steps D971 to D974 are sequentially executed, and thereafter, the process proceeds to step D975.
In step D971, the address of the motion list table is loaded as in step D871.
In step D972, the address of the motion table is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D971).

In step D973, the object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D972. For example, if the table at the bottom of FIG. 179 is the target motion table and k = 3 (the designated line is the fourth line), this command is executed because the command is a decode code. In this case, Since the object index of k = 3 is (0), 0 is acquired as the object index in step D973.
In step D974, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D973 is set. For example, in the table of FIG. 179, when k = 3, the object index 0 is the symbol “1” added at k = 0 (first line), so the display information area corresponding to this symbol “1” An address is set.

In step D975, it is determined whether the display type data in the motion management area X is I picture moving picture information. If it is I picture moving picture information, the process advances to step D979 after executing steps D977 and D978. If not, the process proceeds to Step D976.
In step D977, the address of the area of the frame count number for I picture (frame count for moving picture only of I picture) in the target display information area (the display information area in which the address is set in step D974, hereinafter the same in this routine) Set.
In step D978, based on the address set in step D977, updating is performed to increase the data of the I picture frame count in the target display information area by one.

In step D979, it is determined whether the I-picture frame count updated in step D978 is equal to or greater than the number of moving image frames (the number of moving image frames corresponding to the image index data at this time). If so, the process proceeds to step D983 after executing step D980, and if it is not greater than the number of moving image frames, the process proceeds to step D983 without executing step D980.
In step D980, since the moving image designated by the image index (in this case, the moving image index) has been displayed up to the last frame, the I picture frame count number in the target display information area is set to restart the moving image from the beginning. Set the data to 0 (start value).

In step D976, it is determined whether the display type data in the motion management area X is normal moving image information. If it is normal moving image information, the flow advances to step D983 after executing steps D981 and D982. Returns as abnormal.
In step D981, the data registered as the image index at this time (in this case, the moving image index data) is loaded.
In step D982, moving image decoding processing (details omitted) for decoding (decoding) one frame of moving images corresponding to the index loaded in step D981 is executed.
In step D983, the command position is updated to the next record as in step D880.
In the case of an I picture moving image, since the picture of each frame exists independently, the number of frames may be managed. When an instruction is given later to the internal register of the VDP 312, the count (I-picture frame count) becomes important.

[Behavior index setting process]
Next, details of the behavior index setting process executed in step D866 in the motion command execution process described above will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, steps D991 to D997 are first executed sequentially, and then the process returns.
In step D991, the address of the motion list table is loaded as in step D871.
In step D992, the motion table address is acquired from the designated row of the target motion list table (designated row of the motion list table designated by the address loaded in step D991). As shown in FIG. 165 as an example, the behavior table name corresponding to the address of the behavior table is also set in the designated row of the motion list table (however, it may be NULL).

In step D993, an object index corresponding to the command position k is acquired from the target motion table specified by the address acquired in step D992. For example, FIG. 181 shows the target motion table, and if k = 1 (the designated line is the second line), this routine is executed because the command is a behavior code. In this case, the object of k = 1 Since the index is (0), 0 is acquired as the object index in step D993.
In step D994, the address of the display information area (display information area in the motion management area X) corresponding to the object index acquired in step D993 is set. For example, in the case of k = 1 in FIG. 181, since the object index 0 is (rolling blue) added with k = 0 (first line), the address of the display information area corresponding to this (rolling blue) Is set.

In Step D995, behavior index data corresponding to the command position k is acquired.
In step D996, the data acquired in step D995 is saved as a behavior index in the target display information area (the display information area in which the address is set in step D994, hereinafter the same in this routine).
For example, when k = 1 in FIG. 181, the behavior index is (0), so this is acquired in step D995 and set in the target display information area in step D996.
In step D997, the command position is updated to the next record as in step D880.

  Note that the behavior table is a table (data table registered in the PROM 321) that includes a line in which a processing address of a behavior (character replacement) is set. Is the behavior index. Therefore, when the values of the behavior table and the behavior index are determined, the processing address of the behavior is determined and the contents of the behavior are specified. This routine performs control processing for designating the contents of such behavior. For example, in FIG. 181, the second line of k = 1 instructs the execution of the behavior (character replacement) specified by the behavior index 0 for the object (roller blue) of the object index 0. Accordingly, the target information display area is set. The behavior specified by the behavior index 0 is, for example, a control in which the color of the open scroll notice character (see FIG. 182) is changed from blue to red for the big hit reliability notification.

[Direction display editing process]
Next, details of the effect display editing process executed in step D31 in the above-described main process will be described with reference to FIGS. 151, 152, and 153. FIG. In the following, step E is used as the step number. As described in the main process, this effect display editing process is a process for setting various commands for instructing the VDP 312 to draw contents on the display device 41 and parameters thereof. In this effect display editing process, commands are set in a table form, and the commands set in this way are sequentially transmitted to the VDP 312 in step D34 (instructing screen drawing) of the main process.
When this routine is started, the loop processing A of steps E1 to E50 is repeatedly executed by the number of motion management areas, and then the process returns. The loop process A includes the loop process B of steps E6 to E48, and the loop process B includes the loop process C of steps E39 to E43.

In the loop process A, first, X = 0 and the process is executed from the step E2 for the motion management area X (ie, the motion management area 0 at the beginning). X = X + 1), it is determined whether or not the loop processing A has been completed for all motion management areas in the next step E50 (in this example, X = 14), and the determination result in step E50 is YES. If NO (that is, if the end condition of the loop process A is satisfied), the process returns. If NO, the loop process A is repeated from step E2.
Hereinafter, the process after step E2 is demonstrated.
In step E2, it is determined whether the data in the address area of the motion management area X is NULL. If NULL, no control is required for the motion management area X, so the process proceeds to step E49. If not NULL, steps E3 to E5 are sequentially performed. After the execution, go to Step E6. If it is determined as NULL (YES) in step E2 and the process proceeds to step E49, the following processes including the loop process B and the loop process C are naturally not executed for the motion management area X.

In step E3, the motion list table to be controlled this time is loaded and prepared.
In step E4, all blend information areas are cleared. The blend information area is an area in the RAM 311a that stores information on parameters of the internal register of the VDP 312 for comparison between old and new. In other words, the VDP 312 has four types of internal register parameters that indicate the inter-pixel calculation fixed value during blending for effects. An area for storing the current setting information and the previous setting information is provided in the RAM 311a for each of the four types of parameters, and this is a blend information area.
In step E5, inter-pixel calculation parameters (that is, four types of parameters set in the internal register of the VDP 312) are set.

  Next, when proceeding to Step E6, the loop process B is started. In the loop process B, steps E6 to E48 are repeatedly executed while increasing the variable i from the initial value 0 by an increment 1 until the final value (the final value = the number of displays−1), and then the process proceeds to step E49. That is, in step E6, immediately after the loop is started, the variable i is set to 0 and the process proceeds to step E7. In step E48, if the variable i is less than the closing price, the process returns to step E6, and if the variable i is greater than or equal to the closing price, the process proceeds to step E49. Then, when returning to step E6, the value of the variable i is increased by 1, and the process proceeds to step E7. Note that the closing price value is a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the display number data set in the motion management area X. That is, in this loop process B, steps E6 to E48 are repeatedly executed for this number of displays, and then the process proceeds to step E49.

Hereinafter, the process after step E7 is demonstrated.
When the process proceeds to step E7, steps E7 to E9 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step E10.
In step E7, the color parameter of the internal register of the VDP 312 is set corresponding to the α value.
In step E8, an α flag used for processing to be described later is set to α.
In step E9, the address of the display information area (hereinafter referred to as the target display information area) corresponding to the variable i in the motion management area X is loaded.
Next, when proceeding to Step E10, the value of the behavior index in the display information area of the address loaded at Step E9 is read to determine whether any index data other than NULL is set, and some behavior index data is set. If YES (YES), the process corresponding to the behavior index is executed in step E11, and then the process proceeds to step E12. If NO, the process proceeds to step E12 without executing step E11.

Note that the process corresponding to the behavior index executed in step E11 is to execute the behavior (replacement of image data) specified by the behavior index for the object (target object) corresponding to the target display information area. This processing is specified by the processing address set in the row specified by the behavior index in the behavior table described above.
For example, when the target object is the current symbol of the left symbol, the processing of the flowchart shown on the left side of FIG. 155 (display left symbol conversion processing) described later is executed in step E11. In the present application, a specific example of the process executed in step E11 is also shown in the right side of FIG. 155 and FIG. 156, and these details will be described later.
When step E11 is executed, the image index data is changed immediately before display, for example, the basic symbol is replaced with a predetermined symbol to be displayed, or the color of the push button (PB) image is changed from the basic color. It may be replaced with a predetermined color (for example, a specific color representing the big hit reliability) according to the gaming state. Since the display pattern of the character defined on the motion table is fixed, basically, unless the motion table is changed, it is not possible to cope with different stop symbols for each change or different notice characters due to distribution. . Therefore, in this example, a behavior can be flexibly handled by embedding a behavior in a necessary part and replacing the character.

  In step E12, the data of the effect type set in the target display information area is read, and it is determined in steps E12, E13, and E14 whether this is a basic blend, an addition blend, or a subtraction blend. If the blend type does not correspond to any blend type, the process proceeds to step E15, and if it does not correspond to any blend type, steps E15 to E18 are skipped and the process proceeds to step E21.

In step E15, the effect parameter value set in the target display information area is loaded and applied to the color parameter, and then the process proceeds to step E16.
When the process proceeds to step E16, it is determined from the data such as the display type set in the target display information area whether the rendering designation is normal video non-transmission reproduction. If YES, the process proceeds to step E17. If NO, the process proceeds to step E17. Proceed to E21.
Proceeding to step E17, it is determined whether the target moving image (the one determined to be playback without transmission of the normal moving image at step E16) is registered without α. If YES, the α flag is set to α without α at step E18. Set and proceed to step E21. If NO, proceed to step E21 without executing step E18.

Next, when proceeding to Step E21, the data of the effect type set in the target display information area is read, and whether this is addition blend, subtraction blend, multiplication blend, screen blend, difference blend, comparison (darkness). ) Whether blending or inversion blending is determined in steps E21 to E27, respectively, and if corresponding to any blend type, the corresponding process (corresponding process among steps E31 to E37) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step E39 If it does not correspond to any blend type, the process proceeds to Step E28.
Here, step E31 is a process executed in the case of addition blending (a process of setting an addition type drawing effect), and step E32 is a process executed in the case of subtraction blending (setting a subtraction type drawing effect). Step E33 is a process executed in the case of multiplication blending (a process for setting a multiplication type drawing effect), and step E34 is a process executed in the case of screen blending (a screen type drawing effect). Step E35 is a process executed in the case of difference blending (a process of setting a difference type drawing effect), and step E36 is a process executed in the case of comparison (dark) blending (comparison). Step E37 is a process for setting a (dark) type drawing effect. Is a process executed when a command (processing for setting the drawing effect of inverting type).

Next, in step E28, it is determined whether the α flag is set to α. If α is absent, a drawing effect without α is set in step E29, and the flow proceeds to step E39. In the case of α), a drawing effect of α type is set in step E38, and the process proceeds to step E39.
In step E29 and steps E31 to E38, various parameters for blending (four types in this example) are set in the corresponding blend information area in accordance with the setting of the effect type and the like of the target information display area. Yes.

Next, when proceeding to Step E39, the loop processing C is started. In the loop process C, steps E39 to E43 are repeatedly executed until the variable j corresponding to the above-described four types of blend information areas is increased from the initial value 0 by 1 to the final value (final value = 3). Proceed to E44.
That is, in step E39, immediately after the start of the loop, the variable j is set to 0 and the process proceeds to step E40.
In step E40, it is determined whether or not the blend information area corresponding to the variable j has been changed. If the blend information area has been changed, steps E41 and E42 are sequentially executed, and the process proceeds to step E43. Proceed to step E43 without executing E42. Here, the determination in step E40 is performed by determining that the previous data and the current data in the corresponding blend information area have been changed if they do not match, and by determining that they have not been changed if they match.
In step E41, the inter-pixel calculation fixed value of the registration parameter corresponding to the variable j is set in the internal register of the VDP 312. In step E42, the current blend information is set as the previous blend information.

In step E43, if the variable j is less than the closing price, the process returns to step E39. If the variable j is the closing price, the loop process C is exited and the process proceeds to step E44. Then, when returning to step E39, the value of the variable j is increased by 1, and the process proceeds to step E40.
The reason why there are four ranges of the variable j is that, as described above, the VDP 312 has four types of internal register parameters that indicate the inter-pixel calculation fixed value at the time of blending. In addition, the area corresponding to each register (blend information area) is provided for the previous time and this time, and the setting process of step E41 is performed only when the old and new data in this blend information area are compared and matched. This is because the value is set in the register of the VDP 312 only when the value to be changed changes (to make the setting process to the VDP more efficient).

Next, when proceeding to Step E44, the display type (display type) data set in the target display information area is read, and it is determined whether this is a still picture, a normal moving picture, an I picture moving picture or a monochromatic square. Each determination is made in E44 to 47, and corresponding processing (corresponding processing among steps E51 and E52, steps E53 and E54, or steps E55 to E57) is executed if any of the display types excluding the single color rectangle is applicable. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step E58, and if it is a monochromatic square, the process proceeds to step E59, and if it does not correspond to any display type, the process proceeds to step E48.
Here, steps E51 and E52 are executed in the case of a still image. In step E51, image index data is loaded. In step E52, attributes of still image data are set based on the loaded image index data. Execute the process. After step E52, the process proceeds to step E58, and a character drawing process (described later) is executed based on the data loaded in step E51 and the setting in step E52.

Steps E53 and E54 are executed for a normal moving image. In step E53, image index data is loaded. In step E54, attributes of normal moving image data are set based on the loaded image index data. Execute the process. After step E54, the process proceeds to step E58, and a character drawing process (described later) is executed based on the data loaded in step E53 and the setting in step E54.
Steps E55 to E57 are executed in the case of an I picture moving image. In step E55, image index data is loaded. In step E56, an I picture frame count is read from the target display information area. In step E57, processing such as setting the attributes of I picture moving image data is executed based on the loaded data. After step E57, the process proceeds to step E58, and a character drawing process (described later) is executed based on the data loaded in steps E55 and E56 and the setting in step E57.
Step E59 is executed in the case of a single-color quadrangle, and a process of drawing a rectangular image (single-color quadrangle image) in the virtual drawing space (frame buffer) of the VDP 312 (that is, pasting the sprite of the rectangular image into the virtual drawing space) Processing).
Note that after step E58 or step E59, the process proceeds to step E48.

Next, when proceeding to Step E48, it is determined whether or not the variable i of the loop process B has reached the final value (the number of displays −1). If so, the process exits the loop process B and proceeds to Step E49. If not, the process returns to step E6 and loop processing B is repeated.
Then, when the process proceeds to step E49, an update for increasing the target motion management area number X by 1 is executed, and then in step E50, it is determined whether X has reached the final value of loop processing A (14 in this example). If so, return from loop process A, and if not, return to step E1 and repeat loop process A from step E2.

  In the step of setting the attributes of steps E52, E54, and E57, the process of transferring the character data (still image data or moving image data) from the character ROM (image ROM 322) to the VRAM 312a (606, 607) is also performed at the same time. . However, if the same VRAM already exists, this data transfer is not performed. In the case of a single-color square, the character ROM data is not used, so this data transfer is not necessary. Here, the attribute is basic information of the character, and includes, for example, an α mode, a color mode (how many colors are displayed), a character size, a color palette designation, and the like.

[Character drawing process]
Next, the details of the character drawing process executed in step E58 in the above-described effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step E61, the X coordinate of the display upper left point and the X coordinate of the lower left display point are obtained from the target display information area (display information area corresponding to the variable i) in the motion management area X. It is read to determine whether or not they match. If they match, the process proceeds to step E62, and if they do not match, the process proceeds to step E77.
In step E62, the Y coordinate of the display upper left point and the Y coordinate of the display upper right point are read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and it is determined whether or not they match. If not, the process proceeds to step E77.
If the image is a quadrilateral (rectangular) image, the determination result in steps E61 and E62 is YES and the process proceeds to step E63. If the image is a triangle character (triangle image), either determination is NO. Then, the process proceeds to Step E77.
In step E77, a triangle character drawing process (not described) is executed and the process returns.

Next, when the process proceeds to Step E63, Steps E63 to E67 are sequentially executed and then the process proceeds to Step E68.
In step E63, the X coordinate data of the display upper left point is read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and this is set as the upper left base point X coordinate of the character.
In step E64, the Y coordinate data of the display upper left point is read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and this is set as the upper left base point Y coordinate of the character.
In step E65, the X coordinate of the display upper right point and the X coordinate of the display upper left point are read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and the difference between these (= X coordinate of the upper right display point−X of the upper left display point) Coordinate) is set as character width data.

In step E66, the data of the Y coordinate of the lower left display point and the Y coordinate of the upper left display point are read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and the difference between them (= the Y coordinate of the lower left display point−the Y upper display point Y). Coordinate) is set as the height data of the character.
In step E67, no horizontal flip (inversion in the horizontal direction) and no vertical flip are set. Here, horizontal flip means image inversion in the horizontal direction (X coordinate direction), and vertical flip means image inversion in the vertical direction (Y coordinate direction).

In step E68, it is determined whether the width data set in step E65 is less than 0 (that is, a negative value). If it is less than 0, there is a horizontal flip, so steps E69 to E71 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step E72. If it is not less than 0, there is no horizontal flip, so the process proceeds to step E72 without executing steps E69 to E71.
In step E69, the X coordinate data of the display upper left point is read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and the addition result obtained by adding the width data (minus value) set in step E65 to the upper left base point X of the character. Update setting as coordinates.
In step E70, the width data (minus value) set in step E65 is converted to a positive number, and this is updated and set as new width data.
In step E71, the presence of horizontal flip is set (the setting in step E67 is changed).

In step E72, it is determined whether the height data set in step E66 is less than 0 (that is, a negative value). If it is less than 0, there is a vertical flip, so steps E73 to E75 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step E76. If it is not less than 0, there is no vertical flip, so the process proceeds to step E76 without executing steps E73 to E75.
In step E73, the Y coordinate data of the display upper left point is read from the target display information area in the motion management area X, and the addition result obtained by adding the height data (minus value) set in step E66 to this is obtained as the upper left base point of the character. Update setting as Y coordinate.
In step E74, the height data (minus value) set in step E66 is converted into a positive number, and this is updated and set as new height data.
In step E75, the presence of vertical flip is set (the setting in step E67 is changed).
Then, when proceeding to step E76, an image of a predetermined character corresponding to the data of the image index loaded in any one of the steps E51, E53, E55 based on the setting by the processing so far (steps E63 to E75). Is executed in the virtual drawing space (frame buffer) of the VDP 312 (that is, processing for pasting a sprite of a predetermined character into the virtual drawing space), and then the process returns.

[Display left symbol conversion process]
Next, details of the display left symbol conversion process executed in step E11 in the effect display editing process will be described with reference to the flowchart on the left side of FIG.
When this routine is started, steps E81 to E83 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step E84.
In step E81, image index data (data before replacement by behavior) is loaded.
In step E82, the data of the index (symbol number) of the current symbol (left) to be displayed (for example, the data set in step D727 or D747 described above) is loaded. In the case of this example, since there are nine types of symbols, the index (symbol number) data of the symbols (decorative symbols of special symbols) is any numerical value from 0 to 8.

  In step E83, the index data of the current symbol (left) loaded in step E82 is added to the index data of the current symbol (left) set in the image index loaded in step E81, and the addition result is updated. Set as an index. For example, when the value of the image index before replacement (conversion) loaded in step E81 is 0, and the index data of the current symbol (left) to be replaced loaded in step E82 is 6, In step E83, 6 (= 0 + 6) is set as the update index value.

Next, when proceeding to step E84, it is determined whether or not the update index data set at step E83 exceeds the symbol upper limit (8 in this example). If not, the process proceeds to Step E86 without executing Step E85.

In step E85, a value obtained by adding 1 to the symbol upper limit (9 in this example) is subtracted from the update index value, and this subtraction result is set as a new update index value. According to these steps E84 and E85, when the value of the update index exceeds the symbol upper limit, the value of the update index is updated to a value that makes a round.

In step E86, the left symbol index conversion table is set, and the flow advances to step E87. The left symbol index conversion table is a table in which a row is designated by the update index, and the value of the image symbol of the left symbol to be displayed in the designated row is set.
In step E87, a new image index value is acquired from the row specified by the update index in the left symbol index conversion table set in step E86, and the process proceeds to step E88.
In step E88, the value acquired in step E87 is saved in the image index area (area for saving the image index) as a new image index value, and then the process returns.
In addition, although the display left symbol conversion process was demonstrated above, there exists the same process also about a right symbol and a middle symbol (details are abbreviate | omitted).

[PB color conversion processing]
Next, details of the PB color conversion process executed in step E11 in the effect display editing process described above will be described with reference to the flowchart on the upper right side of FIG.
When this routine is started, the process returns after executing steps E91 to E94 sequentially.
In step E91, the distribution result is loaded from the PB color area of the effect distribution result area.
In step E92, a PB index conversion table is set, and the process proceeds to step E93. The PB index conversion table is a table in which a row is designated by the distribution result saved in the PB color area, and an image index value of a PB (push button) image to be displayed in the designated row is set. .

In step E93, a new image index value (PB index value) is acquired from the row specified by the distribution result in the PB index conversion table set in step E92, and the process proceeds to step E94.
In step E94, the value acquired in step E93 is saved in the image index area as a new image index value, and then the process returns.
In addition, as the motion control data (especially image index data) for the push button notice, only the button character that becomes the default color is registered. This routine (PB color conversion process) is executed. Not only this notice but also a process of converting (replacing) an appearing warrior character by behavior.

[Reach character conversion processing]
Next, details of the reach character conversion process executed in step E11 in the effect display editing process described above will be described with reference to the flowchart on the lower right side of FIG.
When this routine is started, steps E101 to E103 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step E104.
In step E101, the distribution result is loaded from the reach character area of the effect distribution result area.
In step E102, a reach character index conversion table is set, and the process proceeds to step E103. The reach character index conversion table is a table in which a row is designated by the sorting result saved in the reach character area, and an image index value of a reach character image to be displayed on the designated row is set.
In step E103, a new image index value (reach character index value) is acquired from the row specified by the distribution result in the reach character index conversion table set in step E102.

In step E104, it is determined whether the reach character index obtained in step E103 is a value indicating "no character". If YES, the character (image) size of the reach character is set to 0 in step E105. Return later, and if NO, return without executing step E105.
In this example, the reach characters such as “reach!”, “Fighter”, and “win” that are displayed at the moment when the reach occurs are also displayed as default characters in the motion control data (especially image index data). If necessary, change the character or change the color of each character, etc. just before the display by behavior.
In the reach character conversion processing described above, for example, when the reliability of the jackpot notice changes with low reliability, the character size is set to 0 in step E105, so that the reach character exists for control but is actually visible. There is no control. However, the method of not displaying may not be limited to this configuration, for example, a configuration that does not display reach characters.

[Bushou 1 serif conversion process]
Next, details of the warrior 1-line conversion process executed in step E11 in the above-described effect display editing process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step E111, the distribution result is loaded from the line SU area of the effect distribution result area.
Next, in step E112, based on the distribution result loaded in step E111, it is determined whether the line SU is SU1 system (one that is not SU2 system or SU3 system). If NO, the process proceeds to step E113.
In step E117, the distribution result is loaded from the dialogue 1 area of the effect distribution result area, and in the next step E118, the military commander 1SU1 serif index conversion table is set. The warrior 1 SU1 serif index conversion table is a table in which a row is specified by the sorting result saved in the serif 1 area, and the image index value of the serif image to be displayed in the specified row is set.

Next, when proceeding to Step E113, it is determined whether or not the line SU is SU2 system (SU2 system has only one character appearing) based on the distribution result loaded at Step E111. If NO, the process proceeds to step E114.
In step E119, the distribution result is loaded from the dialogue 2 area of the effect distribution result area, and in the next step E120, the military commander 1SU2 serif index conversion table is set. The warrior 1 SU2 serif index conversion table is a table in which a row is designated by the sorting result saved in the serif 2 area, and the image index value of the serif image to be displayed in the designated row is set.

Next, when proceeding to Step E114, it is determined whether or not the line SU is SU3 type (SU3 type has two characters appearing) based on the distribution result loaded at Step E111. If YES, Steps E121 and E122 are executed sequentially. The process proceeds to E115, and if NO, the process proceeds to Step E115.
In step E121, the distribution result is loaded from the line 3 area of the effect distribution result area, and in the next step E122, the military commander 1 SU3 line index conversion table is set. The warrior 1 SU3 serif index conversion table is a table in which a row is designated by the sorting result saved in the serif 3 area, and the image index value of the serif image to be displayed in the designated row is set.

Next, when proceeding to step E115, a new line is specified from the line specified by the loaded distribution result in the serif index conversion table set in the immediately preceding step (any one of step E118, step E120, step E122, etc.). The value of the image index (the value of the serif index) is acquired, and the process proceeds to step E116.
In step E116, the value acquired in step E115 is saved in the image index area (bitmap index area) as a new image index value, and then the process returns.
Note that there may be a type other than the SU1 system, the SU2 system, and the SU3 system as the type of the line SU, and in that case, a processing step corresponding to a portion omitted by the broken line in FIG. 156 is provided.

[VDP interrupt processing]
Next, the VDP interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 6, in the production control device 300, the CPU 311 receives interrupt signals INT0 to INT0 from the VDP 312 which is an interrupt factor, and the CPU 311 receives a plurality of (maximum) interrupt signals INT0 to n based on the interrupt signals INT0 to n. 2 n power interrupts (hereinafter referred to as “VDP interrupts”) can be accepted. In this example, the VDP interrupt includes a V blank start interrupt, a V line start interrupt, a drawing command INT interrupt, a drawing error interrupt, a drawing end interrupt, a data transfer 1 completion interrupt, a data transfer 2 completion interrupt, and a data transfer 3 completion. Interrupt, checksum end interrupt, compression decompression event interrupt, serial command interrupt.
This routine (VDP interrupt processing) is started when at least one of the plurality of VDP interrupts occurs. When at least one of the plurality of VDP interrupts is generated, the ON data of the interrupt flag indicating the occurrence of the interrupt is set in the register of the CPU 311.
When this routine is started, the process returns after sequentially executing steps E131 to E144.

In step E131, the status of each interrupt factor (information on whether or not the plurality of VDP interrupts are generated) is obtained by reading the interrupt signals INT0 to INT0. This status information is set in the interrupt register of the VDP 312.
In step E132, since the status is read in step E131, each interrupt factor is cleared. That is, the setting is made to return all the status data (interrupt register data of the VDP 312) to the values without interrupts. As shown in FIG. 6, the CPU 311 and the VDP 312 are capable of bidirectional communication, and the setting of step E132 is performed by this communication.
In steps E133 to E143, processing for each interrupt (processing such as determining the presence or absence of an interrupt and setting a flag) is executed based on the status acquired in step E131.
In step E144, the interrupt flag is cleared. That is, the off data of the interrupt flag is set in the register of the CPU 311.

Although the production control device 300 has a function of monitoring various interrupts of the VDP 312 as described above, not all of them are used.
The conditions for generating each interrupt are as follows.
• V blank start interrupt; an interrupt is generated at the start of the V blank period.
V line start interrupt: An interrupt occurs at the start of the display line specified by the user.
• Drawing command INT interrupt: Occurs when drawing command analysis is interrupted.
・ Drawing error interrupt: Occurs when the drawing circuit becomes abnormal.
・ Drawing end interrupt; occurs when drawing is finished.
-Data transfer 1 to 3 completion interrupt; Occurs when data transfer between each memory is completed.
The data transfer can be performed between the image ROM 322, the CPU 311 (data in the RAM 311a or data in the control ROM 321), VRAM (1) 606, VRAM (2) 607, and the like. Since the three sets of data transfer 1 to 3 are independent of each other, they can be transferred at the same time. However, priority is set in the order of 1>2> 3, and waiting occurs when the transfer destination is the same. .
Checksum end interrupt: There is a function for automatically calculating the checksum of the image ROM 322 (in response to an instruction from the CPU 311), and occurs at the end of the calculation.
Regarding the checksum calculation, it is possible to specify parameters such as an address to start calculation, an end address, and a unit to be calculated (for example, 32-bit unit / 64-bit unit).
-Compression / decompression event interrupt: Occurs when decoding of one frame of a moving image is completed or when a decoding error occurs.
Serial command interrupt; for example, when a sound command LSI connected to the serial interface is instructed by a serial command and the execution is completed.

[V blank start interrupt processing]
Next, the V blank start interrupt process executed in step E133 in the VDP interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. Note that a V blank start interrupt (also referred to as a V blank interrupt or a V sync interrupt) is generated every time scanning of the entire screen for drawing is completed by the VDP 312. The generation period of this V blank start interrupt is, for example, 1/60 seconds as described above.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step E151 whether or not a V blank start interrupt has occurred based on the status acquired in step E131 described above. If it has occurred, the process proceeds to step E152 and occurs. If not, the process returns without executing step E152 and subsequent steps.
When the process proceeds to step E152, an update for increasing the value of the V blank count by 1 is executed, and then the process proceeds to step E153. The V blank count is a counter for executing the same drawing a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, twice). The frame switching timing described in step D33 in the main process described above is a point in time when the V blank count reaches a predetermined value (2 in this embodiment) in principle. In other words, in this example, the value of the V blank count is normal except for the moment when the V blank count instantaneously becomes 2 (the moment until it becomes 2 after the update of step E152 and is cleared to 0 at step E155). For example, 0⇔1 is repeated alternately, and as a result, the frame is switched every two V blank interrupts. Since the V blank interrupt is generated every 1/60 seconds, the frame is switched every 1/30 seconds (33.333 ms).

  In step E153, it is determined whether or not the execution result of the compression / decompression is an error. If there is an error, the process returns without executing the processes in and after step E154. Here, the execution result of the compression / decompression means a result of whether or not the process of expanding the compressed movie data is successful. The determination value indicating the compression / decompression execution result is set in the compression / decompression event interrupt process in step E142, and the determination in step E153 is executed based on the determination value. If the movie development fails due to the processing time being over due to the presence of step E153, frame switching is not executed even if the V blank count reaches a predetermined value, and the same drawing is repeated.

  Proceeding to step E154, it is determined whether or not the value of the V blank count is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (in this example, whether or not it is greater than 1). If it is greater than or equal to the predetermined value (if greater than 1), steps E155 to E158 are performed. Are sequentially executed, and if not greater than a predetermined value (if not greater than 1), the process returns without executing step E155 and subsequent steps. This step E154 substantially determines whether or not the frame switching timing has come. In this example, if the same drawing is executed twice as described above, this frame switching timing is in principle (that is, if the compression / decompression execution result is not an error). However, it is not limited to twice, and may be three or more times.

Steps E155 to E158 are processing for frame switching for switching the drawing contents. In step E155, the aforementioned V blank count is cleared to 0. In step E156, the on data of the frame switching flag is set. In step E157, the frame buffer is switched. In step E158, the corresponding frame buffer (switched frame buffer) screen is displayed. Allow display (display data generation).
Here, the frame switching flag set in step E156 is used in step D33 in the main process described above. That is, in step D33 described above, it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the ON data of the frame switching flag is set. In step E158, the display circuit 608 accesses the VRAM (1) 606 and permits display data to be generated.

The frame buffer corresponds to the virtual drawing space described in steps E59 and E76, and is a buffer configured by the VRAM (1) 606 in the VDP 312. In this embodiment, the frame buffer has a frame buffer number of 0 and a frame buffer number of 1. In this embodiment, for example, if the display frame buffer is number 0, the number 1 frame buffer is used for drawing work and is alternately used for display. In step E157, a process of switching the display frame buffer to the next one (in this example, a process of switching from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0) is executed. In step E158, display data generation in the display frame buffer switched in step E157 is permitted.
According to the V blank start interrupt processing described above, unless the compression / decompression error occurs, the same drawing is repeated a predetermined number of times, and frame switching is performed when the V blank start interrupt occurs a predetermined number of times. In the case of the present embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and the V blank start interrupt is generated twice, frame switching is performed, and the cycle of the frame switching timing is the cycle of the V blank start interrupt (for example, 1/60 seconds). This is doubled (for example, 1/30 seconds≈33.33 ms).

[Packet configuration example for inter-sub communication]
Next, a packet configuration example of inter-sub communication will be described with reference to FIG.
The packet configuration of inter-sub-communication in this example is a data configuration as shown in the upper table of the figure. A description of each data is given at the bottom of the figure. That is, 1-byte data is No. 1 to No. The total capacity (capacity of one packet) is 12 bytes.

No. 1 is data (for example, 02H) of a packet start code (STX) indicating the packet head.
No. 2 is the packet size, that is, the data of the number of inter-sub-transmission data (SIZE) (in this case, data indicating 12 bytes).
No. Reference numeral 3 denotes data of a transmission source ID (SID) (terminal ID and group ID).
No. Reference numeral 4 denotes transmission destination ID (DID) data (terminal ID and group ID). Note that, in the data of the transmission source ID (SID) and the transmission destination ID (DID), the upper bit of one byte is the group ID, and the lower bit is the terminal ID (and broadcast). Here, the range of the terminal ID is, for example, a range of 00 to 0E in hexadecimal, and when the lower bit data is 0F, the terminal ID is handled as the data of the broadcast code.

No. Reference numeral 5 denotes inter-sub-maker code (MAKER) data.
No. 6 is the data of the year code (YEAR) (for example, the last two digits of the year).
No. Reference numeral 7 denotes inter-sub-model code (TYPE) data.
No. 8 is the data of the inter-subcommand MODE (SB_MODE).
No. 9 is data of the inter-sub command ACT (SB_ACT).
No. Reference numeral 10 denotes STS data representing the game state of the player.
No. Reference numeral 11 denotes a checksum of data from STX to STS.
No. 12 is data (for example, 03H) of a packet end code (ETX) indicating the end of the packet.
The inter-sub-communication packet configuration example described above is merely an example, and there may be various modes. For example, the data may not have a 1-byte configuration (for example, the model code has a plurality of bytes), and the sending order is not limited to the above configuration example. In addition, there may be data having other meanings, and conversely, the number of data may be smaller than in the above configuration example. Further, for example, a “maker code” may be brought second in the transmission order. In this mode, commands from other manufacturers' gaming machines can be discarded efficiently, or conversely, in order to collaborate with other manufacturers, branching to the corresponding reception process (other manufacturer's command reception process) allows efficient processing. Can be. Here, the other manufacturer command reception process is a process for receiving a command corresponding to the command form of another manufacturer when the command form is different for each manufacturer.

[Specific example of effect control data table and effect display]
Next, a specific example of a data table used in the control of the effect control device 300 described above and a specific example of effect display performed on the display unit 41a (screen) of the display device 41 by the same control are shown in FIGS. 182.
FIG. 160 is a specific example of the ACTION check table and the coincidence check table, and has already been described in steps D62 and D94.
Next, FIG. 161 shows a loss-time ACT matching check address table and an ACT matching check table, which have already been described in step D124 of the variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process.

Next, FIG. 162 is a specific example of the general pattern table, which has already been described in the step D365 and the like of the variation pattern classification process.
Next, FIG. 163 is a specific example of the still image ROM member list table, which has already been described in step D878 and the like of the bitmap addition process.
Next, FIG. 164 shows a specific example of the moving image ROM member list table, which has already been described in step D897 of the moving image adding process.

Next, FIG. 165 is a specific example of the motion list table, which has already been described in step D294 and the like of the variation effect setting process.
Next, FIGS. 166 and 167 are specific examples of the notice allocation table, and have already been described in the step D272 of the variation effect setting process, the step D371 of the random number lottery process A, and the like.
Next, FIG. 168 is a specific example of the symbol variation list table, which has already been described in step D315 and the like of the reachless variation setting process.
Next, FIG. 169 is a specific example of the scenario table (at the time of special fluctuation in FIG. 1), and has already been described in step D586 of the scenario analysis process.

Next, FIG. 170 is a specific example of the motion table (at the time of starting the left symbol normal variation), and has already been described in step D823 and the like of the motion command execution process.
Next, FIG. 171 is an example of the display result by the motion table shown in FIG.
As shown in this figure, since the upper left corner of the display screen 41a is the origin (X coordinate = 0, Y coordinate = 0) and the vertical direction is the Y axis direction, the lower left corner of the display screen 41a is the X coordinate. = 0 and Y coordinate = 767. Further, since the left and right direction in the display screen 41a is the X-axis direction, the upper right corner of the display screen 41a is X coordinate = 1023 and Y coordinate = 0, and the lower right corner of the display screen 41a is X coordinate = 1023 and Y Coordinates = 767. In addition, the specific numerical value of such a coordinate is only an example.

  FIG. 171 (a) corresponds to the first frame (a) of the motion table. The symbol “2” including the image of the tiger character is the next symbol (object index 0), the symbol “1” is the current symbol (object index 1), and the symbol “9” is the symbol (object index 2). These objects are additionally registered in the first to sixth lines of the motion table, and the behavior is set. In addition, the display position and size of these objects are set in the seventh to ninth lines of the motion table, respectively, whereby the display shown in FIG. 171 (a) is performed. However, the next symbol is not actually visible as it is entirely outside the screen, and only a part of the previous symbol is visible.

  FIG. 171 (b) corresponds to the second frame (b) of the motion table. The design and behavior of each object remain the same as the first frame (a), and the display position and size of these objects are set in the 11th to 13th lines of the motion table. The display shown in (b) is performed. In this case, the values of the Y coordinate are all changed by -8 from the first frame (a) (for example, the current symbol of the object index 1 is changed from the Y coordinate value of 7 to -1). The symbol has moved slightly upward on the display screen 41a. This is a part of the movement of once hopping in the operation of scrolling (fluctuating) downward after each symbol once hops (slightly rises) at the start of fluctuation. In the third and fourth frames (c) and (d) of the motion table (FIG. 170), the Y coordinate is sequentially changed by −8.

Next, the upper side of FIG. 172 shows the state of the initial position of each symbol (the state at the top except for the hopping operation described above), which is the same display as in FIG.
Further, the lower side of FIG. 172 shows a state in which each symbol is scrolled to the bottom of the moving range.
The movement (scrolling) of the display position as a variable display of each symbol is performed within the range of the two states described above.
For example, when the current symbol comes to the bottom of the movement range, the next value is returned to the initial value of the movement range with the symbol number updated (+1). In this example, three symbols (when considering not the symbol number but the current symbol / previous symbol / next symbol) are only moving repeatedly within each narrow effective range. Since the symbol number is incremented by 1 when returning to the top (that is, for example, the symbol “1” is switched to the symbol “2”), it appears that the same symbol is scrolling from the upper part of the screen to the lower part of the screen.

When the y-coordinate fluctuates at a rate of adding by 100, the current symbol is fluctuated and controlled by the values of 7 → 107 → 207 → 307 → 407 → 7 → 107 →. The symbol number displayed when it becomes 7 is incremented by one. The same applies to the previous symbol and the next symbol of the left symbol, and the same applies to the current symbol, the previous symbol, and the next symbol of the middle symbol and the right symbol.
As an advantage of this method, it is easy to determine how many symbol numbers are currently the center of control. In the example of FIG. 172, it is relatively possible to calculate that the symbol number “1” is the center, the previous symbol is “9” immediately before it, and the next symbol is “2” after it. When the coordinates return to the top, the control symbol can be narrowed down to one, such as “2” as the central symbol, so that the structure can be simplified.
This is not a method of dividing the current symbol, the previous symbol, and the next symbol, but if the same symbol is moved from top to bottom, each will exist as three independent symbols. However, in this example, such a problem can be solved.
The above-mentioned range division is a case of normal fluctuation. This is not the case during reach (during reach action), as the position of the symbol changes in various ways. However, the concept of classification of the current symbol, previous symbol, next symbol, etc. remains even during reach.

Next, FIG. 173 is an example of a motion table at the time of special figure 1 4th symbol fluctuation. The first frame is the first frame from the first line to the eleventh line. In the first to third lines, the fourth symbol “blue” is set as the object index 0, the fourth symbol “blue” is set as the object index 1, The fourth symbol “white” is registered as the object index 2 respectively. Next, in the fourth line, the object index 2 is replaced with the behavior index 0, and in the fifth line, the fourth symbol “white” is registered as the object index 3, and in the sixth line, the object index 3 is replaced with the behavior index 0. The display positions of the four objects with the object indexes 0 to 3 are set in the 7th to 10th lines, and the setting for one frame is ended with the end code in the 11th line.
Here, among the four objects, the objects with the object index 0 and the object index 1 are images of the fourth symbol in FIG. 1 indicated by reference numerals TZ10 and TZ11 in FIG. 174 described later. In addition, the objects of the object index 2 and the object index 3 are images of the fourth symbol in FIG.

Next, FIG. 174 is a diagram showing a display example of the fourth symbol.
In the upper part of FIG. 174, a state (a) in which the stop mode “2, 4, 1” is first displayed on the screen 41a as a special design (left, middle, and right), and thereafter, from this stop mode. The state (b) in which the fluctuation has started (the next symbol is “3, 5, 2”) is shown vertically. In any state, the fourth symbol images TZ10, TZ11, TZ20, and TZ21 are displayed in the lower left portion of the screen 41a. The images TZ10, TZ11, TZ20, and TZ21 in the fourth pattern are rhombus images in the case of this example, and the two vertical images TZ10 and TZ11 on the left side are the fourth pattern in FIG. Two images TZ20 and TZ21 in the vertical direction are the fourth symbol of FIG. In the case of this example, the combination of the colors of the two images of the left, middle and right symbols of the decorative symbol and the fourth symbol indicates whether or not it is a probable variation symbol. For example, if the decorative symbol is “4, 4, 4” and the fourth symbol is “blue, blue”, the normal jackpot, the decorative symbol is “4, 4, 4”, and the fourth symbol is “blue, In the case of “orange”, the probability change jackpot (a jackpot whose jackpot probability is increased after the jackpot special prize period) is set. At the time of disconnection, in this example, the 4th pattern is one pattern of “white, white”.

  Further, in the upper state (A) (stop mode) in the upper stage of FIG. 174, since the special figure 1 is stopped in the disengagement mode “2, 4, 1”, the fourth design (image TZ10) of the special figure 1 is shown. , TZ11) is also stopped in the disengagement mode “white, white”. At this time, the fourth symbol (images TZ20, TZ21) of the special figure 2 displays the stop aspect at the time of the last special figure 2 fluctuation. And in the lower state (b) in the upper part of FIG. 174 (at the start of the fluctuation of the next special figure 1), the decorative symbols (left, middle and right) start to fluctuate from the previous stop mode “2, 4, 1”. However, the 4th symbol (in this case, the 4th symbol TZ10, TZ11 in the special figure 1) starts to change from the first mode of the cycle every time, that is, “blue, blue” in this example, regardless of the immediately preceding stop mode. It is the composition to do. This is because the motion table at the start of the variation of the fourth symbol sets the objects of the object index 0 and the object index 1 to the fourth symbol “blue” at the beginning of the variation as shown in FIG. 173 described above.

  Thus, in this example, the left, middle, and right symbols continue to change from the continuation number of the previous stop symbol, but the fourth symbol changes with a fixed symbol pattern every time, regardless of the stop symbol of the previous change. This is the feature of this example. Since the example of FIG. 173 above is a case where the special figure 1 fluctuates, the fourth figure (object index 2, 3) on the special figure 2 side uses the behavior to stop the last time (the last symbol when the special figure 2 fluctuates). However, the special figure 1 side (object index 0, 1) displays the fixed symbol pattern without such replacement. By doing so, the number of symbol replacements is greatly reduced (since the symbol of Special Figure 1 is not replaced), the burden on the CPU can be reduced, and the data capacity can be reduced. In addition, although the example of the said FIG. 173 is made into the motion table which controls the symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 simultaneously, it is good also as a separate table.

The middle part of FIG. 174 shows an example of the variable display cycle of the 4th symbol shown in FIG. In this example, the 4th symbol of Special Figure 1 changes from “blue, blue” → “blue, yellow” → “blue, orange” → “yellow, blue” → “yellow, yellow” (“yellow, yellow” After that, it is configured to repeat a combination of various other colors (which may include red, green, peach, etc.) and return to “blue, blue”).
Here, in the above-described cycle example, the combination “white, white” is not included in the cycle. This eliminates the problem that the player easily understands the cycle period of the variation of the 4th symbol, the number of the 4th symbol combinations, and the like, and the interest is lowered. That is, when white is included in various combinations of colors, the period is visible because white is conspicuous, and the number of combinations can be easily known to the player even though it is the fourth pattern to make it difficult to understand There is also sex. However, such a problem is solved if the configuration does not include white as in this example.
However, the configuration is not limited to the above configuration, and a configuration including white may be used.

The lower part of FIG. 174 shows a cycle example from the change of the fourth symbol in FIG. In this example, the variation of the 4th symbol is always executed in a cycle starting from “blue, blue” which is a fixed pattern.
However, the variation of the fourth symbol is not limited to the configuration starting from the same mode every time as described above, and may be configured to move following the previous stop mode, or may be configured to start the variation from the previous stop symbol. But you can. For example, in the lower part of FIG. 174, there is a point (fourth from the left) that stops at “yellow, blue”, and the next change in this part starts from “blue, blue”. If so, the start of variation should be “yellow, yellow”, and if the previous symbol is displayed first, it should be “yellow, blue”, and such a configuration may be adopted.

  Next, FIG. 175 is a connection example of the motion table at the time of left symbol normal fluctuation. The connection of the motion tables is performed by the scenario table described above. First, in the motion table (Mdat0000) shown in the upper part of FIG. 175, for example, the motion index 0 is set by the 20th line (// 19) of the scenario table shown in FIG. This is set by designating the first line (left symbol stop). Then, by the motion table (Mdat0000), the symbol “1” is registered as the object index 0 (first row), and then this symbol is replaced with a predetermined symbol by the behavior specified by the behavior index 0 (second row). ) Displayed as a stop symbol at the display position specified in the third line. A motion table such as this motion table (Mdat0000) is registered in the table as a basic character so that only one pattern can be registered for the same movement even if the rendered character varies depending on the situation. The character with the lowest number in control (for example, the character with the youngest address in registration in the character ROM (image ROM 322), in this case, the stop symbol “1”). According to this configuration, since the number with the lowest number in the internal control is used as a reference, it is easy to calculate a difference value such as character replacement by behavior (change processing), and control is easy and efficient. This has the effect of improving the development efficiency. In addition, since the motion table is registered only once for the same movement, there is an effect that an increase in the data capacity can be prevented.

  Next, in the motion table (Mdat0003) shown in the middle of FIG. 175, for example, the motion index 3 is set by the first line of the scenario table (MS_LZ100) shown in FIG. It is set by specifying the line (normal left fluctuation (first half)). Then, similarly to the case described with reference to FIG. 170 described above, this motion table (Mdat0003) registers the next symbol, the current symbol, and the previous symbol, respectively, and displays the normal variation (first half) of the left symbol. Note that the middle part of FIG. 175 and FIG. 170 show the same motion table (Mdat0003).

Next, in the motion table (Mdat0004) shown in the lower part of FIG. 175, for example, the motion index 4 is set by the fourth line of the scenario table (MS_LZ100) shown in FIG. 169. It is set by specifying the eye (// 4 left normal fluctuation (second half)). Then, the next symbol, the current symbol, and the previous symbol are registered by this motion table (Mdat0004), and the normal variation (second half) of the left symbol is displayed.
Although only the left symbol has been described above, the same applies to the right symbol, the middle symbol, or other objects.
As described above, the scenario table can easily configure a series of long effects by freely combining a plurality of motion tables for designating blocked display effects.

Next, the upper part of FIG. 176 is a specific example of the scenario table (at the time of push button notice), and has already been used in step D455 of the scenario data setting process for PB notice, the step D586 of the scenario analysis process, the PB determination branch process, and the like. explained.
Next, the lower part of FIG. 176 is a specific example of the motion table (at the time of push button notice), and has already been described in step D455 of the PB notice scenario data setting process, step D823 of the motion command execution process, and the like.
Next, FIG. 177 is a specific example of the scenario table (during the customer waiting demo), which has already been described in the step D585 of the scenario analysis process, the constant weight process, the repetition process, and the like.

Next, FIG. 178 is an example of a scenario table used at the time of ending the special display variable display effect.
Here, a symbol display period of a predetermined time is provided during the ending period so that the next symbol variation does not start suddenly at the end of the ending movie. In this example, a constant wait code is set in the 27th line (// 26), and the wait time value is 30 (that is, 1 second). As a result, the left, right and middle stop symbol displays registered for motion in the 20th line (// 19), 22nd line (// 21), and 24th line (// 23) are displayed for a predetermined time (in this example). Then, it continues for 1 second, and the next symbol variation does not start suddenly at the end of the ending movie.

  Also, the background setting of the 18th line (// 17) in FIG. 178 is NO at step D637 of the motion registration process described above because the value of the motion index is set to (−1), and the motion index of the RAM is set. The region value is used as the motion index. This must match the background to be displayed after the end of the ending, but since no probability information command has been received at this point, it can be predicted from information such as already received symbol commands, fanfare commands, ending commands, etc. This is because the background needs to be selected. In addition, even if a command command of a probable variation symbol is sent from the game control device, there is a possibility that the production control device side will perform an effect of making it appear as a normal symbol (non-probable variation symbol), so not only the command This is because it is necessary to use the internal information of the production control device. Note that a probability information command is sent at the end of the ending scenario, but if there is no problem with the display content, it can be continued as it is, or if there is a problem, the background is switched to the background corresponding to the command ( The command from the game control device is the highest priority).

Next, FIG. 179 is a configuration example of a design movie for sharing a motion table. This is an example of a temporary stop of the left symbol. There is an effect technique in which a character animates when a symbol starts a temporary stop. In FIG. 179, (a) shown at the upper left is a state where the design stops without change (still image), and (b) shown at the upper right shows a state where the design stops (moving image) while changing. Originally, the motion table is not the same for still images and movies (depending on whether there is data to decode the movie, settings depending on differences in additional codes, etc.), but the pattern in (a) ), The motion table may be commonly used as in the motion table (Mdat0005) shown in the lower part of FIG. By doing so, it is not necessary to increase the number of motion tables, so that it is possible to prevent the control ROM 321 from being compressed (that is, capacity reduction, etc.).
In the motion table (Mdat0005) shown in the lower side of FIG. 179, the motion index 5 is set by the seventh row of the scenario table (MS_LZ100) shown in FIG. It is set by specifying the eye (left temporary stop).

Next, FIGS. 180 and 181 are examples of a motion table at the time of scroll notice, and FIG. 182 is an example of an actual screen display at the time of notice of a scroll.
Among these, FIG. 180 (a) is a motion table of an operation a in which a closed scroll falls from the upper outside of the screen, stops at almost the center of the screen, and waits for a predetermined time. In this motion table, an object “Scroll Blue” (closed scroll) is registered as an object index 0 in the first line, and then a movement 1 code is executed for each frame with respect to the object index 0 to display the display position. The Y coordinate value is changed in a direction that increases for each frame. In the scenario table (not shown) for designating the motion table, for example, a line for instructing a wait for a predetermined time using a constant wait code is provided on the next line after the execution of the motion table. As a result, in the actual screen display of the operation a, as shown in FIG. 182 (a), an image is displayed in which the closed scroll falls from the top and reaches the center and remains stationary for a predetermined time. In this example, the player has a sense of expectation by giving two choices of effects of releasing the scroll after waiting for a predetermined time or falling down while keeping it closed.

FIG. 180 (b) is a motion table of operation b (so-called most unfortunate state) that falls outside the screen while being closed. In this motion table, in the first line, an object called “rolling blue” (closed scroll) is newly registered as an object index 0, and then a movement 1 code is executed for each frame with respect to the object index 0 to display position. The value of the Y coordinate is changed in a direction in which it increases for each frame. Thus, in the actual screen display of the operation b, as shown in FIG. 182 (b), an image is displayed in which the closed scroll falls from the center and disappears to the lower outside of the screen.
In this example, as shown in FIGS. 180 (a) and 180 (b), the basic character registered in the first row of the motion table is the “blue” character with the least reliable color of the scroll. It is said. In some cases, the character replacement (in this case, color change) is performed by the behavior of the behavior index 0 in the second line, so that, for example, an effect according to the big hit reliability can be achieved. Has improved. This color assignment of the scroll is determined by the advance notice assignment (C5: scroll color assignment) in FIG. 166 and may be replaced with “green” or “gold”.
In this way, in this embodiment, even if the drawn character has different effects depending on the situation, only one pattern is registered for the same motion, and the motion table is displayed on the table as a basic character in the motion table for the notice effect. The registered character is the character with the lowest jackpot reliability (in the above example, a scroll whose color is “blue”). According to this configuration, by registering the character with the lowest jackpot reliability as a basic character, there is a high possibility that the character will appear in common at both the time of loss and the time of jackpot. This will enable efficient control and improve development efficiency. In addition, since the motion table is registered only once for the same movement, there is an effect that an increase in the data capacity can be prevented.

FIG. 181 is a motion table of an operation c in which a scroll opens and characters appear. This motion table has already been described in the step D933 of the effect type designation process and the step D993 of the behavior index setting process, but will be described here again.
In this motion table, in the first section (a), first, in the first line (command position k = 0; the line indicated by “// 0” in the figure), the video “Scroll Blue” (open scroll) A character is registered as an object index 0, and thereafter, a behavior code for changing the color of the character (color of the scroll), a movement 1 code for setting a display position, and the like are executed. Thereby, in the actual screen display of the section (A), as shown in (A) of FIG. 182 (c), an animation display in which the closed scroll spreads to the left and right is executed. It should be noted that it is configured to wait for a predetermined time when it is fully opened. In addition, at the time of section (A), nothing is written on the scroll and it is configured to be white.

  Next, in the second section (A), in the first line (k = m + 2; “// m + 2” line), the character of the character “Wolf Smoke” (regarded) is additionally registered as an object index 1, In the second and subsequent lines, a behavior, a display position, and an effect are set for this object index 1, and the effect is set so that the value of the effect parameter gradually increases. Thereby, in the actual screen display of the section (b), as shown in (b) of FIG. 182 (c), the character “Wolf smoke” gradually appears on the white background portion of the open scroll. Is done. It should be noted that when the display is completed, a predetermined time is waited. As described above, the numerical value (P) of the effect parameter represents the transparency. (For example, it is expressed by the formula of P / 255. The state where P = 255 is 100% visible.) The basic character registered in the first line is a character called “Wolf Smoke”. In the second line, by changing the character by the behavior of behavior index 1 (in this case, changing the character), for example, it is possible to produce an effect according to the jackpot reliability, thereby improving the interest of the game Yes. This character distribution is determined by the notice distribution (C6: scroll character pattern distribution) in FIG. 166 and may be replaced with “conflict”, “general general”, “great master”, or “big game”.

  Next, in the third section (c), in the third line (k = o + 3; “// o + 3”) and the fifth line (k = o + 5; “// o + 5”), The character and the character “Wolf” are newly registered as object indexes 0 and 1, respectively, and the behavior, display position, and effect are set for these object indexes 0 and 1 in the fourth and sixth lines. The effect is set so that the value of the effect parameter gradually decreases. Thus, in the actual screen display of the section (c), as shown in (c) of (c) of FIG. 182, the display of the scroll and characters that are gradually disappearing is performed. In this example, the operation ends when the scroll and characters disappear.

By executing each program as described above, a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and each effect means (display device 41, board decoration device 42) is controlled by the effect control device 300 based on this command. , Various effects by the frame decoration device 43, the board effect device 44, the frame effect device 45, the speakers 12a, 12b, etc.) are executed. For example, the display device 41 executes a variable display game with a special decoration.
Specifically, during a game of the pachinko machine 1, when a game ball wins a special drawing start winning opening 25 or 26 (that is, when there is a special drawing start winning), a command for instructing a variation effect of the special figure Is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, and a special figure is displayed on the display unit 41a (the effect on the display device 41 is a decorative special figure. If the stop result mode of the variable display game becomes a special result mode, a big hit occurs, and in the case of a loss, the game stops at a loss symbol.
Here, among the commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, there is a command that does not start the effect alone but exerts an effect as a set. Command + variation pattern command ". In the first embodiment, since the stop symbol command is transmitted in the order of the variation pattern command, the combination of “stop symbol command + variation pattern command” is as described above.
The “stop symbol command” may also be referred to as a “symbol designation command”, and in the following description, the “symbol designation command” may be described as short as “symbol command” as appropriate.

When the stop symbol command and the variation pattern command are sequentially transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 based on the start winning of the special symbol, the effect control device 300 displays the special symbol based on the transmitted command. Perform production control.
Note that the stop symbol command and the variation pattern command correspond to a first command and a second command, respectively, that are effective in combination.
Further, when the start opening SW is turned on during the change of the symbol and the start memory is generated, the information indicating that the special figure hold number = “1” is displayed on the screen of the display device 41, and the prefetch command and the special figure hold number are displayed. A command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300.
If reception of multiple commands (for example, “stop symbol command + fluctuation pattern command”) is normal, that is, the stop symbol command sent first and the fluctuation pattern command sent later are normally received. Then, it is determined that the command to be set has been established, and the effect of symbol variation is performed on the display device 41 by the effect control device 300 based on the command to be set.

Here, the types and contents of commands that form a set will be described.
There are the following commands as a set, which will be described separately for each performance.
(1) Symbol variation This is transmitted at the start of variation, and a set is established by “stop symbol command” + “variation pattern command”. The “stop symbol command” is abbreviated as a symbol command as appropriate.
(2) Effect during the big hit For this, a set is formed by “effect screen command” + “hit symbol command” according to the effect section.
The production screen commands include the following.
(A) Fanfare start = Fanfare command (b) Start of each round = Round command corresponding to the number of rounds (c) Interval start = Interval command (d) Ending start = Ending command "Stop symbol command" = "Big hit symbol command".
Here, as described above, a combination of two commands of “stop symbol command” + “variation pattern command” is effective in a plurality of commands that form a pair. The present invention can be applied even if the effect is exhibited in a form in which three or more are combined.
The “stop command” is a command for instructing to stop a symbol such as during fluctuation, but this is a single command and does not constitute a set.
In the following description, “motion data” means motion table data (image data to be displayed, data for specifying the display position, etc.) and is different from the above-mentioned “motion control data”.

In this embodiment, the concept of scenario data (scenario layer) is used in drawing control of a screen displayed on the display device 41. Scenarios are set in advance as a table by dividing the design variation effects into a plurality of layers (scenario layers) such as background scenario, left symbol scenario, right symbol scenario, etc. (details will be described later) This is a technique for generating a picture on one screen by individually controlling them as a scenario and synthesizing all the scenarios.
In multiple layers (scenario layers), for example, background, left design, right design, ... are categorized separately for each display element, and multiple pieces of motion information are independently or simultaneously It is set as a table of operation scenarios for switching and displaying effects.

FIG. 183 is a diagram illustrating an example of display components and a display screen used in the production of the display device 41.
First, FIG. 183 (a) shows display components, which are divided into the following elements.
・ Background ・ Left design ・ Right design ・ Medium design ・ Notice character (Although it is a notice character, it is abbreviated as a notice character)
・ Push button character (A character that appears when the push button type production button 9 operated by the player is pressed, but is abbreviated as a push button character.)
・ Holding display ・ 4th design Among the above display components, the background is the display component that is displayed at the back of the screen of the display device 41. Hereinafter, the left design, the right design, ... Arranged so as to be display elements displayed on the near side of the screen in the order of the 4th symbol. Therefore, the 4th symbol is the display element displayed on the most front side on the screen.

Then, a scenario table for a variation effect is created for each display component.
FIG. 184 (a) shows a scenario table, which is created by being divided into the following elements.
-Background control scenario table-Left symbol control scenario table-Right symbol control scenario table-Middle symbol control scenario table-Notice character control scenario table-Push button character control scenario table-Hold display control scenario table- Scenario table for 4th symbol control

In addition, each display component is composed of layers, and the plurality of layers are sequentially stacked from the back side (background layer) toward the front side, and the front row is the fourth symbol layer to form one display screen. Created.
Next, FIG. 183 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the effect of the display device 41 when the screen control is performed using the scenario table, and this shows a plurality of layers from the back side (background layer). One display screen is created by sequentially superimposing toward the front side.
In FIG. 183 (b), 701 is the background, 702 is the left symbol, 703 is the right symbol, 704 is the middle symbol, 705 is the notice character, the push button character is not shown, 707 is the hold display, and 708 is the fourth symbol. Each display component is displayed on a layer.
In such effect control, when generating an effect screen, it is divided into a plurality of layers (scenario layers) corresponding to display elements of the effect screen and set in advance as a table, and then these are individually controlled as a scenario. Then, by synthesizing all the scenarios in the layer format, a picture of one screen is generated and displayed as an effect screen of the display device 41, and a variation effect of a symbol (special drawing) is performed.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 183 (b), the symbol “3, 5, 7” is displayed in a variable manner with a white background as the background, and the character representing the star as the notice character crosses the middle symbol “5”. In this way, effects appearing on the front side of each symbol are performed.
On the other hand, a special figure hold display is performed below the display screen. Here, four hold states are displayed. Note that this hold display is an example of FIG.
The push button character is not shown in the figure, but this is a character that appears when the push button type effect button 9 operated by the player is pressed during the effect. In this case, it is the sixth character from the back side. The push button character will be displayed on the layer.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the rendering control of the display device 41 controlled by the effect control device 300, the background, the left symbol, the right symbol,... Then, a table of operation scenarios for effect display by switching a plurality of motion information simultaneously or continuously is set for each display element, and the scenario table is selected according to the effect command from the game control device 100 and combined. Thus, the drawing content (one frame) is generated on one screen.
Therefore, according to the above-described configuration, it is only necessary to define a minimum operation pattern (part of operation), and it is possible to obtain an effect that data capacity can be saved and development efficiency can be improved.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device for controlling the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device capable of performing an effect by controlling an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device,
The production control device
Scenario data setting means for setting scenario data for each display element in the drawing control of the screen displayed on the display means;
In accordance with a command from the game control device, screen creation means for selecting and synthesizing preset scenario data for each display element and creating one screen drawing content;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:
Here, the PROM (control ROM) 321 constitutes scenario data setting means, and the VDP 312 constitutes screen creation means.

Details of the background of the inventive concept will be described below.
A conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-13477 has a plurality of different moving image data for display elements such as a background, a symbol, a notice character, etc., corresponding to a gaming state and a gaming result, A plurality of moving image data provided for each display element is selected and combined to form one variable display game.
However, in the design variation effect on the display device, for example, by the effect distribution performed for each variation, such as the motion of the beginning of the variation, the motion from the slowdown to the temporary stop (number of frames to be played, sliding, etc.), the type of the notice effect, etc. Since there are various combinations, if scenario data (for example, different moving image data) is created for each screen for every combination, a huge amount of data is required.
Therefore, in this embodiment, in the rendering control in the special drawing variation effect in the effect control device 300, the background, the left symbol, the right symbol,... A table of operation scenarios for effect display by switching a plurality of motion information simultaneously or continuously is set for each display element and stored in advance in, for example, (PROM (control ROM) 321. Next, game control. The production control device 300 selects a scenario table in accordance with the production command from the device 100, and combines and synthesizes the drawing contents (one frame) for each screen. It is only necessary to define a limited operation pattern (part of operation), saving data capacity and improving development efficiency.
In particular, when performing various combinations, scenario management is performed independently for each display element, so it is not necessary to provide a scenario table for each combination, reducing data capacity and reducing development man-hours. it can. (Because there are few tables to make).

In addition, most of the display components of the special figure variation effect differ in various ways of movement, displayed characters, etc., depending on the mode and random number distribution. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 184 (a), unless there is each scenario table corresponding to the display component, the variation effect cannot be controlled and divided.
In contrast, in this embodiment, since each scenario table corresponding to each display component is provided, the display component can be displayed in various ways and displayed in different modes and random numbers when performing special figure variation effects. Even if the character or the like to be different is different, the production control is easy and the development efficiency is improved.

Specific implementation points of the inventive concept are as follows.
In the flowchart of the production control device 300, the following corresponds.
Scenario data setting process: FIG.
-Customer wait scenario data setting processing (in case of customer wait demonstration production): Fig. 109
PB notice scenario data setting process: FIG.
Scenario setting process: FIG. 129
Scenario analysis processing: FIGS. 130 and 131
-Motion registration processing: FIG. 132
・ Change scenario switching process: FIG. 139
-Motion control processing: FIG. 141
Production display editing process: FIGS. 151, 152, 153
Drawing command preparation end process: Step D32 of the main process (FIG. 98)
-VDP interrupt processing: Fig. 157
V blank start interrupt processing: FIG. 158
The scenario table is stored in a PROM (control ROM) 321. That is, when performing a special figure variation effect, a scenario table in which a plurality of pieces of motion information for rendering control of the display character are selected and the selected motion information is sequentially arranged in a table shape along the flow of the effect. Are previously created and stored in a PROM (control ROM) 321. The scenario table is defined in a large number for each effect content and display component (background, left symbol, right symbol,..., The fourth symbol), and the effect control device 300 starts from the game control device 100. An effect is performed by selecting a scenario table corresponding to the command.

Next, the case of demonstration display on the customer waiting screen will be described.
The scenario table shown in FIG. 184 (a) is a normal gaming state scenario table. In the case of a demo display on a so-called customer waiting screen, unlike the normal gaming state, the scenario table is as shown in FIG. 184 (b).
That is, the scenario table in the customer waiting demonstration shown in FIG. 184 (b) is different from the scenario table in the variation effect shown in FIG. 184 (a), and the scenario of the fourth symbol control from the scenario table of the background control in one table. The configuration is such that the motion information of each display component up to the table is centrally controlled. Therefore, the scenario table in the customer waiting demonstration is in the form of a scenario table of one overall control specialized for the customer waiting demonstration production.
In addition to the customer-waiting demonstration effect, the jackpot effect, the user's game history / gaming machine customization screen, etc. are less random due to random numbers, so one overall control scenario scenario as shown in FIG. 184 (b). It is configured in the form of a bull.

Here, when the customer waiting demonstration production is compared with the above-mentioned fluctuation production in the normal gaming state, the customer waiting demonstration production defines the flow of the production, and it is common that the production contents have little change. It is.
Therefore, in this embodiment, instead of each display component of the production, one overall control scenario table is used, and each display from the background control scenario table to the fourth symbol control scenario table is included in one table. By adopting a configuration that is registered so as to control the motion information of the component elements in an integrated manner, there are effects that the development efficiency can be improved and the data capacity can be reduced.
In other words, for presentations with little change, all display components are registered in one scenario (a small number of scenarios) table, making it easier for developers to visualize screen drawing contents and improving development efficiency. And you can expect a reduction in data capacity.

Here, in the form of a single integrated control scenario table, for example, a configuration is adopted in which all display components are comprehensively controlled only by a scenario table of one display component (for example, background). By doing so, it is possible to perform the effect control of the display device 41 with a smaller number of scenario tables than the scenario table in the case of a variable effect.
That is, in an effect with little change such as a customer-waiting demonstration effect, it is easier to imagine the display contents in the effect screen on the display device 41 when all display components are registered in one scenario table. (Easy to imagine for developers) Development efficiency is improved and data capacity can be reduced.
In the above customer waiting demonstration production, one scenario table is set. However, it is not necessarily one, and a small number of scenario tables are possible. For example, a configuration in which two scenario tables are set. But you can. Since eight scenario tables are used in the variation effect in the normal gaming state, if there are at least a few scenario tables, there is a corresponding effect.

This background will be described.
In the special figure variation effect on the display device 41, characters and the like change in various ways depending on the game game situation (mode, random number distribution, etc.), so the background, the left symbol, the right symbol, the notice character,. Since it is necessary to set scenario tables separately for each display component and combine them, it is difficult for developers to imagine the display contents of the production, but there are places where it can not be helped.
On the other hand, it is also possible to configure the scenario table separately for each display component in the same manner as the special drawing variation effect for the customer waiting demonstration effect, but it is difficult to eliminate the point that it is difficult to imagine the display contents of the effect.
Therefore, in this embodiment, a table configuration for efficiently selecting motion information of a customer waiting demonstration production is provided by focusing on the fact that the flow of the production is specified in the customer waiting demonstration production and the production contents are little changed. As a result, it was made easier to imagine the contents of production by registering all display components in one scenario table instead of multiple scenario tables. As a result, improvement of development efficiency, The reduction in data capacity has been achieved.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The production control device
Scenario data setting means for setting one scenario data in the drawing control of the screen displayed on the display means;
Screen creation means for creating drawing content of one screen based on one scenario data set in advance;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:
Here, the PROM (control ROM) 321 constitutes scenario data setting means, and the VDP 312 constitutes screen creation means.

Next, a description will be given of a control operation in which the scenario presentation time is variable depending on the timing when the presentation button 9 is pressed.
In the present embodiment, scenario data is set for each display element in the rendering control of the screen displayed on the display device 41. In the scenario table relating to the effect of the effect button 9, the effective period of the effect button 9 is included. There is provided a timer for counting. Then, at the timing when the effect button 9 is pressed, control is performed such that the effect time of the scenario to be performed subsequently becomes variable depending on the update status of the timer value.

FIG. 185 performs a push button effect (abbreviated as PB effect. This is an effect when the effect button 9 is pressed (hereinafter the same)) using the scenario table of FIG. It is a figure explaining the operation | movement in a case.
FIG. 185 (a) shows an operation situation using a scenario table related to the effect of the effect button 9. As shown in FIG. 185 (a), the effective period of the effect button 9 (PB) is set to 90 frames. Here, 90 frames correspond to the initial value of the timer for counting the effective period of the effect button 9. One frame is about 33 msec, for example.
In the scenario table shown in FIG. 185 (a), the first to fourth lines (index numbers 0 to 3 shown on the right side of the table) are common parts, and the fifth to sixth lines (index numbers 4 to 5). Is the operation part when the production button 9 is not pressed, and the 7th to 15th lines (index numbers 6 to 14) are the operation part when the production button 9 is pressed. This is explained on the right side of the scenario table.
In the PB effect, every time one frame elapses from 90 frames, one frame is subtracted and updated (that is, (-1) update) (this update process corresponds to a timer).

Next, each time the production frame advances, the timer (the time corresponding to the number of frames) of the effective time (corresponding to the remaining frames when the frames are subtracted from 90 frames every frame) is decremented to “0”. Then, the operation of the effect button 9 becomes invalid, and the effect when the effect button 9 is pressed is not performed.
The operation when the effect button 9 is not pressed is performed according to the fifth to sixth lines (index numbers 4 to 5) of the scenario table shown in FIG. 185 (a).
On the other hand, if the effect button 9 is pressed before the timer becomes “0”, the effect is started at the time of pressing, and the effect period is “remaining time” (that is, time corresponding to the remaining frame) + “fixed time” " Here, when the “remaining time” is α frame, the “fixed time” is set as 55 frames.
In the scenario table shown in FIG. 185 (a), the production period is expressed as “variable weight”, and “variable weight” = 55 + α (unit: frame) is the control of time adjustment of PB operation by frame standby. Yes.

Specifically, when the effect button 9 is pressed before the timer becomes “0”, the scenario in the 7th to 15th lines (index numbers 6 to 14) of the scenario table shown in FIG. The production progresses along. That is, when the player presses the effect button 9, a warrior (push button character) appears, and the warrior tells a dialogue.
This situation is shown in FIGS. 185 (b) and 185 (c). That is, when a display prompting the user to press the PB (effect button 9) as shown in FIG. 185 (b) is displayed on the screen of the display device 41, when the player presses the effect button 9, the screen shown in FIG. 185 (c) is displayed. As shown in the figure, warrior B appears and a notice effect is given to talk about words (not shown).
Since this case corresponds to the case where the effect button 9 is pressed before the timer becomes “0”, the operation of the effect button 9 is not invalidated, and the effect starts when the effect button 9 is pressed. The production period is “remaining time” (that is, α frame) + “fixed time” (55 frames).

Since the timer for counting the effective period of the effect button 9 is counted down from 90 frames (initial value), 90 frames + “fixed time” (55 frames) = 145 frames is the maximum effect period, and 145 frames-90 frames = "Fixed time" (55 frames) is the minimum performance period. Therefore, when the effect button 9 is pressed before the timer becomes “0”, the notice effect is performed in the range of 145 frames to 55 frames.
Thus, the effective time timer ("Remaining time": α frame) remaining when the effect button 9 is pressed is added to the fixed effect time (55 frames) so that the effect time can be made variable. Yes. Therefore, when the effect button 9 is pressed early, a long notice effect (remaining time + fixed time) is seen according to the remaining time (α frame), and when the effect button 9 is pressed at the end, the minimum fixed time amount is displayed. A notice effect will be performed.
As a result, the longer the effect button 9 is pressed, the longer the notice effect can be seen. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to press the effect button 9 earlier, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device for controlling the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device capable of performing an effect by controlling an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device,
The production control device
Scenario data is set for each display element in the drawing control of the screen displayed on the display means, and the scenario data setting means provided with a timer for counting the button valid period is included in the scenario table related to the effects of the effect buttons;
Effect button control means for controlling the effect time of a scenario to be performed afterwards based on the update status of the timer that counts the button effective period according to the timing when the effect button is pressed,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:
Here, the PROM (control ROM) 321 constitutes scenario data setting means, and the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 constitutes effect button control means.

Details of the background of the inventive concept will be described below.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-154896, if the player operates the effect button during the effective operation period of the effect button, a preset wait time (effect display start) (Time value from end to end) is displayed.
However, the wait time here is only a fixed value and does not vary depending on the operation timing of the effect button. Therefore, it is difficult to produce an effect that enhances the fun of the game according to the operation timing of the production button.
For example, if the time of the production performed when the production button is pressed is fixed, if the production button is pressed early, the production will end at an early timing, and the connection with the next stage notice production is good. There is a disadvantage of not.
Specifically, if the space between the next stage notice effect is too vacant or too narrow depending on the timing when the effect button is pressed, there is a problem that it is difficult to obtain an effective continuous effect.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, control is performed such that the scenario presentation time is variable depending on the timing when the presentation button 9 is pressed.
That is, the effective time timer (“remaining time”: α frame) remaining when the effect button 9 is pressed is added to the fixed effect time (55 frames) so that the effect time is variable. Therefore, when the effect button 9 is pressed early, a long notice effect (remaining time + fixed time) is seen according to the remaining time (α frame), and when the effect button 9 is pressed at the end, the minimum fixed time amount is displayed. A notice effect is performed.
According to the present embodiment, since the end timing of the effect performed when the effect button 9 is pressed becomes constant, it becomes easy to smoothly connect to the next stage notice effect, and the effect of the effect is improved.
In particular, since the interval between the PB effect and the next stage effect is constant, it becomes easier to calculate the flow / timing of the scenario of the effect that you want to show to the player, and the effect of improving the effect of the effect as well as improving the effect of the effect Is obtained.
In addition, since the longer the presentation button 9 is pressed, the longer the presentation can be seen. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to press the presentation button 9 earlier, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Specific implementation points of the inventive concept are as follows.
In the flowchart of the effect control device 300, the process relating to the scenario table is the same as that in the case of performing independent scenario management for each display element described above, and the following corresponds in particular.
Scenario analysis process: Step D579 in FIGS. 130 and 131
Variable weight processing: Step D696 in FIG.
-PB waiting process: FIG.
PB determination branch processing: FIG. 136

Next, when the effect button 9 is pressed early, a long notice effect (remaining time + fixed time) is seen according to the remaining time (α frame), and when the effect button 9 is pressed at the end, the minimum fixed time is displayed. The inventive concept of the above configuration that the notice effect is performed is expressed as follows.
The production button control means
When the production button is pressed at the early timing of the announcement production, a long announcement production is produced according to the remaining time of the production, and when the production button is pushed at a timing close to the end of the announcement production, at least a minimum fixed time A game machine that is controlled so as to perform a notice effect.
Here, the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 constitutes an effect button control means.

Further, the invention concept of the above-described configuration in which the timer of effective time remaining when the effect button 9 is pressed (“remaining time”: α frame) is added to the fixed effect time (55 frames) to make the effect time variable. Is expressed as follows.
The production button control means
A gaming machine characterized in that, when an effect button is pressed for a notice effect, a remaining effect effective time value is added to a predetermined fixed effect time to vary the notice effect time related to the effect button.
Here, the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 constitutes an effect button control means.

Next, regarding the PB effect, a modification of the present embodiment will be described.
The present embodiment may be modified as follows.
(1) In the first embodiment, control is performed such that the scenario presentation time is variable according to the timing when the presentation button 9 is pressed. However, the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, it is good also as a structure which performs the notice effect which cannot be seen to the last if it does not press the production | presentation button 9 early.
In this configuration, when the effect button is pressed, the movie effect starts, and when the effect time ends, the movie ends there. In other words, if the player wants to see the notice effect until the end, the effect is that the player needs to press the effect button quickly.
However, since it is almost impossible to press at the fastest speed after the “prompt to press the effect button” appears, a certain grace time is provided.
With such a configuration, the player can be motivated to actively participate in the notice effect game.

Next, the control for performing the continuation determination of the display content in the effect of the display device 41 will be described.
In the present embodiment, a scenario table in which scenario data is set for each display element in the drawing control of the screen displayed on the display device 41 is provided. In the scenario table, the current rendering state is continued. If the motion information in the RAM 311a in the effect control device 300 is different from the motion information on the scenario table, the motion information on the scenario table is set as the effect content. In the same case, control is performed such that the motion information on the scenario table is not set as the effect contents.

A specific example of the control will be described with reference to a scenario table relating to a customer waiting demonstration effect shown in FIG.
When performing a customer waiting demonstration effect, the contents of the effect on the display device 41 are realized in the order of progress of each data in the scenario table shown in FIG.
In the customer waiting demonstration production process, as shown in FIG. 177, a motion continuation code (determination code) for determining whether or not to continue the current production state (background continuation determination) is set in the eighth scenario data. Then, by comparing this motion continuation code with the motion information in the RAM 311a, it is determined whether to continuously display the background of the effect screen or to perform the effect with a new background.

Next, the case where the background of the effect screen is continuously displayed or the effect is produced with a new background will be described separately.
(A) Case where production is performed with a new background In this case, for example, there is a case where a normal period of special drawing ends and a certain period of time elapses, and the customer waits for a demonstration production.
That is, when a game ball wins the special drawing start winning opening 25 or 26 (that is, when there is a special drawing start winning), a command for commanding a special drawing variation effect is sent from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. The display device 41 executes a variable display game with a special figure (decorative special figure). When the stop result mode of the variable display game becomes a special result mode, a big hit occurs, and in the case of a loss, the game stops at a loss symbol.

Now, if the stop result mode is out of place, it will stop at the off symbol, and after that, if there is no start prize even after a certain period of time, it will move to the customer waiting demonstration production, but at that time in FIG. 177 The scenario table shown is used.
Here, first, the current motion information stored in the RAM 311a in the effect control device 300 is compared with the motion information on the scenario table shown in FIG. 177, and the determination by the motion continuation code is performed.
The determination by the motion continuation code is executed according to the flowchart (motion continuation process) of FIG. In the case of this continuation code, for example, in the case of the background, if the motion information of the background motion control area currently displayed is the same as the value of the operand number (the designated operation has already been executed). If the value is different, the setting is made to switch to the background of the number indicated by the operand.
The current motion information stored in the RAM 311a is for the scenario table of the special figure fluctuation, but the special figure is out of place and stops at the symbol, and then a certain period of time has passed. It is compared with the motion continuation code (determination code) of the scenario table shown in 177. Then, since they are different, setting to switch to the background (new background) of the number designated by the operand on the scenario table shown in FIG. 177 is performed. The new background is No. The motion information corresponding to 12 is set. As a result, the display device 41 has No. A new background corresponding to the 12 pieces of motion information is displayed, and a customer waiting demonstration effect is performed.

(B) Case in which production is performed in a continuous background In this case, for example, a demonstration for waiting for a customer may continue.
If there is no customer on the table (game machine) and the table is empty, the customer waiting demonstration will continue. In this case, the scenario table shown in FIG. 177 corresponding to the customer waiting demonstration effect is continuously used.
As in the case (a), the determination by the motion continuation code is executed by the flowchart of FIG. 134 (motion continuation processing). If the motion information is the same as the value of the operand number (if the designated operation has already been performed), the process ends without changing the background.
That is, the current motion information stored in the RAM 311a and the motion information on the scenario table (FIG. 177) are the same, and control is performed so as not to set the motion information on the scenario table as the effect contents.
Thereby, since it is the motion information of both, operation will continue as if nothing happened, and the customer waiting demonstration production of the same background will continue. Since the background operation is continued in this manner, the scenario data shown in FIG. 177 uses “motion continuation code” as the scenario data at the relevant location.

As described above, it is determined based on the determination code (motion continuation code) whether to continuously display the background of the effect screen or to perform the effect with the new background, and when it is determined to be the new background, the current RAM 311a Overwrite the data with the data corresponding to the new background on the scenario table. As a result, the background is switched and an effect is performed with the new background. On the other hand, if it is determined that the background is to be continued, the instruction data acquired from the scenario table is discarded and the presentation proceeds with the current background.
By doing in this way, the background state in the previous production can be continued in the next production, for example, it is possible to have a display element having a sense of unity between the productions of different special figure fluctuations. , The fun of gaming is improved.
For example, it is possible to perform various effects such as leaving the notice character on the screen of the display device 41 across a plurality of different special drawing fluctuation effects.
Further, there is no need to use different scenario tables depending on whether the production contents are continued or not, and the development efficiency is improved. In other words, it is possible to produce effects in accordance with the game situation with one scenario table.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device for controlling the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device capable of performing an effect by controlling an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device,
The production control device
Scenario data setting means for setting scenario data for each display element in the drawing control of the screen displayed on the display means, and providing a determination code for determining whether or not to continue the present performance state in the scenario table;
When it is determined that the current motion information is different from the motion information on the scenario table based on the determination code, the motion information on the scenario table is set as the production content. Production content control means for controlling not to set motion information on the scenario table as production content;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:
Here, the PROM (control ROM) 321 constitutes scenario data setting means, and the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 constitutes effect content control means.

Details of the background of the inventive concept will be described below.
In a conventional gaming machine such as that disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-211583, when a customer waiting demo command is received, a demonstration effect display is performed for a predetermined time on the sub-board (effect control device) side, and the effect time Is continued, the demonstration effect display data is newly set each time.
However, in the case of the above-described demonstration for waiting for a customer, if the duration of the stage is to continue (the stage for the demonstration of waiting for a customer is continued), the demonstration will be performed again at the next time every time the last stage of the presentation is finished. Since the display data is set, the control is complicated and the development efficiency is also reduced.
Moreover, in the conventional game machine, the background effect was performed from the beginning for every special figure change, and the impression was not made. In other words, every time a transition is made to the next production, the previous production is reset, so there are many cases where the production is not cursed, and there is a possibility that there is no calmness and a sense of unity. For this reason, the interest of the game tended to decrease. Furthermore, it was difficult to perform various productions.
However, the background effect is not always continued.For example, if the previous special figure change was a reach effect, and then the normal effect is changed, for example, if the background effect is simply continued, the next background May be the one at the time of reach, so it may be necessary to switch the background to a normal one.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a determination code (motion continuation code) for determining whether or not to continue the current effect state is provided in the scenario table, and motion information in the RAM 311a in the effect control device 300 and the motion on the scenario table are provided. If the information is different, the motion information on the scenario table is set as the production content, and if it is the same, the motion information on the scenario table is not set as the production content.
In other words, when the determination code (motion continuation code) is a continuation determination code, the requested display content (instruction data on the scenario table) and the display content of the current presentation (control data in the RAM 311a). ) Are the same as the current display contents (the instruction data acquired from the scenario table is discarded), and if they are different, the instruction data on the scenario table is overwritten in the RAM 311a (since a new effect is started) Including initial settings of timers, table pointers, etc.), so that new effects can be started.
Specifically, there is a part in the scenario table where a code for determining continuation is set. For example, there is a background movie setting in the symbol variation scenario table.

Now, when a certain symbol variation ends and the next symbol variation starts, a decision code (motion continuation code) that determines whether or not to continue the background movie is entered in the scenario table. A continuous background effect can be performed across the variable effects. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incongruity that will disrupt the world view, and to enhance the interest of the game.
That is, it is not necessary to perform a background effect from the beginning for every special figure change, and an impression that does not appear is not given. For example, it is not necessary to reset the previous production every time the next production is performed, and the production does not become tedious. In addition, the possibility that the production is not settled and there is no sense of unity is eliminated, and the interest of the game can be improved. It is also possible to perform a variety of performances.
The background setting at the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect has the same effect as described above.
.
In addition, it is not necessary to use different scenario tables depending on whether the production contents are continued or not, and the development efficiency is improved. In other words, it is possible to produce effects in accordance with the game situation with one scenario table.

Specific implementation points of the inventive concept are as follows.
In the flowchart and data of the effect control device 300, the processing related to the scenario table is the same as that in the case of performing independent scenario management for each display element described above, and the following corresponds in particular.
Scenario analysis processing: FIGS. 130 and 131
-Motion continuation processing: FIG. 134
・ Scenario table for customer waiting demonstration: Fig. 177
・ Special map scenario table: Fig. 169

Next, the inventive concept of the above configuration of continuing the background effect during the customer waiting demonstration effect is expressed as follows.
Production content control means,
When the scenario table is a customer waiting demonstration effect, if it is determined that the current motion information and the motion information on the scenario table are the same based on the determination code, the motion on the scenario table is displayed as the effect contents. A gaming machine that is controlled so as not to set information and continues the background effect.

Next, a modified example of the present embodiment will be described with respect to control by the determination code (motion continuation code).
The present embodiment may be modified as follows.
(1) Not only the background of the effect screen, but also the control may be performed so that the notice character or the like is left on the screen across the next symbol variation.
If it does in this way, the effect which makes a notice character etc. appear continuously over a plurality of change productions can be performed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Production content control means,
When the scenario table includes an effect of a notice character, if it is determined that the current motion information and the motion information on the scenario table are the same based on the determination code, the content of the scenario table is displayed on the scenario table. A gaming machine that is controlled so as not to set motion information and that produces a notice character on the screen across the next special figure fluctuation.

Next, control of the character defined in the motion table will be described.
In this embodiment, a condition is defined for the character defined in the motion table, and control is performed so as to create an animation by determining a basic (representative) character.
That is, when performing an effect on the display device 41, the scenario table is used as described above. In this scenario table, data for controlling the flow of a specific effect (which motion table is executed at what timing) Data that specifies whether or not to perform) is set.
The motion table has motion data of each effect (mainly effect display) that is blocked (that is, data that specifies image data to be displayed and its display position), and the motion is blocked. Meaning directing action.
Therefore, in the motion table, for each display element (background, left symbol, right symbol,...), The motion is defined in time series so that the drawing can be controlled in units of frames and arranged as data. . In addition, even if the character drawn in the motion table performs differently depending on the situation, if the same movement, a single character (basic character) that becomes the basic (representative) for a plurality of the same kind of characters is determined, Only one way of motion data is registered. In other words, motion is defined and arranged as data for only one basic character.

  In this case, the basic character is set to the one with the lowest jackpot reliability in the group to be replaced. For example, if there are white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow types in the character related to the operation of the effect button 9 displayed in the effect of the push button notice (PB notice), the character is defined in the motion data of the push button notice. In the example shown in the motion table of FIG. 176, “white” having the lowest jackpot reliability is used as the button character to be performed. However, it is assumed that they appear in common at the time of loss and the big hit.

A specific example of the above control will be described with reference to a push button notification motion table shown in FIG.
The motion table shown in FIG. 186 defines data for displaying an animation in which the effect button 9 repeats unevenness in order to prompt the player to press the effect button 9. That is, in FIG. 186, the button character defined in the motion data of the push button notice is “white” having the lowest jackpot reliability when the effect button 9 is not pushed (protruded) in the PB notice. When the production button 9 is pressed (recessed) in the PB notice, it is set to use “black” (common regardless of the lighting color), which is the image of the production button 9 being turned off. Yes.
In each row of the motion table shown in FIG. 186, a command code is set at the head, and subsequently, a parameter corresponding to the command is set. However, there may be no parameters. Each data (code) of the motion table is designated by a line, and an index number is shown on the right side of the table. For example, the data in the first line is an additional code, and the index number at that time is “0”.
Since the motion table commands and parameters have been described in detail with reference to FIG. 176, only the outline necessary for the description of the operation will be described below.

In the motion table shown in FIG. 186, the first to twelfth lines (index numbers “0” to “11”) correspond to the display in which the effect button 9 is not pressed (projected) in the PB notice. The 13th to 24th lines (index numbers “12” to “23”) correspond to the display of the state in which the effect button 9 is pressed (dented) in the PB notice.
First, “push button white” is set as a basic character in the additional code in the first row (index number is “0”) of the motion table shown in FIG.
Accordingly, when there are a plurality of types of push button characters displayed in the push button notice (PB notice), the “button with the lowest jackpot reliability as the push button character defined in the motion data of the push button notice” Motion data is registered with the character “white” (corresponding to a basic character).
This is to facilitate the common use of the push button character since there is a possibility that it will appear in common in the push button notice in both cases of big hit and off.

Next, the behavior code is set in the second line (specifically, the command “behavior code” and the parameters “object index (0)” and “behavior index (0)” are set), and the PB notice character (push button) ) Change the color. For example, the color of the PB notice character (push button) is changed from white to yellow.
This is an operation to replace the color of the push button character with another (for example, yellow) by this behavior processing when displaying the state where the production button 9 is not pressed (projected) in the PB notice. Is what you do.
Next, the movement 1 code is set in the third line. Thereby, the display position and display size of the push button character (object) after the behavior processing are designated.
Next, an end code is set in the fourth line. Thereby, the data for one frame is completed.
Thus, when displaying the state in which the effect button 9 is not pressed (projected) in the PB notice, “white” having the lowest jackpot reliability is set as the basic character as the push button character. At the time of display, the push button color is changed from white to another color (color based on the result lottery result. For example, yellow) by the behavior process.

On the other hand, when displaying the state in which the effect button 9 is pressed (depressed) in the PB notice, a deletion code is set in the 13th line (index number is “12”) of the motion table shown in FIG. The deletion of the object (push button character) is commanded. Next, on the 14th line, “push button black” is set as a basic character with an additional code.
This is an effect in the case where the button is pressed (depressed) in the animation display prompting the player to press the effect button 9 in the push button notice (PB notice). The character is “push button black”. In this case, the character when the button is on is the same for all actions (even when push buttons of various colors are displayed), so the subsequent behavior processing (in this case, the action of replacing the push button character color with another one) There is no.
That is, the behavior code is not set after the additional code, and the movement 1 code is set in the 15th line. Thereby, the display position and display size of the push button character (object: “push button black” as the basic character) are designated.
Next, an end code is set on the 16th line. Thereby, the data for one frame is completed.
As described above, when displaying the state in which the production button 9 is pressed (dented) in the PB notice, the “black” commonly used as the push button character is set as the basic character, and the push is performed. Display is done without replacing the button color with another color.

As described above, in the case of a notice (PB notice) that prompts the player to press the production button 9, motion data is registered in the motion table with the “button white” character (basic character) having the lowest jackpot reliability. It is done.
Then, when displaying the state in which the effect button 9 is not pressed (projected) in the PB notice, an operation of replacing the color of the push button character with another (for example, yellow) is performed by the behavior processing. After that, an operation of displaying the push button character on the screen is performed. After that, the result of the variable display game is lost or a big hit, but since the push button character starts with the “button white” character with the lowest reliability of the big hit, the data that can be used at both the time of the loss and the big hit Become.
For example, in the case of a big hit, replacing the “button white” character (basic character) with a rainbow (rainbow) push button character in the behavior process will increase the excitement to the player, and then the big hit As a result, the interest of the game is improved. Further, even if it is off, if a “button white” character (basic character) is replaced with a red push button character by behavioral processing, a game game with a high expectation of a big hit can be achieved.
In this way, the “button white” character with the lowest jackpot reliability is registered in the motion table as a basic character, and the change of the character with the progress of the production (however, for example, a push button character of the same kind If you want to change within the range of the character) by performing a behavior (function to replace the image data (character data) of the object (display element)) to replace the basic character with another in the control program, It becomes possible to cope with any display mode, and it becomes data that can be used in common at the time of losing and the big hit, the data capacity can be reduced, and the development efficiency is improved.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device for controlling the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device capable of performing an effect by controlling an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device,
The production control device
Character data storage means for storing a plurality of image data of still images or moving images;
Motion table storage means for storing a plurality of motion tables composed of the image data to be displayed on the display means and data for specifying the display position;
Scenario table storage means for storing a plurality of scenario tables made up of data for controlling the progress of effects including display effects on the display means;
In the motion table, one basic character is defined and set for motion data of a plurality of characters performing the same action,
Based on the scenario table selected according to the command from the game control device, the effect means is controlled to produce an effect,
A game machine having a configuration in which motion data of characters other than the basic character is created based on the motion data of the basic character.
Here, the image ROM 322 constitutes character data storage means, and the PROM (control ROM) 321 constitutes motion table storage means and scenario table storage means.

Details of the background of the inventive concept will be described below.
A conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-261724 has a plurality of displayable button image data, and a plurality of stored button image data based on a determination result such as a jackpot reliability. From this, control is performed such that one desired button image data is selected and displayed on the effect screen.
However, in the control as described above, it is necessary to store a lot of data as button image data that can be displayed, which increases the amount of data, complicates the image processing related to the operation of the button, and reduces the development efficiency. It was.
To explain from the viewpoint of image control, for example, when creating a variation animation, it is necessary to make a symbol character appear.
However, there are innumerable combinations (states) of symbols displayed on the screen of the display device 41, and it is impossible to create an animation reflecting all of them.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a basic (representative) character is determined and one animation is created (one in a group in which the characters move in the same way, but the characters are different), and the character replacement process is performed by the control program. By performing (for example, behavior processing), it is possible to cope with any display mode, thereby saving data capacity and improving development efficiency.
For example, the condition of the basic character used in the animation is that the address registered in the character ROM (image ROM 322) is the first (with a small number) in the same group (for example, a special figure displayed during normal operation). It is easy to perform behavioral (replacement) calculations by making it a thing or having the lowest big hit reliability.

Specifically, in the case of a push button as a character, if the motion (character drawing position) is the same as the push button motion data, there is basically only one way even if the displayed character is different. We do not provide it. Therefore, the animation for generating the push button motion data is created after a basic character (for example, “button white”) is determined.
That is, in this embodiment, control is performed such that a condition is defined for the character defined in the motion table, a basic (representative) character is determined, and one animation is created.
The basic character is set to the one with the lowest jackpot reliability in the group to be replaced.
For example, if there are white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow types of button characters displayed in the push button notice, the button character defined in the motion data of the push button notice has the highest hit reliability. Low “white” is used. However, it is assumed that they appear in common at the time of loss and the big hit.
Even when displaying the state in which the effect button 9 is pressed (depressed) in the PB notice, if the “white” button character is used, the effect button 9 is not pressed (protruded) in the PB notice. Since it is difficult to make a difference between the case of displaying and the effect, the “black” button character is set as the basic character when displaying the state in which the effect button 9 is pressed (depressed) in the PB notice.

On the other hand, in the case of a symbol, a character is created so as to start from the lowest number. For example, “1” is not the only representative. That is, the character is created so that it appears in a manner such as 1 → 2 → 3 →... → 9 → 1 →.
However, when the operation is switched (possibility of changing to another motion, timing with an option, etc.), start from “1” again. In this case, “1” is set as the basic character (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 190).
In addition, when registering characters in the character ROM (image ROM 322), the same group is consolidated (designs are the same (the same size), push buttons are the push buttons), and the numbers are in ascending order or the reliability of the big hit is low. Arrange them in order from the youngest address.
In this way, by registering the character with the lowest jackpot reliability in the motion table as a basic character, it becomes data that can be used in common at the time of both losing and hitting, making it easy to make common change processing by behavior, and the data capacity Savings and improving development efficiency.

Specific implementation points of the inventive concept are as follows.
In the flowchart of the effect control device 300, the process relating to the scenario table is the same as that in the case of performing independent scenario management for each display element described above, and the following corresponds in particular.
-Motion registration processing: FIG. 132
-PB waiting process: FIG.
PB determination branch processing: Step D579 in FIG. 130, FIG. 131, FIG. 136
-Motion control processing: FIG. 141
-Motion execution processing: FIGS. 142 and 143
・ Behavior index setting processing: FIG. 150
-PB color conversion processing: FIG. 155

Next, an application example to another character other than the push button character in the motion control in this embodiment will be described.
In addition, since the contents of the presentation differ depending on the contents of the command from the game control device 100 and the scenario table, even if the motion table is the same in the following application examples, the contents of the presentation of the variable display game are different. .
(1) Control for making display symbol number acquisition source the same First, control for making the display symbol number acquisition source the same will be described.
In the motion control of this embodiment, as described in the explanation of FIG. 175, even if the drawn character has different effects depending on the situation, the motion table is registered as a basic character so that only one way is registered for the same movement. Registered on the table is the character with the lowest number in the internal control (for example, the character with the lowest address in registration in the character ROM (image ROM 322), in the case of FIG. 175, the stop symbol “1”). Yes.
FIG. 187 is a diagram showing an operation for controlling the display of the stop symbol using the motion table as described above.
FIG. 187 (a) is a diagram showing the motion table of the left stop symbol display. In this motion table, symbol “1” (basic character) is registered as the object index 0 by the additional code (first line). Next, this symbol is replaced with a predetermined symbol by the behavior code specified by the behavior index 0 (second row) and displayed as a stop symbol at the display position specified by the movement code on the third row.

By controlling the display of the stop symbol using the motion table shown in FIG. 187 (a), it is possible to make the display symbol number acquisition source of the stop symbol the same both when the power is turned on and during the normal game.
More specifically, FIG. 187 (b) shows a stop symbol that is a result of the previous variable display game during the normal game. Here, a state of stopping at a symbol of “9, 6, 7” is displayed. In the display process in this case, “left stop symbol area”, “middle stop symbol area”, and “right stop symbol area” are arranged in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 311a in the effect control device 300, and “ The symbol data of “9”, “6”, and “7” are stored, read out, and drawn on the display device 41 to display the stopped symbols. Further, in this case, the motion table of the left stop symbol display shown in FIG. 187 (a) is used to replace the symbol to be stopped by the behavior code (here, the symbol data read from the storage area of the RAM 311a) and move. Control that is displayed as a stop symbol at the display position specified by the code is performed.

  On the other hand, FIG. 187 (c) shows a stop pattern of a special figure (decorative special figure) when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. Here, a state of stopping at a symbol of “2, 4, 1” is displayed. In the display process in this case, the “left stop symbol area”, “medium stop symbol area”, and “right stop symbol area” are arranged in the RAM 311a of the effect control device 300 in the same manner as the stop symbol display process in the normal game described above. In addition, symbol data “2”, “4”, and “1” are stored in these areas before the drawing process, read out, and drawn on the display device 41 to display the stopped symbols. Similarly, in this case, the motion table of the left stop symbol display shown in FIG. 187 (a) is used and replaced with the symbol to be stopped by the behavior code (here, the symbol data read from the storage area of the RAM 311a). Then, control is performed so as to be displayed as a stop symbol at the display position designated by the movement code.

In particular, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the symbol is displayed as an initial symbol irrespective of the stop symbol of the previous variation display game, so the symbol is a combination of fixed symbols. Therefore, it is possible to draw by designating the combination data of fixed symbols directly without using the “left stop symbol region”, “middle stop symbol region”, and “right stop symbol region” of the RAM 311a (display processing). In this embodiment, the “left stop symbol area”, “medium stop symbol area”, and “right stop symbol area” of the RAM 311a in the effect control device 300 are used in the same manner as in the stop symbol display process during the normal game. Before the stop symbol drawing process, the symbol data “2”, “4”, “1” is written in the same region, and the behavior data is applied to the symbols “2”, “4”, “1” in the same region. By replacing, the display device 41 displays a stop symbol when the power is turned on.
As described above, since the symbols are fixed combinations when the power is turned on, the display processing is faster when the combination data of the fixed symbols is directly specified and drawn. However, the “left stop symbol” of the RAM 311a is first displayed after one cushion. By rewriting the “region”, “middle stop symbol region”, and “right stop symbol region” with the symbols “2”, “4”, and “1”, the same RAM 311a region is referenced in the replacement process by behavior. As a result, motion control can be performed, and the motion table to be defined can be used in common (common at power-on and during normal games), which has the effect of reducing the data capacity.

This background will be described.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-230583, when a power-on command is received from a game control device, the sub board (production control device) side is prepared in advance for power restoration. The displayed image (stop symbol) is displayed on the display device.
However, in the control as described above, it is necessary to divide tables for symbol display control during normal games and when the power is turned on, and the data capacity is large.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the meaning of the symbol to be displayed on the display device 41 is different between when the power is turned on and during the normal game. The initial symbol is displayed when the power is turned on, and the previous stopped symbol is displayed during the normal game. By configuring so that the symbol data can be acquired from the area, the behavior processing for replacing the basic character can be used in common. In other words, the display symbol number acquisition source (“left stop symbol area”, “medium stop symbol area”, “right stop symbol area” in the RAM 311a) can be made the same when the power is turned on and during normal game play. As a result, the volume of motion data is reduced (there is no need to separate between normal gaming and when the power is turned on), and the development efficiency is improved.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device for controlling the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device capable of performing an effect by controlling an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device,
The production control device
Character data storage means for storing a plurality of image data of still images or moving images;
Motion table storage means for storing a plurality of motion tables composed of the image data to be displayed on the display means and data for specifying the display position;
Scenario table storage means for storing a plurality of scenario tables made up of data for controlling the progress of effects including display effects on the display means;
In the motion table, one basic character is defined and set for motion data of a plurality of characters performing the same action,
The initial symbol displayed on the display means when the power is turned on is changed to a fixed combination symbol by changing the basic character. A gaming machine configured to perform display control and to have the same display symbol number acquisition source both when the power is turned on and during normal games.
Here, the image ROM 322 constitutes character data storage means, and the PROM (control ROM) 321 constitutes motion table storage means and scenario table storage means.

(2) Control with one type of motion data registration Next, control with one type of motion data registration will be described.
In the motion control of this embodiment, even if the drawn character has different effects depending on the situation, only one way is registered in the motion table for the same movement, and it is registered on the table as a basic character. The character with the lowest number in control (for example, the character with the youngest address in registration in the character ROM (image ROM 322), in the case of FIG. 175, the stop symbol “1”).
FIG. 188 is a diagram for explaining the operation of controlling the display of stop symbols using the motion table as described above.
FIG. 188 is a diagram showing the motion table of the left stop symbol display. In this motion table, symbol “1” (basic character) is registered as object index 0 by the additional code (first line). That is, the character of the stop symbol “1” is designated.
Next, this symbol is replaced with a predetermined symbol by the behavior code specified by the behavior index 0 (second line). That is, the basic character is replaced with a character having a predetermined symbol by a behavior number (change processing registration number) for changing the stop symbol character. Next, it is displayed as a stop symbol at the display position designated by the movement code on the third line.

By controlling the display of the stop symbol using the motion table shown in FIG. 188, the drawing character is changed by the program, so that it is not necessary to prepare the motion data for the character type.
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 188, the display data of the left symbol at the time of stop can be considered as a plurality of types of patterns such as “1” to “9”. Only one type of character (in this case, the symbol character “1”) is registered as data for the bull, and changing to another symbol is a behavior change. Therefore, the data capacity of a symbol character is only a fraction.
This background will be described.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-168684, a character (for example, a symbol character) displayed on a display device is moved from a movement source (for example, ROM) to a movement destination (for example, RAM). When the character is moved and displayed on the screen of the display device, the position coordinates of the character are designated by the counter corresponding to the number of movements of the character (the position coordinates corresponding to the number of movements required from the start of movement to the end of movement are Have to be set up every time).
For this reason, it is necessary to prepare motion data for all of a plurality of types of characters, which increases the data capacity.
Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the drawn character has different effects depending on the situation, if the movement is the same, only one type of character (for example, “1” symbol character) is used for the motion table, and other symbols are used for the other symbols. Since the character is changed by the program behavior, it is not necessary to prepare the motion data for the character type, the data capacity can be reduced, and the development efficiency is improved.
A program to change the character (behavior processing, etc.) is required, but the type of stop symbol is likely to be different for each type of gaming machine. Increased versatility makes it easy to develop gaming machines.
Further, it is preferable that the character that changes depending on the situation, for example, the color change of the notice character, not the stop symbol character, can be changed by a program by subroutine information embedded in the motion table.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device for controlling the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device capable of performing an effect by controlling an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device,
The production control device
Character data storage means for storing a plurality of image data of still images or moving images;
Motion table storage means for storing a plurality of motion tables composed of the image data to be displayed on the display means and data for specifying the display position;
Scenario table storage means for storing a plurality of scenario tables made up of data for controlling the progress of effects including display effects on the display means;
In the motion table, even if the drawn character has different effects depending on the situation, if the same movement is defined, one type of character is defined and set.
A gaming machine characterized in that changing to a character other than the basic character is performed by behavior processing.
Here, the image ROM 322 constitutes character data storage means, and the PROM (control ROM) 321 constitutes motion table storage means and scenario table storage means.

(3) Control for making the same symbol character size Next, control for making the same symbol character size will be described.
In the motion control of the present embodiment, even if the design of the special figure (decoration special figure) is different for each game mode, the same character character size can be obtained by using the same symbol character size for the same movement (including stoppage). A motion table is used.
FIG. 189 is a diagram for explaining the operation of controlling the display of symbols using the motion table as described above.
FIG. 189 (a) is a diagram showing the motion table of the left stop symbol display. In this motion table, symbol “1” (basic character) is registered as the object index 0 by the additional code (first line). . That is, the character of the stop symbol “1” is designated.
Next, this symbol is replaced with a predetermined symbol by the behavior code specified by the behavior index 0 (second line). That is, the basic character is replaced with a character having a predetermined symbol by a behavior number (change processing registration number) for changing the stop symbol character. Next, it is displayed as a stop symbol at the display position designated by the movement code on the third line.

By controlling the display of the symbols using the motion table shown in FIG. 189 (a), the size of the transparent portion of the character can be adjusted to the same symbol character size even if the symbols are different in size. Thus, the motion table can be used in common, and the control complexity and the data capacity increase due to the increase of the motion table can be prevented.
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 189 (b), when the symbol character is a number in the normal mode, a number (here, “9, 6, 7 ") is displayed in three columns.
On the other hand, during the special mode, as shown in FIG. 189 (c), even if the symbol character is a numeral, a Chinese numeral with a special frame on the screen of the display device 41 (here, “8 , 7, 4 ") are displayed in three columns.
Even in such a case, the size is adjusted according to the size of the transparent portion of the character (in this case, the symbol character), and the same symbol character size is set in either the normal mode or the special mode. As shown in FIG. 189 (b), the transparent portion of the symbol character in the normal mode is larger, and thus the transparent portion of the symbol character in the normal mode is in the special mode. By making it larger than the transparent portion of the symbol character, it is adjusted to the same character size as the symbol character in the special mode.
Therefore, even if the special symbol design is different for each game mode, such as the normal mode or the special mode as described above, the same symbol character size is used as long as the movement (including stop) is the same. Therefore, it is possible to use a common motion table, prevent compression of the storage area due to an increase in data in the PROM (control ROM) 321, and increase data and control due to an increase in the motion table. Complexity can be prevented.

This background will be described.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-17885, a special symbol variation display game is different when stopping with a special symbol different from a normal symbol (temporary stop for revariation). The variation display game is controlled based on the variation pattern table. Therefore, it is not the control content of replacing the changing symbols based on the data of one pattern table.
For this reason, since the variation display game is controlled based on a plurality of different variation pattern tables, the data capacity is increased and the control is complicated due to the increase of the pattern tables.
In addition to the above, there are also those disclosed in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 2010-1113824 and 2010-1113825. However, these technologies change the design depending on the game mode (a predetermined character corresponds to a number). However, the variation pattern table differs depending on the corresponding character, and therefore, there is a problem similar to the above.
Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the design of the special figure is different for each game mode, such as the normal mode or the special mode, the design of the design is made using the motion table shown in FIG. 189 (a). By controlling the display, even if the size of the symbol is different, the size of the transparent part of the character is adjusted to the same symbol character size, so that the motion table can be used in common, and the motion table It prevents control complexity and data volume enlargement due to an increase in the number of tables.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device for controlling the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device capable of performing an effect by controlling an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device,
The production control device
Character data storage means for storing a plurality of image data of still images or moving images;
Motion table storage means for storing a plurality of motion tables composed of the image data to be displayed on the display means and data for specifying the display position;
Scenario table storage means for storing a plurality of scenario tables made up of data for controlling the progress of effects including display effects on the display means;
In the motion table, even if the drawn character has different effects depending on the situation, if the same movement is defined, one type of character is defined and set.
Even if the character design changes according to the game situation and the size is different, if the movement is the same including the stop state, the character display is controlled using a common motion table. Here, the game machine is characterized by having the same character size. Here, the image ROM 322 constitutes character data storage means, and the PROM (control ROM) 321 constitutes motion table storage means and scenario table storage means. To do.

(4) Control for setting the basic character to the character with the youngest number Next, control for setting the basic character to the character with the youngest number will be described.
This control is similar to the above-mentioned “(2) Control with one type of motion data registration”, but this control is from the viewpoint of control that it is easy to calculate a difference value for character replacement by behavior. It is described separately from the above description of the control in that the effect is derived.
In the motion control of this embodiment, even if the drawn character has different effects depending on the situation, only one way is registered in the motion table for the same movement, and it is registered on the table as a basic character. The character with the lowest number in control (for example, the character with the youngest address in registration in the character ROM (image ROM 322), in the case of FIG. 175, the stop symbol “1”).
FIG. 190 is a diagram for explaining the operation of controlling the display of the stop symbol using the motion table as described above.
FIG. 190 is a diagram showing a motion table with a left stop symbol display. In this motion table, symbol “1” (basic character) is registered as an object index 0 (first line) by an additional code. That is, the character of the stop symbol “1” is designated.
This is to set the character (number) having the smallest number (value) in the internal control as the symbol number (the symbol character having the stop number “1”) as the basic character.
Next, this symbol is replaced with a predetermined symbol by the behavior code specified by the behavior index 0 (second line). That is, the basic character is replaced with a character having a predetermined symbol by a behavior number (change processing registration number) for changing the stop symbol character. Next, it is displayed as a stop symbol at the display position designated by the movement code on the third line.

By controlling the display of the stop symbol using the motion table shown in FIG. 190, the character with the smallest number (value) in the internal control (the symbol character with the stop number “1”) is set as the basic character. Using this as a reference, it is easy to calculate a difference value such as character replacement by behavior (change processing), and control becomes easy.
More specifically, as shown in FIG. 190, the display data of the left symbol at the time of stop is originally “1” to “9”. Any value may be used as a reference (basic character), but “1”, which is the youngest number (value) in internal control, is used as a reference, so that “1” can be replaced with another stop symbol number. The difference can be easily calculated. For example, when replacing with “9” as another stop symbol number, the difference can be calculated simply by subtracting “1” from “9”, and this is the same for other stop symbol numbers (for example, “8”). Therefore, “other stop symbol number” − “1” = difference is always obtained, and the calculation is greatly simplified and facilitated. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an effect that the stop symbol display control using the motion table is easy.

This background will be described.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-168684, a character (for example, a symbol character) displayed on a display device is moved from a movement source (for example, ROM) to a movement destination (for example, RAM). When the character is moved and displayed on the screen of the display device, the position coordinates of the character are designated by the counter corresponding to the number of movements of the character (the position coordinates corresponding to the number of movements required from the start of movement to the end of movement are Have to be set up every time). In addition, there was no definition or concept of a reference character or the like.
Therefore, the control of character change is complicated and troublesome, and the development efficiency is also reduced.
Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the drawn character has different effects depending on the situation, if the movement is the same, only one type of basic character is included in the motion table, and the basic character is registered in the motion table. Is the character with the lowest number (value) in internal control (for example, the symbol character with stop number “1”), which makes it easy to calculate the difference when switching from the basic character to another stop symbol number. This makes it easier to control the display of stop symbols using motion tables, and improves development efficiency.

Note that, not only when the stop symbol number is controlled as described above, but also when, for example, control is performed to replace the notice character by behavior processing, the notice character and the like are internally ordered. If the notice character with the youngest number (value) is set as a basic character and the behavior processing is performed based on this character, it is easy to calculate a difference value for character replacement, etc., and it is easy to control. is there.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device for controlling the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device capable of performing an effect by controlling an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device,
The production control device
Character data storage means for storing a plurality of image data of still images or moving images;
Motion table storage means for storing a plurality of motion tables composed of the image data to be displayed on the display means and data for specifying the display position;
Scenario table storage means for storing a plurality of scenario tables made up of data for controlling the progress of effects including display effects on the display means;
In the motion table, even if the drawn character has different effects depending on the situation, if the same movement is defined, one type of character is defined and set.
The one type of character is configured so that the character with the lowest number in internal control is set as a basic character. Here, the image ROM 322 constitutes character data storage means, and is a PROM (control ROM) 321 constitutes a motion table storage means and a scenario table storage means.

(5) Control for setting the basic character to the one with the youngest address in the character ROM registration Next, a modified example of the above-mentioned “(4) Control for setting the basic character to the character with the youngest number” will be described.
In other words, FIG. 190 shows “(4) control for setting the basic character to the lowest numbered character”. However, the present invention is not limited to this control mode. For example, as shown in FIG. A modification may be adopted in which control is performed to set the address with the youngest address in the registration.
In this modification, the symbol “1” (basic character) is registered as the object index 0 by the additional code, as shown in FIG. 191 (a), the motion table of the left stop symbol display (first line). . That is, the character of the stop symbol “1” is designated.
In this case, the symbol “1” (basic character) is set to the one with the youngest address in the character ROM (image ROM 322) registration.

Here, FIG. 191 (b) shows a list table of registered character members (in this case, symbol characters) in the character ROM (image ROM 322).
In addition, when registering characters in the character ROM (image ROM 322), the same group is hardened (the symbols (the same size) for the symbols, the push buttons for the push buttons), the numerical order is small, and the big hit reliability is low. In order, etc., they are arranged from the youngest address. Therefore, the symbol “1” is registered at the youngest address for the symbol character.
In the motion table processing of the left stop symbol display shown in FIG. 191 (a), the instructions after the additional code are the same as those in FIG. 190, and the instructions of the behavior code, the movement code, and the end code are sequentially executed. .

In this manner, by controlling the display of the stop symbol using the motion table shown in FIG. 191 (a), the character with the youngest address in the character ROM (image ROM 322) registration (the symbol of the stop number “1”) is displayed. Character) is set as a basic character, and character replacement control by behavior (change processing) is performed based on this.
In this case, among the symbol characters registered in the character ROM (image ROM 322), the character with the youngest address (the symbol character with the stop number “1”) is used as a reference (basic character) and is replaced by behavior processing. Address calculation to the stop symbol character becomes easy.
For example, when replacing with “9” as another stop symbol number, the difference of the address calculation can be calculated by simply subtracting “1” from “9”, which is the other stop symbol number (for example, “8”). ) Is the same, and always “other stop symbol number” − “1” = difference in address calculation, and the calculation is greatly simplified and facilitated. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an effect that the stop symbol display control using the motion table is easy.
Note that, not only when the stop symbol number is controlled as described above, but also when, for example, the control of replacing the notice character by the behavior processing is performed, the notice character is ordered using the registered address of the character ROM (image ROM 322) as an index. Then, similarly, if a notice character or the like having the youngest address in the character ROM (image ROM 322) registration is set as a basic character and behavior processing is performed based on this, a difference value for character replacement or the like is calculated. It has the effect of being easy and easy to control.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device for controlling the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device capable of performing an effect by controlling an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device,
The production control device
Character data storage means for storing a plurality of image data of still images or moving images;
Motion table storage means for storing a plurality of motion tables composed of the image data to be displayed on the display means and data for specifying the display position;
Scenario table storage means for storing a plurality of scenario tables made up of data for controlling the progress of effects including display effects on the display means;
In the motion table, even if the drawn character has different effects depending on the situation, if the same movement is defined, one type of character is defined and set.
The one type of character is configured such that the character with the youngest address in registration in the character data storage means is set as a basic character. Here, the image ROM 322 has character data storage means. The PROM (control ROM) 321 constitutes a motion table storage means and a scenario table storage means.

Next, control for predicting and selecting the background type before the end of the jackpot will be described.
In this embodiment, control is performed such that a background type is predicted and selected from the game situation before the end of the jackpot effect, and a symbol stop screen using the selected background type is displayed before the end of the jackpot ending period. Is done.
Specifically, after the big hit effect, the display returns to the normal screen for changing the special figure (decorative special figure, the same applies hereinafter) of the display device 41, where a background screen (for example, a background movie) that harmonizes with the symbol fluctuation. ) Is displayed. In this case, there is a high possibility that the type of background screen and the shape of the special figure differ depending on the gaming state at that time (for example, probability variation, time reduction, normal probability, etc.).
The effect control device 300 determines the game state based on the probability information command from the game control device 100, but the game control device 100 may change the state of the probability or the like when the jackpot operation is completed. Therefore, the probability information command can be transmitted just before starting the special figure fluctuation after the big hit.
However, if the type of the background screen is changed by receiving the probability information command, the background screen for the big hit ending screen is suddenly switched to the background screen for special figure fluctuations, which can be a stunning effect. High nature.

This background will be described.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-105528, a display device based on an end command, a short time background command, or the like received from the game control device at the sub-board (production control device) after the big hit ends. The background screen was switched to a gaming state called a short-time background. In this case, the command from the game control device is not sent to the production control device unless it is just before starting the special figure change after the big hit is over, so the background screen for the special figure change suddenly from the big hit end screen It was switched to, and it was a stunning production, and the impression to the player was bad.
On the other hand, the production control device determines the gaming state based on the command from the game control device, but the game control device side may change the state such as the probability when the jackpot operation is finished. The command can be transmitted immediately before the start of the special figure change after the big hit.

In this embodiment, therefore, a time (predetermined symbol display period) for displaying a so-called stop symbol display screen is provided during a specified time (for example, about 1 to 2 seconds) before the end of the jackpot ending operation. The background screen is a background screen at the time of special figure change in the normal game after the big hit, so that a smooth transition from the big hit ending period to the special figure change game in the normal game state can be performed.
Specifically, the control of the ending period is as shown in FIG.
In FIG. 192, the big hit operation is performed in a plurality of rounds, and an ending period Te is provided in the final round (for example, 16 rounds), an effect suitable for the end of the big hit is performed, and the next special figure fluctuation starts. Provided.
In this case, in the first half period T1 of the ending period Te, the ending movie is displayed on the screen of the display device 41, and the big hit end effect is performed. On the other hand, the second half period T2 (for example, 1 to 2 seconds) of the ending period Te is a period (predetermined symbol display period) for displaying a stop symbol display (for example, the jackpot symbol “7, 7, 7” in the jackpot). ) And the background movie is displayed behind the stop symbol display as the background of the screen at that time. The background movie at this time needs to be produced in harmony with the next game state (for example, probability fluctuation, time reduction, normal probability, etc.) after the big hit.

Here, at the start of the second half period T2, the probability control command from the game control device 100 (a command for notifying whether or not the probability changes after the end of the big hit) has not yet been received by the effect control device 300 side. The probability information command is only transmitted from the game control device 100 immediately before the end of the jackpot ending period.
For this reason, the effect control device 300 needs to predict the gaming state after the jackpot is finished in order to set the background movie in accordance with the gaming state to be displayed after the reception of the probability information command.
Thus, for example, a symbol command received during a jackpot (which may have been received at the start of symbol variation. If it is operating normally, it should be basically the same information just before the jackpot ends), fanfare command, ending In addition to the contents of the command and the like, the prediction is performed in consideration of the internal parameters (internal information) of the effect control device 300.
The internal parameters are as follows.
By the distribution process in the production control process in the production control device 300, for example, the game control device 100 keeps hidden from entering the probability variation even if information on the probability variation symbol is sent, as if it was a normal symbol. There may be a case where an effect to be performed (for example, a so-called latent probability changing state) is performed, in which case the information is information corresponding to an internal parameter.
As described above, the prediction accuracy of the next game situation is improved by performing the prediction considering not only the command received from the game control device 100 but also the internal parameters of the effect control device 300.

Then, the background type is predicted and selected from the gaming situation based on the various information as described above. Since a plurality of types of background movies are stored in advance in the image ROM 322, this is performed by selecting one background movie that matches the gaming situation after the big hit from the plurality of types of background movies. Here, the background movie selection process is performed by the behavior process of the control program.
For example, even if an image (for example, a movie (movie)) drawn in a motion table has a different effect depending on the situation of the game game, conditions (for example, image size and If the drawing position and the like are the same, only one image data is registered for the same type of gaming state, and the registered image data is converted into other image data by behavioral processing when the presentation differs depending on the game game situation. By replacing, control is performed to select the type of image.

As an example, as a background movie when transitioning to a normal game after the jackpot ends, the background movie image data that matches the gaming state of only the short time without probability fluctuation is used as the background image after the jackpot ends before the jackpot ends. If the game state after the big hit ends is a probability variation after registration, if the background movie is replaced with a background movie corresponding to the probability variation by behavior processing, the control is simple and easy. Become.
Then, in the ending period Te shown in FIG. 192, the background movie selected at the time when the first half period T1 ends and the second half period T2 starts is displayed on the screen of the display device 41. As a result, in the second half period T2 of the ending period Te, the background movie is displayed over the background of the stop symbol display (for example, “7, 7, 7”), and the next game after the end of the jackpot An effect harmonized with the state (for example, probability variation, time reduction, normal probability, etc.) is performed.
Next, a probability information command is transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300 just before the latter half period T2 in the ending period Te ends. Also, the special symbol variation display game based on the next variation command is started from the timing when the second half period T2 ends.

In this way, in the effect control device 300, in addition to command information (such as an ending command) already received from the game control device 100, in addition to the internal parameters of the effect control device 300, the normal situation after the big hit is considered. Control that displays a symbol stop screen using the selected background movie as a background screen on the display device 41 before the end of the jackpot ending period is selected by predicting the background type in the game and selecting one background movie. Done.
Therefore, by making a time to display the symbol stop screen using the background movie before the big hit ending operation is finished, it is possible to prevent a sudden change of the effect screen and improve the effect.
In addition, since the prediction based on the internal parameters of the production control device 300 is preliminarily handled, the possibility of normal display is increased without taking measures when the probability information command is not received, and the development is efficiently performed.・ Control can be performed.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device for controlling the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device capable of performing an effect by controlling an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device,
The production control device
In the display means, it is possible to execute a variable display game including the occurrence of a special gaming state by variably displaying and stopping a plurality of types of decorative decorations for effects set, and before the end of the special gaming state ending operation Provide a predetermined symbol display period for displaying the decorative symbol stop display screen,
Background type selection means for predicting and selecting the background type in the normal game after the special gaming state based on at least the command information from the already received game control device;
A background effect unit for performing an effect of displaying the background screen of the background type selected by the background type selection unit as the background of the decorative symbol stop display during the symbol display period;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:
Here, the production control device 300 constitutes background type selection means and background production means.
Further, the inventive concept of a configuration in which the background type is predicted and selected before the effect control device 300 receives the probability information command is expressed as follows.
Background production means
A gaming machine characterized by predicting and selecting a background type before an effect control device receives a probability information command transmitted from a game control device at the end of a special gaming state.

Specific implementation points of the inventive concept are as follows.
In the flowchart and data of the effect control device 300, the processing related to the scenario table is the same as that in the case of performing independent scenario management for each display element described above, and the following corresponds in particular.
Motion registration processing: FIG. 132 (Step D637, Step D641, etc.)
・ Ending scenario table: Fig. 178

Next, a modified example of the control for predicting and selecting the background type before the end of the jackpot will be described.
The present embodiment may be modified as follows.
(1) If the predicted background type matches the content of the probability information command, the background type can be used as it is as the background screen in the normal game after the jackpot ends. What is necessary is just to correct to the background kind according to the content of the command (because priority is given to the instruction from the game control apparatus 100).
In this case, the background movie of the predicted background type and the background movie to be changed according to the content of the probability information command have the same conditions (for example, the image size, drawing position, etc.) other than the image playback content. Because it is set, change the background type by replacing the image data of the registered predicted background movie with the image data of the background movie that changes according to the contents of the probability information command by behavior processing (that is, the probability information command The control may be such that the background type is adjusted to the content).
Note that with the control according to the present embodiment, the predicted background type and the background type in the normal game after the jackpot are not different.
On the other hand, there is a possibility that the difference between the two may occur at the time of inspection during the development of a gaming machine (since it is possible to send a command ignoring the flow of the game), various commands are sent. If development that confirms the result is performed, the possibility that the predicted background type is different from the background type in the normal game after the end of the jackpot can be extremely reduced.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The production control device
Character data storage means for storing a plurality of image data of still images or moving images;
Motion table storage means for storing a plurality of motion tables composed of the image data to be displayed on the display means and data for specifying the display position;
Scenario table storage means for storing a plurality of scenario tables made up of data for controlling the progress of effects including display effects on the display means;
In the motion table, even if the rendered video varies depending on the situation, if the conditions other than the playback content of the video are the same, one type of video is registered,
The game machine is characterized in that the behavior is changed to another movie.

(2) When it is difficult to determine whether or not the predicted background type matches the content of the probability information command, for example, a default background screen is determined in advance for each content of the probability information command, and the default background screen May be displayed as a background screen in the normal game after the big hit. If the content of the probability information command is, for example, “probability variation”, a gorgeous default background movie for “probability variation”, and if “low probability / short time”, “normal default background for“ low probability / short time ” Set it as a movie.
And if this time is a big hit with probability fluctuation, if you use a background movie for "probability fluctuation", if it is a normal big hit, if you use a background movie for "low probability / short time", there will be no big difference , You will be able to produce a safer performance without compromising the fun of the game.

Next, a description will be given of the control for efficiently performing the rendering process by defining a plurality of objects of the same category in the motion table.
In this embodiment, a plurality of objects (for example, characters) of the same category are defined in the motion table to control the production.
That is, although motion data (image data to be displayed and data for specifying the display position thereof) is registered for each display element (for example, background, left symbol, right symbol,...) In the motion table. These data are registered together in an object group defined as the same category.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 170 as an example of the motion table of the left symbol normal variation start, for example, for the object group defined as the left symbol category, not only the current symbol but also the previous symbol, the next symbol, etc. Is also defined in one motion table as a symbol character. For each of these objects (characters such as the current symbol, the previous symbol, and the next symbol), a character number, coordinates, size, behavior, and the like are defined on the motion table as motion data.
Although not shown in the data of the motion table shown in FIG. 170, the effect of rendering may be enhanced by adding “transparency” to the motion data. As the “transparency” data, for example, the same definition as the line of the effect 1 code and the effect 2 code as shown in FIG.
When motion data of “transparency” is added to the motion table, in the variable display game on the display device 41, the pattern is opaque when the pattern (decoration special figure) starts to change, but the transparency gradually increases after the change starts. At the time of maximum speed, there will be a performance that will be almost transparent.
By using such “transparency” motion data, there is an effect of making it easier to see the notice character displayed in the background or behind the symbol. Specifically, while the symbols are changing at high speed, even if the symbols are displayed in an opaque manner, the player can somehow follow the background and the notice character. Therefore, by increasing the transparency of the symbol as much as possible so that the behavior of fluctuation can be understood, it is easy to see the notice effect performed behind the symbol, and the interest of the game is improved. Then, when the symbol variation slows down, an operation of gradually returning to opaque is performed.
In addition, when “transparency” data is added, the motion table is defined so that the transparency is set except where 100% opaque display is performed.
In this way, by defining the symbol character within one motion table, for example, in the case of the left symbol category, not only the symbol (current symbol) that is visible in front of the screen 41a of the display device 41 but also the symbol symbol. The next symbol and the previous symbol arranged above and below the symbol are also defined in the same motion table. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 171 (a), when the current symbol that is visible in front of the screen 41a of the display device 41 is “1”, the next symbol “2” arranged on the current symbol “1”. Is positioned immediately before the screen 41a, and a part of the previous symbol “9” arranged under the current symbol “1” is controlled to be displayed on the screen 41a, and an effect of symbol variation is performed. become.

The motion table corresponding to this effect is shown in FIG. 170 described above.
That is, FIG. 170 shows the data for the first four frames of the motion table of the normal variation (first half) of the left symbol. In this motion table, symbol “2”, symbol “1”, symbol “9” are defined as the same motion table, and symbol variation display is performed, but symbol number “1” is the center. It can be relatively calculated that the previous symbol is “9” the previous symbol and the next symbol is “2” the next symbol, so when the coordinates return to the top, the central symbol is Since the control object can be limited to one, such as “2”, a simple structure can be achieved.
Therefore, according to the control using the motion table shown in FIG. 170, not only the current symbol “1” but also the next symbol “2” and the previous symbol “9” are defined in the same motion table. Since the motion control of the character is performed, when performing the replacement calculation of the next symbol “2” and the previous symbol “9” on the basis of the current symbol “1”, a character of the same category (here, the symbol character) has one motion. By being defined in the table, it is possible to reuse the parameters of the calculation, and the calculation process can be performed efficiently.

That is, when controlling the production using such a motion table, the motions of characters in the same category are registered together as an object group in one motion table, and thus similar. It is possible to collectively control characters in the same category as the action. Therefore, it is easy to handle when creating a scenario table for managing motion, the amount of data can be reduced, the control process becomes easy to think, and development efficiency is improved. As a result, it will increase the interest of the game.
This background will be described.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-679, control for determining a display position of a symbol is performed by setting a reference coordinate and a vector value.
This is a control using a data structure having a plurality of parameters.
However, in conventional gaming machines, control is performed using a data structure having a plurality of parameters. Therefore, even if a character of the same category has a similar action like a symbol character, each symbol character is displayed. Since the position and the like (motion) are individually controlled, the control is complicated, the data capacity is large, and the development efficiency is lowered.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a plurality of objects (for example, characters) of the same category are defined in the motion table (character data such as character number, coordinates, size, behavior, etc. are defined for each of the plurality of objects), and the production control is performed. By doing so, characters in the same category that have similar behavior can be controlled collectively and the parameters of the operation can be reused, so that the calculation processing can be performed efficiently. ing.
Objects that are defined as the same category are not irrelevant at all, and objects that have similar behavior are defined in the same category.
For example, when controlling a symbol, when the current symbol, the next symbol, the previous symbol, etc. are displayed on the screen of the display device 41, the next symbol and the previous symbol are replaced on the basis of the current symbol. If a category character (in this case, a symbol character) is defined in one motion table, it can be instructed in the same table (instruction for replacement calculation). It can be made and program development is efficient. Further, when performing the replacement calculation, the calculation parameters can be reused, and the control can be performed efficiently. In particular, the efficiency of arithmetic processing and the like is improved.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device for controlling the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device capable of performing an effect by controlling an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device,
The production control device
Character data storage means for storing a plurality of image data of still images or moving images;
Motion table storage means for storing a plurality of motion tables composed of the image data to be displayed on the display means and data for specifying the display position;
Scenario table storage means for storing a plurality of scenario tables made up of data for controlling the progress of effects including display effects on the display means;
In the motion table, a plurality of objects belonging to the same category are defined and registered,
A gaming machine configured such that motions of a plurality of objects belonging to the same category can be controlled using the same motion table.
Here, the image ROM 322 constitutes character data storage means, and the PROM (control ROM) 321 constitutes motion table storage means and scenario table storage means.

Specific implementation points of the inventive concept are as follows.
In the flowchart and data of the effect control device 300, the processing related to the scenario table is the same as that in the case of performing independent scenario management for each display element described above, and the following corresponds in particular.
-Motion registration processing: FIG. 132
-Motion control processing: FIG. 141
Motion command execution processing: FIGS. 142 and 143
Bitmap addition processing: FIG. 144
-Motion table at the start of the left symbol normal fluctuation: Fig. 170

Next, a modified example of the present embodiment will be described with respect to presentation control in which a plurality of objects of the same category are defined in the motion table.
The present embodiment may be modified as follows.
(1) Objects defined in the motion table as the same category are not limited to symbol characters. For example, for characters appearing in a notice effect or other display effects, a plurality of objects of the same category may be defined in the same motion table.
Specifically, for example, the “button character” when prompting the press of the effect button 9, the “military character” appearing after being pressed, the “self speech balloon, the serif character” of the military commander, etc. A plurality of objects of the same category may be defined in the table.
In this way, it is possible to collectively control the characters of the same category that are related operations in the push button notice effect, and the calculation process can be performed efficiently.

Next, control for drawing a character that appears to be a still image display using a one-image moving image character will be described.
In this embodiment, a normal moving image display character is stored in the image ROM 322 using a moving image character, and a character that looks like a still image display by repeatedly displaying one still image (appears as a still image). Character) is stored using a one-image moving image character of a format that repeatedly displays a still image composed of only one image. When these characters are displayed on the display device 41, a common motion table is stored. The drawing is controlled using.
In other words, even if the character looks like a still image on the screen of the display device 41 that the player sees, the internal control of the effect control device 300 is configured with only one image in the form of repeatedly displaying the still image. The one-image moving image character is stored in the image ROM 322, and the one-image moving image character is created using data in a format in which the same still image composed of only one image is repeatedly displayed.

An example of a motion table that defines a motion using a one-image moving image character is shown in the lower part of FIG.
The lower part of FIG. 179 shows an example of the structure of a symbol movie for sharing a motion table, and in particular, a motion table for performing a temporary stop (temporary stop for re-variation) of the left symbol. It is.
In the motion table shown in the lower part of FIG. 179, when k = 3 (the designated line is the fourth line), the command is a decode code for instructing decoding of the movie, and the object index 0 is acquired. Since the symbol is “1” added at 0 (first line), the motion data of the left temporary stop corresponding to this symbol “1” is decoded and executed.
At this time, when the temporary stop of the left symbol is displayed as a still image of “1”, a plurality of decode codes are repeated, whereby a plurality of one-image moving image characters are decoded and read from the image ROM 322, and FIG. As shown in a), a tiger character imitating the symbol “1” is drawn on the screen 41 a of the display device 41 as a special decoration. Since a single-image moving image character is created by a movie (still image movie) composed of the same image (that is, the same still image) (that is, a single-image moving image character repeats the same still image composed of only one image) Therefore, even if it is reproduced as a moving image, the visual image itself does not change, and a still image similar to a still image character is displayed as shown in FIG. 179 (a). Visible to the player as a display. As described above, the still image movie is a movie in which the same type of character composed of only one image is continuously displayed by the internal control of the effect control device 300 even if it looks still.
However, in the motion table shown in the lower part of FIG. 179, since the y coordinate of the still image of the symbol “1” changes every time, the still image of the symbol “1” fluctuates in the vertical direction in the process of temporary stop. The temporary stop operation effect is performed.
When the temporary stop of the left symbol is displayed as a still image of “1”, there are many games with low reliability of the big hit even if the symbol re-changes after the temporary stop, and there are many results of loss.

On the other hand, when displaying the temporary stop of the left design as an animation video of “1”, the normal video character is decoded and read from the image ROM 322 according to the instruction of the decode code, and is displayed as shown in FIG. 179 (b). On the screen 41a of the apparatus 41, the temporary stop action of the symbol “1” is displayed as a decorative special figure while the tiger character imitating the symbol “1” is in a moving image state. At this time, the animation video of the tiger character imitating the pattern “1” is displayed in such an effect that it sways while moving and temporarily stops.
When the temporary stop of the left pattern is displayed as an animation movie of “1”, there are many games with high reliability of the big hit, and it becomes a big hit by re-variation after the temporary stop, or hot reach production after the temporary stop. There are many cases.

As described above, in the motion table that defines the motion of the image, the motion table is commonly used by defining a normal moving image character and a one-image moving image character that appears to be a still image display in the same table. I have to.
When a normal moving image character that appears as a moving image display and a one-image moving character that appears as a still image display are displayed on the display device 41, drawing control is performed using a common motion table. For a one-image moving image character that appears to be displayed, drawing is performed using data in a format in which the same still image composed of only one image is repeatedly displayed.
In this case, since the one-image moving image character that looks like a still image is created by a movie composed of the same image (the same still image), the appearance image does not change even when played back as a moving image. The display is the same as the character.

  Therefore, since the one-image moving image character that looks like a still image is stored in the image data format in the image ROM 322 of the production control device 300 and handled as a moving image, the motion table can be used in common. It is not necessary to increase the number of tables (data capacity reduction), it is possible to prevent the control ROM 321 from being compressed (that is, capacity reduction, etc.), and to facilitate control by reducing the number of data items. In addition, ease of management can be expected, and development efficiency is improved.

This background will be described.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-17885, when stopping with a special symbol different from the normal symbol (temporary stop for re-variation), it is based on a different variation pattern table. Controls drawing of symbols.
However, the conventional control does not replace the symbols with one variation pattern, but the number of variation pattern tables increases, leading to compression of the control ROM (ie, increase in capacity, etc.). In addition, the increase in the number of data items complicates the control and reduces the development efficiency.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the motion table that defines the motion of the image defines the motion table by defining the character of the normal moving image and the one-image moving image character that appears to display a still image in the same table. -The common use of the bulls does not increase the number of motion tables, and the data capacity is reduced.

More specifically, if the moving image is displayed on the display device 41, a movie decoding instruction is defined in the motion table.
However, in the case of still image display, since decoding is not necessary, the same motion table cannot be used in common with the case of using a moving image character even if the effect is the same movement.
This is because, when displaying a moving image character, data for sequentially decoding a movie is required, and it is not common to displaying a still image character.
On the other hand, if two types of motion tables are prepared, the motion data is simplified, but the controlling side (program of the production control device 300) needs to be selected according to the situation, and the control becomes complicated. There is a risk that.
Therefore, even if the character looks like a still image, in the internal control executed by the program of the effect control device 300, character data (data of a one-image moving image character that looks like a still image display) in a moving image format is prepared. In the case of producing a character whose appearance is a still image, the motion table is made common by assuming that a moving image character that is data in the moving image format is used.

In this way, the one-image moving image character that looks like a still image is stored in the image data format of the image ROM 322 inside the effect control device 300, and is handled as a moving image so that the motion table can be used in common. The number of motion tables need not be increased (data capacity reduction), the control ROM 321 can be prevented from being compressed (that is, the capacity can be reduced, etc.), and control can be facilitated by reducing the number of data items. In addition, management efficiency can be expected, and development efficiency is improved.
In addition, in the case of motion data dedicated to still images, if a still image movie is used without playing back a movie (for example, only the first image of a one-image movie character is displayed), it becomes a mere still image, Since it is not necessary to prepare character data for a single still image, the data amount can be saved.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device for controlling the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device capable of performing an effect by controlling an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device,
The production control device
Character data storage means for storing a plurality of image data of still images or moving images;
Motion table storage means for storing a plurality of motion tables composed of the image data to be displayed on the display means and data for specifying the display position;
Scenario table storage means for storing a plurality of scenario tables made up of data for controlling the progress of effects including display effects on the display means;
In the character data storage means, a normal moving image display character is stored using a moving image character, and a character that appears to be a still image display is a one-image moving image character that repeatedly displays a still image composed of only one image. Memorize using
In the motion table, a common motion table is used for data related to the motion of both a normal moving image display character and a single image moving character in a format that repeatedly displays a still image composed of only one image. Register,
When displaying a normal moving image display character and a one-image moving image character in a format in which a still image composed of only one image is repeatedly displayed on the display means, drawing is performed using a common motion table. A game machine that is configured to render a single image moving image character so that it appears as a still image display by repeatedly displaying one still image of the same type.

Specific implementation points of the inventive concept are as follows.
In the flowchart of the effect control device 300, the process relating to the scenario table is the same as that in the case of performing independent scenario management for each display element described above, and the following corresponds in particular.
-Motion registration processing: FIG. 132
-Motion control processing: FIG. 141
Motion command execution processing: FIGS. 142 and 143
・ Video addition processing: FIG. 145
・ Motion table at the time of temporary stop of the left symbol: Fig.

Next, a modification of the present embodiment will be described with respect to control for drawing a character that appears to be a still image display using a one-image moving image character.
The present embodiment may be modified as follows.
(1) Even for a motion table that requires only a still image, use still image movie character data in a moving image format using one image moving image character instead of still image data, and do not instruct movie decoding. Any configuration may be used.
With such a configuration, it is possible to produce an effect that can be displayed as a still image using a single image moving image character without using still image data, and it is not necessary to prepare character data for both still images and still image movies. There is an advantage that can be done.

Next, a description will be given of control in which a processing code related to sound output is provided in a scenario table related to the effect of PB notice (push button notice).
In the present embodiment, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 176, an example of a scenario table relating to the effect of PB notice is provided, and the control of the effect is performed by providing a processing code relating to sound output in this scenario table.
Specifically, when the display prompts the user to press the PB (production button 9) on the screen of the display device 41 while the game is in progress, when the player presses the production button 9, a button pressing sound is output. For example, a warrior appears and a notice effect is given to talk about the lines. This effect is controlled by a scenario table shown in the upper part of FIG. 176 for managing images of characters and the like.
In the scenario table at the top of FIG. 176, lines 1 to 4 (index numbers 0 to 3 shown on the right side of the table) are common parts, and buttons are pressed to lines 5 to 6 (index numbers 4 to 5). If there is no button, the seventh to fifteenth lines (index numbers 6 to 14) are the operation units when the button is pressed.
In the third row (index number 2) of the scenario table, PB waiting code data of PB determination (button effective period 90 frames) is set, and whether or not the effect button 9 is pressed during the period of 90 frames. Based on the determination result, if the effect button 9 is turned on in the next PB determination branch code, the scenario data jumps by +3 (proceeds to the operation section when the effect button 9 is pressed). If it is off, the scenario data advances by +1 (proceeds to the operation part when the effect button 9 is not pressed).
As described above, since the PB wait code data for determining whether or not the effect button 9 is pressed in the period of 90 frames is set in the scenario table, the effect button 9 is purposely pressed by another program. It is not necessary to determine whether or not the flag has been set, and a process such as setting a flag is unnecessary. If the control of the effect is advanced according to the scenario table shown in the upper part of FIG. .

In this case, in the scenario table related to the effect of the PB notice, the scenario data when the effective time ends without the effect button 9 being pressed, and the effect is advanced by pressing the effect button 9 There is scenario data.
The former corresponds to the 5th to 6th lines (index numbers 4 to 5) of the scenario table as described above, and is scenario data of the operation unit when the effect button 9 is not pressed.
On the other hand, the latter corresponds to the 7th to 15th lines (index numbers 6 to 14) of the scenario table, and is scenario data of the operation unit when the effect button 9 is pressed.
Here, in the scenario data portion where the production progresses when the production button 9 is pressed, a processing code for setting output of a button press sound for sounding when the production button 9 is pressed is provided. This processing code corresponds to the button sound setting on the 8th line (index number 7), and the sound No. Data (15) (corresponding to a code for processing related to sound output) is provided.
Accordingly, during the progress of the game, the scenario table shown in the upper part of FIG. 176 is used during the PB advance notice to control the production, so that a display prompting the user to press the PB (production button 9) is displayed on the screen of the display device 41. When the player presses the effect button 9, the sound No. specified by the “voice setting code” is displayed. A button press sound of (15) is output, and for example, a warrior appears and a notice effect is performed in which a speech is spoken.
On the other hand, when a display prompting the user to press the PB (effect button 9) is displayed on the screen of the display device 41, the button pressing sound is not output unless the player presses the effect button 9.

  In this way, since the production control is executed by the processing code called “voice setting code” for setting the output of the button press sound in the scenario table, it is not necessary to confirm whether the button press sound is sounded or not. Since the control contents are in the same scenario table, it is easy to manage the synchronization of video and sound effects, and the development efficiency is improved.

This background will be described.
A conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-296867 is configured such that different effects are performed corresponding to button operations depending on the effect patterns to be executed, and sound control based on the button effect operations is performed. Is done in a separate process.
However, in conventional gaming machines, sound control is performed in a process separate from the image. For example, when setting a sound output request in the effect button input monitoring process at the time of a PB notice effect, the effect button is not displayed. When the button is pressed, a determination flag such as “Is the button now being produced?” Or the like is required, which may complicate the management of the production. As a result, the development efficiency may also decrease.
Therefore, in this embodiment, by defining the processing code related to the sound output in the scenario table instead of the production button input monitoring process, it is possible to reduce the production button input monitoring flag, etc. Development efficiency has also been improved by making it easier to manage the synchronization of video and sound effects.

Specifically, by setting a PB waiting code for determining whether or not the effect button 9 has been pressed in the scenario table related to the effect of the PB notice, and setting a code for processing related to sound output, It is not necessary to determine whether or not the effect button 9 has been pressed by another program, and processing such as setting a flag becomes unnecessary, and the control of the effect is advanced according to the scenario table shown in the upper part of FIG. It is possible to execute control related to the production.
That is, in the effect process executed by the code of the process related to sound output, it is not necessary to confirm whether the button press sound is sounded or not (however, it is necessary to determine whether or not the button press sound is soundable: (This is because the PB wait code data is set in the scenario table, so it is possible to determine that the effect button 9 has been pressed in the period of 90 frames). Thus, since the video and audio control contents are in the same scenario table, it is easy to manage the synchronization of the video and audio effects, and the development efficiency is improved.
If a code for executing a sound output request process (a process for actually outputting a sound is different) is provided in the scenario table (a code for a process related to sound output), it is determined that the effect button 9 has been pressed. Therefore, since it is only necessary to perform sound output processing based on that assumption, it is not necessary to provide a flag or the like as described above, which leads to a merit that management is easy.
Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to produce a sound output without judging the situation of whether or not the production button 9 has been pressed by another program, and management of the production of video and audio becomes easy. Development efficiency can be improved.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
A game control device for controlling the progress of the game;
In a gaming machine provided with an effect control device capable of performing an effect by controlling an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device,
The production control device
Scenario data is set for each display element in the drawing control of the screen displayed on the display means, and a determination code for determining whether or not the effect button has been pressed and a code for processing related to sound output are included in the scenario table. Scenario data setting means that has been set,
When it is determined that the effect button has been pressed based on the determination code, effect content control means for controlling the effect related to the sound based on the code of the process related to the sound output;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:
Here, the PROM (control ROM) 321 constitutes scenario data setting means, and the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 311 constitutes effect content control means.

Specific implementation points of the inventive concept are as follows.
In the flowchart and data of the effect control device 300, the processing related to the scenario table is the same as that in the case of performing independent scenario management for each display element described above, and the following corresponds in particular.
Scenario analysis processing: FIGS. 130 and 131
・ Push button notice scenario table: Fig. 176

Next, a modified example of the present embodiment will be described with respect to control in which a processing code related to sound output is provided in a scenario table related to the effect of PB notice.
The present embodiment may be modified as follows.
(1) In the production of the PB notice that is relatively easy to appear, if the sound is sounded every time the production button 9 is pressed, the player may feel troublesome.
Therefore, for example, a button pressing sound may be output only when the jackpot reliability of a character or the like that appears after pressing the effect button 9 is higher than a predetermined reference value.
With such a configuration, the effect of the PB notice can be sharpened and the interest of the game can be maintained.
The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The effect content control means determines whether or not to output a sound based on the processing code related to the sound output according to the content of the notice effect that proceeds after the effect button is pressed.

(2) The scenario table is not limited to a configuration in which a determination code for determining whether or not an effect button has been pressed and a code for processing related to sound output are set.
For example, a processing code for a decorative member such as an LED or a movable accessory may be set in addition to the processing code related to the sound output.
If it does in this way, the effect of decoration members, such as LED and a movable accessory, can be added in the case of PB notice, it can be made more various effects, and the interest of a game can be raised.

  Next, configurations, effects, backgrounds, and implementation points corresponding to other inventive concepts (17) to (32) that can be extracted or developed from the present embodiment will be described below.

(Invention concept (17))
In this embodiment, motion data (motion table data) such as notices and special drawing (decorative symbols) fluctuation effects are provided for each effect section, and the motion table that becomes the part is selected according to the contents of the effect to be implemented. Since the configuration is used in combination, effects such as a reduction in data amount and improvement in development efficiency can be obtained.
The inventive concept (17) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with a game control device for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control device capable of performing an effect by controlling an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device,
The production control device
Character data storage means (image ROM 322) for storing a plurality of still image or moving image data;
Motion table storage means (PROM 321) for storing a plurality of motion tables composed of the image data to be displayed on the display means and data for specifying the display position;
Scenario table storage means (PROM 321) for storing a plurality of scenario tables composed of data for controlling the progress of effects including display effects on the display means (which may include effects by effect means such as decorative lamps and speakers); Have
Based on the scenario table selected according to the command from the game control device, the effect means is controlled to produce an effect,
The motion table is provided for each section of production.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the scenario table is configured to selectively use the motion table as a part of the display effect.

Details of the background of the inventive concept (17) will be described below.
A conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-126384 has a series of notice execution patterns (data) for each notice (for each notice character), and a notice corresponding to the determination result from the series. Is selected and executed. The advance notice is composed of a series of advance notice execution patterns (data), and even the different notice execution patterns have data of the patterns themselves.
However, it cannot cope with the display effect amount that tends to increase year by year, and an efficient development method is required to cope with this.
According to the above-described inventive concept, it is possible to deal with display effects that tend to increase year by year, and it is possible to efficiently develop diversified effects.

That is, there are an enormous number of patterns for the notice effect. For example, in general, there are cases where the presentation develops and there is a case where the development does not develop (possibility of further development), and if a motion table including motion data for performing the entire production of each pattern is provided, An enormous number of motion tables are required, and the ROM capacity for storing the motion tables becomes enormous, resulting in a deterioration in development efficiency.
Therefore, in the present embodiment to which the above inventive concept is applied, for example, the motion (production contents) related to the part before development is the same, so that “motion data before development” is used so that such a section can be used in common. "(A)". Other necessary data may be, for example, “motion data of movement when development fails” (B), “motion data of movement when development” (C),. If data is concatenated and used, such as A + B when it does not evolve and A + C when it evolves, it is not necessary to have data in section A twice, so the amount of data is reduced and development is performed. Since only one A needs to be changed during the change, the development efficiency is improved.
In other words, in the above inventive concept, the motion table is provided as a part for each section of the effect, the motion table (parts) necessary for the effect is defined on the scenario table, and the display effect is based on the information in the scenario table. Control. For this reason, a portion where motion data overlaps between different motion tables is remarkably reduced, an increase in the capacity of the ROM storing the motion tables can be avoided, and development efficiency can be improved.

In particular, if the configuration is such that only one set of motion data in the production section having the same movement is provided in principle (that is, a configuration in which only one motion table is provided in the production section having the same movement), the above effect is obtained. Becomes more prominent. For example, the same section is surely the same when the production develops and does not. When this develops, when a separate table is created completely when it does not evolve, it is necessary to change the data of each table when changing specifications at the time of production. For this reason, it can be said that there is a high possibility that it will be in the same production section due to mistakes or the like, but it becomes a different part (because the production amount is enormous). If such a place is left on the market, players will notice subtle differences if they are playing for a long time, and the results are too prefetched to lower the interest of the game. There is a risk of letting you.
However, if the same section is used as one table, the above situation does not occur, and only one change is required, and development efficiency is remarkably improved. In addition, there is an advantage that the capacity of the motion data can be smaller (since it is not necessary to have several data in the same section).

Specific implementation points of the inventive concept (17) are as follows (in the flowchart of the effect control device 300, the notice effect setting process 1 and the like correspond).
That is, when the production control device receives, for example, a variable command from the game control device, step D101 (variable command processing) is executed in the received command analysis processing of FIG. 102, and step D114 of this variable command processing (FIG. 103). The variation effect setting process (FIG. 112) is executed. In this variable effect setting process, as described above, the content of the command received from the game control device and the content of the preview effect to be executed are determined by random number lottery. For example, in the notice effect setting process 1 (FIG. 118) in step D280, A scenario table corresponding to the decision is selected, and data (scenario table address) specifying the scenario table is set in a predetermined area (scenario data table area of the corresponding scenario management area) (steps D381 to 384). It should be noted that more detailed setting of the changing effect is executed after step D281 in the changing effect setting process (FIG. 112).
Then, the presentation is executed based on the scenario table selected and set in this way, and the scenario table is configured to selectively use the motion table that is a part of the display presentation. It is provided for each section. For example, in the case of a push button notice, a scenario table as shown in the upper part of FIG. 176 is selected, and this scenario table is a motion index No. provided for each section of production. The motion tables of (70), (65), (66), and (67) are used in combination. Here, for example, the motion index No. The motion table (70) (shown in the lower part of FIG. 176) is a motion table for a section from when the push button notice is started until the presence or absence of the push button pressing operation is determined. Even commonly used.

(Invention concept (18))
Further, in this embodiment, the motion table is divided into blocks for each effect change point where the reliability of the notice (for example, the reliability of the big hit or the reliability that becomes probable) changes. In other words, because the motion information of the notice character is defined as each motion table divided into blocks for each production change point where the big hit reliability changes, a variety of productions with different reliability can be achieved with a small amount of data and high development efficiency. The effect that can be realized is obtained.
The inventive concept (18) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The motion table for the notice effect is provided for each effect section with the effect change point at which the reliability of the notice changes as a boundary,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the scenario table is configured to selectively use the motion table as a part of the display effect.

The background of the inventive concept (18) is the same as (17), and specific implementation points of the inventive concept (18) are as follows.
That is, for example, in the display example of the notice effect shown in FIG. 182, whether the transition is made from (a) to (b) in FIG. 182 or from (a) to (c) (that is, the closed scroll falls from above). The reliability of the notice varies depending on whether it falls to the center and then falls to the bottom of the screen or the scroll is released), and this is the production change point where the notice reliability changes. However, as described with reference to FIGS. 180 and 181, the motion table for the advance notice effect of the scroll is divided into the effect change points and is provided as a separate motion table. For this reason, the number of motion tables and the volume of motion data that change the combination according to the reliability of the notice are minimized, making it possible to perform character drawing control efficiently and with various reliability levels. Production can be realized with a small amount of data and high development efficiency.

(Invention concept (19))
In this embodiment, since behavior data (behavior code, behavior index, etc.) is further embedded in the motion table, the character setting such as reliability can be set by the change processing by the behavior. The effect is that you can realize more various productions with different degrees with less data and high development efficiency. That is, a difference in reliability or the like is provided in the scenario table as an entrance, and an effect such as a reliability can be performed even with the same motion table, so that the effect amount can be increased without increasing the amount of data.
The inventive concept (19) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein behavior data for changing the image data displayed on the display means can be set in the motion table for the notice effect.

The background of the inventive concept (19) is the same as that of (17), and specific implementation points of the inventive concept (19) are as follows.
That is, for example, as shown in FIGS. 180A and 180B, the basic character registered in the first row of the motion table is a “blue” character with the least reliable color of the scroll. . In some cases, the character replacement (in this case, the color change) is performed by the behavior of the behavior index 0 in the second line, so that, for example, an effect corresponding to the big hit reliability can be achieved. The interest of the game is improved without increasing the number. The character data (image data) is changed by the behavior described above by executing step E11 in the effect display editing process (FIG. 151), so that the image index data is changed immediately before display according to the result of the effect distribution. For example, the basic symbol is replaced with a predetermined symbol to be displayed, or the color of the image of the push button (PB) is changed from the basic color to a predetermined color (for example, big hit reliability) It is replaced with a specific color representing the degree), or the lines of the warrior displayed are changed.

(Invention concept (20))
Also, in this embodiment, the distribution of effects (the contents of the effects) based on the state of the gaming machine that the game control device (main board) cannot know (for example, the game state (mode, etc.) by the effect control device not managed by the main board) Since the scenario table is selected based on the distribution result, an effect of realizing more various effects can be obtained. In other words, from the main board by selecting the scenario table (and hence the motion table) based on the result, based on the game state (= mode etc.) that the main board does not manage (not know) This makes it possible to produce a variety of performances by simply using command commands.
The inventive concept (20) with the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The game control device is configured to perform a distribution of effects based on a state of a gaming machine that the game control device cannot know, and to select the scenario table based on the distribution result.

The background of the inventive concept (20) is the same as that of (17), and specific implementation points of the inventive concept (20) are as follows.
That is, for example, in step D272 in the variation effect setting process (FIG. 112), the notice distribution table 1 corresponding to the major patterns returned in the variation pattern classification process in step D271 and various effect information is prepared. The effect information may include a game mode (not based on a command from the game control device 100) managed by the effect control device 300. In other words, the production control device 300 of this example can distribute the production based on the state of the gaming machine that the game control device 100 cannot know, and selects a scenario table based on the distribution result (step). D280 etc.). As a result, a variety of effects can be performed rather than sorting based on command instructions from the main board alone.

(Invention concept (21))
Further, in the present embodiment, the variation of the fourth symbol (variation state notification symbol) is performed from the beginning of the variation cycle determined regardless of the previous stop symbol, so that an effect such as improvement in development efficiency can be obtained. .
The inventive concept (21) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with a game control device for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control device capable of performing an effect by controlling an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device,
The production control device
The display means is capable of executing a variable display game in which a decorative pattern for presentation is displayed in a variable manner and stopped, and can execute a variable display of a variable state notification symbol for notifying a variable state of the decorative symbol, The gaming machine is characterized in that the decorative symbol variation display starts from the previous variation display stop mode, and the variation state notification symbol variation display starts from the beginning of a prescribed variation cycle.

Details of the background of the inventive concept (21) will be described below.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-131661, after one variable display game is stopped, the variable display game based on the next start winning is changed from the previous stop mode (stop pattern). Be started.
However, it cannot cope with the display effect amount that tends to increase year by year, and an efficient development method is required to cope with this.
According to the above-described inventive concept, it is possible to deal with display effects that tend to increase year by year, and it is possible to efficiently develop diversified effects.

  That is, in the present embodiment to which the above inventive concept is applied, the decorative symbols (decorative symbols) such as the left, middle, and right symbols start to fluctuate from the previous stop symbol so as not to give a sense of incongruity to the production. At the same time, it is difficult for the player to understand whether the variation is so-called pseudo-continuous variation or multiple variations. Here, the decorative symbol and the fourth symbol (fluctuation state notification symbol) are special symbol decorative symbols of the same category, but in this embodiment, it is possible to know a clear difference to the player by performing the subsequent performance. The control method is different between the decorative design that may not be desired and the 4th design that allows visual recognition of whether or not the effect is changing in any production state. Specifically, as described with reference to FIG. 174, the control of the fourth symbol starts from the fixed display pattern specified in the data table regardless of the previous stop symbol, and thereafter the same The configuration is such that the display pattern varies as specified. This makes it possible to recognize that the connection between the previous and current fluctuations is sparse and is a new fluctuation. Further, it is not necessary to derive a symbol to be displayed by calculation or the like, and the processing burden can be reduced. Specifically, the fixed pattern variation control can be performed according to the information of the motion table without performing the symbol replacement process, so that the processing load on the CPU 311 can be reduced. Therefore, it can contribute to efficient development of diversifying effects.

  A specific implementation point of the inventive concept (21) is, for example, the configuration of the motion table of the fourth symbol shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, due to such a configuration of the motion table, as in the display example shown in FIG. 174, the 4th symbol fluctuates with a fixed symbol pattern every time, regardless of the previously changed stop symbol. For this reason, by changing the control of the fourth symbol irrespective of the previous stop symbol, the variation control can be performed without performing the symbol changing process by the behavior, so that the processing load can be reduced. Since the player usually does not see the 4th pattern, there is no sense of incongruity even if the fixed pattern is changed. On the other hand, if the left / middle / right symbols do not change following the previous stop symbol, the sense of incongruity is great.

In addition, as a deformation | transformation and expansion | deployment of the said invention concept (21), there may be the following structures.
First, during the variation of the 4th symbol, it is possible not to include an out-of-order display pattern (for example, the “white and white” pattern described in FIG. 174). This is because the combination of outliers often has a clear difference from the color of the winning combination (not necessarily a color), so it is easy to see that the cycle has completed one cycle, and the number of combination patterns is read. It becomes easy. In addition, since there are a plurality of combination patterns in order to make it difficult to understand whether the change is probabilistic or non-probable, it is possible to keep the interest of the game longer if the number of combinations is difficult to know. Therefore, it is possible to adopt a configuration that does not include the display pattern of deviation during the variation of the 4th symbol.
Next, the special figure controlled by the game control device 100 is not limited to the fourth figure, and may be a variation of a predetermined pattern.

(Invention concept (22))
In this embodiment, the decorative symbol (left / middle / right symbol) and the fourth symbol have the same period but are controlled by different scenario tables. During the symbol variation, the decorative symbol is the center case. Control is performed so as to be arranged outside and inside the display area (area that is not hidden by the center case, etc.) regardless of the movable object provided in the above, etc., but the fourth pattern is not obstructed by the movable object, and It is the structure which controls so that it may arrange | position only inside the display area. For this reason, while the design is changing, it is possible to enhance the interest by making free movement with the decorative design (it may disappear in some cases), and the 4th design should not create a state where it cannot be seen even for a moment. Therefore, it is possible to check that the game state is changing at any time.
The inventive concept (22) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The production control device
Having scenario table storage means for storing a plurality of scenario tables composed of data for controlling the progress of effects including display effects on the display means;
Based on the scenario table selected according to the command from the game control device, the effect means is controlled to produce an effect,
In the display means, it is possible to execute a variation display game in which a decorative symbol for production is displayed in a variable manner and stop it, and it is possible to execute a variation display of a variation state notification symbol for notifying a variation state of the decorative symbol,
The display of variation of the decorative symbol and the variation state notification symbol is executed in the same period, but is controlled by the separate scenario table,
The decorative design is arranged inside and outside the visible area of the display means (the display area of the display means, which is not shielded by a movable object or the like in the center case), while the change state notification design is displayed in the visible area. A gaming machine characterized by being placed only inside.

The background of the inventive concept (22) is as follows.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-185700, a special drawing for performing scroll display is displayed in addition to the display area (the coordinates of the display position are set). However, the display position of the 4th symbol is not taken into consideration, and improvement is required. According to the above inventive concept, such a problem can be solved.

  That is, as can be seen from the motion table in FIG. 173 and the display example in FIG. 174, in this example, the fourth symbol (variation state notification symbol) is always displayed in a visible area such as the left corner of the display screen 41a. It has become. On the other hand, the decorative symbols (left, middle, and right symbols) are configured to freely move (may disappear in some cases) as described with reference to FIGS. 171 and 172. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest and not to create a state in which the 4th symbol cannot be seen even for a moment, so that it can be checked at any time that the game state is changing.

(Invention concept (23))
Further, in this embodiment, after having the configuration of the inventive concept (22), for each design (decoration design (left, middle, right design) motion table), one variation pattern is provided for each section, The structure where the motion data overlaps between multiple different fluctuation patterns is controlled by using a common motion table, thereby reducing the amount of data and improving the development efficiency while ensuring the visual recognition of the 4th pattern. Can be secured.
The inventive concept (23) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The production control device
Character data storage means for storing a plurality of image data of still images or moving images;
Motion table storage means for storing a plurality of motion tables composed of the image data to be displayed on the display means and data for specifying the display position;
Scenario table storage means for storing a plurality of scenario tables made up of data for controlling the progress of effects including display effects on the display means;
Based on the scenario table selected according to the command from the game control device, the effect means is controlled to produce an effect,
The scenario table is configured to selectively use the motion table as a part of the display effect.
In the display means, it is possible to execute a variation display game in which a decorative symbol for production is displayed in a variable manner and stop it, and it is possible to execute a variation display of a variation state notification symbol for notifying a variation state of the decorative symbol,
The display of variation of the decorative symbol and the variation state notification symbol is executed in the same period, but is controlled by the separate scenario table,
The motion table for the decorative design is provided for each section of production.
The decorative design is arranged inside and outside the visible area of the display means (the display area of the display means, which is not shielded by a movable object or the like in the center case), while the change state notification design is displayed in the visible area. A gaming machine characterized by being placed only inside.

(Invention concept (24a))
In this embodiment, the decorative symbol (decorative symbol left / middle / right symbol) and the fourth symbol (variation state notification symbol) have the same variation time, but the scenario table is controlled as a separate independent symbol. I do. And the 4th symbol is a structure which changes to the last, without changing with the motion table set at the time of a change start. In other words, although the motion table may be switched for the decorative symbol, the motion table is not switched for the fourth symbol. For example, especially in the reach (movie reach) that aims to show the movie to the player and enhance the interest, the decorative pattern does not interfere with the movie, but changes in a state that is reduced to a small corner in the screen. It is common. Here, the small symbol may be a reduced size of the decorative symbol that fluctuates in the normal fluctuation section (reduction by the function of VDP), or a character may be provided separately as a reduced symbol. When the decorative symbol changes as a reduced symbol at the corner of the screen, control is performed by switching to a motion table dedicated to the section. However, the 4th symbol was changed to the end without changing the motion table set at the start of the change. In detail, since the 4th symbol only uses the motion table (for example, the motion table illustrated in FIG. 173) defining only the pattern for 1 cycle repeatedly until the end of the fluctuation, the size, display position, transparency, etc. Will be displayed in the same state until the end. As a result, the 4th symbol undergoes (visually) stable fluctuations to the end, so that even if the decorative symbol is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize, it is determined that the player is changing. Can be easily recognized. Further, since the minimum data amount is sufficient, it can be said that it is difficult to press the ROM capacity for the display control of the fourth symbol. From this point of view, it is possible to efficiently develop diversifying effects.
The inventive concept (24a) with the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with a game control device for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control device capable of performing an effect by controlling an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device,
The production control device
Character data storage means for storing a plurality of image data of still images or moving images;
Motion table storage means for storing a plurality of motion tables composed of the image data to be displayed on the display means and data for specifying the display position;
Scenario table storage means for storing a plurality of scenario tables made up of data for controlling the progress of effects including display effects on the display means;
Based on the scenario table selected according to the command from the game control device, the effect means is controlled to produce an effect,
The scenario table is configured to selectively use the motion table,
In the display means, it is possible to execute a variation display game in which a decorative symbol for production is displayed in a variable manner and stop it, and it is possible to execute a variation display of a variation state notification symbol for notifying a variation state of the decorative symbol,
The display of variation of the decorative symbol and the variation state notification symbol is executed in the same period, but is controlled by the separate scenario table,
The game machine is characterized in that the change display of the change state notification symbol is configured to be used until the end of the change display without changing the motion table set at the start of change.

(Invention concept (24b))
Further, in this embodiment, the display control of a plurality of types of 4th symbols (4th symbol in Special Fig. 1 and 4th symbol in Special Fig. 2) is performed with one motion table, so that the effect of improving development efficiency and the like is achieved. Is obtained.
The inventive concept (24b) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with a game control device for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control device capable of performing an effect by controlling an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device,
The production control device
The display means is capable of executing a variable display game in which any one of a plurality of types of decorative designs for special effects (Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2) is variably displayed and stopped, and the plural types of decorative symbols are displayed. It is possible to execute a variation display of a plurality of types of variation state notification symbols (fourth symbol of Special Fig. 1 and fourth symbol of Special Fig. 2) that respectively notify the variation states of the plurality of variations. A gaming machine characterized in that the display is controlled based on a single control table (motion table).

Details of the background of the inventive concept (24b) with the above configuration will be described below.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-213733, there are a process table for controlling the fourth symbol of FIG. 1 and a process table for controlling the fourth symbol of FIG. It is another.
For this reason, it cannot cope with the display effect amount which tends to increase year by year, and an efficient development method is required to cope with this.
According to the above-described inventive concept, it is possible to deal with display effects that tend to increase year by year, and it is possible to efficiently develop diversified effects.

That is, for example, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-213733, a process for variably displaying the 4th symbol corresponding to the variation target (Special Fig. 1 or 2) at the start of the variation of the 4th symbol. A table is set up. Since it is necessary to always display the 4th symbol of both symbols on the screen, it is necessary to control both symbols (a symbol that fluctuates and a symbol that stops). However, since only the display control of the symbol that changes is described and there is no description regarding the display control of the other symbol, the details are unknown. Since the process table for controlling the 4th symbol of Special Figure 1 is separate from the process table for controlling the 4th symbol of Special Figure 2, there is a problem that the program structure and the like are complicated. .
On the other hand, in the present embodiment to which the above inventive concept is applied, as described above with reference to FIG. 173, both symbols (fourth symbol in special figure 1 and fourth symbol in special figure 2) with one motion table. Since the display control is performed, the program structure becomes simple. As a result, diversified productions can be efficiently developed.

(Invention concept (25))
Further, in this embodiment, when performing the fade effect, the fading character is arranged on the back side from the 4th pattern, so that the processing process for showing the 4th pattern is not necessary, and the processing load can be reduced. Effects such as development efficiency improvement can be obtained.
The inventive concept (25) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with a game control device for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control device capable of performing an effect by controlling an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device,
The production control device
In the display means, it is possible to execute a variation display game in which a decorative symbol for production is displayed in a variable manner and stop it, and it is possible to execute a variation display of a variation state notification symbol for notifying a variation state of the decorative symbol,
When performing a screen switching effect including a fade effect (fade-in / fade-out display effect) on the display means, an image (for fading) that performs the screen switch effect on the back side from the change state notification symbol (fourth symbol) A gaming machine having a configuration in which a character is arranged.

Details of the background of the inventive concept (25) having the above-described configuration will be described below.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-73458, fade-out processing is performed when an effect by a moving image ends and the effect is switched to a still image. And there is a description about the process for fade-in / fade-out of the character to be controlled, but there is no explanation for the relationship with the 4th symbol when fading in / out the entire screen, and the processing to show the 4th symbol It is thought that processing is required.
For this reason, it cannot cope with the display effect amount which tends to increase year by year, and an efficient development method is required to cope with this.
According to the above-described inventive concept, it is possible to deal with display effects that tend to increase year by year, and it is possible to efficiently develop diversified effects.

That is, in the present embodiment to which the above inventive concept is applied, when performing a fade effect, a fade character is arranged on the back side of the fourth symbol, so that the state of the fourth symbol is understood and fluctuating no matter what the effect is performed. I can confirm that there is. Therefore, the processing for showing the 4th pattern is not required, the processing load can be reduced, and as a result, the diversified effects can be efficiently developed.
More specifically, in the present embodiment, in a fade effect such as fade-in and fade-out of screen display, a motion table that defines control information of a character (image) for fade effect is provided in the control ROM 321. For example, the fade control procedure when the whole screen fades out white and switches to a different screen is as follows. First, a white rectangular character is prepared in the character ROM 322 as a fade character. Second, the fading character is superimposed in a state of high transparency in front of the drawing screen. Thirdly, the transparency of the fade character is lowered in accordance with the effect speed of fading out. Fourth, the screen finally becomes a pure white screen. Fifth, the faded character is removed (not drawn) and at the same time, a new drawing content is displayed on the screen. Here, you may perform control which raises transparency, without removing suddenly. In addition to fade-in / out for changing the transparency, there are various other methods for switching the screen. This time, it is a fade character, but the character for performing the same switching effect is also synonymous with the content of this time. Then, in any case, control is performed so that the fade character is drawn on the back side of the screen with respect to the fourth pattern. This prevents the player from visually recognizing that the screen is changing no matter what screen switching effect is performed.

Specific implementation points of the inventive concept (25) are as follows.
For example, in the scenario table used in the customer waiting demonstration in FIG. 177, the fade-out (FO) type motion is set for the motion 12 at the eighth line (// 7), and at the 17th line (// 16). The fourth symbol is set for the motion 13. In other words, in this embodiment, the layer number of the motion of the fade effect is 12, for example, the layer number of the motion of the fourth symbol is 13, and the younger the layer number of the motion is arranged on the back side of the screen, the fourth A fade character is arranged behind the symbol. To put it simply, the 4th pattern has a motion layer number of 13 at the maximum, and is displayed on the foremost side on the screen as compared with images of other layer numbers. This eliminates the need for processing to show the 4th symbol and reduces the processing burden.

In addition, as a deformation | transformation and expansion | deployment of the said invention concept (25), there may be the following structures.
The display layer that displays the error message and the display layer of the fade character may be the same layer (Invention Concept (26)). Here, the display layer means a layer (in this embodiment, for example, a motion layer) that determines the context of whether to display as the near side or the far side on the screen. In this way, the message display at the time of error can be displayed without affecting other character drawing. For example, when an error message is displayed during the production, the message is transmitted to the player in preference to the game production, but it is also reported that the message is changing so as not to affect the fourth graphic. . It is also possible to easily advance the game behind the scenes while displaying an error message and return to the game when the error is released.
The inventive concept (26) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The production control device
The display means is capable of executing a variable display game in which a decorative pattern for presentation is displayed in a variable manner and stopped, and also displays a variable display of a variable state notification symbol for notifying a variation state of the decorative symbol and an error message. Error display can be executed,
When performing a screen switching effect including a fade effect (fade-in / fade-out display effect) on the display means, an image for performing the screen switch effect on the display layer on the back side from the change state notification symbol (fourth symbol) (Fade character) is placed,
A gaming machine, wherein the error display image and the image (fade character) for performing the screen switching effect are arranged on the same display layer.

(Invention concept (27))
In this embodiment, in the case of control of decorative symbols that change with the same size, the first frame of the various motion tables that are blocked starts from a certain coordinate position (in this case, the display position when the symbol is stopped). Therefore, when selecting a combination of motions, it can be performed without being aware of the connection, and the development efficiency is improved.
The inventive concept (27) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with a game control device for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control device capable of performing an effect by controlling an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device,
The production control device
Character data storage means (image ROM 322) for storing a plurality of still image or moving image data;
Motion table storage means (PROM 321) for storing a plurality of motion tables composed of the image data to be displayed on the display means and data for specifying the display position for each frame;
Scenario table storage means (PROM 321) for storing a plurality of scenario tables composed of data for controlling the progress of effects including display effects on the display means (which may include effects by effect means such as decorative lamps and speakers); Have
Based on the scenario table selected according to the command from the game control device, the effect means is controlled to produce an effect,
The motion table is provided for each section of production.
The scenario table is configured to selectively use the motion table as a part of the display effect.
The gaming machine, wherein the specific motion tables used in combination with each other have the display position of the image data in the first frame set to the same specific display position even if the section of the production is different.

Details of the background of the inventive concept (27) will be described below.
In a conventional gaming machine such as that disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-168684, the coordinate data of a symbol is set in a reach effect corresponding to the number of movements from the effect start position to the final stop position. It is configured. In other words, even if the same movement is performed for reach production or the like, the data is not divided into blocks, but a series of movement data is provided for each pattern. And since it is not made into blocks, it is necessary to prepare data on a one-to-one basis for all the movements, and there is a problem that the amount of data increases.
For this reason, the conventional gaming machine described above cannot cope with the display effect amount that tends to increase year by year, and an efficient development method is required to cope with this.
On the other hand, according to the above-described inventive concept, it is possible to deal with the display effect amount that tends to increase year by year, and it is possible to efficiently develop diversified effects.

That is, in the present embodiment to which the above inventive concept is applied, the first frame of the various motion tables that are blocked is configured to start from a predetermined coordinate position. This can be done without being aware of the connection, improving the efficiency of development. In addition, since any table can be linked, the degree of freedom in selection increases.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, the size of the decorative design (the decorative design left / middle / right design) is basically the same as in the stop display in the section where normal fluctuation and normal reach are performed. Yes. And the design size of this decorative design is not basically changed unless some notice effect or reach occurs. This is because if the size is changed every time a normal change is made, it is easy to get tired when playing a game for a long time. Even in a normal fluctuation section that is not a reach effect, there are a plurality of patterns in the way of fluctuation (due to sliding or various notices), so there are motion tables corresponding to various operations. As described above, the motion data is blocked and used by connecting necessary data. However, in the motion table when the symbol size fluctuates with the initial size like the motion table shown in FIG. 175 described above, The display coordinate data of the first frame defined in the table is the same as that at the time of stop display. In this way, if it is configured to start from the coordinate position where the first of the various motion tables that are blocked, it can be performed without being aware of the connection in selecting a combination of motion tables, Development efficiency is improved. In addition, since any table can be connected, the degree of freedom in selection increases.

Specific implementation points of the inventive concept (27) are as follows.
For example, the motion table (Mdat0000) shown in the upper part of FIG. 175 is a motion table used when the left symbol is stopped, but the current symbol (stop symbol) set in the third row (// 2) of this motion table. The display position of the X coordinate is (0) and the Y coordinate is (7). On the other hand, the motion table (Mdat0003) shown in the middle of FIG. 175 is a motion table used for the left symbol normal fluctuation (first half), but is set in the eighth row (// 7) of this motion table. The display position of the current symbol is X coordinate (0) and Y coordinate (7), which is the same as the stop symbol display position described above. The motion table (Mdat0004) shown in the lower part of FIG. 175 is a motion table used for the left symbol normal fluctuation (second half), but the current symbol set in the eighth row (// 7) of this motion table. As for the display position, the X coordinate is (0) and the Y coordinate is (7), which is also the same as the stop symbol display position described above. In other words, the data of the display position of the current symbol of each motion table in FIG. 175 has the initial coordinate data of each table at a constant initial position (same as the stop symbol).

In addition, as a deformation | transformation and expansion | deployment of the said invention concept (27), there may exist the following structures.
For example, when only the current symbol is displayed when stopped, and when the current symbol / previous symbol / rear symbol is displayed during fluctuation, the current symbol is displayed as the subject of the inventive concept (the first frame of the motion table) as in FIG. (The target image with a constant display position). Moreover, the motion table is not limited to symbol variation. For example, the motion data of the notice character may be similarly blocked, and the relationship between the connected portions may be configured similarly.

(Invention concept (28))
Also, in this embodiment, in the case of control of decorative symbols that change with the same size, the first frame of various motion tables that are blocked is configured to start from a fixed coordinate position, and the final frame Since the coordinate data of is set at a position different from the fixed coordinate position, it can be performed without considering the connection when selecting a combination of motions, and the transition to the next motion can be performed smoothly. As a result, development efficiency is improved.
The inventive concept (28) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with a game control device for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control device capable of performing an effect by controlling an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device,
The production control device
Character data storage means (image ROM 322) for storing a plurality of still image or moving image data;
Motion table storage means (PROM 321) for storing a plurality of motion tables composed of the image data to be displayed on the display means and data for specifying the display position for each frame;
Scenario table storage means (PROM 321) for storing a plurality of scenario tables composed of data for controlling the progress of effects including display effects on the display means (which may include effects by effect means such as decorative lamps and speakers); Have
Based on the scenario table selected according to the command from the game control device, the effect means is controlled to produce an effect,
The motion table is provided for each section of production.
The scenario table is configured to selectively use the motion table as a part of the display effect.
The specific motion tables used in combination with each other are set such that the display position of the image data in the first frame is set to the same specific display position even if the section of the production is different, and the display position of the image data in the final frame Is set to a display position different from the specific same display position.

Details of the background of the inventive concept (28) will be described below.
In a conventional gaming machine such as that disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-168684, the coordinate data of a symbol is set in a reach effect corresponding to the number of movements from the effect start position to the final stop position. It is configured. In other words, even if the same movement is performed for reach production or the like, the data is not divided into blocks, but a series of movement data is provided for each pattern. And since it is not made into blocks, it is necessary to prepare data on a one-to-one basis for all the movements, and there is a problem that the amount of data increases.
For this reason, the conventional gaming machine described above cannot cope with the display effect amount that tends to increase year by year, and an efficient development method is required to cope with this.
On the other hand, according to the above-described inventive concept, it is possible to deal with the display effect amount that tends to increase year by year, and it is possible to efficiently develop diversified effects.

  That is, in the present embodiment to which the above inventive concept is applied, the first frame of the various motion tables that have been blocked is configured to start from a certain fixed coordinate position. This can be done without being conscious of the connection, improving the efficiency of development. In addition, since any table can be linked, the degree of freedom in selection increases. In particular, according to the inventive concept, the coordinate data of the final frame is set to a position different from the fixed coordinate position (for example, a value one frame earlier than the fixed coordinate position). The display at the same coordinates will not overlap, and the transition to the next motion can be performed smoothly (that is, the movement will not be strange because the coordinate data is not covered). It will be possible to do this, further improving development efficiency. In other words, for example, if it is made to end at the coordinate position according to the fluctuation speed of the image display executed at each table (at the end of each table), it is less conscious of the connection in selecting the combination of the blocked motion tables. The degree of freedom of selection is further improved, and the development efficiency is further improved.

  Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, the size of the decorative symbols (left, middle and right symbols which are decorative symbols) in the section where normal variation is basically performed is the same as that at the time of stop display. And the design size of this decorative design is not basically changed unless some notice effect or reach occurs. This is because if the size is changed every time a normal change is made, it is easy to get tired when playing a game for a long time. Even in a normal fluctuation section that is not a reach effect, there are a plurality of patterns in the way of fluctuation (due to sliding or various notices), so there are motion tables corresponding to various operations. As described above, the motion data is blocked and used by connecting necessary data. However, in the motion table when the symbol size fluctuates with the initial size like the motion table shown in FIG. 175 described above, The display coordinate data of the first frame defined in the table is the same coordinate (initial position) as at the time of stop display, and the display coordinate data of the last frame defined in the table is a coordinate different from that at the time of stop display (initial position) ( Specifically, the difference between the coordinate data values corresponding to the fluctuation speed is a value obtained by subtracting the initial position). Note that, when fluctuating at a constant speed, a value obtained by subtracting the difference between the last and previous (two different coordinates) coordinate values from the coordinates of the initial position matches the coordinate value of the final frame. In the case of a shift, it matches the value obtained by subtracting the difference that is based on the law. With such a configuration, as described above, the ease and flexibility of combining motion tables are greatly improved, and the development efficiency is further improved.

Specific implementation points of the inventive concept (28) are as follows.
For example, the motion table (Mdat0003) shown in the middle of FIG. 175 is a motion table used for the left symbol normal fluctuation (first half), but the current symbol set in the eighth row (// 7) of this motion table. As for the display position, the X coordinate is (0) and the Y coordinate is (7), which is the same as the display position of the stop symbol described above. However, the display position of the current symbol set in the last frame row (// 1827) of this motion table (Mdat0003) is (0) for the X coordinate and (340) for the Y coordinate. The Y coordinate that is the moving direction is different from the display position of the stop symbol. Specifically, the coordinates are related to the changing speed. That is, during high-speed fluctuation, the Y coordinate is set to change in the order of 7 → 174 → 340 → 7 → 174 → 340 → 7 →..., And the next pattern is displayed in 3 frames (100 ms). Since it is the fluctuating speed updated to the number, the value (340) is set to the previous position by one frame of the Y coordinate (7) of the initial position.
In this embodiment, since the movement range of each symbol is 500, it is not uniform, but it is unknown because it is a difference of 1 among many dots. Although it may be set based on a positional relationship that can be evenly divided, this time it is set to an easily conceivable value of 500.

Note that the following configuration can be used as a modification or development of the inventive concept (28).
For example, when only the current symbol is displayed when stopped, and when displaying the current symbol / previous symbol / rear symbol during fluctuation, the current symbol is displayed as the subject of the inventive concept (display of the first frame of the motion table) as in this embodiment. The position may be constant (initial position), and the final frame display position may be different from the initial position. Moreover, the motion table is not limited to symbol variation. For example, the motion data of the notice character may be similarly blocked, and the relationship between the connected portions may be configured similarly.

(Invention concept (29))
Further, in this embodiment, in the case of normal fluctuation that is not reach, normal reach, etc., as described in FIG. 172 above, three decorative symbols (current symbol, previous symbol, and next symbol) repeat within the narrow effective range. A motion table with decorative patterns is configured to move. For this reason, a clear reference (for example, the current symbol) is provided, and it is easy to manage symbol replacement and the like, and it is possible to effectively control the variation display of the decorative symbol.
The inventive concept (29) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The production control device
In the display means, it is possible to execute a variable display game in which a decorative pattern for production is displayed in a variable manner and stopped.
The category of decorative symbols during fluctuation is categorized into multiple floating symbols (for example, current symbol, previous symbol, next symbol), and this category is divided by a predetermined range (effective range) that does not overlap the display coordinates of the variation direction. A gaming machine characterized by having a control function associated with an object and controlling so that each of the changing symbols moves within the corresponding predetermined range.
Note that the above control function (a control function that realizes a variable display by controlling so as to move only within the predetermined range (within the effective range not overlapping) corresponding to each of the changing symbols) For example, it may be executed only in the case of normal fluctuation that is not reach or normal reach. In special reach production, for example, the direction of pattern change may change (from vertical to horizontal), or the special figure may move in a spiral shape. You may make it limit a range in the form corresponding to the moving direction of a middle symbol.

The background of the inventive concept (29) is as follows.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-210428, the next (previous) symbol moves up / down (varies) along with the movement of the symbol that is visible as the current symbol. When performing, there is a description that the current symbol is changed upward (down) by a half symbol, and the current symbol and the next (previous) symbol are displayed in the display area for each half symbol. However, it is unclear how the current symbol and the next (previous) symbol are variably displayed. If the control is performed in units of characters to be displayed (a method of moving the same symbol from top to bottom), multiple fluctuating symbols exist as independent symbols, so the priority is high. Since the character no longer exists (because there is no reference pattern), there is a problem that the reference is difficult to determine and as a result, it is difficult to control.
According to the above inventive concept, such a problem can be solved.

  That is, as described above with reference to FIG. 172, in this example, the decorative symbols are categorized into a plurality of changing symbols (current symbol, previous symbol, next symbol) during variation such as normal variation that is not reach. , This category is associated with the display coordinates of the variation direction divided by effective ranges that do not overlap, and the motion table data (motions) of the decorative symbols so that each of the varying symbols moves only within the corresponding effective range Data) is set. As a result, for example, by controlling the current symbol as a reference, there are advantages such as easy control at the time of symbol replacement and the like, and the necessity of managing all the changing symbols.

  A specific implementation location of the inventive concept (29) is, for example, the motion table of FIG. 175, and a display example is FIG. As shown in FIG. 172, the effective range of the next symbol is -493 or more and less than 7 in the Y coordinate which is the coordinate of the variation direction (the direction in which the symbol appears to move by variation display), and the effective range of the current symbol is The effective range of the previous symbol is 507 or more and less than 1007, and is divided by an effective range that does not overlap. For each changing symbol (current symbol, previous symbol, next symbol), data of the motion table (for example, FIG. 175) is set so that the value of the Y coordinate changes within the corresponding effective range. As described above, in the example of FIG. 172, the current symbol number “1” is the center, the previous symbol is “9” immediately before it, and the next symbol is “2” after it. Can be calculated relatively. When the coordinates return to the top, the control object can be narrowed down to one, such as “2” as the central symbol, so that the structure can be made simple (program or data structure).

(Invention concept (30))
Further, in this embodiment, even when the display of the same character is continued, since the character information is once deleted and re-registered at the change point of the effect, effects such as improvement in development efficiency can be obtained.
The inventive concept (30) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with a game control device for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control device capable of performing an effect by controlling an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device,
The production control device
Character data storage means (image ROM 322) for storing a plurality of still image or moving image data;
Motion table storage means (PROM 321) for storing a plurality of motion tables composed of the image data to be displayed on the display means and data for specifying the display position for each frame;
Scenario table storage means (PROM 321) for storing a plurality of scenario tables composed of data for controlling the progress of effects including display effects on the display means (which may include effects by effect means such as decorative lamps and speakers); ,
Character information (information such as an image index registered in the display information area in the motion management area described above) that is information for specifying the image data specified by the data in the motion table is erasably registered for display control. Character information storage means (RAM 311a) for
Based on the scenario table selected according to the command from the game control device, the effect means is controlled to produce an effect,
The scenario table is configured to selectively combine the motion tables.
Even when the image data to be displayed is the same, when the contents of the display effect by the image data change, the character information about the image data is temporarily deleted and a predetermined area (described above) of the character information storage means The display information area) is re-registered.

Details of the background of the inventive concept (30) having the above configuration will be described below.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-222876, cell information is set as detailed information when an image is developed in a drawing area. This publication describes the setting information when drawing an image part (developing in a VRAM), but does not describe the control when the image is no longer drawn.
For this reason, it cannot cope with the display effect amount which tends to increase year by year, and an efficient development method is required to cope with this.
According to the above-described inventive concept, it is possible to deal with display effects that tend to increase year by year, and it is possible to efficiently develop diversified effects.

That is, in the present embodiment to which the above inventive concept is applied, even when the display of the same character is continued, the character information is once deleted and re-registered at the change point of the effect. Specifically, in the data structure in the motion table, even when the motion is performed by the same character (same image data), the display information area regarding the character in the motion management area when the content of the effect changes Is deleted (that is, the character data is deleted from the VRAM 312a (VRAM 607)), and the character information is newly re-registered, and then the drawing process is performed.
As described above, the configuration in which the character information is re-registered at the change point of the effect can restore the correct display even when the data is destroyed due to noise or the like. In addition, it becomes easy to block motion data, flexibly responding to changes during development, etc., improving development efficiency. When the content of the production changes, it is better to always delete the image data to be deleted and the image data to be deleted and create the motion data. It is easy. Even in the case of a series of productions with a fixed flow, data can be created in blocks, so that changes during development can be flexibly handled and development efficiency is improved.

Specific implementation points of the inventive concept (30) are as follows (in the flowchart of the effect control device 300, motion command execution processing and the like correspond).
That is, in step D837 in the motion command execution process (FIG. 142), as described above, it is determined whether the command of the target motion table is a deletion code. If it is a deletion code, the object deletion process (FIG. 148) is performed in step D862. Execute. In the object deletion process (FIG. 148), as described above, the data in the display information area of the target object is deleted in step D958 or the like. That is, in this embodiment, if the motion table command is a deletion code, the data in the display information area of the unnecessary character (including the character to be deleted) corresponding to the object to be deleted in the motion management area. Is configured to be deleted.
For example, in the motion table at the time of the variation of the 4th symbol in FIG. 1 shown in FIG. 173, even when the same character (for example, “blue” in the 4th symbol) is used thereafter, a deletion code is entered at the change point of the production. . That is, for example, in the 14th line (// 13) and the 15th line (// 14), deletion codes are respectively set for the object indexes (1) and (0). Character information corresponding to the object indexes (1) and (0) (information of the 4th pattern “blue”) is once deleted and added in the next 16th line (// 15) and 17th line (// 16) The character information is re-registered with a code. Note that the motion table used at the time of scroll notice shown in FIG. 181 also illustrates a configuration in which a deletion code is entered at the change point of the effect even when the same character is used thereafter.

In addition, as a deformation | transformation and expansion | deployment of the said invention concept (30), there may be the following structures.
For example, when there are a plurality of motion tables, it is natural to delete them because there is no connection with the table that was executed last time. However, even in the case of one table, a deletion code is provided. The deletion instruction may be a method of providing a deletion code in the motion table as in this embodiment, or a method of deleting (programmatically) first when a new character is added. Incidentally, in this embodiment, when the motion table is newly switched, all display information areas in the motion management area are initialized (see steps D807 to D815 in the motion control process of FIG. 141 described above).

(Invention concept (31))
In this embodiment, the simple RAM (constant weight, variable weight) and button wait weight in the scenario of the production are separated from the RAM area to be written, so that the effect of improving the development efficiency can be obtained. .
The inventive concept (31) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with a game control device for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control device capable of performing an effect by controlling an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device,
The production control device
Scenario table storage means (PROM 321) for storing a plurality of scenario tables composed of data for controlling the progress of effects including display effects on the display means (which may include effects by effect means such as decorative lamps and speakers); ,
Working storage means (RAM 311a) for providing a work area for control processing;
Based on the scenario table selected according to the command from the game control device, the effect means is controlled to produce an effect,
Based on the wait time value defined in the scenario table, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of weights that limit the progress of the performance,
When performing each wait, the wait time value is written in a predetermined area of the working storage means, and the time is managed by updating the value of the predetermined area.
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined area is varied depending on the type of the weight.

Details of the background of the inventive concept (31) having the above-described configuration will be described below.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-175437, a flag setting unit and a timer setting unit are provided in the effect data holding area of the RAM, and the corresponding flag and timer are set according to the effect control state. Set and update. This effect control timer is for measuring the effect time such as the variable display time of the decorative design, the execution time of the probabilistic re-draw lottery effect, and the advantageous open re-draw lottery effect. It has become a meaningful usage.
For this reason, it cannot cope with the display effect amount which tends to increase year by year, and an efficient development method is required to cope with this.
According to the above-described inventive concept, it is possible to deal with display effects that tend to increase year by year, and it is possible to efficiently develop diversified effects.

That is, in the present embodiment to which the above inventive concept is applied, there are a simple waiting weight (either a fixed time or a variable time is acceptable) and a weight waiting for a button operation as weights for limiting the progress of the scenario of the production. Each wait time value is defined in the scenario table. When a wait is performed, the timer value is written in the RAM 311a and the value in this RAM is updated to manage the passage of time. The RAM area to be written is separated in the case of simple wait and button wait wait. Thereby, the process (program) can be created easily and easily, and the development efficiency is improved.
This means that if the same RAM storage area is used regardless of the meaning, a flag is required to indicate the meaning, so the flag is set or cleared. Is necessary (especially clearing at the end of the wait interval). In other words, when the same storage area is used, a flag is required to determine which meaning the timer has, and when the wait interval ends, processing such as clearing the flag is necessary. A flag set at the start of the wait is also required.
On the other hand, the timer update process itself may be provided, for example, in an integrated process so that it is automatically updated until the time is up, so it is a flag that needs to consider set / clear timing. In comparison, it can be created relatively easily. Since it can be determined whether or not the time is up instead of the presence or absence of the flag, it is not necessary to perform some processing such as clearing at the end of the wait period, and the development efficiency is improved. That is, since it is easy to create a timer so as to be automatically updated, it is possible to determine whether or not the timer value is 0 instead of a flag, and it is not necessary to perform any processing at the end of the wait, improving development efficiency and the like.

Specific implementation points of the inventive concept (31) are as follows (in the flowchart of the production control device 300, scenario analysis processing and the like correspond).
For example, in the scenario table used at the time of the push button notice shown in FIG. 176 described above, the PB wait code and the valid time value (90) are set in the third line (// 2), and in the eleventh line (// 10). A variable wait code and an effective time value (55) are set. For example, in the scenario table used in the customer waiting demonstration shown in FIG. 177, for example, a constant wait code and an effective time value (300) are set in the 20th line (// 19).
Then, as already described in the explanation of the flowchart of the effect control device, the constant weight code is set in the scenario table by the processing of steps D592 to D594 and D604 to D606 in the scenario analysis processing shown in FIGS. 130 and 131 described above. If it is set, a constant wait process (upper side in FIG. 135) is executed. If a variable wait code is set, a variable wait process (lower side in FIG. 135) is executed. If a PB wait code is set, a PB wait process is executed. (Upper side in FIG. 136) is executed.

Here, in step D692 of constant weight processing (upper side of FIG. 135), the effective time value (operand value) set in the scenario table is set in the scenario timer area, and variable weight processing (lower side of FIG. 135) is executed. In step D696, a value obtained by adding the PB effect addition time to the valid time value (operand value) set in the scenario table is set in the scenario timer area. On the other hand, in step D702 of the PB waiting process (upper side of FIG. 136), the valid time value (operand value) set in the scenario table is used as a PB timer area (an area different from the scenario timer area) of the target scenario management area. ). That is, the RAM area to be written is different for simple waits (constant weights and variable waits in this example) and button wait waits (PB wait waits in this example). Note that by adding the PB effect addition time to the set value in step D696, an effect in which the subsequent effect time changes depending on the timing of pressing the button is realized.
In addition, simple wait timer management is performed by steps D574 to D576 in the scenario analysis processing shown in FIG. 130, and button wait wait timer management is performed by D577 to D582 in the same processing. It is a simple processing content that does not use.

(Invention concept (32))
In this embodiment, in the process of analyzing the code representing the scenario contents (scenario data) defined on the scenario table (scenario analysis process), if the code is determined to be abnormal, the process is performed without updating the scenario table. Therefore, when the code becomes an abnormal value due to noise or the like, a good response is realized.
The inventive concept (32) of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
In a gaming machine equipped with a game control device for controlling the progress of a game and an effect control device capable of performing an effect by controlling an effect means including a display means based on a command from the game control device,
The production control device
Scenario table storage means (PROM 321) for storing a plurality of scenario tables composed of data for controlling the progress of effects including display effects on the display means (may include effects by effect means such as decorative lamps and speakers). Have
Based on the scenario table selected according to the command from the game control device, the effect means is controlled to produce an effect,
In the process of analyzing data defined in the scenario table (scenario analysis process), if it is determined that the data is abnormal, the process is terminated without executing the update of the scenario table Machine.

Details such as the background of the inventive concept (32) of the above configuration will be described below.
In a conventional gaming machine, for example, one disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-231953, an effect is advanced based on scenario data configured by combining a plurality of blocks in a time series, and once scenario data is set, Based on this, the drawing process is sequentially performed, and there is no disclosure of correspondence when the scenario data is abnormal.
According to the above inventive concept, it is possible to realize a good response when the scenario data is abnormal (that is, a control processing configuration that can effectively deal with anomalies in the scenario data without increasing the number of processes so much).

  That is, in the present embodiment to which the above inventive concept is applied, if the scenario code (code as scenario data set in the scenario table) becomes an abnormal value due to noise or the like, the scenario proceeds further in that frame. Damage can be minimized. Since the table is not updated, it is read again at the time of processing the next frame, and if it can be determined that it is normal, the scenario can proceed with a delay of one frame, and the subsequent scenario can proceed without any problem. If the table is advanced at the time of an abnormal code, the target operation is completely skipped, which may cause trouble during the production. For example, if a scenario for symbol replacement is skipped and the change is stopped without being replaced, there is a possibility of a trouble that becomes a winning symbol even if it is not a big hit. In this embodiment, such troubles can be effectively prevented by simple processing.

A specific implementation point of the inventive concept (32) is the scenario analysis process shown in FIG. 131 described above.
In this scenario analysis process, in the process after the determination result in step D600 is NO, as described above, when the prepared opcode upper data does not correspond to any kind of data (code) (that is, abnormal) (If it is a value), it is configured to return. Returning here means that the scenario analysis process is terminated and the table address is not updated, so the same code is read and executed the next time this process is reached. For this reason, if an abnormality occurs instantaneously due to noise or the like, correct processing can be performed when it becomes normal next time. In addition, when the abnormality becomes constant, the scenario progress is stopped, so that the appearance is abnormal, but trouble can be easily avoided. Then, if the scenario changes, a new scenario table is set, so that normal recovery can be performed there. As described above, it is possible to realize a good countermeasure against the scenario data abnormality with a simple processing configuration that simply returns.

Next, the above embodiment has the following incidental effects.
(1) For the external output of the unique ID, the following operations are performed and the following effects are obtained.
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or reset, the unique ID stored in the gaming microcomputer 101 (for example, stored in the HW parameter ROM) (referred to as the main unique ID as appropriate) is read out, and the operation of the game program Is converted into a serial communication format (or may be a parallel communication format), relayed by the external information terminal board 55, and transmitted to the external management device 140 (or the card unit 551 may be included). As a result, the unique ID stored in the gaming microcomputer 101 can be sent to the gaming store side.
The unique ID is transferred to the outside (in this case, the inspection apparatus connection terminal 102 in FIG. 4) in response to a request from the outside. Then, for example, by connecting the inspection device to the inspection device connection terminal 102, the unique ID stored in the gaming microcomputer 101 is read out by the inspection organization.
On the other hand, the payout unique ID (payout individual identification information) that can identify the payout microcomputer 201 of the payout control device 200 is made into a serial communication format (or a parallel communication format) by the payout control device 200 by the operation of the payout program. Then, it is relayed by the external information terminal board 55 and transmitted to the external management device 140 (or the card unit 551 may be included). As a result, the payout unique ID stored in the payout microcomputer 201 can be sent to the game store side.

In this way, the unique ID (individual identification information) can be identified as the gaming microcomputer 101 (arithmetic processing unit) and at the same time can identify each gaming machine. If the configuration is such that the ID is output to the outside (for example, the management device 140) and the legitimacy is determined, it is possible for the game shop to manage each gaming machine, and an unauthorized person can deal with each arithmetic processing device. It has the effect of improving security because it must be tampered with.
Further, as in this embodiment, the game program created for each model and written in the arithmetic processing unit is provided with a function for outputting this unique ID, so that the output form and output of the unique ID can be made by changing the game program. Timing and other improvements and changes can be made quickly and inexpensively.
Furthermore, when the payout control device 200 is configured to output a payout unique ID (payout individual identification information) that can identify the payout microcomputer 201 of the payout control device 200 to the outside (for example, the management device 140) to determine the validity, There is an effect that the security for 200 is improved.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
Main board unique identification information output means for outputting to the outside main board unique identification information capable of individually identifying the game control device;
A payout board unique identification information output means for outputting the payout board unique identification information capable of individually identifying the payout control device; and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:
Here, the game control device 100 constitutes a main board unique identification information output means, and the payout control apparatus 200 constitutes a payout board unique identification information output means.

Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described.
The second embodiment is a control example in the case where there are a plurality of special figures (special figures 1 and 2), and one of the special figures 2 changes in priority.
FIG. 193 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a scenario and a display screen when special figure 2 undergoes priority change.
In the second embodiment as well, a scenario table for varying effects is created separately for each of the plurality of display components.
FIG. 193 (a) shows a scenario table, which is created by being divided into the following elements.
When the display component is the background, the “background control scenario table” is the official name, but it is long, so for convenience of explanation, it will be abbreviated as “background scenario” and also on the drawing. Abbreviated.
・ Background scenario ・ Left symbol scenario ・ Right symbol scenario ・ Middle symbol scenario ・ Notice character scenario ・ Push button character scenario ・ Special figure 1 hold display scenario ・ Special figure 2 symbol display scenario ・ 4th symbol scenario

Further, as in the first embodiment, each display component is constituted by layers, and the plurality of layers are sequentially stacked from the back side (background layer) toward the front side, and the foremost row is the fourth symbol layer. Thus, one display screen is created.
In the second embodiment, a special figure 1 hold display scenario and a special figure 2 hold display scenario are provided corresponding to the fact that there are a plurality of special figures (special figure 1 and special figure 2). The special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold display are handled separately, and each display area on the display device 41 is determined. In addition, the control for preferentially changing the special figure 2 is performed.
Next, FIG. 193 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the effect of the display device 41 when screen control is performed using the scenario table. This is a diagram showing a plurality of layers from the back side (background layer). One display screen is created by sequentially superimposing toward the front side.
In FIG. 193 (b), 801 is a background, 802 is a left symbol, 803 is a right symbol, 804 is a middle symbol, 805 is a notice character, a push button character is not shown, 807 is a special figure 1 hold display, and 808 is a special symbol. 2 hold display, 809 shows the 4th design, and each display component is displayed on the layer (the push button character is not shown).
In such effect control, in the second embodiment as well as in the first embodiment, when generating an effect screen, it is preset as a table divided into a plurality of layers (scenario layers) corresponding to display elements of the effect screen. However, at this time, corresponding to the fact that there are a plurality of special figures (Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2), the special figure 1 hold display scenario and the special figure 2 stop display scenario are set in advance. Next, when special figure hold display is performed, special figure 1 and special figure 2 are individually controlled based on the scenario, and all scenarios are combined in the form of a layer to generate a picture on one screen, and display device 41 In the second embodiment, control is performed so that the special figure 2 is preferentially fluctuated.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 193 (b), the symbol “3, 5, 7” is displayed variably with a white background as a background, and the character representing the star as a notice character crosses the middle symbol “5”. In this way, effects appearing on the front side of each symbol are performed.
On the other hand, on the lower side of the display screen, a plurality of special figure hold displays are performed. Here, the special figure 1 hold 807 and the special figure 2 hold display 808 are both displayed as four hold states. In the second embodiment, the special figure 2 is preferentially fluctuated, so that the special figure 2 hold display 808 is used first.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold display are treated separately, and the respective display areas on the display device 41 are determined. 1 hold display scenario and special figure 2 hold display scenario), it is easy to handle, and it is possible to save data capacity and improve development efficiency.
In other words, when there are multiple special drawings, if any special figure is preferentially fluctuated, each special figure is assumed to be a separate scenario, and the hold display is divided into four parts for special figure 1 and special figure 2. Since it is performed by the apparatus 41, priority control is performed according to the scenario, and handling is simplified. In other words, scenario management is classified according to special map 1 hold and special map 2 hold, and the development efficiency is improved as a management method in accordance with the special map fluctuation specifications.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The production control device
A scenario data setting means for setting scenario data for each pending display of a plurality of special maps when performing a control for displaying a plurality of special maps on a display means and performing priority control of any special figure,
Screen creation means for creating the drawing contents of the special figure hold in preference to the scenario data of the special figure that changes in priority among the preset scenario data;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:
Here, the PROM (control ROM) 321 constitutes scenario data setting means, and the VDP 312 constitutes screen creation means.

Next, Embodiment 3 of the present invention will be described.
The third embodiment is a control example in the case where there are a plurality of special figures (special figures 1 and 2), but none of the special figures changes in priority.
FIG. 194 is a diagram showing an example of a scenario configuration and a display screen in the case where none of the special drawings among the plurality of special drawings (Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2) change in priority.
In the third embodiment, unlike the second embodiment, each reserved drawing is controlled as the same display component (the special figure 1, the special figure 2) even in the case of a plurality of special figures (the special figure 1, the special figure 2). Is done.
FIG. 194 (a) shows a scenario table. Here, one special figure holding display scenario is arranged corresponding to a plurality of special figures (Special figure 1 and Special figure 2), and other scenarios are implemented. This is the same as Example 2 and will not be described in detail.

Further, as in the second embodiment, each display component is constituted by layers, and the plurality of layers are sequentially stacked from the back side (background layer) toward the front side, and the foremost row is the fourth symbol layer. Thus, one display screen is created.
In the third embodiment, even if there are a plurality of special figures (Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2), only one special figure hold display scenario is provided. The special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold display are handled in the same way, and the display area on the display device 41 is the same. In addition, any special figure is configured to perform control (control to hold display in order of winning to the start ports 25 and 26) that does not change in priority.
Next, FIG. 194 (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the effect of the display device 41 when the screen control is performed using the scenario table, and this shows a plurality of layers from the back side (background layer). One display screen is created by sequentially superimposing toward the front side.
In FIG. 194 (b), 817 indicates a special figure hold display, and the others are the same as in the second embodiment, and each display component is displayed on the layer (the push button character is not shown). )

In such effect control, in the third embodiment as well as in the second embodiment, when generating the effect screen, it is preset as a table divided into a plurality of layers (scenario layers) corresponding to the display component of the effect screen. However, at this time, even if there are a plurality of special figures (Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2), one special figure hold display scenario is set in advance. Next, for special figure hold display, special figure 1 and special figure 2 are controlled based on the same special figure hold display scenario, and all scenarios are combined in the form of a layer to generate a picture on one screen. Then, it is displayed as an effect screen of the display device 41, and a change effect of a symbol (special drawing) is performed. Further, in the third embodiment, no special figure is controlled with priority, and the order of special figure hold display is determined in the winning order to the start ports 25 and 26.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 194 (b), in the special figure hold display 817, the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold are displayed in the order determined in the winning order to the start ports 25 and 26. . Here, in the special figure hold display 817, a circle indicates a special figure 1 and a square indicates a special figure 2.

As described above, even if there are a plurality of special figures (Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2), only one special figure hold display scenario is provided for the special figure hold display. Since special figure 1 hold and special figure 2 hold are displayed in order of winning a prize, the display form of special figure hold varies.
The third embodiment has the following effects.
When special maps are displayed in the order determined in the winning order to the start ports 25 and 26 with no priority fluctuation even when there are a plurality of special figures (Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2), that is, Special Figure 1 and Special Figure In the case of using eight (maximum number of holds) hold display as a summary of the hold in FIG. 2, the drawing control of the hold display in which both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are mixed is performed. It can be handled and has the effect of being easy to control.
That is, there is no need to perform scenario management divided into functions such as special figure 1 hold and special figure 2 hold, and the special figure hold display only needs to be performed in the order of start winning, so that development efficiency is improved.

The inventive concept of the above configuration is expressed as follows.
The production control device
A scenario data setting means for displaying a plurality of special figure hold on the display means, and when performing control without priority change of any special figure, a scenario data setting means for setting the same scenario data for the hold display of the plurality of special figures;
Screen creation means for creating the drawing contents of the special figure hold in order of the start winning prize based on the scenario data set in advance;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:
Here, the PROM (control ROM) 321 constitutes scenario data setting means, and the VDP 312 constitutes screen creation means.

Next, another modification of the present invention will be described.
The present invention may be modified as follows.
(1) In the first embodiment, one scenario table is set for the customer waiting demonstration effect, but the present invention is not limited to this.
One scenario table is set when the flow of production is specified as in the demonstration of waiting for a customer, and when the production content has little change, it is a form of scenario table for one overall control. This increases the development efficiency and reduces the data capacity.
Other examples of the content of the production with a defined flow of production with little change include, for example, a big hit production, a RAM clear notification display, a power failure recovery notification display, and the like. Also for these effects, a configuration may be adopted in which one overall control scenario table is set. By doing so, there is an effect similar to the demonstration of waiting for a customer.
In addition, for example, the user's game history / game machine customization screen has little randomness due to random numbers. For such a customization screen, setting a single integrated control scenario table will improve the development efficiency. And the data capacity can be reduced.

(2) When setting a scenario table, it is not necessary to clearly divide whether to use one or more scenario tables. For example, it is divided into a special drawing variation production and a customer waiting demonstration production, and the former is not clearly divided and set such that there are a plurality of scenario tables and the latter is one scenario table. Among them, it may be configured to produce an effect by defining it in one scenario table.
An example of such is a so-called full rotation reach. In this state, the special symbol display slowly rotates in the ascending or reverse order with the same three symbols displayed, and the effect of stopping at which symbol is stopped. It gives a sense of excitement. In such a full rotation reach, the flow of the production is regulated and the production content has little change, so it may be configured as a single integrated control scenario table. Capacity can also be reduced.

(3) The method of dividing the scenario layers is not limited to eight as shown in the examples shown in FIGS. 183 (a) and 194 (a).
For example, the number of scenario layers may be less than 8, or more than 8.
In short, the number of scenario layers may be other than eight as long as the effect of performing independent scenario management for each display element when performing various combinations of effects is obtained.
(4) The above embodiment of the present invention is an example in which the operations of video, audio, decoration, and accessory are controlled by a single effect control board. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, control is performed by a plurality of effect control boards. A configuration may be used, or a configuration in which a plurality of CPUs are mounted on the same substrate and shared control may be performed.
By doing so, the processing speed increases as the processing load on each CPU is reduced. In addition, the program size of each CPU can be reduced.

Next, the scope of application of the present invention will be described.
(1) As long as the gaming machine uses pachinko balls to play a game, the gaming machine is not limited to the example as in the embodiment but can be applied to an enclosed ball type gaming machine.
(2) Moreover, it is only necessary to provide a display device capable of displaying a decoration special figure as a gaming machine, and thus can be widely applied to general gaming machines provided with a video device such as a liquid crystal display.
(3) The display device only needs to be able to change the display content, and the image may be configured to change the screen content by character display, video display, or the like.
(4) The display device is not limited to a display device using liquid crystal, but a member capable of producing an effect by changing display contents such as an organic EL, a cathode ray tube, a dot LED, a 7-segment LED, a device using a bending material such as electronic paper, etc. Anything is acceptable.
(5) The present invention is not limited to a gaming machine using a pachinko ball, but is also applicable to a so-called pachislot machine (rotating slot machine gaming machine) that uses a coin (or medal) to play a game. can do.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
4 Front frame 5 Glass frame 9 Production buttons 20 Game board 25 First start prize opening 26 Second start prize opening 2 (ordinary electric equipment: ordinary power) (ordinary variable prize device)
27 Variable prize-winning device (Special variable prize-winning device)
32 Universal drawing start gate 33 Second variable prize winning device 35 Collective display device 41 Display device (special drawing display device, normal symbol variable display device, rendering means, display means)
54 card unit connection board 55 external information terminal board 100 game control device (main control means, power failure monitoring means, random number update means, start winning storage means, second start storage means, prior determination means, priority control means, variation pattern determination means , Variation display game execution control means, determination means, stop time setting means, specific game state generation control means, main board unique identification information output means)
101 Microcomputer for game (arithmetic processing unit for game)
101A CPU
101B ROM
101C RAM
120 First Start Port Switch 121 Second Start Port Switch 122 Gate Switch 123 Winner Port Switch 124 Lower Count Switch 125 Upper Count Switch 126 Magnetic Sensor 127 Radio Wave Sensor 140 Management Device 200 Discharge Control Device (Sub Control Means, Dispensing Board Unique Identification Information) Output means)
201 Discharge microcomputer 211 Glass frame open detection switch 212 Front frame open detection switch 213 Overflow switch 214 Radio wave sensor 215 Discharge ball detection switch 216 Shoot ball cut switch 300 Production control device (sub control means, scenario data setting means, screen creation means, Effect control means, effect button control means, effect content control means, character data storage means, motion table storage means, scenario table storage means, background type selection means, background effect means)
311 Main control microcomputer (1stCPU)
311a RAM (working storage means, character information storage means)
312 VDP
321 PROM (motion table storage means, scenario table storage means)
322 Image ROM (character data storage means)
500 Power supply 551 Card unit

Claims (1)

And game control means for controlling the progress of a game, the gaming machine and a presentation control means capable of performing the effect by controlling the Viewing means,
The production control means includes
Character data storage means for storing image data of still images or moving images;
A motion table storage means for storing a motion table including the image data to be displayed on the display means and information for designating the display position for each frame;
Scenario table storage means for storing a scenario table including information for controlling the progress of the display effect on the display means,
It performs the display effect based on the scenario table selected in response to a command from said game control unit,
The motion table is provided for each section of production.
The scenario table is configured to selectively use the motion table as a part of the display effect.
Particular the motion table to be used in combination with each other, includes first motion table and the second motion table, when performing predetermined display effect, the first motion corresponding to the progression of the display effect A table and the second motion table are used sequentially,
The gaming machine , wherein the display position of the image data in the first frame in the first motion table and the second motion table is set to the same display position.

Images